FC-451C SH en 0012 PDF

SERVICE HANDBOOK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c
Model: FC-281C/351C/451C
Publish Date: June 2005
File No. SHE050003L0
R05032182702-TTEC
Ver12_2009-02
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
• The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft prod-
ucts are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other coun-
tries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
• PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• iCLASS is a trademark of HID Corporation.
• MIFARE is a trademark of Royal Philips Electronics.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.
08/04
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the posi-
tions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 113 kg (249 lb), therefore pay full atten-
tion when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when trans-
porting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V or 240
V / 8 A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
2) General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for
the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not
be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the
power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
3) Important Service Parts for Safety

- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended
by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.
06/08
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batter-
ies and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-11
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1
2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-15
2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-23
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ....................................................................................................... 2-25
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03).................................................................................... 2-27
2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-36
2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-39
2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ............................................................................................ 2-40
2.2.5 Setting mode (08) ................................................................................................... 2-87
2.2.6 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-223
2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08).......................... 2-233
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control ....................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-8
3.4.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-14
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21
3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-21
3.5.2 Color Deviation Adjustment .................................................................................... 3-22
3.5.3 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-28
3.5.4 Color balance adjustment....................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.5 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-30
3.5.6 Offsetting adjustment for background processing .................................................. 3-30
3.5.7 Judgment threshold for ACS .................................................................................. 3-31
3.5.8 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-31
3.5.9 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-32
3.5.10 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-32
3.5.11 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-33
3.5.12 Adaptation to highlighter......................................................................................... 3-33
3.5.13 Beam level conversion setting................................................................................ 3-34
3.5.14 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type.................................................. 3-34
3.5.15 Maximum text density adjustment .......................................................................... 3-35
3.5.16 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment .............................................................. 3-35
3.5.17 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode .................................... 3-36
3.5.18 Background adjustment(Black Mode) .................................................................... 3-36
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-37
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-37
3.6.2 Color deviation adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-38
© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

CONTENTS
1
3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ............................................................ 3-38
3.6.4 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)................................................................. 3-39
3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-39
3.6.6 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ................................................................ 3-40
3.6.7 Dot size adjustment in black printing ...................................................................... 3-40
3.6.8 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type.................................................. 3-40
3.6.9 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing......................................... 3-40
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-41
3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-41
3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)........................................................................... 3-42
3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode) .......................................................... 3-43
3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode).................................................................... 3-43
3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS .................................................................................. 3-44
3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-44
3.7.7 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-45
3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density ............................................................................ 3-46
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection ......................................................................... 3-46
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) ....................................... 3-47
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color) ........................................ 3-47
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting ..................................................................................... 3-48
3.8.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-48
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-49
3.9.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-49
3.9.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-55
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-55
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit ...................................................................................... 3-57
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit)........................................................... 3-57
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) ........................................................... 3-59
3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment............................................... 3-61
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-63
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-63
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-68
3.12.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-70
3.12.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-73
3.12.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-74
3.12.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-76
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-77
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-78
3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-78
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-80
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-81
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-82
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-84
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-85
3.13.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-87
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)....................................................................... 3-89
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)...................................................... 3-89
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................ 3-90
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................ 3-91
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) .......................... 3-94
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................... 3-94
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) .......................................... 3-95
3.15 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)................................................................................ 3-96
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

CONTENTS
2
3.15.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position ............................................................................ 3-96
3.15.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................... 3-98
3.15.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings ................................................................. 3-100
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1
4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-8
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure .............................................................................. 4-9
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.6 Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.7 Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-33
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-34
4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-34
4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-34
4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade... 4-35
4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush ............................................................................. 4-35
4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt ......................................................................................... 4-35
4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller ........................................ 4-36
4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller ........................................ 4-36
4.8.8 Checking and cleaning of discharge brush ............................................................ 4-37
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) .................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ..................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Paper transport jam ................................................................................................ 5-10
5.1.4 Other paper jam ..................................................................................................... 5-18
5.1.5 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-20
5.1.6 RADF jam ............................................................................................................... 5-24
5.1.7 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-29
5.1.8 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-52
5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-53
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-59
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-60
5.1.12 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-63
5.1.13 RADF related service call ....................................................................................... 5-64
5.1.14 Circuit related service call ...................................................................................... 5-64
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call ..................................................................... 5-67
5.1.16 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-68
5.1.17 Image control related service call ........................................................................... 5-87
5.1.18 Copy process related service call........................................................................... 5-91
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call ............................................................... 5-95
5.1.20 Other service call.................................................................................................... 5-99
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function............................................................ 5-100
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-114
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-145
5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-145
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-148
5.3.3 Replacing SLG board ........................................................................................... 5-149
5.3.4 Replacing or clearing NVRAM.............................................................................. 5-149
5.3.5 Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed .................................... 5-151
5.3.6 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-152

CONTENTS
3
06/08
5.4 Other errors ..................................................................................................................... 5-154
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-4
6.1.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-18
6.1.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device ................................................................... 6-37
6.2.1 Appendix ................................................................................................................ 6-59
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4
8. REMOTE SERVICE....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11
8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.2 Setting .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.3 Items to be notified ................................................................................................. 8-19
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE ......................................................... 9-1
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1
10.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 DC Wire Harness....................................................................................................... Appendix
10.3 Electric Parts Layout.................................................................................................. Appendix

CONTENTS
4
05/11
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/
SUPPLIES
1
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

MODE
2
3. ADJUSTMENT
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT
8. REMOTE SERVICE
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10
05/11
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1
1.1 Specifications
yCopy process .......................... Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)
yType......................................... Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal
(PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)
yOriginal table ........................... Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
yAccepted originals ................... Original type: Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects
Note that when the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is
used, carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted, and
paper type of the original should be 35-157g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.
Cover) for single-sided copy and 50-157 g/m2 (13.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.
Cover) for double-sided copy.
Maximum size: A3/LD
• Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO281c
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
Paper size Size specified (A4/LT only)
specified
A4, LT 28 (11) 28 (11) 16 (5) 28 (11) 28 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 21 (5) 21 (5) 16 (5) 21 (5) -
B4, LG 18 (5) 18 (5) 16 (5) 18 (5) -
A3, LD 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) -
e-STUDIO351c
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 35 (11) 35 (11) 21 (5) 35 (11) 35 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 28 (5) 28 (5) 21 (5) 28 (5) -
B4, LG 24 (5) 24 (5) 21 (5) 24 (5) -
A3, LD 21 (5) 21 (5) 21 (5) 21 (5) -
e-STUDIO451c
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 45 (11) 45 (11) 22 (5) 45 (11) 45 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 32 (5) 32 (5) 22 (5) 32 (5) -
B4, LG 26 (5) 26 (5) 22 (5) 26 (5) -
A3, LD 22 (5) 22 (5) 22 (5) 22 (5) -
* "-" means "Not acceptable".
* When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
* Plain paper is selected for the paper type.
* When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, copying in the speed of 28, 35 and 45
sheets per minute are only possible under the following conditions:

SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-1
• Original: A4 or LT (single-sided)
• Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode
• Number of copies:
Black mode: 28 sheets or more (e-STUDIO281c), 35 sheets or more (e-STUDIO351c), 45 sheets
or more (e-STUDIO451c)
Color mode: 11 sheets or more
• Reproduction ratio: 100%
* The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
Thick paper / OHP

e-STUDIO281c
Thick1 (81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 28 (11) 28 (11) 16 (5) 28 (11) 28 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 20 (5) 20 (5) 16 (5) 20 (5) -
B4, LG 18 (5) 18 (5) 16 (5) 18 (5) -
A3, LD 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) -
Thick2 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)

Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (6) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (3) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (3) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
Thick3 (164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2, 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (2) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (2) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (2) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT - 10 (3) - - -

1-2
e-STUDIO351c
Bypass feed 1
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 30 (11) 30 (11) 16 (5) 30 (11) 30 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 23 (5) 23 (5) 16 (5) 23 (5) -
B4, LG 19 (5) 19 (5) 16 (5) 19 (5) -
A3, LD 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) -

Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (6) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (3) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (3) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (2) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (2) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (2) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT - 10 (3) - - -

1-3
e-STUDIO451c
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT 30 (11) 30 (11) 16 (5) 30 (11) 30 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 23 (5) 23 (5) 16 (5) 23 (5) -
B4, LG 19 (5) 19 (5) 16 (5) 19 (5) -
A3, LD 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) 16 (5) -

Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (6) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (3) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (3) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R - 20 (2) 10 (2) - -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 14 (2) 10 (2) - -
B4, LG - 11 (2) 10 (2) - -
A3, LD - 10 (2) 10 (2) - -
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply LCF
Drawer Size not PFP
specified
A4, LT - 10 (3) - - -
* "-" means "Not acceptable".
* When originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying.
* The bypass copying speed is measured with the paper size specified.
* The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

1-4
* System copy speed
Sec.
Copy mode
e-STUDIO281c e-STUDIO351c e-STUDIO451c 1
Single-sided originals 1 set 31.26 (71.97) 28.15 (71.97) 24.99 (71.97)
↓ 3 sets 74.07 (182.19) 61.02 (182.19) 50.03 (182.19)
Single-sided copies
5 sets 116.64 (289.94) 95.19 (289.94) 76.63 (289.94)
Single-sided originals 1 set 32.61 (81.63) 29.65 (81.63) 28.49 (81.63)
↓ 3 sets 74.69 (189.38) 64.92 (189.38) 60.76 (189.38)
Double-sided copies
5 sets 117.45 (299.04) 101.75 (299.04) 92.2 (299.04)
Double-sided originals 1 set 64.24 (138.12) 63.54 (138.12) 63.01 (138.12)
↓ 3 sets 150.73 (355.91) 134.25 (355.91) 126.36 (355.91)
Double-sided copies
5 sets 234.59 (574.51) 205.69 (574.51) 189.67 (574.51)
Double-sided originals 1 set 58.85 (128.31) 58.76 (128.31) 58.09 (128.31)
↓ 3 sets 143.68 (347.08) 126.57 (347.08) 110.94 (347.08)
Single-sided copies
5 sets 228.58 (565.02) 194.49 (565.02) 165.19 (565.02)
* Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message "Ready" is dis-
played. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above is
selected.)
* Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the upper drawer.
* The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.
* The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.
• Copy paper
Drawer ADU PFP LCF Bypass copy Remarks
Size A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13"
A3 to A5-R,
LG, 8.5"SQ, 305 x 457 mm
LD to ST-R,
A4, LT (12" x 18")
13" LG,
(Non-standard or userspec-
8.5"SQ
ified sizes can be set.)
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond
to 110 lb. Index
64 to 105 g/m2 (Continuous feeding)
Weight 17 to 28 lb.
Bond 64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond
to 110 lb. Index
(Single paper feeding)
Special Labels, OHP film Special paper recom-
-
paper (thickness: 80µm or thicker) mended by Toshiba Tec
yFirst copy time ......................... Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color)
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
yWarming-up time ..................... Approx. 40 sec. (Stand-alone, temperature: 20°C)
yMultiple copying....................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
yReproduction ratio ................... Actual ratio: 100±0.5%
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
(25 to 200% when using RADF)
yResolution/Gradation............... Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black)
Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color)

1-5
yEliminated portion.................... Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (black
copy)
Leading edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (color
copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (black /
color print)
yPaper feeding .......................... Standard drawers:
2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/
m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
PFP:
Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550
sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
LCF:
Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80
g/m2 (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
Bypass feeding:
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22
lb. Bond)
yCapacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)
.................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less)
yAutomatic duplexing unit ......... Stackless, Switchback type
yToner supply ............................ Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method
yDensity control......................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
yWeight ..................................... Approximately 113 kg (249 lb.)
yPower requirements ................ AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A
220-240 V or 240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)
* The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%.
yPower consumption................. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment.
yTotal counter............................ Electronical counter
yDimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 660 x D 758 x H 739 (mm))
* When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
758
45°
739
0
66
Fig. 1-1

1-6
1.2 Accessories
1
Unpacking/Setup instruction 1 set
Operator’s manual 4 pcs. (except for MJD and ASU)
Operator's manual pocket 1 pc.
Power cable 1 pc.
Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAD)
Setup report 1 set (for NAD, MJD and CND)
PM sticker 1 pc. (for MJD)
Drum (installed inside of the equipment) 1 pc.
Control panel stopper 1 pc.
Color developer holder 6 pc.
Rubber plug 4 pcs.
Blind seal (small / large) 3 pcs. /1 pc.
CD-ROM 3 pcs.
Developer material (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. each (for CND)
Screw M4 x 8 1 pc.
Guide 1 pc.
Approval sheet 1 set (for CND)
Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. each (for CND)
Platen cover 1 pc. (for CND)
* Machine version
NAD: North America
MJD: Europe
AUD: Australia
ASD: Asia, Argentine
TWD: Taiwan
SAD Saudi Arabia
ASU Saudi Arabia, Asia
CND China
KRD Korea
JPD: Japan

1-7
1.3 Options
Platen cover KA-3511PC / -C

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3018
Drawer module MY-1021 / -C
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011 / -C
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT / A4-C
Hanging Finisher MJ-1022 / -C
Finisher MJ-1023 / -C
MJ-1101
Saddle Stitch Finisher MJ-1024 / -C
Hole punch unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S / E-C (for MJ-1023/1024)
MJ-6101 N/E/F/S (for MJ-1101)
Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024)
STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101)
Bridge kit KN-3511 / -C
Work table KK-3511 / -C
Damp heater kit MF-3511U/E
FAX unit GD-1200 NA/AU/AS/EU/C/TW
GD-1201 NA/AU/AS/EU/C/TW
2nd line for fax unit GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW
GD-1260 NA/EU-N/C/TW
128 MB Expansion memory GC-1181
512 MB Expansion memory GC-1230
Wireless LAN module GN-1040/1041
PCI slot GO-1060
Scrambler board GP-1040
Bluetooth module GN-2010
Antenna GN-3010
Parallel interface kit GF-1140
Data overwrite kit GP-1060
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (HID iClass) KP-2004
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (MIFARE) KP-2005
Desk MH-1700
Harness kit for coin controller GQ-1020

1-8
08/12
Notes:
1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023,
MJ-1024 or MJ-1101). 1
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
3. The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/F/S).
4. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040)
and the parallel interface kit (GF-1140).
5. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041)
and the bluetooth module (GN-2010).
6. Up to 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041).
7. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are
installed together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.

1-9
1.4 Supplies
Drum OD-3511N
Toner bag PS-TB-281C/ C-E/ C-C
Developer (K) D-3511-K
Developer (Y) D-281C-Y
Developer (M) D-281C-M
Developer (C) D-281C-C
Toner cartridge (K) PS-ZT281C-K(4) NAD
PS-ZT281C-EK(1) MJD
PS-ZT3511DK Others
PS-ZT3511TK TWD
PS-ZT3511CK CND
Toner cartridge (Y) PS-ZT281C-Y(4) NAD
PS-ZT281C-EY(1) MJD
PS-ZT3511DY Others
PS-ZT3511TY TWD
PS-ZT3511CY CND
Toner cartridge (M) PS-ZT281C-M(4) NAD
PS-ZT281C-EM(1) MJD
PS-ZT3511DM Others
PS-ZT3511TM TWD
PS-ZT3511CM CND
Toner cartridge (C) PS-ZT281C-C(4) NAD
PS-ZT281C-EC(1) MJD
PS-ZT3511DC Others
PS-ZT3511TC TWD
PS-ZT3511CC CND

1 - 10
08/04
1.5
Hole Punch Unit Hanging Finisher Reversing Automatic
Staple Cartridge MJ-6004 N/E/F/S MJ-1022 Document Feeder
STAPLE-2000 (RADF) Platen Cover
MR-3018 KA-3511PC
e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2004
e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2005
Staple Cartridge
System List
STAPLE-1600
Bridge Kit
Finisher
KN-3511
MJ-1023 Work Tray
KK-3511

Damp Heater
MF-3511U/E
08/12
1 - 11
Fig. 1-2
Expansion Expansion 2nd Line for FAX unit
memory memory FAX unit GD-1200/1201
GC-1230 GC-1181 GD-1160/1260
Saddle stitch Staple Cartridge

Finisher STAPLE-600 Antenna Bluetooth Wireless LAN
MJ-1024 GN-3010 module module
GN-2010 GN-1040/1041
Staple Cartridge Data Parallel Scrambler PCI slot

STAPLE-2400 overwrite kit interface kit board GO-1060
GP-1060 GF-1140 GP-1040
Drawer Module Paper Feed Large Capacity

Finisher Hole Punch Unit MY-1021 Pedestal (PFP) Feeder (LCF)
MJ-1101 MJ-6101 N/E/F/S KD-1011 KD-1012 A4/LT
1
1 - 12
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1 Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL
SERVICE” symbol is blinking. 2
2.1.1 Jam
Error code Classification Contents Troubleshooting

E010 Paper exit jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which P. 5-1
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
E020 Paper exit jam Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the P. 5-2
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
E030 Other paper jam Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the P. 5-18
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
E061 Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The P. 5-18
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size set-
ting of the equipment.
E062 Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The P. 5-18
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size set-
ting of the equipment.
E063 Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer: P. 5-18
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
E064 Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer: P. 5-18
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
E065 Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The P. 5-18
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
E090 Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed P. 5-19
cannot be prepared.

ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-1
E110 Paper misfeeding ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registra- P. 5-3
tion sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU does not reach the registration sensor during
duplex printing.
E120 Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the regis- P. 5-4
tration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray
does not reach the registration sensor.
E130 Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 5-5
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed
sensor.
E140 Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 5-6
lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed
sensor.
E150 PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching P. 5-7
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.
E160 PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching P. 5-8
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
E190 LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed P. 5-9
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
E200 Paper transport jam Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the P. 5-10
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.

2-2
E210 Paper transport jam Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the P. 5-10
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
E220 Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the P. 5-11
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not
reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor. 2
E300 PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach- P. 5-10
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
E330 PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach- P. 5-10
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
ing the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sen-
sor.
E3C0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registra- P. 5-10
tion sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and passed
through the upper drawer feed sensor does not
reach the registration sensor.
E3D0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper P. 5-11
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and
passed through the lower drawer feed sensor does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor.
E3E0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower P. 5-12
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and
passed through the LCF feed sensor does not
reach the lower drawer feed sensor.
E400 Cover open jam Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover P. 5-20
has opened during printing.
E410 Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened P. 5-20
during printing.

2-3
08/04
E420 Cover open jam PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has P. 5-21
opened during printing.
E430 ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during print- P. 5-21
ing.
E440 Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened P. 5-22
during printing.
E450 LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has P. 5-22
opened during printing.
E480 Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened P. 5-23
during printing.
E510 Paper transport jam Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The P. 5-14
(ADU section) paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.
E520 Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the P. 5-15
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
E550 Other paper jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The P. 5-19
paper is remaining on the transport path when print-
ing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).
E712 RADF jam Jam not reaching the original registration sensor: P. 5-24
The original fed from the original feeding tray does
not reach the original registration sensor.
E713 Cover open jam in the read ready status: Jam P. 5-24
caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover
or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the
scanning start signal from the equipment.
E714 Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is P. 5-25
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
E721 Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original P. 5-25
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
E722 Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor P. 5-26
(during scanning): The original which passed the
read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse
sensor when it is transported from the scanning
section to exit section.
E724 Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The P. 5-26
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-
nal registration sensor after its leading edge has
reached this sensor.
E725 Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the P. 5-27
original does not pass the read sensor after its lead-
ing edge has reached this sensor.
E731 Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: The P. 5-27
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-
nal exit/reverse sensor after its leading edge has
reached this sensor.
E860 RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam P. 5-27
access cover has opened during RADF operation.
E870 RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF P. 5-28
operation.

2-4
06/08
E910 Finisher jam Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The P. 5-29
(Bridge unit) paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sen-
sor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
E920 Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The P. 5-29
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
E930 Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trail- P. 5-29 2
ing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit
transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1.
E940 Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The P. 5-29
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 2.
E9F0 Finisher jam Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. P. 5-46
(Punch unit) [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
EA10 Finisher jam Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has P. 5-30
(Finisher section) passed the bridge
unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024/1101]
EA20 Paper transport stop jam: P. 5-32
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sen-
sor.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor
or processing tray sensor.
[MJ-1023/1024]
(3) The paper which has passed through the inlet
sensor does not reach the transport sensor.
[MJ-1101]
EA21 Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sen- P. 5-33
sor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ-
1101]
EA30 Power-ON jam: P. 5-34
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is
turned ON.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or pro-
cessing tray sensor when power is turned ON.
[MJ-1023/1024]
EA31 Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper P. 5-35
which has passed through the inlet sensor does not
reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101]
EA32 Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining P. 5-35
on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON.
[MJ-1101]

2-5
06/08
EA40 Finisher jam Door open jam: P. 5-36
(Finisher section) 1) The finisher has been released from the equip-
ment during printing. [MJ-1022]
2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or
the upper/ front door of the puncher section has
opened during printing. [MJ-1023/1024]
3) The front cover or stationary tray cover is
opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101]
EA50 Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. P. 5-38
[MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101]
EA60 Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper P. 5-40
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/
1024/1101]
EA70 Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of P. 5-41
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack
tray. [MJ-1022]
Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit
belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
EA80 Finisher jam Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. P. 5-43
(Saddle stitcher sec- [MJ-1024]
EA90 tion) Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover P. 5-43
has opened dur-ing printing [MJ-1024].
EAA0 Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, P. 5-44
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1024]
EAB0 Transport stop jam: The paper which passed P. 5-44
through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024]
EAC0 Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached P. 5-45
the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sen-
sor. [MJ-1024]
EAD0 Other paper jam Print end command time-out jam: The printing has P. 5-47
not finished normally because of the communica-
tion error between the SYS board and LGC board
at the end of printing.
EAE0 Finisher jam Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been P. 5-47
interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the fin-
isher.
EAF0 Finisher jam Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which P. 5-42
(Finisher section) passed through the delivery roller on the intermedi-
ary process tray. [MJ-1022]
EB30 Finisher jam Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges P. 5-47
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
EB50 Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple P. 5-16
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
EB60 Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple P. 5-17
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).

2-6
07/11
ED10 Finisher jam Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detec- P. 5-48
tion abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
ED11 Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position P. 5-48
detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101
is installed)] 2
ED12 Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at P. 5-49
the home position. [MJ-1101]
ED13 Front alignment plate home position error: The front P. 5-49
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ-
1101]
ED14 Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear P. 5-50
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ-
1101]
ED15 Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the P. 5-50
home position. [MJ-1101]
ED16 Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is P. 5-51
not at the home position. [MJ-1101]

2-7
2.1.2 Service call

C010 Drive system related Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not P. 5-52
service call rotating normally.
C020 Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor P. 5-52
is not rotating normally.
C030 Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is P. 5-52
not rotating normally.
C040 Paper feeding system PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotat- P. 5-53
related service call ing normally. (the case that paper can be fed from
any drawer except the PFP)
C130 Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer P. 5-54
tray-up motor is not rotating or the upper drawer
tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper
can be fed from any drawer except the upper
drawer)
C140 Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer P. 5-54
tray-up motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray
is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the lower drawer)
C150 PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper P. 5-55
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP upper drawer)
C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower P. 5-55
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP lower drawer)
C180 LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up P. 5-56
motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any
drawer except the LCF)
C1A0 LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end P. 5-57
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
C1B0 LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF trans- P. 5-58
port motor is not rotating normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF)
C260 Scanning system Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp P. 5-59
related service call (white reference) is not detected when power is
turned ON.
C270 Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF P. 5-59
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not shift from its home position in a specified time.
C280 Carriage home position sensor not turning ON P. 5-59
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not reach to its home position in a specified period
of time.
C360 Copy process related Charger cleaner motor abnormality: Charger P. 5-91
service call cleaner motor is not rotating or wire cleaner is not
moving normally.

2-8
C411 Fuser unit related ser- Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: P. 5-60
vice call Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when
power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser
roller does not rise in a specified period of time after
power is turned ON.
C412 Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Ther- P. 5-60
mistor abnormality is detected at power-ON or the
fuser roller temperature does not rise within a spec- 2
ified period of time after power-ON.
C443 Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (not P. 5-61
reaching to intermediate temperature)
C445 Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment P. 5-61
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)
(temperature abnormality at ready status)
(overheating)
C471 IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormal- P. 5-61
ity
(IH board initial abnormality)
C472 IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor- P. 5-61
mality)
C475 IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor- P. 5-61
mality when door is opened)
C480 Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT P. 5-61
rises abnormally.
C490 IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality P. 5-62
is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/
shorted.
C4B0 Fuser unit counter abnormality P. 5-62
C550 Optional communica- RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred P. 5-63
tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner.
C570 Communication error between Engine-CPU and P. 5-63
IPC board
C580 Communication error between IPC board and fin- P. 5-63
isher
C900 Circuit related service Connection error between SYS board and LGC P. 5-64
call board
C940 Engine-CPU abnormality P. 5-64
C950 LGC board memory abnormality P. 5-64
C960 Connection error between LGC board and DRV P. 5-64
board, ID abnormality
C970 Process related ser- High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of P. 5-91
vice call the main charger is detected.
C9E0 Circuit related service Connection error between SLG board and SYS P. 5-65
call board, ID abnormality
CA10 Laser optical unit Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor P. 5-67
related service call is not rotating normally.
CA20 H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC P. 5-67
board cannot detect laser beams.

2-9
06/08
CB10 Finisher related Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is P. 5-68
service call not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
CB11 Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray P. 5-68
guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CB12 Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer P. 5-68
roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is
CB20 Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or deliv- P. 5-69
ery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022]
CB30 Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 P. 5-69
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not mov-
ing normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable P. 5-69
tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is
CB31 Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actua- P. 5-70
tor of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor
does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101]
CB40 Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear align- P. 5-70
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Front alignment motor abnormality: The front align- P. 5-70
ment motor is not rotating or the front alignment
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CB50 Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotat- P. 5-71
ing or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024]
Stapler home position error: The stapler home posi- P. 5-71
tion sensor does not work. [MJ-1101]
CB51 Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not P. 5-71
at the home position. [MJ-1101]
CB60 Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor P. 5-72
is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally.
[MJ-1023/1024/1101]
CB80 Backup RAM data abnormality: P. 5-72
1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher con-
troller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024]
2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch con-
troller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is
installed)]
RAM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value P. 5-72
on finisher controller PC board is detected when the
power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
CB81 Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum P. 5-73
value on finisher controller PC board is detected
when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
CB90 Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper P. 5-73
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing
CBA0 Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) P. 5-73
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
CBB0 Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) P. 5-73
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]

2 - 10
06/08
CBC0 Finisher related Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is P. 5-73
service call not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
CBD0 Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotat- P. 5-74
ing or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
CBE0 Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding P. 5-74
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.
[MJ-1024] 2
CBF0 Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper P. 5-74
positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper posi-
tioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
CC00 Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide P. 5-75
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position
sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024]
CC10 Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, P. 5-75
inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover
switch is open. [MJ-1024]
CC20 Communication error between finisher and saddle P. 5-75
stitcher: Communication error between finisher con-
troller PC board and saddle stitcher controller board
[MJ-1023/1024]
CC30 Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack pro- P. 5-76
cessing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack trans- P. 5-77
port motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt
is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CC31 Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is P. 5-77
not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
CC40 Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotat- P. 5-77
ing or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/
1024]
CC41 Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The P. 5-78
paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ-
1101]
CC50 Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizon- P. 5-78
tal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is
not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-
6004 is installed)]
CC51 Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality: P. 5-78
Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or
puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when
MJ-6101 is installed)
CC52 Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew P. 5-79
adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not
shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
CC60 Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotat- P. 5-79
ing or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/
1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
CC61 Punch motor (M3) home position detection error: P. 5-80
Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shift-
ing normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]

2 - 11
06/08
CC71 Finisher related Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of check- P. 5-80
service call sum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
CC72 Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of check- P. 5-80
sum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
CC80 Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment P. 5-81
motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front align-
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear align- P. 5-81
ment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment
CC90 Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper P. 5-82
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
CCA0 Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower P. 5-83
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
CCB0 Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging P. 5-83
motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
CCD0 Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection P. 5-84
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating nor-
mally. [MJ-1023/1024]
CCE0 Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper P. 5-84
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ-
1023/1024]
CCF0 Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing P. 5-84
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
CDE0 Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not P. 5-85
rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ-
1101]
CE00 Communication error between finisher and punch P. 5-85
unit: Communication error between finisher control-
ler PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-
1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
CE10 Image control related Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The P. 5-87
service call output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when sensor light source is OFF.
CE20 Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): P. 5-88
The output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when the image quality control test pattern is
not formed.
CE40 Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The P. 5-89
test pattern is not formed normally.
CE50 Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The out- P. 5-90
put value of this sensor is out of a specified range.
CE90 Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of P. 5-90
the drum thermistor is out of a specified range.

2 - 12
07/04
CEA0 Copy process related Revolver home position detection abnormality: It P. 5-91
service call cannot detect that the revolver is at its home posi-
tion.
CEB0 Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality: P. 5-92
The black developer unit does not move up or down
normally (lifting cam does not operate normally).
CEC0 Copy process related 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality: P. 5-93
service call The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release 2
normally.
CEE0 Transfer belt position detection abnormality (normal P. 5-94
speed): The home position of the transfer belt can-
not be detected.
CEE1 Transfer belt position detection abnormality (when P. 5-94
decelerating): Reference position of the transfer
belt cannot be detected.
CEF0 Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not P. 5-94
rotating or revolver is not moving normally.
CF10 Finisher related ser- Undefined error code processing: If the engine of P. 5-86
vice call the equipment judges that a code (command) other
than the defined error codes is sent from the fin-
isher, it regards this as a CF10 error.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
Communication module SRAM writing failure.
[MJ-1101]
CF20 Toner density control Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The P. 5-95
related service call output value of the color auto-toner sensor in print-
ing is out of a specified range.
CF30 Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The P. 5-96
output value of the color auto-toner sensor against
the reference plate is out of a specified range at the
light amount correction during an auto-toner adjust-
ment or when a print job has finished.
CF40 Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The P. 5-97
light amount correction is not finished normally dur-
ing an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job
has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out
of a specified range when the light amount correc-
tion has finished.
CF50 Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connec- P. 5-98
tion of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be
detected at the initialization, or the output value of
color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts
rotating for initialization is out of a specified range.
F070 Communication Communication error between System-CPU and P. 5-63
related service call Engine-CPU
F090 Circuit related service SRAM abnormality on the SYS board P. 5-65
F091 call NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board P. 5-65
F092 SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board P. 5-66

2 - 13
05/11
F100 Other service call HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized nor- P. 5-99
mally.
F101 HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be P. 5-99
detected.
F102 HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state. P. 5-99
F103 HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be P. 5-99
performed in the specified period of time.
F104 HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data P. 5-99
of HDD.
F105 HDD other error P. 5-99
F106 Point and Print partition damage P. 5-99
F107 /BOX partition damage P. 5-99
F108 /SHA partition damage P. 5-99
F110 Communication Communication error between System-CPU and P. 5-63
related service call Scanner-CPU
F111 Scanner response abnormality P. 5-63
F120 Other service call Database abnormality: Database is not operating P. 5-99
normally.
F130 Invalid MAC address P. 5-99
F200 Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off P. 5-100
F350 Circuit related service SLG board abnormality P. 5-66
call

2 - 14
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error
Error code Classification Troubleshooting
1C10 System access abnormality P. 5-100
1C11 Insufficient memory P. 5-100
1C12 Message reception error P. 5-100
1C13 Message transmission error P. 5-100
1C14 Invalid parameter P. 5-100
2
1C15 Exceeding file capacity P. 5-100
1C20 System management module access abnormality P. 5-100
1C21 Job control module access abnormality P. 5-100
1C22 Job control module access abnormality P. 5-100
1C30 Directory creation failure P. 5-101
1C31 File creation failure P. 5-101
1C32 File deletion failure P. 5-100
1C33 File access failure P. 5-101
1C40 Image conversion abnormality P. 5-101
1C60 HDD full failure during processing P. 5-101
1C61 Address Book reading failure P. 5-101
1C62 Memory acquiring failure P. 5-101
1C63 Terminal IP address unset P. 5-101
1C64 Terminal mail address unset P. 5-101
1C65 SMTP address unset P. 5-101
1C66 Server time time-out error P. 5-101
1C67 NIC time time-out error P. 5-101
1C68 NIC access error P. 5-101
1C69 SMTP server connection error P. 5-101
1C6A HOST NAME error P. 5-101
1C6B Terminal mail address error P. 5-102
1C6C Destination mail address error P. 5-102
1C6D System error P. 5-101
1C70 SMTP client OFF P. 5-102
1C71 SMTP authentication error P. 5-102
1C72 POP before SMTP error P. 5-102
1C80 Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received P. 5-102
1C81 Onramp Gateway transmission failure P. 5-102
1C82 Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received P. 5-102
1CC0 Job canceling -
1CC1 Power failure P. 5-102

2 - 15
2) RFC related error
Message displayed in
Error code Contents Troubleshooting
the TopAccess screen
2500 Syntax error, command unrecog- HOST NAME error(RFC: 500) P. 5-103
nized Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
2501 Syntax error in parameters or argu- HOST NAME error(RFC: 501) P. 5-103
ments Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
2503 Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error P. 5-103
(RFC: 503)
2504 Command parameter not imple- HOST NAME error P. 5-103
mented (RFC: 504)
2550 Mailbox unavailable Destination mail address error P. 5-103
(RFC: 550)
2551 User not local Destination mail address error P. 5-103
(RFC: 551)
2552 Insufficient system storage Terminal/Destination mail address P. 5-103
error
(RFC: 552)
2553 Mailbox name not allowed Destination mail address error P. 5-103
(RFC: 553)

2 - 16
07/11
3) Electronic Filing related error
2B10 There was no applicable job. No applicable job error in job control P. 5-104
module
2B11 Job status failed. JOB status abnormality P. 5-104
2B20 Failed to access file. File library function error P. 5-104
2B21 Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity P. 5-104
imum size.
2
2B30 Insufficient disk space. Insufficient disk space in /BOX parti- P. 5-104
tion
2B31 Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic Filing P. 5-104
or folder is undefined or being cre-
ated/deleted
2B32 Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure: P. 5-104
ment. Specified document can not be
printed because of client’s access
(being edited, etc.).
2B50 Failed to process image. Image library error P. 5-104
2B51 Failed to process print image. List library error P. 5-104
2B60 The folder was renamed. A folder of A folder with the same name exists in -
the same name already existed. a box.
2B70 The document was renamed. A doc- A document with the same name -
ument of the same name already exists in a box or folder.
existed.
2B71 Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days -
exist
2B80 Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /BOX partition is -
nearly full. nearly full (90%).
2B90 Insufficient Memory. Insufficient memory capacity P. 5-104
2BA0 Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password P. 5-104
2BA0 Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password P. 5-104
2BA1 Incorrect paper size A Paper size not supported in the P. 5-105
Electronic Filing function is being
selected.
2BB1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 5-105
2BC0 System fatal error. Fatal failure occurred P. 5-104
2BC1 Failed to acquire resource. System management module P. 5-104
resource acquiring failure
2BD0 Power failure occurred during e-Fil- Power failure occurred during restor- P. 5-105
ing restoring. ing of Electronic Filing
2BE0 Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading failure P. 5-105
2BF0 Maximum number of page range is Exceeding maximum number of P. 5-105
reached. pages
2BF1 Maximum number of document Exceeding maximum number of doc- P. 5-105
range is reached. uments
2BF2 Maximum number of folder range is Exceeding maximum number of fold- P. 5-105
reached. ers

2 - 17
07/11
4) E-mail related error
2C10 Illegal Job status System access abnormality P. 5-106
2C11 Not enough memory Insufficient memory P. 5-106
2C12 Illegal Job status Message reception error P. 5-106
2C13 Illegal Job status Message transmission error P. 5-106
2C14 Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter P. 5-106
2C15 Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity P. 5-106
imum size
2C20 Illegal Job status System management module access P. 5-106
abnormality
2C21 Illegal Job status Job control module access abnor- P. 5-106
mality
2C22 Illegal Job status Job control module access abnor- P. 5-106
mality
2C30 Failed to create directory Directory creation failure P. 5-106
2C31 Failed to create file File creation failure P. 5-106
2C32 Failed to delete file File deletion failure P. 5-106
2C33 Failed to create file File access failure P. 5-106
2C40 Failed to convert image file format Image conversion abnormality P. 5-106
2C43 Encryption error. Failed to create file Encryption error P. 5-106
2C44 Creating the image file was not per- Encryption PDF enforced mode error P. 5-106
mitted.
2C60 Failed to process your Job. Insuffi- HDD full failure during processing P. 5-106
cient disk space.
2C61 Failed to read AddressBook Address Book reading failure P. 5-107
2C62 Not enough memory Memory acquiring failure P. 5-106
2C63 Invalid Domain Address Terminal IP address unset P. 5-107
2C64 Invalid Domain Address Terminal mail address unset P. 5-107
2C65 Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP address unset P. 5-107
2C66 Failed to connect to SMTP server Server time time-out error P. 5-107
2C67 Failed to send E-Mail message NIC time time-out error P. 5-107
2C68 Failed to send E-Mail message NIC access error P. 5-107
2C69 Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP server connection error P. 5-107
2C6A Failed to send E-Mail message HOST NAME error (No RFC error) P. 5-107
2C6B Invalid address specified in From: Terminal mail address error P. 5-107
field
2C6C Invalid address specified in To: field Destination mail address error (No P. 5-107
RFC error)
2C6D NIC system error System error P. 5-107
2C70 SMTP service is not available SMTP client OFF P. 5-107
2C71 Failed SMTP Authentication SMTP authentication error P. 5-107
2C72 POP Before SMTP Authentication POP before SMTP error P. 5-107
Failed
2C80 Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when pro- P. 5-108
cessing E-mail job received
2C81 Failed to process received Fax job Process failure of FAX job received P. 5-108
2CC0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2CC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 5-108

2 - 18
07/11
5) File sharing related error
2D10 Illegal Job status System access abnormality P. 5-109
2D11 Not enough memory Insufficient memory P. 5-109
2D12 Illegal Job status Message reception error P. 5-109
2D13 Illegal Job status Message transmission error P. 5-109
2D14 Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter P. 5-109
2D15 There are too many documents in the Exceeding document number P. 5-109 2
folder. Failed in creating new docu-
ment.
2D20 Illegal Job status System management module access P. 5-109
abnormality
2D21 Illegal Job status Job control module access abnor- P. 5-109
mality
2D22 Illegal Job status Job control module access abnor- P. 5-109
mality
2D30 Failed to create directory Directory creation failure P. 5-109
2D31 Failed to create file File creation failure P. 5-109
2D32 Failed to delete file File deletion failure P. 5-109
2D33 Failed to create file File access failure P. 5-109
2D40 Failed to convert image file format Image conversion abnormality P. 5-109
2D43 Encryption error. Failed to create file Encryption error P. 5-109
2D44 Creating the image file was not per- Encryption PDF enforced mode error P. 5-109
mitted.
2D60 Failed to copy file File library access abnormality P. 5-109
2D62 Failed to connect to network destina- File server connection error P. 5-110
tion. Check destination path
2D63 Specified network path is invalid. Invalid network path P. 5-110
Check destination path
2D64 Logon to file server failed. Check Login failure P. 5-110
username and password
2D65 There are too many documents in the Exceeding documents in folder: P. 5-110
folder. Failed in creating new docu- Creating new document is failed.
ment.
2D66 Failed to process your Job. Insuffi- HDD full failure during processing P. 5-110
cient disk space.
2D67 FTP service is not available FTP service not available P. 5-110
2D68 File Sharing service is not available File sharing service not available P. 5-110
2DA0 Expired scan documents deleted Periodical deletion of scanned docu- -
from share folder. ments completed properly.
2DA1 Expired Sent Fax documents deleted Periodical deletion of transmitted -
from shared folder. FAX documents completed properly.
2DA2 Expired Received Fax documents Periodical deletion of received FAX -
deleted from shared folder. documents completed properly.
2DA3 Scanned documents in shared folder Manual deletion of scanned docu- -
deleted upon user’s request. ments completed properly.
2DA4 Sent Fax Documents in shared folder Manual deletion of transmitted FAX -
deleted upon user’s request. documents completed properly.
2DA5 Received Fax Documents in shared Manual deletion of received FAX -
folder deleted upon user’s request. documents completed properly.
2DA6 Failed to delete file. File deletion failure P. 5-109
2DA7 Failed to acquire resource. Resource acquiring failure P. 5-109
2DA8 The HDD is running out of capacity Hard disk space in /SHA partition is -
for the shared folder. nearly full (90%).
2DC0 Job canceled Job canceling -
2DC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 5-110

2 - 19
6) E-mail reception related error
3A10 MIME Error has been detected in the E-mail MIME error P. 5-111
received mail.
3A11 MIME Error has been detected in the P. 5-111
received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
3A12 MIME Error has been detected in the P. 5-111
received mail. This mail could not be
3A20 Analyze Error has been detected in E-mail analysis error P. 5-111
the received mail.
3A21 Analyze Error has been detected in P. 5-111
the received mail. This mail has been
3A22 Analyze Error has been detected in P. 5-111
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
3A30 Whole partial mails were not reached Partial mail time-out error P. 5-111
by timeout.
3A40 Partial Mail Error has been detected Partial mail related error P. 5-111
in the received mail.
3A50 HDD Full Error has been occurred in Insufficient HDD capacity error P. 5-111
this mail.
3A51 HDD Full Error has been occurred in P. 5-111
this mail. This mail has been trans-
ferred to the administrator.
3A52 HDD Full Error has been occurred in P. 5-111
this mail. This mail could not be
3A60 HDD Full Warning has been occurred Warning of insufficient HDD capacity P. 5-111
in this mail.
3A61 HDD Full Warning has been occurred P. 5-111
in this mail. This mail could not be
3A62 HDD Full Warning has been occurred P. 5-111
in this mail. This mail could not be
3A70 Receiving partial mail was aborted Warning of partial mail interruption P. 5-111
since the partial mail setting has
been changed to Disable.
3A80 Partial mail was received during the Partial mail reception setting OFF P. 5-111
partial mail setting is disabled.
3A81 Partial mail was received during the P. 5-111
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
3A82 Partial mail was received during the P. 5-111
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3B10 Format Error has been detected in E-mail format error P. 5-111
the received mail.
3B11 Format Error has been detected in P. 5-111
3B12 Format Error has been detected in P. 5-111

2 - 20
3B20 Content-Type Error has been Content-Type error P. 5-111
detected in the received mail.
3B21 Content-Type Error has been P. 5-111
detected in the received mail. This
administrator.
3B22 Content-Type Error has been P. 5-111 2
administrator.
3B30 Charset Error has been detected in Charset error P. 5-111
the received mail.
3B31 Charset Error has been detected in P. 5-111
3B32 Charset Error has been detected in P. 5-111
3B40 Decode Error has been detected in E-mail decode error P. 5-111
the received mail.
3B41 Decode Error has been detected in P. 5-111
3B42 Decode Error has been detected in P. 5-111
3C10 Tiff Analyze Error has been detected TIFF analysis error P. 5-111
3C11 Tiff Analyze Error has been detected P. 5-111
in the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
in the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the administra-
tor.
3C20 Tiff Compression Error has been E-mail format error P. 5-111
3C21 Tiff Compression Error has been P. 5-111
administrator.
3C22 Tiff Compression Error has been P. 5-111
administrator.
3C30 Tiff Resolution Error has been Content-Type error P. 5-112
3C31 Tiff Resolution Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C32 Tiff Resolution Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.

2 - 21
3C40 Tiff Paper Size Error has been Charset error P. 5-112
3C41 Tiff Paper Size Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C42 Tiff Paper Size Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C50 Offramp Destination Error has been E-mail decode error P. 5-112
3C51 Offramp Destination Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C52 Offramp Destination Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C60 Offramp Security Error has been TIFF analysis error P. 5-112
3C61 Offramp Security Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C62 Offramp Security Error has been P. 5-112
administrator.
3C70 Power Failure has been occurred in Power failure error P. 5-112
Email receiving.
3D10 SMTP Destination Error has been Destination address error P. 5-112
mail was deleted.
3D20 Offramp Destination limitation Error Offramp destination limitation error P. 5-112
has been detected in the received
mail.
3D30 Fax Board Error has been occurred FAX board error P. 5-112
3E10 POP3 Connection Error has been POP3 server connection error P. 5-112
occurred in the received mail.
3E20 POP3 Connection Timeout Error has POP3 server connection time-out P. 5-112
been occurred in the received mail. error
3E30 POP3 Login Error has been occurred POP3 login error P. 5-112
3E40 POP3 Login Error occurred in the POP3 login method error P. 5-112
received mail.
3F00 File I/O Error has been occurred in File I/O error P. 5-112
3F10 this mail. The mail could not be P. 5-112
3F20 received until File I/O is recovered. P. 5-112
3F30 P. 5-112
3F40 P. 5-112

2 - 22
2.1.4 Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen.
402F Page memory size error - 1200 dpi network print is performed by the equip- P. 5-113
ment with 128 MB (standard) memory.
4031 HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid P. 5-113
network print are saved in HDD.
4032 Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be per- P. 5-113
formed. 2
4033 Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the P. 5-113
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
4034 e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD P. 5-113
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
4035 Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent P. 5-113
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
4036 User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not P. 5-113
registered as a user.
A221 Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from P. 5-113
the print job screen.
A222 Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during P. 5-113
print job (copy, list print, network print).
A290 Limit over error (Black): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those P. 5-113
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same
time.
A291 Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one P. 5-113
specified with the user code.
A292 Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one P. 5-113
specified with the department code.
A2A0 Limit over error (Color): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those P. 5-113
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same
time.
A2A1 Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one P. 5-113
specified with the user code.
A2A2 Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one P. 5-113
specified with the department code.

2 - 23
<<Error history>>
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10 99999999 05 06 14 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000
Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits 8 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
B Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT, 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5,
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unsed H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ
K: A3-wide L: 305×457 mm M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
C Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
D ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
E APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
F Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
G Unused
H Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
I Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K Unused
L Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
O Color mode
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale
6: Unused 7: Image smoothing

2 - 24
06/08
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode For start Contents For exit Display

Control panel [0]+[1]+ All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all [POWER] -
check mode [POWER] the LCD pixels blink. OFF/ON
Test mode [0]+[3]+ Checks the status of input/output signals. [POWER] 100% C A4
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Test print mode [0]+[4]+ Outputs the test patterns. [POWER] 100% P A4 2
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST PRINT
Adjustment [0]+[5]+ Adjusts various items. [POWER] 100% A A4
mode [POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Setting mode [0]+[8]+ Sets various items. [POWER] 100% D
[POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
List print mode [9]+[START]+ Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and [POWER] 100% UA A4
[POWER] 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. OFF/ON LIST PRINT
PM support [6]+[START]+ Clears each counter. [POWER] 100% K
mode [POWER] OFF/ON TEST MODE
Firmware [8]+[9]+ Performs updating of the system firmware. [POWER] -
update mode [POWER] OFF/ON
Notes:
1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagno-
sis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line con-
nectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be
sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connect-
ing the modular code.
To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode:

Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equip-
ment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
<Operation procedure>
• Control panel check mode (01):
[POWER] OFF/ON
[0][1] LED lit/ (Exit)
[START] (Button check)
[POWER] LCD blinking
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
• Test mode (03): Refer to “2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03)” and “2.2.2. Output check (test mode
03)”.
• Test print mode (04): Refer to “2.2.3. Test print mode (04)”.
• Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”.
• Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”.

2 - 25
• List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER]
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to OFF/ON
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
• PM support mode (6S):
[6][START]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
2: PM Support Screen (Operation started) (Exit)
• Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”.
[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1] [0][3] [0][4] [0][5] [0][8] [9][START] [6][START] [8][9]
Control panel Test print Adjustment Setting List print PM support Firmware
Warming up check mode Test mode mode mode mode mode update mode
mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.

2 - 26
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and
the digital keys in the test mode (03).
2
[0][3] [FAX]
[START] or [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] [COPY] (Exit)
[CLEAR]
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.

2 - 27
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Contents
Digital Highlighted display Normal display
Button Items to check
key
e.g. e.g.
A Bypass unit connection Not connected Connected
B ADU connection Not connected Connected
C - - -
D LCF connection Not connected Connected
[1]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H LCF drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present
A PFP upper drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present
B - - -
C PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present
D PFP upper drawer feed sensor Paper present No paper
[2] E PFP connection Not connected Connected
F PFP side cover open/close switch Cover opened Cover closed
G PFP upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present
H PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor Tray at upper limit Other than upper
position limit position
A LCF tray bottom sensor Tray at bottom posi- Other than upper
tion limit position
B LCF standby side paper misload detection sen- Properly loaded Paper misload
sor
C - - -
[3] D - - -
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side Paper present No paper
A PFP lower drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present
B - - -
C PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present
D PFP lower drawer feed sensor Paper present No paper
[4] E PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
output mode (03))
F - - -
G PFP lower drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present
H PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor Tray at upper limit Other than upper

2 - 28
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A LCF end fence home position sensor Fence home posi- Other than home
tion position
B LCF end fence stop position sensor Fence stop position Other than stop
position
C Empty sensor at LCF standby side No paper Paper present 2
D LCF side cover open/close switch Cover closed Cover opened
[5]
E LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
output mode (03))
F LCF tray-up sensor Tray at upper limit Other than upper
G LCF feed sensor No paper Paper present
H Empty sensor at LCF feed side No paper Paper present
A Lower drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present
B Upper drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present
C Lower drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present
D Upper drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present
[6] E Lower drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present
F Upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present
G Lower drawer tray-up sensor Tray at upper limit Other than upper
H Upper drawer tray-up sensor Tray at upper limit Other than upper
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[7]
E Side cover open/close switch Cover opened Cover closed
F Front cover opening/closing switch Cover opened Cover closed
G - - -
H Exit sensor Paper present No paper
A Bypass feed paper width sensor 3 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Refer to table1)
B Bypass feed paper width sensor 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Refer to table1)
C Bypass feed paper width sensor 1 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Refer to table1)
[8] D Bypass feed paper width sensor 0 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Refer to table1)
E Bypass sensor No paper Paper present
F ADU opening/closing switch ADU opened ADU closed
G ADU exit sensor Paper present No paper
H ADU entrance sensor Paper present No paper

2 - 29
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[9]
E - - -
F Key copy counter connection Not connected Connected
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[0]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper width sensor
Paper width size
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1 A3/LD
1 0 1 1 A4-R/LT-R
1 1 0 1 A5-R/ST-R
1 1 1 0 Card size
0 0 1 1 B4-R/LG
1 0 0 1 B5-R

2 - 30
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor Released Contacted
B Black developer contact timing detection sensor Releasing move- Contacting move-
ment ment
C Black developer contact position detection sen- Released position Contacted position 2
sor
D Main motor rotation status Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))
[1]
E Developer motor rotation status Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
F Transport motor rotation status Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
G Polygonal motor rotation status Abnormal rotation Normal rotation
H 24V Power supply Power OFF Power ON
A IPC board connection Not connected Connected
B Color toner cartridge sensor Normally Installation fault
C Revolver home position sensor Home position Other than home
position
[2] D - - -
E - - -
F Toner bag full detection sensor Toner bag full Not full
G Black auto-toner sensor connection Not connected Connected
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[3]
E - - -
F - - -
G Lower drawer feed sensor No paper Paper present
H Upper drawer feed sensor Paper present No paper
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[4]
E Bridge unit connection Not connected Connected
F Color auto-toner sensor connection Not connected Connected
G - - -
H - - -

2 - 31
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[5] E - - -
F RADF connection RADF connected Not connected
G Platen sensor Platen cove opened Platen cover closed
H Carriage home position sensor Home position Other than home
position
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D APS sensor (APS-R) No original Original present
[6]
E APS sensor (APS-C) No original Original present
F APS sensor (APS-3) No original Original present
G APS sensor (APS-2) No original Original present
H APS sensor (APS-1) No original Original present
A [RADF] Original tray sensor Original present No original
B [RADF] Original empty sensor Original present No original
C [RADF] Jam access cover sensor Cover opened Cover closed
D [RADF] RADF opening/closing sensor RADF opened RADF closed
[7]
E [RADF] Original exit/reverse sensor Original present No original
F [RADF] Original intermediate transport sensor Original present No original
G [RADF] Read sensor Original present No original
H [RADF] Original registration sensor Original present No original
A [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID0S) OFF (H) ON (L)
(Refer to table2)
B [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID1S) OFF (H) ON (L)
(Refer to table2)
C [RADF] Original tray width sensor (TWID2S) OFF (H) ON (L)
(Refer to table2)
[8]
D - - -
E [RADF] Original length detection sensor Original present No original
F [RADF] Original width detection sensor-1 Original present No original
G [RADF] Original width detection sensor-2 Original present No original
H - - -
A Black toner cartridge switch Cartridge not Cartridge installed
installed
B - - -
C - - -
D Bypass feed sensor No paper Paper present
[9]
E Registration sensor Paper present No paper
F - - -
G - - -
H Transfer belt home position sensor Home position Other tha home
position

2 - 32
08/04
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A Bridge unit transport sensor 2 Paper present No paper
B Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch Cover opened Cover closed
C Bridge unit transport sensor 1 Paper present No paper
D Bridge unit paper full detection sensor Paper not full Paper full 2
[0] E - - -
F Charger cleaner front position detection switch Cleaner home posi- Other than home
tion position
G Charger cleaner rear position detection switch Cleaner rear posi- Other than rear posi-
tion tion
H - - -
Table 2. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width).
Original tray width sensor Paper width size Paper width size
TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S (LT series) (A4 series)
H H H LD/LT A3/A4
H H L - B5-R
H L H ST-R A5-R
L H H LD/LT A3/A4
L H L - -
L L H 8.5" x 8.5" / LT-R / LG / A4-R/FOLIO
13" LG
L L L COMPUTER B4/B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short

2 - 33
08/04
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
- Temperature/humidity sensor (displays temper- - Temperature [°C]
[1]
ature inside of the equipment)
- Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity - Humidity [%RH]
[2]
inside of the equipment)
- Drum thermistor (displays drum surface temper- - Temperature [°C]
[3]
ature)
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[4]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[5]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[6]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[7]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[8]
E - - -
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -

2 - 34
05/11
Contents
key
e.g. e.g.
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D - - -
[9]
E - - - 2
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
A - - -
B - - -
C - - -
D Dongles for other equipments / Other USB Connectable Not connectable
devices
[0]
E Judgement for acceptable USB storage device Acceptable Not acceptable
(*1)
F - - -
G - - -
H - - -
*1
• Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with
this code.
• Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
• It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB stor-
age device.

2 - 35
2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
Procedure 1
[0][3] Operation Stop Operation [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] [START]
[POWER] ON code OFF (Exit)
Procedure 2
[0][3] Operation Test mode [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] One direction [CLEAR]
[POWER] standby (Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
Operation Operation Test mode OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START] [CLEAR] standby
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF
[POWER]
Code Function Code Function Procedure

101 Main motor ON (Operational without 151 Code No.101 function OFF 1
black developer unit)
102 Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON 152 Code No.102 function OFF 1
103 Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON 153 Code No.103 function OFF 1
108 Registration clutch ON 158 Code No.108 function OFF 1
109 PFP motor ON 159 Code No.109 function OFF 1
110 ADU motor ON 160 Code No.110 function OFF 1
112 Developer motor ON (Operational with 162 Code No.112 function OFF 1
black developer unit)
115 Drum cleaning brush motor ON 165 Code No.115 function OFF 1
116 Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON 166 Code No.116 function OFF 1
118 Laser ON 168 Code No.118 function OFF 1
120 Exit motor (normal rotation) ON 170 Code No.120 function OFF 1
121 Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON 171 Code No.121 function OFF 1
122 LCF motor ON 172 Code No.122 function OFF 1
123 Transport motor ON 173 Code No.123 function OFF 1
124 Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON 174 Code No.124 function OFF 1
125 Color auto-toner sensor shutter sole- 175 Code No.125 function OFF 1
noid ON (open)
126 Color auto-toner sensor LED ON 176 Code No.126 function OFF 1

2 - 36
06/08
Code Function Procedure
201 Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
202 Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
203 Lower transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF 3
204 Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF 3
205 Lower transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF 3 2
206 LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF 3
207 LCF end fence reciprocating movement 2
208 LCF end fence motor ON/OFF 3
209 LCF feed clutch ON/OFF 3
210 LCF transport clutch ON/OFF 3
218 Key copy counter count up 2
225 PFP transport clutch ON/OFF 3
226 PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
228 PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3
232 Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF 3
235 Discharge LED ON/OFF 3
241 IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF 3
242 Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
243 Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
248 Developer bias (Black) [+DC] ON/OFF 3
249 Developer bias (Black) [-DC] ON/OFF 3
252 Main charger ON/OFF 3
261 Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using 2
ZOOM button)
264 SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan ON (high/low speed) 1
265 SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan OFF 1
267 Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF 3
268 Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF 3
271 LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN 2
278 PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
280 PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2
281 RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) 3
282 RADF original feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) 3
283 RADF read motor ON/OFF 3
284 RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) 3
285 RADF original exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) 3
294 RADF gate solenoid ON/OFF 3
295 Power OFF mode (for 200V series) 4
297 RADF fan motor ON/OFF 3
410 Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF 3
411 Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF 3
412 Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) 3

2 - 37
08/04
Code Function Procedure
413 Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) 3
416 IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF 3
417 Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF 3
418 Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF 3
419 Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF 3
420 Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF 3
421 Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF 3
422 Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF 3
424 1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 3
425 1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF 3
426 2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 3
427 2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF 3
428 Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF 3
430 Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON/OFF 3
431 Color developer drive clutch ON/OFF 3
432 Black developer drive clutch ON/OFF 3
433 Black developer lifting clutch ON/OFF 3
435 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF 3
437 Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON/OFF 3
439 Upper transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF 3
440 Upper transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF 3
442 Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF 3
450 Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation) 3
451 Revolver motor operation (at standby position) 2
452 Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position) 2
453 Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position) 2
454 Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position) 2
455 Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position) 2
456 Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position) 2
457 Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position) 2
458 Revolver motor operation (at home position) 2
459 Revolver motor operation (at developing position) 2
460 Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement) 3
461 Charger cleaner motor movement (one reciprocating movement) 2

2 - 38
06/08
2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
<Procedure 1>
[0][4]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] Operation [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON 2
Continuous (Exit)
Test Printing
<Procedure 2>
[0][4]
(Code) [START] Color [START] Operation [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] selection Continuous (Exit)
[CLEAR] Test Printing
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not per-
formed.
Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Code Types of test pattern Remarks Remarks

142 Grid pattern (black) Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm 1
204 Grid pattern (color) Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm 2
219 6% test pattern 2
220 8% test pattern 2
231 Secondary scanning direction 33 grada- 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm 2
tion steps
237 Halftone 2
250 Test pattern for KCMY secondary scan- For color deviation check 1
ning position adjustment
262 Pattern for jitter evaluation 1 pixel standard, for color deviation cor- 2
(4 lines ON / 4 lines OFF) rection
270 Image quality control test pattern For checking the image quality control 2

2 - 39
2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER]
button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1
[Digital key] [ENTER] [FAX] [POWER]

[0][5] [Digital key] [START] *[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Code) or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit)
[CANCEL] (Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT]
([FAX] [START])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Value unchangeable) (Exit)
Procedure 3
[UP] [ENTER] [POWER]

[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or ([FAX] [START])
or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) [DOWN] (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Adjust a value) (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START] [ENTER] ([FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
*[FUNCTION CLEAR] [START])
(Key in a value) Stores value (Exit)
[CLEAR] in RAM (Test copy)
(Corrects value) [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5] [UP] [ENTER] [FAX] [POWER]
[Digital key] [START] Automatic or or
[POWER] adjustment OFF/ON
(Code) [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit)
(Adjust a value) Stores value (Test copy)
in RAM

2 - 40
Procedure 6
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic [FAX] [COPY]) [POWER]OFF/ON

[START]
[POWER] (Code) adjustment (Test copy) (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is

displayed. 2
* Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
button.
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic [POWER]
[START] Stores value
[POWER] (Code) adjustment [START] OFF/ON
in RAM
(Test copy) (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is

displayed.
* Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 10
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value [POWER]

[START] [START] [START] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) displayed
(Exit)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 14
[ENTER] [FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [UP] or [DOWN] or [POWER]
[START] [Digital key] [START]
[POWER] (Code) (Adjust a value) [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
(Sub code) [START] (Exit)
Stores value (Test copy)
in RAM
[CLEAR] [CANCEL]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode.
In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has
become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

2 - 41
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code Types of test pattern Remarks

1 Grid pattern (Black) Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
3 Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing) Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
4 For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
pattern)
5 For gamma adjustment (Color) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
6 For gamma adjustment (Black) For checking the gradation reproduction
7 For gamma adjustment (Color) For checking the gradation reproduction
10 For gamma adjustment (Black) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
12 Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation For checking the image of printer section
steps (Y)
steps (M)
steps (C)
steps (K)
47 Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
dpi)
48 Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
dpi)
49 Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 600 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
dpi)
50 Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 1,200 x Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
600 dpi)
51 Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) For checking the gradation reproduction
52 Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 For checking the gradation reproduction
dpi)
55 Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
56 Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
57 Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
58 Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
59 Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
60 Grid pattern (Black / OHP) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
62 For color deviation correction (Full Color) Only for A3/LD size
68 For color deviation correction (Full Color) Only for A4/LT size
69 For color deviation correction (Full Color) Only for A4/LT size

2 - 42
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Pro-
Classifi- Func- <Accept-
Code Items RAM Contents cedur
cation tion able
e
2
value>
200 Develop- Initialization of All ALL - M The value starts chang- 5
ment color auto- (Y,M,C,K) <0-255> ing approx. 3 minutes
201 toner sensor Y ALL - M after this adjustment 5
light amount <0-255> started.
202 correction tar- M ALL - M The value is automati- 5
get value <0-255> cally set during this
adjustment (approx. 2
203 C ALL - M minutes). 5
<0-255> (As the value increases,
204 K ALL - M the sensor output 5
<0-255> increases correspond-
206 YMC ALL - M ingly.) (Chap. 3.2) 5
<0-255>
207 Develop- Initialization of color auto- ALL - M Initializes the color 6
ment toner sensor light amount (color) auto-toner sensor light
correction target value amount correction tar-
get value.
208 Develop- Enforced correction of ALL - M Performs the color 6
ment color auto-toner sensor (color) auto-toner sensor light
light amount amount correction forc-
ibly.
210 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out- ALL 225 M When the value 3
put adjustment (When not <0-225> decreases, the 1st
transferred) transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 541, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
224 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out- ALL 147 M When the value 3
put adjustment (When <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
cleaning the roller [+] ) transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
put adjustment (When <188- decreases, the 2nd
cleaning the roller [-] ) 255> transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
put adjustment (Paper <188- decreases, the 2nd
interval/When not trans- 255> transfer roller bias out-
ferred) put increases.
227-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 159 M When the value 14
roller bias outside (black) <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
227-1 put adjust- Reverse ALL 134 M transfer roller bias out- 14
ment side at (black) <0-187> put increases.
(Plain paper) duplexing The adjustment value
227-2 Single ALL 147 M becomes effective 14
side (color) <0-187> when the Setting Mode
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
227-3 Reverse ALL 128 M is 0 (invalid). 14
side at (color) <0-187>
duplexing

2 - 43
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
229-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 144 M When the value 14
roller bias outside (black) <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
229-1 put adjust- Reverse ALL 119 M transfer roller bias out- 14
ment side at (black) <0-187> put increases.
(Thick paper duplexing The adjustment value
229-2 1) Single ALL 125 M becomes effective 14
side (color) <0-187> when the Setting Mode
(08-544, 549 and 551)
229-3 Reverse ALL 112 M is 0 (invalid). 14
duplexing
230-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out- ALL 153 M When the value 14
put (Thick paper 2) (black) <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
230-1 ALL 150 M transfer roller bias out- 14
(color) <0-187> put increases.
becomes effective
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
put (Thick paper 3) (black) <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
becomes effective
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
put (OHP film) (black) <0-187> decreases, the 2nd
becomes effective
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
234-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 5 M Sets the offset amount 4
roller bias off- side (black) <0-10> of 2nd transfer roller
234-1 setting adjust- Reverse ALL 5 M bias. 4
ment side at (black) <0-10> 0: -500V 1: -400V
(Plain paper) duplexing 2: -300V 3: -200V
234-2 Single ALL 5 M 4: -100V 5: 0V 4
side (color) <0-10> 6: +100V 7: +200V
8: +300V 9: +400V
234-3 Reverse ALL 5 M 10: +500V 4
duplexing
236-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 5 M Sets the offset amount 4
roller bias off- side (black) <0-10> of 2nd transfer roller
236-1 setting adjust- Reverse ALL 5 M bias. 4
ment (Thick side at (black) <0-10> 0: -500V 1: -400V
paper 1) duplexing 2: -300V 3: -200V
236-2 Single ALL 5 M 4: -100V 5: 0V 4
side (color) <0-10> 6: +100V 7: +200V
8: +300V 9: +400V
236-3 Reverse ALL 5 M 10: +500V 4
duplexing

2 - 44
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
237-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off- ALL 5 M Sets the offsetting 4
setting adjustment (black) <0-10> amount of 2nd transfer
237-1 (Thick paper 2) ALL 5 M roller bias. 4
(color) <0-10> 0: -1,000V 1: -800V 2
238-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off- ALL 5 M 2: -600V 3: -400 V 4
setting adjustment (black) <0-10> 4: -200V 5: 0 V
(Thick paper 3) 6: +200V 7: +400V
238-1 ALL 5 M 8: +600V 9: +800 V 4
(color) <0-10> 10: +1,000V
239-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off- ALL 5 M 4
setting adjustment (black) <0-10>
239-1 (OHP film) ALL 5 M 4
(color) <0-10>
241 Main Main charger Y ALL 78 M As the value increases, 3
charger grid bias <0-255> the transformer output
242 adjustment M ALL 84 M increases. The adjust- 3
<0-255> ment value becomes
243 C ALL 87 M effective only when the 3
<0-255> setting mode (08-549,
551, 556, 557) is 0
244 K ALL 94 M (invalid). 3
<0-255>
245 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias off- ALL 5 M Sets the offsetting 1
setting (black) <0-10> amount of 1st transfer
roller bias.
0: -500 V 1: -400 V
2: -300 V 3: -200 V
4: -100 V 5: 0 V
6: +100 V 7: +200 V
8: +300 V 9: +400 V
10: +500 V
247 Transfer Temperature/humidity sen- ALL 50 M The humidity of the 2
sor Humidity display <0-100> inside of the equipment
is displayed.
[Unit: RH%]
248 Transfer Drum thermistor Tempera- ALL 23 M The ambient tempera- 2
ture displa <0-100> ture of the drum surface
is displayed.
[Unit: °C]
250 Transfer 1st transfer +Low ALL 4000 M Transformer output set- 1
roller bias out- <3600- ting of the 1st transfer
put voltage 4400> roller bias.
When replacing the
251 +High ALL 400 M high-voltage trans- 1
<280- former, the values listed
520> in attached data sheet
are entered.
(Unit: V)
252 Transfer 2nd transfer +Low ALL 6000 M Transformer output set- 1
roller bias out- <5400- ting of the 2nd transfer
put voltage 6600> roller bias (plus output).
When replacing the
253 +High ALL 500 M high-voltage trans- 1
<350- former, the values listed
650> in attached data sheet
are entered.
(Unit: V)

2 - 45
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
254 Transfer 2nd transfer -Low ALL -500 M Transformer output set- 1
roller bias out- <-9999- ting of the 2nd transfer
put voltage 0> roller bias (minus out-
put).
255 -High ALL -2000 M When replacing the 1
<-9999- high-voltage trans-
0> former, the values listed
in attached data sheet
are entered.
(Unit: V)
270 Transfer Temperature/humidity sen- ALL 23 M The temperature of the 2
sor Temperature display <0-100> inside of the equipment
is displayed.
[Unit: °C]
275 Transfer 2nd transfer (+) ALL 147 M Displays the value of 2
roller bias <0-255> 2nd transfer roller bias
276 actual value (-) ALL 229 M when printing is oper- 2
(When clean- <0-255> ated.
ing the roller)
277-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 159 M Displays the value of 10
roller bias side (black) <0-187> 2nd transfer roller bias
277-1 actual value Reverse ALL 134 M when printing is oper- 10
display (Plain side at (black) <0-187> ated.
paper) duplexing
277-2 Single ALL 147 M 10
side (color) <0-187>
277-3 Reverse ALL 128 M 10
duplexing
279-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Single ALL 144 M Displays the value of 10
roller bias side (black) <0-187> 2nd transfer roller bias
279-1 actual value Reverse ALL 119 M when printing is oper- 10
display (Thick side at (black) <0-187> ated.
paper 1) duplexing
279-2 Single ALL 125 M 10
side (color) <0-187>
duplexing
281 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL - M The RMS value of the 2
resistance detection con- <0-255> main charger grid bias
trol is displayed..
284 Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit ALL 141 M When the value 1
contact timing adjustment <88-168> increases, the contact
timing of transfer belt
cleaning unit is delayed.
285 Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit ALL 121 M When the value 1
release timing adjustment <88-168> increases, the release
timing of transfer belt
cleaning unit is delayed.
290-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off- ALL 153 M Displays the value of 10
setting adjustment (black) <0-187> 2nd transfer roller bias
290-1 (Thick paper 2) ALL 150 M when printing is oper- 10
(color) <0-187> ated.

2 - 46
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
291-1 (Thick paper 3) ALL 131 M when printing is oper- 10
(color) <0-187> ated. 2
292-1 (OHP film) ALL 119 M when printing is oper- 10
293-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Plain ALL 85 M Corrects the 2nd trans- 14
roller bias cor- paper <0-255> fer roller bias output of
293-1 rection of Thick ALL 75 M leading/trailing edge of 14
leading/trail- paper 1 <0-255> paper (05-227, 229,
293-2 ing edge of Thick ALL 80 M 230, 231 and 232). 14
paper paper 2 <0-255> Correcting factor: %
293-3 Thick ALL 80 M 14
paper 3 <0-255>
293-4 OHP film ALL 80 M 14
<0-255>
294-0 Transfer Actual value Single ALL 164 M Displays the value of 10
display of 2nd side (black) <0-255> 2nd transfer roller bias
294-1 transfer roller Reverse ALL 142 M on the leading/trailing 10
bias of lead- side at (black) <0-255> edge of paper when
ing/trailing duplexing printing is performed.
294-2 edge of paper Single ALL 153 M (The value corrected in 10
(Plain paper) side (color) <0-255> 05-293 is displayed.)
duplexing
296-0 Transfer Actual value Single ALL 155 M 10
display of 2nd side (black) <0-255>
296-1 transfer roller Reverse ALL 136 M 10
bias of lead- side at (black) <0-255>
ing/trailing duplexing
296-2 edge of paper Single ALL 141 M 10
(Thick paper side (color) <0-255>
1)
duplexing
297-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd ALL 160 M 10
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>
297-1 ing/trailing edge of paper ALL 158 M 10
(Thick paper 2) (color) <0-255>
298-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd ALL 142 M 10
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>
298-1 ing/trailing edge of paper ALL 143 M 10
(Thick paper 3) (color) <0-255>
299-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd ALL 133 M Displays the value of 10
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255> 2nd transfer roller bias
299-1 ing/trailing edge of paper ALL 133 M on the leading/trailing 10
(OHP film) (color) <0-255> edge of paper when
printing is performed.
(The value corrected in
05-293 is displayed.)

2 - 47
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
305 Scanner Image location adjustment ALL 124 SYS When the value 1
of secondary scanning <92-164> increases by “1”, the
direction image shifts by approx.
(scanner section) 0.137 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
306 Scanner Image location adjustment ALL 113 SYS When the value 1
of secondary scanning <0-255> increases by “1”, the
direction image shifts by approx.
(scanner section) 0.0423 mm toward the
front side of the paper.
308 Scanner Distortion mode ALL - - Moves carriages to the 6
adjusting position.
(Chap. 3.4.4)
330-0 Image Image quality Y ALL 3 M Sets the maximum cor- 4
control closed-loop <0-255> rection number of time
330-1 control con- M ALL 3 M of the contrast voltage 4
trast voltage <0-255> in the closed-loop con-
330-2 correction/ C ALL 3 M trol mode 2. 4
Mode 2 maxi- <0-255>
mum number
330-3 of time cor- K ALL 3 M 4
rected <0-255>
331-1 control laser M ALL 2 M of the laser power in the 4
power correc- <0-255> closed-loop control
331-2 tion/Mode 2 C ALL 2 M mode 2. 4
maximum <0-255>
number of
331-3 time corrected K ALL 2 M 4
<0-255>
332-1 control con- M ALL 1 M of the contrast voltage 4
trast voltage <0-255> in the closed-loop con-
332-2 correction/ C ALL 1 M trol mode 1. 4
Mode 1 maxi- <0-255>
mum number
332-3 of time cor- K ALL 1 M 4
rected <0-255>
333-1 control laser M ALL 1 M of the laser power in the 4
power correc- <0-255> closed-loop control
333-2 tion/Mode 1 C ALL 1 M mode 1. 4
maximum <0-255>
number of
333-3 time corrected K ALL 1 M 4
<0-255>
334 Image Main charger grid calibra- ALL 300 M Transformer output cali- 1
control tion voltage 1 (low) <210- bration of the main
390> charger grid bias. When
335 Image Main charger grid calibra- ALL 1000 M replacing the high-volt- 1
control tion voltage 2 (high) <900- age transformer, the
1100> values listed in attached
data sheet are entered.
(Unit: V)

2 - 48
06/08
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
338 Image Color developer bias DC ALL 100 M Transformer output cali- 1
control (-) calibration voltage 1 <70-130> bration of the color
(low) developer bias. When
339 Image Color developer bias DC ALL 900 M replacing the high-volt- 1 2
control (-) calibration voltage 2 <810- age transformer, the
(high) 990> values listed in attached
(Unit: V)
340 Scanner Reproduction ratio adjust- ALL 127 SYS When the value 1
ment of secondary scan- <0-255> increases by “1”, the
ning direction (scanner reproduction ratio in the
section) secondary scanning
direction (vertical to
paper feeding direc-
tion) increases by
approx. 0.223%.
350 Scanner Shading posi- Original ALL 128 SYS 0.1369 mm/step 1
tion adjust- glass <118-
ment 138>
351 RADF ALL 128 SYS 0.1369 mm/step 1
<118-
138>
354 RADF Adjustment of for single- ALL 10 SYS When the value 1
RADF paper sided orig- <0-20> increases by “1”, the
alignment inal aligning amount
355 for double ALL 10 SYS increases by approx. 1
sided orig- <0-20> 0.5 mm.
inal
357 RADF Fine adjustment of RADF ALL 50 SYS When the value 1
transport speed <0-100> increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of the
secondary scanning
direction on original (fed
from the RADF)
increases by approx.
0.1%.
358 RADF RADF sideways deviation ALL 128 SYS When the value 1
adjustment <0-255> increases by “1”, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0423 mm.
359 Scanner Carriage position adjust- ALL 128 SYS When the value 1
ment during scanning from (black) <0-255> increases by “1”, the
360 RADF ALL 128 SYS carriage position shifts 1
(color) <0-255> by approx. 0.1 mm
toward the exit side
when using the RADF.

2 - 49
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
361 Scanner Log table switching for ALL 0 SYS 0: Same log table as 1
RADF copying (color) <0-4> the one used at
copying with original
glass
1: Background repro-
duction - Light 2
duction - Light 1
duction - Dark 1
duction - Dark 2
362 ALL 0 SYS 0: Same log table as 1
(black) <0-4> the one used at
copying with original
glass
duction - Light 2
duction - Light 1
duction - Dark 1
duction - Dark 2
363 Scanner Data transfer of character- SCN - SYS Transfers the character- 6
istic value of scanner / SYS istic values of the scan-
board → SLG board ner (shading correction
factor / RGB color cor-
rection / reproduction
ratio color aberration
correction) from the
NVRAM of the SYS
board to the NVRAM of
the SLG board.
364 Scanner Data transfer of character- SCN - SYS Transfers the character- 6
istic value of scanner / SLG istic values of the scan-
board → SYS board ner (shading correction
factor / RGB color cor-
rection / reproduction
ratio color aberration
correction) from the
NVRAM of the SLG
board to the NVRAM of
the SYS board.
365 RADF RADF lead- for single- ALL 50 SYS When the value 1
ing edge posi- sided orig- <0-100> increases by “1”, the
tion 1 inal copied image of original
366 adjustment for double ALL 50 SYS fed from the RADF 1
sided orig- <0-100> shifts toward the trail-
inal ing edge of paper by
approx. 0.1 mm.

2 - 50
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
367 RADF RADF original guide width ALL - - Stores the current width 6
adjustment of RADF original guide
(Minimum) by keying in this code
with the guide set at the 2
minimum width. Per-
form this adjustment
when the RADF board
or volume is replaced,
or when the code (05-
356) is performed.
368 RADF RADF original guide width ALL - - Stores the current width 6
adjustment of RADF original guide
(Maximum) by keying in this code
with the guide set at the
maximum width. Per-
form this adjustment
when the RADF board
or volume is replaced,
or when the code (05-
356) is performed.
372 Image Black developer bias DC ALL 100 M Transformer output cali- 1
control (-) calibration voltage 1 <70-130> bration of the black
(low) developer bias. When
373 Image Black developer bias DC ALL 900 M replacing the high-volt- 1
control (-) calibration voltage 2 <810- age transformer, the
(high) 990> values listed in attached
(Unit: V)
380-0 Image Image quality Y ALL 320 M Displays the contrast 10
control open-loop <0-999> voltage initial value set
380-1 control/ con- M ALL 330 M by the open-loop con- 10
trast voltage <0-999> trol. (Unit: V)
380-2 initial value C ALL 340 M 10
display <0-999>
380-3 K ALL 375 M 10
<0-999>
381-0 Image Contrast volt- Y ALL 320 M Displays the contrast 10
control age actual <0-999> voltage when printing is
381-1 value display M ALL 330 M operated. (Unit: V) 10
<0-999>
381-2 C ALL 340 M 10
<0-999>
381-3 K ALL 375 M 10
<0-999>
382-0 Image Image quality Y ALL 408 M Displays the laser 10
control open-loop <0-999> power initial value set
382-1 control/ laser M ALL 408 M by the open-loop con- 10
power initial <0-999> trol. (Unit: µW)
382-2 value display C ALL 408 M 10
<0-999>
382-3 K ALL 408 M 10
<0-999>

2 - 51
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
383-0 Image Laser power Y ALL 92 M Displays the laser 10
control actual value <0-255> power when printing is
383-1 display M ALL 92 M operated. (bit value) 10
<0-255>
383-2 C ALL 92 M 10
<0-255>
383-3 K ALL 92 M 10
<0-255>
384-0 Image Laser power Y ALL 408 M Displays the laser 10
control actual value <0-999> power when printing is
384-1 display M ALL 408 M operated. (Unit: µW) 10
<0-999>
384-2 C ALL 408 M 10
<0-999>
384-3 K ALL 408 M 10
<0-999>
385-0 Image Main charger Y ALL 78 M Displays the main 10
control grid bias <0-255> charger grid bias when
385-1 actual value M ALL 84 M printing is operated. (bit 10
display <0-255> value)
385-2 C ALL 87 M 10
<0-255>
385-3 K ALL 94 M 10
<0-255>
386-0 Image Developer Y ALL 135 M Displays the developer 10
control bias DC (-) <0-255> bias when printing is
386-1 actual value M ALL 137 M operated. (bit value) 10
display <0-255>
386-2 C ALL 139 M 10
<0-255>
386-3 K ALL 146 M 10
<0-255>
388 Image Output value When the ALL 0 M Displays the output 2
control display of light <0-1023> value of image quality
image quality source is sensor when the sensor
sensor OFF light source is OFF.
389 Transfer ALL 0 M Displays the output 2
belt sur- <0-1023> value of image quality
face sensor (when there is
no test pattern) on the
transfer belt.
390-0 Highden- ALL 0 M Displays the output 10
sity pat- <0-1023> value of image quality
tern Y sensor when a high-
390-1 Highden- ALL 0 M density test pattern is 10
sity pat- <0-1023> written.
tern M The larger the value is,
390-2 Highden- ALL 0 M the smaller the toner 10
sity pat- <0-1023> amount adhered
tern C becomes.
390-3 Highden- ALL 0 M 10
sity pat- <0-1023>
tern K

2 - 52
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
391-0 Image Output value Lowden- ALL 0 M Displays the output 10
control display of sity pat- <0-1023> value of image quality
image quality tern Y sensor when a low-den-
391-1 sensor Lowden- ALL 0 M sity test pattern is writ- 10 2
sity pat- <0-1023> ten.
tern M The larger the value is,
391-2 Lowden- ALL 0 M the smaller the toner 10
sity pat- <0-1023> amount adhered
tern C becomes.
391-3 Lowden- ALL 0 M 10
sity pat- <0-1023>
tern K
392 Image Light amount adjustment ALL 0 M The LED light amount 2
control result of image quality sen- <0-255> adjustment value of this
sor sensor is the reference
value to set the
reflected light from the
belt surface.
393 Image Relative humidity display ALL 0 M Displays the relative 2
control during latest closed-loop <0-100> humidity at the latest
control performing of the
closed-loop
control.
394 Image Enforced performing of ALL - - Performs the image 6
control image quality open-loop quality open-loop con-
control trol.
395 Image Enforced performing of ALL - M Performs the image 6
control image quality closed-loop quality closedloop con-
control trol.
396 Image Image quality control initial- ALL - M Performs the image 6
control ization quality control, initialize
each control value.
398-0 Image Target value Y ALL 265 M Sets the target value of 4
control of the high <220- high image density con-
image den- 360> trol at the time of the
398-1 sity control M ALL 300 M image quality control. 4
<220-
360>
398-2 C ALL 320 M 4
<220-
360>
398-3 K ALL 370 M 4
<300-
420>
401 Laser Fine adjustment of polygo- PRT 134 M When the value 1
nal motor rotation speed <0-255> increases by “1”, the
405 (reproduction ratio adjust- PPC 135 M reproduction ratio of pri- 1
ment) <0-255> mary scanning direction
0.07%. (approx. 0.1
mm/step)
410 Laser Adjustment of primary PPC 128 M When the value 1
scanning laser writing start <0-255> increases by “1”, the
411 position PRT 120 M writing start position 1
<0-255> shifts to the front side
by approx. 0.0423 mm.

2 - 53
06/10
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
417-0 Image Color devia- K ALL 128 M When the value 4
tion correc- <118- increases by “1”, the
tion 1 138> image shifts toward the
417-1 (A3/LD) C ALL 128 M trailing edge of the 4
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
417-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
417-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
tion correc- <118- increases by “1”, the
418-1 (A3/LD) C ALL 128 M trailing edge of the 4
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
418-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
418-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
421 Drive Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 127 M When the value 1
scanning direction repro- PRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the
422 duction ratio (fine adjust- FAX 144 M reproduction ratio of 1
ment of main motor speed) <0-255> secondary scanning
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
424 Drive Fine adjustment of exit PPC/ JPN: 140 M When the value 1
motor speed PRT Others: increases by “1”, the
128 rotation becomes faster
<0-255> by approx.
425 FAX 128 M 0.05%. 1
<0-255>
426 Drive Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 153 M When the value 1
scanning direction repro- PRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the
427 duction ratio (fine adjust- FAX 128 M reproduction ratio of 1
ment of transport motor <0-255> secondary scanning
speed) direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.

2 - 54
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
430 Image Top margin adjustment PPC 26 M When the value 1
(blank area at the leading <0-255> increases by “1”, the
edge of the paper)) blank area becomes
431 Image Left margin adjustment PPC 0 M wider by approx. 1 2
(blank area at the left of the <0-255> 0.0423 mm.
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
432 Image Right margin adjustment PPC 15 M 1
(blank area at the right of <0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
433 Image Bottom margin adjustment PPC 43 M 1
(blank area at the trailing <0-255>
edge of the paper)
434-0 Image Bottom margin adjustment PPC/ EUR: 45 M 4
(blank area at the trailing PRT UC: 28
edge of the paper) JPN: 28
/Reverse side at duplexing Others:
45
<0-255>
434-1 Image Right margin adjustment PPC/ 18 M 4
(blank area at the right of PRT <0-255>
feeding direction)
/Reverse side at duplexing
435 Image Top margin adjustment PRT 24 M 1
(blank area at the leading <0-255>
edge of the paper)
436 Image Left margin adjustment PRT 0 M When the value 1
(blank area at the left of the <0-255> increases by “1”, the
paper along the paper blank area becomes
feeding direction) wider by approx.
437 Image Right margin adjustment PRT 0 M 0.0423 mm. 1
(blank area at the right of <0-255>
feeding direction)
438 Image Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 M 1
(blank area at the trailing <0-255>
edge of the paper)
439 Image Bottom margin adjustment ALL 128 M When the value 1
(blank area at the trailing <0-255> increases by “1”, the
edge of the paper along margin increases by
the paper feeding direc- approx. 0.2 mm.
tion) when paper size is not
specified at bypass feed
440 Laser Secondary Upper ALL 21 M When the value 1
scanning drawer <0-40> increases by “1”, the
441 laser writing Lower ALL 47 M image shifts toward the 1
start position drawer <0-80> trailing edge of the
442 Bypass ALL 22 M paper by approx. 1
feeding <0-40> 0.2 mm.
443 LCF ALL 20 M 1
<0-40>
444 PFP ALL 20 M 1
<0-40>
445 Duplex ALL 21 M 1
feeding <0-40>

2 - 55
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
448-0 Paper Paper aligning Long ALL 15 M When the value 4
feeding amount size <0-63> increases by “1”, the
448-1 adjustment at Middle ALL 15 M aligning amount 4
the registra- size <0-63> increases by approx.
448-2 tion section Short ALL 15 M 0.8 mm. 4
(PFP upper size 1 <0-63> <Paper length>
drawer / Plain Long size:
448-3 paper) Short ALL 15 M 330 mm or longer 4
size 2 <0-63> Middle size:
449-0 Paper Paper aligning Long ALL 15 M 220 mm to 329 mm 4
feeding amount size <0-63> Short size 1:
449-1 adjustment at Middle ALL 15 M 205 mm to 219 mm 4
the registra- size <0-63> Short size 2:
449-2 tion section Short ALL 15 M 204 mm or shorter 4
(PFP lower size 1 <0-63>
drawer / Plain
449-3 paper) Short ALL 15 M 4
size 2 <0-63>
450-0 Paper Paper aligning Long ALL 18 M 4
feeding amount size <0-63>
450-1 adjustment at Middle ALL 18 M 4
the registra- size <0-63>
450-2 tion section Short ALL 18 M 4
(Upper drawer size 1 <0-63>
/ Plain paper)
450-3 Short ALL 18 M 4
size 2 <0-63>
(Lower drawer size 1 <0-63> <Paper length>
/ Plain paper) Long size:
452-3 Short ALL 15 M 330 mm or longer 4
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 2:
204 mm or shorter

2 - 56
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
the registra- size <0-63> increases by approx. 2
(Duplex feed- size <0-63> <Paper length>
ing / Plain Long size:
paper) 330 mm or longer
457 Paper Paper aligning amount ALL 15 M Middle size: 1
feeding adjustment at the registra- <0-63> 220 mm to 329 mm
tion section (LCF / Plain Short size:
paper) 219 mm or shorter
458-0 Paper Paper aligning Long ALL 14 M * Postcard is sup- 4
feeding amount size <0-63> ported only for JPN
adjustment at Middle model.
458-1 ALL 14 M 4
(Bypass feed- size <0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
ing/Thick
paper 1)
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ing/Thick
462-3 paper 3) Post ALL 16 M 4
card <0-63>
ing/OHP film)

2 - 57
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
466-0 Paper Adjustment of Plain ALL 143 M When the value 4
feeding paper push- paper <0-255> increases by “1”, the
466-1 ing amount / Post card ALL 170 M driving speed of bypass 4
Bypass feed- <0-255> feed roller increases by
466-4 ing Thick ALL 143 M approx. 2 ms when the 4
paper 1 <0-255> paper transport is
started from the regis-
466-5 Thick ALL 143 M tration section. 4
paper 2 <0-255> * Post card is sup-
466-6 Thick ALL 143 M ported only for JPN 4
paper 3 <0-255> model.
<0-255>
467 Paper Adjustment of paper push- ALL 128 M When the value 1
feeding ing amount/Duplex feed- <0-255> increases by “1”, the
ing (short size) driving speed of ADU
transport roller
2 ms when the paper
transport is started from
the registration section.
468-0 Finisher Fine adjust- A4-R ALL 0 M When the value 4
ment of bind- /LT-R <-14-14> increases by “1”, the
468-1 ing position/ B4 ALL 0 M binding/folding position 4
folding posi- <-14-14> shifts toward the right
468-2 tion A3/LD ALL 0 M page by 0.25 mm. 4
<-14-14>
feeding amount size <0-63> increases by "1", the
(Upper drawer size 1 <0-63> <Paper length>
/ Thick paper Long size:
469-3 1) Short ALL 18 M 330 mm or longer 4
470-1 adjustment at Middle ALL 15 M 205 mm to 219 mm 4
the registra- size <0-63> Short size 2:
470-2 tion section Short ALL 15 M 204 mm or shorter 4
(Lower drawer size 1 <0-63>
/ Thick
470-3 paper 1) Short ALL 15 M 4
size 2 <0-63>
(PFP upper size 1 <0-63>
drawer / Thick
471-3 paper 1) Short ALL 15 M 4
size 2 <0-63>

2 - 58
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
feeding amount size <0-63> increases by "1", the
the registra- size <0-63> increases by approx. 2
(PFP lower size 1 <0-63> <Paper length>
drawer / Thick Long size:
472-3 paper 1) Short ALL 15 M 330 mm or longer 4
473 Paper Paper aligning amount ALL 15 M 220 mm to 329 mm 1
feeding adjustment at the registra- <0-63> Short size:
tion section (LCF / Thick 219 mm or shorter
paper 1) Short size 1:
474-1 adjustment at Middle ALL 8 M 204 mm or shorter 4
the registra- size <0-63> * Post card is sup-
474-2 tion section Short ALL 12 M ported only for JPN 4
(ADU / Thick size <0-63> model.
paper 1)
475-0 Paper Paper aligning Thick ALL 28 M 4
feeding amount paper 2 <0-63>
adjustment at Long size
475-1 the registra- Thick ALL 28 M 4
tion section paper 2 <0-63>
(Bypass feed- Middle
ing) size
475-2 Thick ALL 28 M 4
paper 2 <0-63>
Short size
paper 3 <0-63>
Long size
paper 3 <0-63>
Middle
size
paper 3 <0-63>
Short size
Long size <0-63>
Middle <0-63>
size
Short size <0-63>
475-9 Post card ALL 28 M 4
<0-63>

2 - 59
06/10
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
494 Laser Secondary When ALL 135 M When the value 1
scanning data decelerat- <0-255> increases by “1”, the
laser writing ing to 1/2 image shifts by approx.
495 start position When ALL 135 M 0.2 mm toward the 1
decelerat- <0-255> trailing edge of the
ing to 1/3 paper.
496 When ALL 140 M 1
decelerat- <0-255>
ing to 1/4
497-0 Laser Adjustment of Upper ALL 128 M When the value 4
drawer side- drawer <0-255> increases by “1”, the
497-1 ways devia- Lower ALL 128 M image shifts toward the 4
tion drawer <0-255> front side by 0.0423
497-2 PFP upper ALL 128 M mm. 4
drawer <0-255>
497-3 PFP lower ALL 128 M 4
drawer <0-255>
497-4 LCF ALL 128 M 4
<0-255>
497-5 Bypass ALL 128 M 4
feeding <0-255>
498-0 Laser Adjustment of Long size ALL 131 M When the value 4
duplex feed- <0-255> increases by “1”, the
498-1 ing sideways Short size ALL 131 M image shifts toward the 4
deviation (A4/LT or <0-255> front side by 0.0423
smaller) mm.
499 Develop- Black developer unit lift up/ ALL 2 M Change the lift up/down 1
ment down timing adjustment <0-255> timing of the black
developer unit when a
CEB0 error occurs.
(Chap. 3.11.3)
501 Image Density Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
adjustment (black) <0-255> increases, the image of
503 Fine adjust- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS the center step density 1
ment of “man- (black) <0-255> becomes darker.
504 ual density” Text PPC 128 SYS 1
/Center value (black) <0-255>
505 Image Density Text/Photo PPC 20 SYS Sets the changing 1
adjustment (black) <0-255> amount by 1 step at the
506 Fine adjust- Photo PPC 20 SYS density adjustment. 1
ment of “man- (black) <0-255> When the value
507 ual density” Text PPC 20 SYS increases, the image of 1
/Light step (black) <0-255> the “light” steps
value becomes lighter.
509 Fine adjust- Photo PPC 20 SYS density adjustment. 1
ment of “man- (black) <0-255> When the value
510 ual density” Text PPC 20 SYS increases, the image of 1
/Dark step (black) <0-255> the “dark” steps
value becomes darker.

2 - 60
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
512 Image Density Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
adjustment (black) <0-255> increases, the image
514 Fine adjust- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
ment of “auto- (black) <0-255> 2
515 matic density” Text PPC 128 SYS 1
(black) <0-255>
532 Image Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 SYS When the value 1
tion Back- (black) <0-255> increases, the back-
533 ground peak Photo PPC 16 SYS ground of the image 1
adjustment (black) <0-255> (low density area)
534 Text PPC 40 SYS becomes harder to be 1
(black) <0-255> printed out.
570 Image Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 22 SYS Sets whether the values 1
tion on origi- (black) <11-14, of the background peak
nal manually 21-24, and text peak are fixed
set on the 31-34, or not. One’s place is
original glass 41-44> an adjustment for “auto-
571 Photo PPC 12 SYS matic density” and ten’s 1
(black) <11-14, place is for “manual
21-24, density”. Once they are
31-34, fixed, the range correc-
41-44> tion is performed with
572 Text PPC 22 SYS standard values. The 1
(black) <11-14, values of the back-
21-24, ground peak and text
31-34, peak affect the repro-
41-44> duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
580 Image Automatic gamma adjust- PPC - - Adjusts the gradation 7
ment (black) reproduction automati-
cally.

2 - 61
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
590-0 Image Adjustment of L PPC 128 SYS When the value 4
gamma bal- (black) <0-255> increases, the density
590-1 ance (Text/ M PPC 128 SYS in the target area 4
Photo) (black) <0-255> becomes higher.
590-2 H PPC 128 SYS L : Low density area 4
(black) <0-255> M : Medium density
area
591-0 Image Adjustment of L PPC 128 SYS H : High density area 4
gamma bal- (black) <0-255>
591-1 ance (Text) M PPC 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
591-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
592-0 Image Adjustment of L PPC 128 SYS 4
592-1 ance (Photo) M PPC 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
592-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
596-0 Image Adjustment of L PRT 128 SYS 4
596-1 ance (PS/ M PRT 128 SYS 4
Smooth) (black) <0-255>
596-2 H PRT 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
597-0 Image Adjustment of L PRT 128 SYS When the value 4
597-1 ance M PRT 128 SYS in the target area 4
(PS/Detail) (black) <0-255> becomes higher.
597-2 H PRT 128 SYS L: Low density area 4
(black) <0-255> M: Medium density
area
598-0 Image Adjustment of L PRT 128 SYS H : High density area 4
598-1 ance M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/Smooth) (black) <0-255>
598-2 H PRT 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
599-0 Image Adjustment of L PRT 128 SYS 4
599-1 ance M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/Detail) (black) <0-255>
599-2 H PRT 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
600 Image Background Text/Photo PPC 5 SYS When the value 1
adjustment (black) <1-9> decreases, the back-
601 Text PPC 5 SYS ground becomes 1
(black) <1-9> darker. When the value
602 Photo PPC 5 SYS increases, the back- 1
(black) <1-9> ground becomes
lighter.

2 - 62
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
604 Image Sharpness Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS When the value 1
becomes sharper.
When the value 2
605 Text PPC 0 SYS decreases, the image 1
(black) <0-31> becomes softer.
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
606 Photo PPC 0 SYS becomes. 1
(black) <0-31> * The default value 0
is equivalent to 16
(center value).
648 Image Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC 30 SYS Adjustment of the 1
smudged/faint (black) <0-255> smudged/faint text.
text With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is sup-
pressed.
654 Image Adjustment of PS PRT 5 SYS When the value 1
smudged/faint (black) <0-9> decreases, the width of
655 text PCL PRT 5 SYS text becomes wider. 1
(black) <0-9>
663 Image Dot size adjustment in PRT 255 SYS Adjusts the dot size of 1
black printing (black) <0-255> primary scanning direc-
tion in black printing.
is, the dot becomes
smaller.
664 Image Upper limit in PS PRT 176 SYS When the value 1
toner saving (black) <0-255> decreases, the printing
665 mode PCL PRT 176 SYS density becomes 1
(black) <0-255> lighter.
667-0 Image Setting beam Beam PPC 0 M Sets the beam level for 4
level conver- level 0/4 (black) <0-255> 4 divided smoothing.
667-1 sion Beam PPC 63 M The primary scanning 4
level 1/4 (black) <0-255> direction is divided into
667-2 Beam PPC 127 M 4 and the dot width is 4
level 2/4 (black) <0-255> set at the 5 levels (incl.
level “0”). The smaller
667-3 Beam PPC 191 M the value is, the smaller 4
level 3/4 (black) <0-255> the primary scanning
667-4 Beam PPC 255 M direction of the dot 4
level 4/4 (black) <0-255> becomes.

2 - 63
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
693 Image Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 22 SYS Sets whether the values 1
nal set on the 21-24, and text peak are fixed
RADF 31-34, or not. One’s place is
41-44> an adjustment for “auto-
matic density” and ten’s
place is for “manual
density”. Once they are
694 Photo PPC 12 SYS fixed, the range correc- 1
(black) <11-14, tion is performed with
21-24, standard values.
31-34, The values of the back-
41-44> ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
695 Text PPC 22 SYS ground density and text 1
(black) <11-14, density respectively.
21-24, 1: fixed/fixed
31-34, 2: varied/fixed
41-44> 3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
700 Image Adjustment of Center FAX 125 SYS When the value 1
binarized value (black) <0-255> increases, the image of
threshold center value density
(Text) becomes darker.
701 Light step FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing 1
value (black) <0-255> amount by 1 step at the
density adjustment.
When the value
increases, the image of
“light” side becomes
lighter.
702 Dark step FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing 1
value (black) <0-255> amount by 1 step at the
density adjustment.
710 Image Density Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value 1
“manual den- the center step density
714 sity” fine Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
adjustment/ (black) <0-255>
Center value
715 Image Density Photo FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing 1
“manual den- density adjustment.
719 sity” fine Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS When the value 1
adjustment/ (black) <0-255> increases, the image of
Light step the “light” steps
720 Image Density Photo FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing 1
724 “manual den- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS density adjustment. 1
sity” fine (black) <0-255> When the value
adjustment/ increases, the image of
Dark step the “dark” steps

2 - 64
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
725 Image Density Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value 1
729 “automatic Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
density” fine (black) <0-255> 2
adjustment
825 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the values 1
nal manually 21-24, and text peak are fixed
set on the 31-34, or not. One’s place is
original glass 41-44> an adjustment for “auto-
826 Text SCN 12 SYS matic density” and ten’s 1
827 Photo SCN 12 SYS standard values. The 1
(black) <11-14, values of the back-
828 Gray scale SCN 12 SYS density respectively. 1
(black) <11-14, 1: fixed/fixed
31-34, 3: fixed/varied
41-44> 4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
830 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the values 1
nal set on the 21-24, and text peak are fixed
RADF 31-34, or not. One’s place is
41-44> an adjustment for “auto-
831 Text SCN 12 SYS matic density” and ten’s 1
832 Photo SCN 12 SYS standard values. 1
(black) <11-14, The values of the back-
833 Gray scale SCN 12 SYS density respectively. 1
(black) <11-14, 1: fixed/fixed
31-34, 3: fixed/varied
41-44> 4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
835 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 56 SYS When the value 1
tion Back- (black) <0-255> increases, the back-
836 ground peak Text SCN 48 SYS ground of the image 1
adjustment (black) <0-255> (low density area)
837 Photo SCN 16 SYS becomes harder to be 1
(black) <0-255> printed out.
838 Gray scale SCN 32 SYS 1
(black) <0-255>

2 - 65
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
840 Image Sharpness Text/Photo SCN 0 SYS When the value 1
becomes sharper.
841 Text SCN 0 SYS When the value 1
(black) <0-31> decreases, the image
becomes softer.
842 Photo SCN 0 SYS The smaller the value 1
(black) <0-31> is, the less the moire
becomes.
* The default value 0
843 Gray scale SCN 0 SYS is equivalent to 16 1
(black) <0-31> (center value).
845 Image Density Text/Photo SCN 128 SYS When the value 1
846 “manual den- Text SCN 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
sity” fine (black) <0-255>
847 adjustment/ Photo SCN 128 SYS 1
Center value (black) <0-255>
848 Image Fine adjustment of back- SCN 128 SYS When the value 1
ground / Center value (black) <0-255> increases, the back-
ground becomes
darker.
851 “manual den- Text SCN 20 SYS the “light” steps 1
sity” fine (black) <0-255> becomes lighter.
Light step (black) <0-255>
value
853 Image Fine adjustment of back- SCN 50 SYS Sets the changing 1
ground / Light step value (black) <0-255> amount by 1 step at
(Image smoothing) background adjust-
ment. When the value
increases, the back-
ground of the “light”
steps becomes lighter.
856 “manual den- Text SCN 20 SYS the “dark” steps 1
sity” fine (black) <0-255> becomes darker.
Dark step (black) <0-255>
value
858 Image Fine adjustment of back- SCN 50 SYS Sets the changing 1
ground / Dark step value (black) <0-255> amount by 1 step at
(Image smoothing) background adjust-
ment. When the value
increases, the back-
ground of the “dark”
steps becomes darker.
861 “automatic Text SCN 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
density” fine (black) <0-255>
862 adjustment Photo SCN 128 SYS 1
(black) <0-255>

2 - 66
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
880-0 Image Adjustment of L SCN 128 SYS When the value 4
880-1 ance (Text/ M SCN 128 SYS in the target area 4
Photo) (black) <0-255> becomes higher. 2
880-2 H SCN 128 SYS L: Low density area 4
(black) <0-255> M: Medium density area
H: High density area
881-0 Image Adjustment of L SCN 128 SYS 4
881-1 ance (Text) M SCN 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
881-2 H SCN 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
882-1 ance (Photo) M SCN 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
882-2 H SCN 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
883-1 ance (Gray M SCN 128 SYS 4
scale) (black) <0-255>
883-2 H SCN 128 SYS 4
(black) <0-255>
884 Image Reproduction ratio fine SCN 128 SYS When the value 1
adjustment of primary (black) <0-255> increases by “1”, the
scanning direction reproduction ratio of pri-
mary scanning direction
0.1%.
Effective with the reso-
lution other than 600
dpi.
tion correc- <118- increases by "1", the
953-1 (A4/LT) C ALL 128 M trailing edge of the 4
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
953-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
953-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>

2 - 67
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
954-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
954-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
955-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
955-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
<118- paper by 0.0423 mm.
138>
956-2 M ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
956-3 Y ALL 128 M 4
<118-
138>
976 Mainte- Equipment number (serial ALL - SYS When this adjustment is 1
nance number) display performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also per-
formed automatically.
(10 digits)
1000 Image Automatic PS/ PRT - SYS Adjusts the gradation 7
gamma 600x600 (color) reproduction for each
adjustment dpi color, Y, M, C and K.
1001 PS/ PRT - SYS 7
1200x600 (color)
dpi
1002 PCL/ PRT - SYS 7
600x600 (color)
dpi
1003 PCL/ PRT - SYS 7
1200x600 (color)
dpi

2 - 68
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1010-0 Image Color bal- L PRT 128 SYS The target color, mode 4
ance adjust- (color) <0-255> and density area
1010-1 ment for “Y” M PRT 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255> value increases. 2
1010-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS L: Low density area 4
Smooth) (color) <0-255> M: Medium density
area
1011-0 Image Color bal- L PRT 128 SYS H: High density area 4
ance adjust- (color) <0-255>
1011-1 ment for “M” M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1011-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
Smooth) (color) <0-255>
1012-0 Image Color bal- L PRT 128 SYS 4
1012-1 ment for “C” M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1012-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
1013-1 ment for “K” M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1013-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
1014-1 ment for “Y” M PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1014-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
Detail) (color) <0-255>
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1015-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1016-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1017-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1018-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4

2 - 69
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1019-1 ment for “M” M PRT 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255> value increases.
area
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1020-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1021-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1022-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1023-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1024-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PS/ (color) <0-255>
1025-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1026-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1027-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4

2 - 70
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1028-1 ment for “C” M PRT 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255> value increases. 2
area
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1029-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1030-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1031-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1032-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1033-2 600x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1034-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1035-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1036-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4

2 - 71
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1037-1 ment for “K” M PRT 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255> value increases.
area
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1038-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1039-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1040-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
(PCL/ (color) <0-255>
1041-2 1200x600dpi/ H PRT 128 SYS 4
1046-0 Image Adjustment of PS PRT 255 SYS When the value 4
maximum (color) <0-255> decreases, the image
1046-1 toner amount PCL PRT 255 SYS becomes lighter. 4
(Plain paper) (color) <0-255> Note:
Note:
1047-0 Image Adjustment of PS PRT 255 SYS When the value 4
maximum (color) <0-255> increases, the
1047-1 toner amount PCL PRT 255 SYS image offsetting 4
(Thick paper (color) <0-255> may occur.
1)
1048-0 Image Adjustment of PS PRT 255 SYS 4
maximum (color) <0-255>
1048-1 toner amount PCL PRT 255 SYS 4
(Thick paper (color) <0-255>
2)
(Thick paper (color) <0-255>
3)
(OHP film) (color) <0-255>

2 - 72
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1055 Image Upper limit in toner saving PRT 176 SYS When the value 1
mode (color) <0-255> decreases, the printing
1056 PRT 176 SYS density becomes 1
(color) <0-255> lighter. 2
1057 PRT 176 SYS 1
(color) <0-255>
1058 PRT 176 SYS 1
(color) <0-255>
1060 Image Reproduction ratio fine SCN 128 SYS When the value 1
adjustment of primary (color) <0-255> increases by “1”, the
scanning direction reproduction ratio of pri-
mary scanning direction
0.1%.
Effective with the reso-
lution other than 600
dpi.
1065 Image Judgment threshold for SCN 70 SYS When the value 1
ACS (color) <0-255> increases, originals
1066 Image Judgment threshold for SCN 70 SYS tend to be judged as 1
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255> monochrome, and
RADF when the value
decreases, they tend to
be judged as color in
autocolor mode.
1070 Image Fine adjust- Text SCN 0 SYS Adjusts the level of 1
ment of back- (color) <0-50> background. When the
1071 ground Printed SCN 0 SYS value increases, the 1
image (color) <0-50> background becomes
1072 Photo SCN 0 SYS more brightened. 1
(color) <0-50>
1075 Image Fine adjust- Text SCN 0 SYS Adjusts the black den- 1
ment of black (color) <0-4> sity of the scanned
1076 density Printed SCN 0 SYS image. When the value 1
image (color) <0-4> increases, the black
1077 Photo SCN 0 SYS density becomes 1
(color) <0-4> darker.
1080 Image RGB conver- Text SCN 0 SYS Sets the color space 1
sion method (color) <0-3> format of the output
1081 selection Printed SCN 0 SYS image. 1
image (color) <0-3> 0: sRGB
1082 Photo SCN 0 SYS 1: AppleRGB 1
(color) <0-3> 2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
1086 Image Sharpness Text SCN 0 SYS When the value 1
adjustment (color) <0-31> increases, the image
1087 Printed SCN 0 SYS becomes sharper. 1
image (color) <0-31> When the value
1088 Photo SCN 0 SYS decreases, the image 1
(color) <0-31> becomes softer.
is, the less the moire
becomes.
is equivalent to 16
(center value).

2 - 73
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1550 Image Density Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
1551 “manual den- Text PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
sity” fine (color) <0-255>
1552 adjustment/ Printed PPC 128 SYS 1
Center value image (color) <0-255>
1553 Photo PPC 128 SYS 1
(color) <0-255>
1554 Map PPC 128 SYS 1
(color) <0-255>
adjustment (color) <0-255> amount by 1 step at the
1561 “manual den- Text PPC 20 SYS density adjustment. 1
sity” fine (color) <0-255> When the value
1562 adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 SYS increases, the image of 1
Dark step image (color) <0-255> the “dark” steps
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
adjustment (color) <0-255> amount by 1 step at the
1571 “manual den- Text PPC 20 SYS density adjustment. 1
sity” fine (color) <0-255> When the value
1572 adjustment/ Printed PPC 20 SYS increases, the image of 1
Light step image (color) <0-255> the “light” steps
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1580 Image Density Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
1581 “automatic Text PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
density” fine (color) <0-255>
1582 adjustment Printed PPC 128 SYS 1
image (color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1612 Image Adjustment of Plain PPC 255 SYS When the value 1
maximum paper (color) <0-255> decreases, the image
1613 toner amount Thick PPC 249 SYS becomes lighter. 1
paper 1 (color) <0-255> Note:
Note:
1614 Thick PPC 237 SYS When the value 1
paper 2 (color) <0-255> increases,
1615 Thick PPC 237 SYS image offsetting 1
paper 3 (color) <0-255> may occur.
1616 OHP film PPC 249 SYS 1
(color) <0-255>

2 - 74
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1630 Image Maximum text Y PPC 5 SYS When the value 1
density (color) <0-10> increases by “1”, the
1631 adjustment M PPC 5 SYS maximum text density 1
(color) <0-10> of each color becomes 2
1632 C PPC 5 SYS darker. 1
(color) <0-10>
1633 K PPC 5 SYS 1
(color) <0-10>
1642 Image Automatic Color/ PPC - SYS Automatic adjustment 7
gamma Black of gradation reproduc-
adjustment tion in the Full Color
Mode (each color of Y,
M, C and K) and Black
Mode.
1643 Color PPC - SYS Automatic adjustment 7
of gradation reproduc-
tion in the Full Color
Mode (each color of Y,
M, C and K).
1675 Image Judgment threshold for PPC 70 SYS When the value 1
ACS (color) <0-255> increases, originals
tend to be judged as
black, and when the
1676 Image Judgment threshold for PPC 70 SYS value decreases, they 1
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255> tend to be judged as
RADF color in auto-color
mode.
1688 Image Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
setting adjust- (color) <0-255> increases, the back-
1689 ment for Text PPC 128 SYS ground becomes 1
background (color) <0-255> darker.
1690 processing Printed PPC 128 SYS 1
(background image (color) <0-255>
density)
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1693 Image Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
setting adjust- (color) <0-255> increases, the text
1694 ment for Text PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
background (color) <0-255>
(text density) image (color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>

2 - 75
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1698 Image Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
ting adjust- (color) <0-255> increases, the back-
1699 ment for Text PPC 128 SYS ground becomes 1
background (color) <0-255> darker.
(background image (color) <0-255>
density)
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1708 Image Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value 1
ting adjust- (color) <0-255> increases, the text
1709 ment for Text PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. 1
background (color) <0-255>
(text density) image (color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1725 Image Text/Photo reproduction PPC 0 SYS 0: Default 1
level adjustment (color) <0-5> 1: Photo oriented 2
(The printed image
reproduction level
higher than that of
the Photo oriented
1)
2: Photo oriented 1
(The printed image
reproduction level
higher than that of
the Default)
3: Equivalent to the
Default
4: Text oriented 1 (The
text reproduction
level higher than
that of the Default)
5: Text oriented 2 (The
text reproduction
level higher than
that of the Text ori-
ented 1)
1737 Image Sharpness Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS When the value 1
adjustment / (color) <0-31> increases, the image
1738 Full Color Text PPC 0 SYS becomes sharper. 1
Mode (color) <0-31> When the value
1739 Printed PPC 0 SYS decreases, the image 1
image (color) <0-31> becomes softer.
1740 Photo PPC 0 SYS is, the less the moire 1
(color) <0-31> becomes.
1741 Map PPC 0 SYS * The default value 0 1
(color) <0-31> is equivalent to 16
(center value).

2 - 76
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1757 Image Sharpness adjustment / PPC EUR: 0 SYS When the value 1
Auto Color Mode (Text/ (color) UC: 0 increases, the image
Photo) JAPN: 22 becomes sharper.
<0-31> When the value 2
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
is equivalent to
16(center value).
1761 Image Black reproduction switch- PPC 0 SYS 0: Default 1
ing (color) <0-1> 1: Black reproduction
oriented
1769 Image Setting for Vivid PPC 0 SYS Sets the reproduction 1
highlighter (color) <0-2> mode for highlighter for
1770 Clear PPC 0 SYS four types of one touch 1
(color) <0-2> adjustment.
1771 Warm PPC 0 SYS 0: Default 1
(color) <0-2> 1: Highlighter 1
2: Highlighter 2
1772 Cool PPC 0 SYS 1
(color) <0-2>
1779-0 Image Color bal- L PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode 4
1779-1 ment for “Y” M PPC 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(Text/Photo) (color) <0-255> value increases.
1779-2 H PPC 128 SYS L: Low density area 4
(color) <0-255> M: Medium density
area
1780-0 Image Color bal- L PPC 128 SYS H: High density area 4
1780-1 ment for “Y” M PPC 128 SYS 4
(Text) (color) <0-255>
1780-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
1781-0 Image Color bal- L PPC 128 SYS 4
(Printed (color) <0-255>
1781-2 image) H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(Photo) (color) <0-255>
1782-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(Map) (color) <0-255>
1783-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>

2 - 77
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1784-1 ment for “M” M PPC 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(Text/Photo) (color) <0-255> value increases.
area
1785-1 ment for “M” M PPC 128 SYS 4
1785-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1787-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(Map) (color) <0-255>
1788-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
1789-1 ment for “C” M PPC 128 SYS 4
(Text/Photo) (color) <0-255>
1789-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
1790-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1792-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>

2 - 78
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1793-1 ment for “C” M PPC 128 SYS become darker as the 4
(Map) (color) <0-255> value increases. 2
area
1794-1 ment for “K” M PPC 128 SYS 4
(Text/Photo) (color) <0-255>
1794-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
1795-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(color) <0-255>
1797-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
(Map) (color) <0-255>
1798-2 H PPC 128 SYS 4
(color) <0-255>
1800-0 Image Upper limit Y ALL 650 M Sets the upper limit 4
control value of con- <0-999> value of the contrast
1800-1 trast voltage M ALL 650 M voltage at the image 4
<0-999> quality control. (Unit: V)
1800-2 C ALL 650 M 4
<0-999>
1800-3 K ALL 600 M 4
<0-999>
1801-0 Image Lower limit Y ALL 120 M Sets the lower limit 4
control value of con- <0-999> value of the contrast
1801-1 trast voltage M ALL 120 M voltage at the image 4
<0-999> quality control. (Unit: V)
1801-2 C ALL 120 M 4
<0-999>
1801-3 K ALL 120 M 4
<0-999>

2 - 79
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1802-0 Image Upper limit Y ALL 800 M Sets the upper limit 4
control value of laser <0-999> value of the laser power
1802-1 power M ALL 800 M at the image quality 4
<0-999> control. (Unit: µW)
1802-2 C ALL 800 M 4
<0-999>
1802-3 K ALL 800 M 4
<0-999>
1803-0 Image Lower limit Y ALL 350 M Sets the lower limit 4
control value of laser <0-999> value of the laser power
1803-1 power M ALL 350 M at the image quality 4
<0-999> control. (Unit: µW)
1803-2 C ALL 350 M 4
<0-999>
1803-3 K ALL 350 M 4
<0-999>
1804-0 Image Background Y ALL 125 M Displays the back- 10
control voltage actual <0-999> ground voltage when
1804-1 value display M ALL 125 M printing is operated. 10
<0-999> (Unit: V)
1804-2 C ALL 125 M 10
<0-999>
1804-3 K ALL 125 M 10
<0-999>
1805-0 Image Drum surface Y ALL 979 M Displays the slope fac- 10
control potential char- <0-999> tor of the approximate
1805-1 acteristic/ M ALL 979 M expression of the drum 10
slope factor <0-999> surface potential to the
1805-2 display C ALL 979 M main charger grid volt- 10
<0-999> age at the open-loop
control.
1805-3 K ALL 990 M 10
<0-999>
1806-0 Image Drum surface Y ALL -6 M Displays the offset fac- 10
control potential char- <-999- tor of the approximate
acteristic/off- 999> expression of the drum
1806-1 set factor M ALL -6 M surface potential to the 10
display <-999- main charger grid volt-
999> age at the open-loop
1806-2 C ALL -6 M control. 10
<-999-
999>
1806-3 K ALL -4 M 10
<-999-
999>
1807-0 Image Drum expo- Y ALL 58 M Displays the slope fac- 10
control sure voltage <0-999> tor of the approximate
1807-1 characteristic/ M ALL 58 M expression of the drum 10
slope factor <0-999> exposure voltage to the
1807-2 display (main C ALL 58 M main charger grid volt- 10
charger grid <0-999> age at the open-loop
low voltage control.
1807-3 area) K ALL 60 M 10
<0-999>

2 - 80
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1808-0 Image Drum expo- Y ALL 35 M Displays the offset fac- 10
control sure voltage <-999- tor of the approximate
characteristic/ 999> expression of the drum
1808-1 offset factor M ALL 35 M exposure voltage to the 10 2
display (main <-999- main charger grid volt-
charger grid 999> age at the open-loop
1808-2 low voltage C ALL 35 M control. 10
area) <-999-
999>
1808-3 K ALL 42 M 10
<-999-
999>
1809-0 Image Drum expo- Y ALL 49 M Displays the slope fac- 10
control sure voltage <0-999> tor of the approximate
1809-1 characteristic/ M ALL 49 M expression of the drum 10
slope factor <0-999> exposure voltage to the
1809-2 display (main C ALL 49 M main charger grid volt- 10
charger grid <0-999> age at the open-loop
high voltage control.
1809-3 area) K ALL 53 M 10
<0-999>
1810-0 Image Drum expo- Y ALL 41 M Displays the offset fac- 10
control sure voltage <-999- tor of the approximate
characteristic/ 999> expression of the drum
1810-1 offset factor M ALL 41 M exposure voltage to the 10
display (main <-999- main charger grid volt-
charger grid 999> age at the open-loop
1810-2 high voltage C ALL 41 M control. 10
area) <-999-
999>
1810-3 K ALL 47 M 10
<-999-
999>
1811-0 Image Contrast volt- Y ALL 500 M Displays the upper limit 10
control age/upper <0-999> value of the contrast
1811-1 limit actual M ALL 500 M voltage when printing is 10
value display <0-999> operated. (Unit: V)
1811-2 C ALL 500 M 10
<0-999>
1811-3 K ALL 600 M 10
<0-999>
1812-0 Image Contrast volt- Y ALL 120 M Displays the lower limit 10
control age/lower limit <0-999> value of the contrast
1812-1 actual value M ALL 120 M voltage when printing is 10
display <0-999> operated. (Unit: V)
1812-2 C ALL 120 M 10
<0-999>
1812-3 K ALL 120 M 10
<0-999>

2 - 81
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1813-0 Image Display of Y ALL 170 M Displays the upper limit 10
control background <0-999> value of the background
1813-1 voltage/upper M ALL 170 M voltage when printing is 10
limit actual <0-999> operated. (Unit: V)
1813-2 value C ALL 170 M 10
<0-999>
1813-3 K ALL 170 M 10
<0-999>
1814-0 Image Background Y ALL 80 M Displays the lower limit 10
control voltage/lower <0-999> value of the background
1814-1 limit actual M ALL 80 M voltage when printing is 10
value display <0-999> operated. (Unit: V)
1814-2 C ALL 80 M 10
<0-999>
1814-3 K ALL 80 M 10
<0-999>
1815-0 Image Contrast volt- Y ALL 0 M Displays the actual 10
control age/correc- <0-255> number of time the con-
1815-1 tion number of M ALL 0 M trast voltage has been 10
time display <0-255> corrected at the closed-
1815-2 C ALL 0 M loop control. 10
<0-255>
1815-3 K ALL 0 M 10
<0-255>
1816-0 Image Laser power Y ALL 0 M Displays the actual 10
control correction/ <0-255> number of time the
1816-1 number of M ALL 0 M laser power has been 10
time display <0-255> corrected at the closed-
1816-2 C ALL 0 M loop control. 10
<0-255>
1816-3 K ALL 0 M 10
<0-255>
1817 Image Laser power actual value PPC 92 M Displays the laser 2
control display (black) <0-255> power value when
copying in the Black
Mode. (Bit value)
1819 Image Laser power correcting fac- PPC 100 M Perform the correction 1
control tor (black) <100- of the setting 05-1817.
255> (Unit: %)
1820 Image Laser power actual value PRT 92 M Displays the laser 2
control display (black) <0-255> power value when print-
ing in the Black Mode.
(Bit value)
1821 Image Laser power correcting fac- PRT 100 M Perform the correction 1
control tor (black) <100- of the setting 05-1820.
255> (Unit: %)

2 - 82
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1822-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Plain ALL 92 M Corrects the 2nd trans- 14
roller bias cor- paper <0-255> fer roller bias output of
1822-1 rection of trail- Thick ALL 88 M the trailing edge of 14
ing edge of paper 1 <0-255> paper (05-227, 229, 2
1822-2 paper Thick ALL 90 M 230, 231 and 232). 14
paper 2 <0-255> Correction factor: %
1822-3 Thick ALL 90 M 14
paper 3 <0-255>
<0-255>
1823-0 Transfer Display of Single ALL 162 M Displays the value of 10
intermediate side (black) <0-255> 2nd transfer roller bias
1823-1 level of 2nd Reverse ALL 139 M when the actual printing 10
transfer roller side at (black) <0-255> is operated.
bias actual duplexing (The value corrected in
1823-2 value of trail- Single ALL 150 M 05-1822 is displayed.) 10
ing edge of side (color) <0-255>
paper
1823-3 (Plain paper) Reverse ALL 133 M 10
duplexing
1825-0 Transfer Display of Single ALL 149 M 10
intermediate side (black) <0-255>
1825-1 level of 2nd Reverse ALL 127 M 10
transfe rroller side at (black) <0-255>
bias actual duplexing
1825-2 value of trail- Single ALL 133 M 10
ing edge of side (color) <0-255>
paper
1825-3 (Thick paper Reverse ALL 121 M 10
1) side at (color) <0-255>
duplexing
1826-0 Transfer Display of intermediate ALL 157 M 10
level of 2nd transfer roller (black) <0-255>
1826-1 bias actual value of trailing ALL 154 M 10
edge of paper (color) <0-255>
(Thick paper 2)
edge of paper (color) <0-255>
(Thick paper 3)
edge of paper (OHP film) (color) <0-255>
1829-0 Transfer 1st transfer Thick ALL 80 M Corrects the 1st trans- 14
roller bias cor- paper 2 <0-100> fer roller bias output.
1829-1 rection at Thick ALL 80 M Correction factor: % 14
deceleration paper 3 <0-100>
<0-100>

2 - 83
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1831 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 187 M Displays the value of 2
actual value display at (black) <0-255> 1st transfer roller bias
deceleration at deceleration when
(Thick paper 2) the actual printing is
1832 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 187 M operated. 2
actual value display at (black) <0-255> (The value corrected in
deceleration 05-1829 is displayed.)
(Thick paper 3)
1833 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 187 M 2
actual value display at (black) <0-255>
deceleration
(OHP film)
1836 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 178 M Displays the actual 2
actual value display in low- (color) <0-255> value of the 1st transfer
speed color printing roller bias when the
(Plain paper / Thick paper transfers of all colors (Y,
1) M, C and K) have fin-
ished.
This adjustment is valid
only when the value of
the code 08-497 is “1”
(6 pages/minute).
1839-0 Transfer 2nd transfer Intermedi- ALL 100 M Corrects the 2nd trans- 14
roller bias cor- ate level <0-100> fer roller bias output of
rection of bias of leading/trailing edge of
leading/trail- trailing paper (05-1840).
ing edge of edge (Correcting factor: %)
1839-1 paper Bias of ALL 90 M 14
(Tab paper) leading/ <0-100>
trailing
edge
1840-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias ALL 153 M As the value decreases, 14
output adjustment (black) <0-187> the 2nd transfer roller
(Tab paper) bias output increases
correspondingly.
1840-1 ALL 150 M The adjustment value 14
(color) <0-187> becomes effective
(08-544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
1841-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias ALL 5 M Sets the offset amount 4
offsetting adjustment (black) <0-10> of 2nd transfer roller
(Tab paper) bias.
0: -500V 1: -400V
1841-1 ALL 5 M 2: -300V 3: -200V 4
(color) <0-10> 4: -100V 5: 0V
6: +100V 7: +200V
8: +300V 9: +400V
10: +500V

2 - 84
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1842-0 Transfer Actual value Intermedi- ALL 153 M Displays the value of 10
display of 2nd ate level (black) <0-225> 2nd transfer roller bias
transfer roller bias of on the leading/trailing
bias trailing edge of paper when 2
of leading/ edge printing is performed.
1842-1 trailing Bias of ALL 157 M (The value corrected in 10
edge of paper leading/ (black) <0-225> 05-1839 is displayed.)
(Tab paper) trailing
edge
1842-2 Intermedi- ALL 150 M 10
ate level (color) <0-225>
bias of
trailing
edge
1842-3 Bias of ALL 154 M 10
leading/ (color) <0-225>
trailing
edge
1845-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias ALL 153 M Displays the value of 10
actual value display (black) <0-187> 2nd transfer roller bias
1845-1 (Tab paper) ALL 150 M when printing is oper- 10
1847 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 400 M The drum surface 1
actual value display <300- potential at the 1st
(Tab paper) 800> transfer bias resistance
detection control is
adjusted.
[Unit: V]
1848 Transfer 1st transfer bias resis- ALL - M The result value of the 2
tance detection control <0-9999> 1st transfer bias resis-
Result value display tance detection control
is displayed.
[Unit: V]
1849 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out- ALL 154 M When the value 1
put adjustment (black) <0-225> decreases, the 1st
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
This setting is enabled
when "0" (disabled) is
set at the codes 08-
541, -549 and -551.
1850-0 Transfer 1st transfer Y ALL 138 M When the value 4
roller bias out- (color) <0-225> decreases, the 1st
1850-1 put adjust- M ALL 143 M transfer roller bias out- 4
ment (color) <0-225> put increases.
1850-2 C ALL 154 M This setting is enabled 4
(color) <0-225> when "0" (disabled) is
set at the codes 08-
1850-3 K ALL 154 M 541, -549 and -551. 4
(color) <0-225>
1861 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias RMS ALL 154 M The RMS value of the 2
value display (black) <0-225> 1st transfer roller bias
at the time of printing is
displayed.

2 - 85
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1862-0 Transfer 1st transfer Y ALL 138 M The RMS value of the 10
roller bias (color) <0-225> 1st transfer roller bias
1862-1 RMS value M ALL 143 M at the time of printing is 10
display (color) <0-225> displayed.
1862-2 C ALL 154 M 10
(color) <0-225>
1862-3 K ALL 154 M 10
(color) <0-225>
1863 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 5 M The current offset 1
resistance detection Cur- <0-10> amount of the 1st trans-
rent offset adjustment fer roller bias resistance
detection is adjusted.
0: -10 1: -8 2: -6
3: -4 4: -2 5: 0
6: +2 7: +4 8: +6
9: +8 10: +10
[Unit: µA]
1864 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias cor- ALL 100 M The 1st transfer roller 1
rection at low-speed color (color) <0-100> bias output after the
printing completion of transfer
of all colors (Y, M, C
and K) is corrected.
This setting is enabled
when "1" (6 sheets/
minute) is set at the
code 08-497.

2 - 86
2.2.5 Setting mode (08)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
2
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
* Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

2 - 87
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[HELP] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
* Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] or (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Select button] or
[INTERRUPT]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key] or
[START] [START] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]

2 - 88
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR] 2
(Corrects value)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.

*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM
in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER]
[START] [START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code) OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
[CLEAR] Adjustment value
(Corrects value) cannot be changed

2 - 89
07/05
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board, “SYS”, “NIC” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board.
Setting mode (08)

Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
200 General Date and time setting ALL - - Year/month/date/day/ 5
<13 dig- hour/minute/second
its> Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sun-
day”. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
“1” to “6”.
201 General Destination selection ALL EUR: 0 M 0: EUR 1
UC: 1 1: UC
JPN: 2 2: JPN
<0-3> 3: Other
202 User Counter installed externally ALL 0 M 0: No external counter 1
interface <0-4> 1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
(This value is valid
only when “2” is set
to 08-201.)
3: Key copy counter
4: Key card for OEM1
203 General Line adjustment mode ALL 0 M 0: For factory ship- 1
<0-1> ment
1: For line
* Field: “0” must be
selected
204 User Auto-clear timer setting ALL 3 SYS Timer to return the 1
interface <0-10> equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
205 User Auto power save mode ALL 11 SYS Timer to automatically 1
interface timer setting <0, 6-15> switch to the energy
saving mode when the
equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min.
10: 10min.
11: 15min.
12: 20min.
13: 30min.
14: 45min.
15: 60min.

2 - 90
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
206 User Auto Shut Off Mode timer ALL Refer to SYS Timer to enter the Sleep 1
interface setting (Sleep Mode) content Mode automatically
<0-20> when the equipment
has not been used 2
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.
11: 80min.
12: 90min.
13: 100min.
14: 110min.
15: 120min.
16: 150min.
17:180min.
18: 210min.
19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO281c: 9
e-STUDIO351c: 9
e-STUDIO451c: 12
207 User Highlighting display on ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white 1
interface LCD <0-1> background
1: White letter on black
background
209 User Default setting of filing for- ALL 1 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1
interface mat when E-mailing (com- (color) <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi)
mon in all color modes) 2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)
210 Paper Paper size (A6-R) PRT 148/105 - 10
feeding feeding/widthwise direction <148-
432/105-
297>
218 User Default setting of filing for- SCN 1 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1
interface mat when storing files (color) <0-4> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG
(at color/ACS modes) 3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
219 User Default setting of filing for- ALL 0 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1
interface mat when storing files (black) <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG
(at black mode) 3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
5: XPS (Multi)
6: XPS (Single)
220 User Language displayed at ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 1
interface power-ON UC: 0 1: Language 2
JPN: 5 2: Language 3
<0-6> 3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7

2 - 91
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
221 User Language selection in UI ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 1
interface data at Web power ON UC: 0 1: Language 2
JPN: 5 2: Language 3
<0-6> 3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
223 Mainte- Switching of output pages/ ALL 0 M Selects the reference to 1
nance driving counts at PM <0-1> notify the PM timing.
(The message is dis-
played on the LCD
screen.)
0: PM counter (The
number of output
pages is set at 08-
251.)
1: PM time counter
(The timing is set at
08-375.)
224 Paper Paper size for bypass feed PPC UNDEF SYS Press the button on the 9
feeding LCD to select the size.
225 Paper Paper size for upper ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the 9
feeding drawer UC: LT LCD to select the size.
JPN: A4
226 Paper Paper size for lower ALL EUR: A3 M Press the button on the 9
feeding drawer UC: LD LCD to select the size.
JPN: A3
227 Paper Paper size for PFP upper ALL EUR: M Press the button on the 9
feeding drawer A4-R LCD to select the size.
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
228 Paper Paper size for PFP lower ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the 9
feeding drawer UC: LG LCD to select the size.
JPN: B4
229 Paper Paper size (A3) ALL 420/297 M 10
432/140-
297>
230 Paper Paper size (A4-R) ALL 297/210 M 10
432/140-
297>
231 Paper Paper size (A5-R) ALL 210/148 M 10
432/140-
297>
232 Paper Paper size (B4) ALL 364/257 M 10
432/140-
297>
233 Paper Paper size (B5-R) ALL 257/182 M 10
432/140-
297>

2 - 92
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
234 Paper Paper size (LT-R) ALL 279/216 M 10
432/140-
297> 2
235 Paper Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 M 10
432/140-
297>
236 Paper Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 M 10
432/140-
297>
237 Paper Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 M 10
432/140-
297>
238 Paper Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 M 10
432/140-
297>
239 Paper Paper size (FOLIO) ALL 330/210 M 10
432/140-
297>
240 Paper Paper size (13”LG) ALL 330/216 M 10
432/140-
297>
241 Paper Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) ALL 216/216 M 10
432/140-
297>
242 Paper Paper size (Non-standard) ALL 432/279 SYS 10
432/105-
297>
243 Paper Memory 1 ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper 10
feeding Paper size (bypass feed- <148- size of bypass feed
ing/non-standard type) 432/100- (non-standard type) into
feeding/widthwise direction 297> [MEMORY 1].
244 Paper Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 M 10
432/140-
297>
245 Paper Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 M 10
432/140-
297>
246 Paper Paper size (A3-wide) ALL 457/305 M 10
457/140-
305>

2 - 93
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
250 Mainte- Service technician tele- ALL 0 SYS A telephone number 11
nance phone number <32 dig- can be entered up to 32
its> digits. Use the [MONI-
TOR/PAUSE] button to
enter a hyphen(-).
251 Mainte- Setting value of PM ALL Refer to M <Default> 1
nance counter content e-STUDIO281c
<8 digits> UC, EUR:
100,000 JPN: 0
e-STUDIO351c
UC, EUR:
120,000 JPN: 0
e-STUDIO451c
UC, EUR:
150,000 JPN: 0
252 Mainte- Current value of PM ALL 0 M Counts up when the 1
nance counter Display/0 clearing <8 digits> registration sensor is
ON.
253 Mainte- Error history display ALL - SYS Displays the latest 20 2
nance errors data
254 Paper LT↔A4/LD↔A3 PRT 0 SYS Sets whether the data is 1
feeding <0-1> printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The mes-
sage to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
255 Paper PFP/LCF installation ALL 0 M 0: Automatic 1
feeding <0-4> 1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
256 Paper Paper size setting /LCF ALL EUR: A4 M Press the icon on the 9
feeding UC: LT LCD to select the size.
JPN: A4

2 - 94
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
257 Counter Counter copy ALL - - 1: Electrical counter → -
<1-2> Backup counter
(LGC board → SYS
board) 2
2: Backup counter →
Electrical counter
(SYS board → LGC
board)
(P. 2-221)
258 Mainte- FSMS acceptance ALL 1 SYS Sets whether the FSMS 1
nance <0-2> connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB con-
nections)
259 Network Storage period at trail and PRT 14 SYS 0: No limits 1
private <0-35> 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1 hour
32: 2 hours
33: 4 hours
34: 8 hours
35: 12 hours
260 Network Web data retention period ALL 10 SYS When a certain period 1
<3 digits> of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being regis-
tered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
263 User Administrator's password ALL 123456 - The password can be 11
interface (Maximum 10 digits) <10 dig- entered in alphabets
its> and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 dig-
its.
264 Network File retention period ALL 30 SYS 0: No limits 1
<0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
265 Network Maximum data capacity at ALL 30 SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 1
E-mailing <2-30>
266 Network Maximum data capacity at ALL 30 SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 1
Internet FAX <2-30>

2 - 95
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
267 Elec- Full guarantee of docu- ALL 1 SYS Sets the file retention 1
tronic ments in Electronic Filing <0-1> level when editing the
filing when HDD is full files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/Save-
Doc command execu-
tion).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained
• Retains the source
file until CutDoc/
SaveDoc command
is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the exe-
cution of command
when “1” is set.
268 User Binarizing level selection ALL 3 SYS 0: Step -2 1
interface (When judging as black in <1-5> 1: Step -1
the ACS Mode) 2: Step 0 (center)
3: Step 1
4: Step 2
* The binarizing level
of each step is set
at 08-609.
270 Elec- Default setting of user box ALL 0 SYS Sets the data retention 1
tronic retention period <0-999> period when creating a
filing user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
271 General Warning notification of the ALL 90 SYS Sets the percentage of 1
File Share and e-Filling <0-100> HDD partition filled
partitions are filled when warning notifica-
tion is sent.
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
* Related code
08-288
272 Scanning Notification setting of E- ALL 3 SYS Sets the days left the 1
mail saving time limit <0-99> notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
273 Scanning Default setting of partial ALL 0 SYS Sets the default value 1
size when transmitting E- <0-6> for the partial size of E-
mail mail to be transmitted
when creating a tem-
plate.
0: Not divided
1: 64 2: 128
3: 256 4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)

2 - 96
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
274 FAX Default setting of page by ALL 0 SYS Sets the default value 1
page when transmitting <0-4> for the page by page of
Internet FAX Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creat- 2
ing a template.
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
276 User Default setting of density SCN 0 SYS 0: Automatic density 1
interface adjustment (Black) (black) <0-11> 1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual den-
sity)
277 User Default setting of back- SCN 3 SYS 1: Step -2 1
interface ground adjustment (color) <1-5> 2: Step -1
(Full Color) 3: Step 0 (center)
4: Step +1
5: Step +2
278 User Default setting of color SCN 0 SYS 0: Black 1
interface mode <0-4> 1: Gray Scale
2: Unused
3: Full Color
4: Auto Color
279 User Default setting of resolution SCN 2 SYS 0: 100 dpi 1
interface (Full Color) (color) <0-3> 1: 150 dpi
2: 200 dpi
3: 300dpi
interface (Gray Scale) (black) <0-4> 1: 150 dpi
2: 200 dpi
3: 300dpi
4: 400 dpi
interface (Black) (black) <0-4> 1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi
3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
282 User Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS 0: Text 1
interface mode (Full Color) (color) <0-2> 1: Photo
2: Printed Image
283 User Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS 0: Text 1
interface mode (Black) (black) <0-2> 1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
284 User Default setting of scanning SCN 0 SYS 0: Single 1
interface mode <0-2> 1: Book
2: Tablet

2 - 97
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
285 User Default setting of rotation SCN 0 SYS 0: 0 degree 1
interface mode <0-3> 1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
286 User Default setting of original ALL 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1
interface paper size <0-22> 1: A3 2: A4
3: LD 4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R 8: LG
9: B4 10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed
20: 8K 21: 16K
22: 16K-R
288 General Searching interval of delet- ALL 12 SYS Sets the search inter- 1
ing expired files and check- <1-24> val of deleting expired
ing capacity of HDD files and checking
partitions capacity of HDD parti-
tions.
(Unit: Hour)
* Related code
08-271
289 User Default setting of back- ALL 3 SYS 1: Step -2 1
interface ground adjustment <1-5> 2: Step -1
(Gray Scale) 3: Step 0 (center)
4: Step +1
5: Step +2
290 Network Raw printing job (Duplex) PRT 1 SYS 0: Valid 1
<0-1> 1: Invalid
291 Network Raw printing job PRT EUR: 6 SYS 0: LD 1: LG 1
(Paper size) UC: 2 2: LT 3: COMP
JPN: 6 4: ST 5: A3
<0 -13> 6: A4 7: A5
8: A6 9: B4
10: B5 11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
292 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: Plain paper 1
(Paper type) <0-4> 1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
293 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: Portrait 1
(Paper direction) <0-1> 1: Landscape
294 Network Raw printing job (Staple) PRT 1 SYS 0: Valid 1
<0-1> 1: Invalid
295 Network Raw printing job (Exit tray) PRT 0 SYS 0: Inner tray 1
<0-6> 1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Unused
4: Unused
5: Unused
6: Unused

2 - 98
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
296 Network Raw printing job PRT 1200 SYS Sets the number of 1
(Number of form lines) <500- form lines from 5 to
12800> 128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form 2
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
297 Network Raw printing job PRT 1000 SYS Sets the font pitch from 1
(PCL font pitch) <44- 0.44 to 99.99. (A hun-
9999> dredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
298 Network Raw printing job PRT 1200 SYS Sets the font size from 1
(PCL font size) <400- 4 to 999.75.
99975> (A hundredfold of the
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
299 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS Sets the PCL font num- 1
(PCL font number) <0-79> ber.
300 User Maximum number of copy PPC 0 SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 1
interface volume (MAX9) <0-2>
301-0 Counter Number of A3 PPC 0 SYS Counts the output 4
301-1 output pages A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color
301-2 at Full Color A5 Mode in the Copier
Mode in Function for each paper
301-3 Copier Func- A6 size according to the
301-4 tion B4 setting for the count
301-5 B5 setting of largesized
301-6 FOLIO paper (08-352) and the
301-7 LD definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
301-8 LG 353).
301-9 LT
301-10 ST
301-11 COMP
301-12 13”LG
301-13 8.5” x 8.5”
301-14 16K
301-15 8K
301-16 Others
302 User Original counter display PPC EUR: 2 SYS Sets whether the origi- 1
interface UC: 0 nal counter is dis-
JPN: 0 played or not.
<0, 2, 4> 0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Double-
sized original is
counted as 2.)

2 - 99
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
303-0 Counter Number of A3 PRT 0 SYS Counts the output 4
303-1 output pages A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color
303-2 at Full Color A5 Mode in the Printer
303-3 Printer Func- A6 size according to the
303-8 LG 353).
303-9 LT
303-10 ST
303-11 COMP
303-12 13”LG
303-13 8.5” x 8.5”
303-14 16K
303-15 8K
303-16 Others
304-1 output pages A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Twin Color
304-2 at Twin Color A5 Mode in the Copier
304-8 LG 353).
304-9 LT
304-10 ST
304-11 COMP
304-12 13”LG
304-13 8.5” x 8.5”
304-14 16K
304-15 8K
304-16 Others

2 - 100
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
305-1 output pages A4 (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black
305-2 at Black Mode A5 Mode in the Copier
in Copier Function for each paper 2
305-3 Function A6 size according to the
305-4 B4 setting for the count
305-5 B5 setting of large-sized
305-8 LG 353).
305-9 LT
305-10 ST
305-11 COMP
305-12 13”LG
305-13 8.5” x 8.5”
305-14 16K
305-15 8K
305-16 Others
306-1 output pages A4 (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black
306-2 at Black Mode A5 Mode in the Printer
in Printer Function for each paper
306-8 LG 353).
306-9 LT
306-10 ST
306-11 COMP
306-12 13”LG
306-13 8.5” x 8.5”
306-14 16K
306-15 8K
306-16 Others

2 - 101
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
307-1 output pages A4 (black) <8 digits> pages at the List Print
307-2 at List Print A5 Mode for each paper
Mode size according to the
307-3 A6 setting for the count
307-5 B5 paper (08-352) and the
307-6 FOLIO definition setting of
307-7 LD largesized paper (08-
353).
307-8 LG
307-9 LT
307-10 ST
307-11 COMP
307-12 13”LG
307-13 8.5” x 8.5”
307-14 16K
307-15 8K
307-16 Others
308-0 Counter Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the output 4
308-1 output pages A4 <8 digits> pages in the FAX Func-
308-2 in FAX Func- A5 tion for each paper size
tion according to the setting
308-3 A6 for the count setting of
308-4 B4 large-sized paper (08-
308-5 B5 352) and the definition
308-6 FOLIO setting of large-sized
308-7 LD paper (08-353).
308-8 LG
308-9 LT
308-10 ST
308-11 COMP
308-12 13”LG
308-13 8.5” x 8.5”
308-14 16K
308-15 8K
308-16 Others

2 - 102
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
309-0 Counter Number of A3 PPC 0 SYS Counts the scanning 4
309-1 scanning A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color
309-2 pages at Full A5 Mode in the Copier
Color Mode in Function for each paper 2
309-8 LG 353).
309-9 LT
309-10 ST
309-11 COMP
309-12 13”LG
309-13 8.5” x 8.5”
309-14 16K
309-15 8K
309-16 Others
310-0 Counter Number of A3 SCN 0 SYS Counts the scanning 4
310-1 scanning A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color
310-2 pages at Full A5 Mode in the Scanning
Color Mode in Function for each paper
310-3 Scanning A6 size according to the
310-4 Function B4 setting for the count
310-8 LG 353).
310-9 LT
310-10 ST
310-11 COMP
310-12 13”LG
310-13 8.5” x 8.5”
310-14 16K
310-15 8K
310-16 Others

2 - 103
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
311-1 scanning A4 (color) <8 digits> pages at the Twin Color
311-2 pages at Twin A5 Mode in the Copier
Color Mode in Function for each paper
311-8 LG 353).
311-9 LT
311-10 ST
311-11 COMP
311-12 13”LG
311-13 8.5” x 8.5”
311-14 16K
311-15 8K
311-16 Others
312-1 scanning A4 (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black
312-2 pages at A5 Mode in the Copier
Black Mode in Function for each paper
312-8 LG 353).
312-9 LT
312-10 ST
312-11 COMP
312-12 13”LG
312-13 8.5” x 8.5”
312-14 16K
312-15 8K
312-16 Others

2 - 104
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
313-0 Counter Number of A3 SCN 0 SYS Counts the scanning 4
313-1 scanning A4 (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black
313-2 pages in A5 Mode in the Scanning
Scanning Function for each paper 2
313-8 LG 353).
313-9 LT
313-10 ST
313-11 COMP
313-12 13”LG
313-13 8.5” x 8.5”
313-14 16K
313-15 8K
313-16 Others
314-0 Counter Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the scanning 4
314-1 scanning A4 <8 digits> pages in the FAX Func-
314-2 pages in FAX A5 tion for each paper size
Function according to the setting
314-6 FOLIO setting of largesized
314-7 LD paper (08-353).
314-8 LG
314-9 LT
314-10 ST
314-11 COMP
314-12 13”LG
314-13 8.5” x 8.5”
314-14 16K
314-15 8K
314-16 Others

2 - 105
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
315-0 Counter Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the transmitted 4
315-1 transmitted A4 <8 digits> pages in the FAX Func-
315-7 LD paper (08-353).
315-8 LG
315-9 LT
315-10 ST
315-11 COMP
315-12 13”LG
315-13 8.5” x 8.5”
315-14 16K
315-15 8K
315-16 Others
316-0 Counter Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the received 4
316-1 received A4 <8 digits> pages in the FAX Func-
316-7 LD paper (08-353).
316-8 LG
316-9 LT
316-10 ST
316-11 COMP
316-12 13”LG
316-13 8.5” x 8.5”
316-14 16K
316-15 8K
316-16 Others

2 - 106
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
317-0 Counter Display of Large PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 14
number of (color) <8 digits> output pages at the Full
317-1 Counter output pages Small PPC 0 SYS Color Mode in the 14
at Full Color (color) <8 digits> Copier Function 2
317-2 Counter Mode in Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
Copier Func- (color) <8 digits> (large/small).
tion Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
318-0 Counter Display of Large PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 14
number of (color) <8 digits> output pages at the Full
318-1 Counter output pages Small PRT 0 SYS Color Mode in the 14
at Full Color (color) <8 digits> Printer Function
318-2 Counter Mode in Total PRT 0 SYS according to its size 14
Printer Func- (color) <8 digits> (large/small).
tion Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of (color) <8 digits> output pages at the
319-1 Counter output pages Small PPC 0 SYS Twin Color Mode in the 14
at Twin Color (color) <8 digits> Copier Function
319-2 Counter Mode in Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
tion Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.

2 - 107
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
number of (black) <8 digits> output pages at the
320-1 Counter output pages Small PPC 0 SYS Black Mode in the 14
at Black Mode (black) <8 digits> Copier Function
320-2 Counter in Copier Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
Function (black) <8 digits> (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of (black) <8 digits> output pages at the
321-1 Counter output pages Small PRT 0 SYS Black Mode in the 14
at Black Mode (black) <8 digits> Printer Function
321-2 Counter in Printer Total PRT 0 SYS according to its size 14
Function (black) <8 digits> (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of (black) <8 digits> output pages at the List
322-1 Counter output pages Small PRT 0 SYS Print Mode Function 14
at List Print (black) <8 digits> according to its size
322-2 Counter Mode Total PRT 0 SYS (large/small). 14
(black) <8 digits> Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.

2 - 108
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
323-0 Counter Display of Large FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of 14
number of <8 digits> output pages in the FAX
323-1 Counter output pages Small FAX 0 SYS Function according to 14
in FAX Func- <8 digits> its size (large/small). 2
323-2 Counter tion Total FAX 0 SYS Large: 14
<8 digits> Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at the
324-1 Counter scanning Small PPC 0 SYS Full Color Mode in the 14
pages at Full (color) <8 digits> Copier Function
324-2 Counter Color Mode in Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
tion Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
325-0 Counter Display of Large SCN 0 SYS Counts the number of 14
325-1 Counter scanning Small SCN 0 SYS Full Color Mode in the 14
pages at Full (color) <8 digits> Scanning Function
325-2 Counter Color Mode in Total SCN 0 SYS according to its size 14
Scanning (color) <8 digits> (large/small).
Function Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.

2 - 109
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
326-1 Counter scanning Small PPC 0 SYS Twin Color Mode in the 14
pages at Twin (color) <8 digits> Copier Function
326-2 Counter Color Mode in Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
tion Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of (black) <8 digits> scanning pages at the
327-1 Counter scanning Small PPC 0 SYS Black Mode in the 14
pages at (black) <8 digits> Copier Function
327-2 Counter Black Mode in Total PPC 0 SYS according to its size 14
Copier Func- (black) <8 digits> (large/small).
tion Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of <8 digits> scanning pages in the
328-1 Counter scanning Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according 14
pages in FAX <8 digits> to its size (large/small).
328-2 Counter Function Total FAX 0 SYS Large: 14
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.

2 - 110
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
329-0 Counter Display of Large SCN 0 SYS Counts the number of 14
number of (black) <8 digits> scanning pages in the
329-1 Counter scanning Small SCN 0 SYS Scanning Function 14
pages in (black) <8 digits> according to its size 2
329-2 Counter Scanning Total SCN 0 SYS (large/small). 14
Function (black) <8 digits> Large:
Number of output
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
number of <8 digits> transmitted pages in the
330-1 Counter transmitted Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according 14
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
331 User Default setting of screen ALL 0 SYS Sets the screen to be 1
interface <0-5> displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recov-
ered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
4: Job Status
5: Template

2 - 111
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
number of <8 digits> received pages in the
332-1 Counter received Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according 14
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
333-0 Counter Display of Large ALL 0 SYS Displays the total num- 14
total number (color) <8 digits> ber of pages at Full
333-1 Counter of pages at Small ALL 0 SYS Color Mode in the 14
Full Color (color) <8 digits> Copier/Printer/Scan-
333-2 Counter Mode Total ALL 0 SYS ning Functions. 14
(color) <8 digits>
total number (color) <8 digits> ber of pages at Twin
334-1 Counter of pages at Small ALL 0 SYS Color Mode in the 14
Twin Color (color) <8 digits> Copier Function.
334-2 Counter Mode Total ALL 0 SYS 14
(color) <8 digits>
total number (black) <8 digits> ber of pages at Black
335-1 Counter of pages at Small ALL 0 SYS Mode in the Copier/ 14
Black Mode (black) <8 digits> Printer/Scanning/FAX
335-2 Counter Total ALL 0 SYS Functions. 14
(black) <8 digits>
342 User Displaying number of PPC 0 SYS This setting is whether 1
interface original pages placed on <0-1> the number of pages of
original glass originals placed on the
original glass is dis-
played or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
343 User Black-free function ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
interface <0-1> 1: Enabled
When "1" (enabled) is
set at this code, "1"
(black) is automatically
set at the code 08-588.
344 Counter Count setting of tab paper ALL 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1
(PM) <0-1> 1: Counted as 2
346 Counter Count setting of large- ALL 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1
sized paper (PM) <0-1> 1: Counted as 2
347 Counter Definition setting of large- ALL 1 M 0: A3/LD 1
sized paper (PM) <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP

2 - 112
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
348 Counter Count setting of thick paper ALL 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1
(PM) <0-1> 1: Counted as 2
349 Counter Count setting of OHP film ALL 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1
(PM) <0-1> 1: Counted as 2 2
352 Counter Count setting of large- ALL JPN: 0 M 0: Counted as 1 1
sized paper (Fee charging OTHER: 1: Counted as 2
system counter) 1 2: Counted as 1
<0-2> (Mechanical counter
is double counter)
353 Counter Definition setting of large- ALL 0 M 0: A3/LD 1
sized paper (Fee charging <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
system counter) FOLIO/COMP/8k
356 Counter Counter for upper drawer ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
feeding <8 digits> sheets fed from upper
drawer
357 Counter Counter for lower drawer ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
feeding <8 digits> sheets fed from lower
drawer
358 Counter Counter for bypass feeding ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
<8 digits> sheets fed from bypass
feed
359 Counter Counter for LCF feeding ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
<8 digits> sheets fed from LCF
360 Counter Counter for PFP upper ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
drawer feeding <8 digits> sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
370 Counter Counter for PFP lower ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
drawer feeding <8 digits> sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
372 Counter Counter for ADU ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
<8 digits> output pages of duplex
printing.
374 Counter Counter for RADF ALL 0 SYS Counts the number of 2
<8 digits> originals fed from RADF
375 Mainte- Setting value of PM time ALL Refer to M <Default> 1
nance counter display/0 clearing content e-STUDIO281c
<8 digits> JPN:0
UC, EUR: 315,000
e-STUDIO351c
JPN:0
UC, EUR: 315,000
e-STUDIO451c
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 315,000
376 Mainte- Current value of PM time ALL 0 M Counts the drum driving 1
nance counter <8 digits> time (main motor ON).
381 Counter Setting for counter installed ALL 1 M Selects the job to count 1
externally <0-7> up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX

2 - 113
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
390 Counter Number of errors in HDD PPC 0 SYS The number of error is 2
(Copying) <8 digits> reset at HDD format-
391 Counter Number of errors in HDD FAX 0 SYS ting. 2
(FAX) <8 digits>
392 Counter Number of errors in HDD SCN 0 SYS 2
(Scanning) <8 digits>
393 Counter Number of errors in HDD PRT 0 SYS 2
(Printer) <8 digits>
398 Laser Number of polygonal motor ALL 0 M Counts the number of 2
rotational speed switching <8 digits> time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rota-
tion and standby rota-
tion
399 Laser Accumulated time of polyg- ALL 0 M Accumulates the time 2
onal motor at normal rota- <8 digits> the polygonal motor has
tion rotated at normal rota-
tion.
400 Fuser Fuser unit error status ALL 0 M 0: No error 1
counter <0-29> 1: C411 2: C412
3: C433 4: -
5: C445 6: C446
7: C447 8: -
9: C449 10: C475
11: C471 12: C472
13: - 14: -
15: C480 16: -
17: C490 18: -
19: C449 20: -
21: C449 22: C449
23: C449 24: C447
25: C449 26: -
27: C449 28: -
29: C449
409 Fuser Fuser roller temperature at ALL 13 M 0: OFF 1: 40°C 1
a energy saver mode <0-16> 2: 45°C 3: 50°C
(Center thermistor) 4: 55°C 5: 60°C
6: 65°C 7: 70°C
8: 75°C 9: 80°C
10: 85°C 11: 90°C
12: 95°C 13: 100°C
14: 105°C 15: 110°C
16:115°C
410-0 Fuser Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 4
during printing (Center (black) <0-16> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
thermistor/Plain paper) 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
410-1 Fuser ALL 11 M 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C

2 - 114
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
411 Fuser Fuser roller temperature on ALL 12 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1
standby (Center ther- <0-16> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
mistor) 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C 2
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
during printing (black) <0-16> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
(Center thermistor/Thick 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
paper 3) 6: 150°C 7: 155°C
412-1 ALL 12 M 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
(Center thermistor/Thick 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
paper 1) 6: 150°C 7: 155°C
413-1 ALL 12 M 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
415-0 Fuser Period of time retaining ALL 3 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 4
print-start temperature (black) <0-10> 2: 2 sec 3: 3 sec
(Thick paper 3) 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
415-1 ALL 2 M 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 4
(color) <0-10> 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
416 Fuser Temperature setting to ALL 9 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1
start solving abnormality <0-12> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
(Center/Side thermistor/ 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
Thick paper 3) 6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: Invalid
417-0 Fuser Pre-running time for first ALL 16 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 4
printing (Thick paper 3) (black) <0-16> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
417-1 ALL 0 M 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
422 Fuser Fuser roller temperature ALL 4 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1
setting at the end of pre- <0-16> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
running during warming-up 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C

2 - 115
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
428-0 Fuser Period of time retaining 3 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 4
ALL
print-start temperature <0-10> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(black)
(Thick paper 2) 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
428-1 2 M 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 4
ALL 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
(color) <0-10>
10: 10 sec.
430 Fuser Transport motor speed ALL 1 M Sets deceleration ratio 1
deceleration (OHP film) (color) <0-3> of paper transport
431 Transport motor speed 1 M speed. 1
ALL 0: 1/1 1: 1/2
deceleration <0-3>
(color) 2: 1/3 3: 1/4
(Thick paper 2)
432 Transport motor speed 2 M 1
ALL
deceleration <0-3>
(color)
(Thick paper 3)
436 Fuser Temperature setting to ALL 9 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1
start solving abnormal- <0-12> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
ity(Center/Side thermistor/ 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
Thick paper2) 6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: Invalid
(Center thermistor /Thick 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
paper 2) 6: 150°C 7: 155°C
437-1 ALL 12 M 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
during printing (Center (black) <0-16> 2: 130°C 3: 135°C
thermistor/OHP film) 4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
438-1 ALL 10 M 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 4
(color) <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
439-1 ALL 0 M 11: 14 sec. 4
(color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.

2 - 116
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
printing (black) <0-16> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
(Plain paper/Low tempera- 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
ture environment) 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 2
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
440-1 ALL 0 M 11: 14 sec. 4
(color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
441-1 ALL 5 M 11: 14 sec. 4
(color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
449 Paper Switching for incorrect ALL 0 M 0: Enabled 1
feeding paper size jam detection <0-1> 1: Disabled
458 Fuser Threshold for warming-up ALL 6 M 0: 0°C 1: 5°C 1
temperature(Low-tempera- <0-11> 2: 9°C 3: 10°C
ture environment) 4: 12°C 5: 14°C
6: 15°C 7: 16°C
8: 17°C 9: 18°C
10: 19°C 11: 20°C
459 Fuser Warming-up time(Low-tem- ALL 7 M 0: No warming-up 1
perature environment) <0-11> 1: 30 sec. 2: 40 sec.
3: 50 sec. 4: 60 sec.
5: 70 sec. 6: 80 sec.
7: 90 sec.
8: 100 sec.
9: 120 sec.
10: 180 sec.
11: 300 sec.
460 Fuser Threshold of temperature ALL 9 M 0: 0°C 1: 5°C 1
for pre-running time for first <0-11> 2: 9°C 3: 10°C
printing(Low-temperature 4: 12°C 5: 14°C
environment) 6: 15°C 7: 16°C
8: 17°C 9: 18°C
10: 19°C 11: 20°C
461 Fuser Pre-running time for first ALL 8 M 0: Invalid (always) 1
printing(Plain paper/Low- <0-11> 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min.
temperature environment) 3: 1 min. 4: 2 min.
5: 3 min. 6: 5 min.
7: 7 min. 8: 10 min.
9: 15 min. 10: 30 min.
11: 60 min.

2 - 117
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
462 RADF Setting for switchback ALL 0 SYS This setting is whether 1
operation in mixed-size <0-2> the original length is
copying using RADF detected or not by
transporting without
scanning in reverse
when A4-R/FOLIO
paper or LT-R/LG paper
is detected in a mixed-
size copying.
0: Disabled -
AMS:
A series - Judges as
A4-R without trans-
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by its length
without transporting
in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO without
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
LT series - Judges
LG without trans-
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO by transport-
ing without scanning
in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges
LG by transporting
without scanning in
reverse to detect its
length.
APS:
The same as that of
APS in 0: Disabled.
2: Enable 2
AMS/APS:
The same as that of
AMS in 1: Enable 1.
463-0 Paper Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of 4
feeding number set- paper <0-5> times of the feeding
463-1 ting (upper Others ALL 5 M retry from the upper 4
drawer) <0-5> drawer.

2 - 118
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
464-1 ting (lower Others ALL 5 M retry from the lower 4
drawer) <0-5> drawer. 2
465-1 ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M retry from the PFP 4
upper drawer) <0-5> upper drawer.
466-1 ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M retry from the PFP 4
lower drawer) <0-5> lower drawer.
467-1 ting (bypass Others ALL 5 M retry from the bypass 4
feed) <0-5> tray.
468-1 ting (LCF) Others ALL 5 M retry from the LCF. 4
<0-5>
470 Paper Paper size (305x457 mm) ALL 457/305 M 10
457/105-
305>
471 Paper Paper size (Post card) ALL 148/100 M * Post card is sup- 10
feeding feeding/widthwise direction <148- ported only for JPN
432/100- model.
297>
478 Laser Judged number of polygo- ALL 0 M Displays the error 1
nal motor rotation error <0-1> [CA10] when the set
(Normal rotation) number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
1: 12 times
479 Laser Judged number of polygo- ALL 0 M 0: Waiting time for 1
nal motor rotation error (At <0-1> polygonal motor
acceleration/deceleration) rotation overshoot-
ing 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshoot-
ing 2.2 sec.
480 Paper Default setting of paper PPC 0 SYS 0: A4/LT 1
feeding source <0-5> 1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer

2 - 119
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
481 Paper Automatic change of paper PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not 1
feeding source <0-2> changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direc-
tion and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the dif-
ferent direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4-
R, LT-R to LT. “1” is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
482 Paper Feeding retry setting ALL 0 M 0: ON 1
feeding <0-1> 1: OFF
483 Laser Pre-running rotation of ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not 1
polygonal motor <0-2> switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the origi-
nal is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the origi-
nal is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
484 Laser Polygonal motor rotational ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not 1
status switching at the Auto <0-1> switching the polygonal
Clear Mode motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
485 Laser Rotational status of polygo- ALL 0 SYS Sets the rotational sta- 1
nal motor on standby <0-1> tus of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rota-
tional speed is set at
08-490.)
1: Stopped

2 - 120
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
486 Laser Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 SYS Switches the polygonal 1
polygonal motor pre-run- <0-2> motor to the standby
ning rotation rotation when a certain
period of time has 2
passed from the pre-
running. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effec-
tive when “0” or “2”
is set at 08-483.
487 Transfer Selection of performing the ALL 0 M 0: Performs only at no 1
2nd transfer roller cleaning <0-1> paper size is desig-
(Bypass feed) nated
1: Performs regardless
of designation of
paper size
488 Laser Setting of polygonal motor ALL 3 M Set the type of polygo- 1
type <2-3> nal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
489 Laser Polygonal motor rotation ALL 5 M 0: 38090.55rpm 1
number on standby <0-5> 1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
490 Laser Polygonal motor rotation in ALL 0 M 0: Stopped 1
the energy saving mode <0-1> 1: 10000rpm.
497 General Speed switching for color ALL 0 M Sets the speed for color 1
printing (color) <0-1> printing.
0: 11 pages/minute
1: 6 pages/minute
502 Image Error diffusion and dither PPC 0 SYS Sets the image repro- 1
setting at photo mode (black) <0-1> duction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
503 User Default setting of density PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1
interface adjustment (black) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center)
511 Main Main charger wire auto- ALL 1 M 0: Invalid 1
charger cleaning setting <0-1> 1: Valid
printing (black) <0-16> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
526-1 (OHP film) ALL 0 M 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 4
(color) <0-16> 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.

2 - 121
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
544 Image Environment correction ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control control of 2nd transfer <0-1> recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias roller bias depending on
the environment.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
545 Image Transfer belt life correction ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control of 2nd transfer roller bias <0-1> recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias depending on
the transfer belt life.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
546 Image 2nd transfer roller life cor- ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control rection of 2nd transfer <0-1> recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias roller bias depending on
the 2nd transfer roller
life.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
548 Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer ALL EUR:0 M 0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/ 1
roller bias table (for each UC:1 EUR
destination/paper thick- JPN:2 1: 75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC
ness) <0-2> 2: 64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/
JPN
549 Image Image quality control/open- ALL 1 M Sets whether or not 1
control loop control 1 <0-1> performing the open-
loop control 1.The
open-loop control 1 is
performed in advance
of the closed-loop con-
trol.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
550 Image Default setting of Original PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1
mode (black) <0-3> 1: Photo
2: Text
3: Gray Scale
551 Image Image quality control/open- ALL 1 M Sets whether or not 1
control loop control 2 <0-1> performing the open-
loop control 2.The
open-loop control 2 is
performed before or
during printing.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
552 Image Drum life correction control ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control <0-1> recting the drum volt-
age depending on the
drum life in open-loop
control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid

2 - 122
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
553 Image Drum temperature correc- ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control tion control <0-1> recting the drum volt-
age depending on the
drum surface tempera- 2
ture in open-loop con-
trol.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
554 Image Image quality open-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether or not 1
control control/Contrast voltage <0-1> deciding the initial value
initial value of contrast voltage in
open-loop control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
555 Image Drum life correction of ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control laser power initial value <0-1> recting the laser power
depending on the drum
life when the laser
power initial value is set
in open-loop control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
556 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control control/Contrast voltage <0-1> recting the contrast volt-
age in closed-loop
control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
557 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether or not cor- 1
control control/Laser power <0-1> recting the laser power
in closed-loop control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
558 Image Contrast voltage/Correc- ALL 1 M Sets whether or not 1
control tion gain environment set- <0-1> switching the correc-
ting tion amount once at
contrast voltage correc-
tion depending on the
environment.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
559 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether perform- 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-2> ing closed-loop control
At power-ON automatically at power-
ON when the fuser
roller temperature
becomes below the
specified level.
0: Invalid
1: Valid (at mode 1)
560 Imagel Process switching for PPC 1 M Sets whether or not 1
image smoothing (Text/ (black) <0-1> performing a smooth-
Photo) ing process (primary
scanning direction,
2,400 dpi or equiva-
lent).
0: Invalid
1: Valid

2 - 123
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
561 Image Process switching for PPC 0 M Sets whether or not 1
image smoothing (Photo) (black) <0-1> performing a smooth-
ing process (primary
562 Image Process switching for PPC 1 M scanning direction, 1
image smoothing (Text) (black) <0-1> 2,400 dpi or equiva-
lent).
0: Invalid
1: Valid
565 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether or not 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-2> performing closed-loop
Relative humidity variation control automatically
when the relative
humidity becomes
below the specified
level from the previous
control.
0: Invalid
Period of time unattended control automatically
when the equipment
has not been used for a
specified period of time.
0: Invalid
Accumulated print volume control automatically
when the specified
number of sheets has
been printed out from
the previous control.
0: Invalid
When recovered from control automatically
“Toner empty” when recovered from
“Toner empty”.
0: Invalid

2 - 124
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
569 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 8 M Sets the fuser roller 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-20> temperature to perform
Temperature setting of closed-loop control
fuser roller at power-ON when “1” or “2” (valid) is 2
set in 08-559.
0: 20°C 1: 25°C
2: 30°C 3: 35°C
4: 40°C 5: 45°C
6: 50°C 7: 55°C
8: 60°C 9: 65°C
10: 70°C 11: 75°C
12: 80°C 13: 85°C
14: 90°C 15: 95°C
16: 100°C 17: 105°C
18: 110°C 19: 115°C
20: 120°C
570 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the relative humid- 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-6> ity difference to per-
Relative humidity differ- form the closed-loop
ence setting control when “1” or “2”
(valid) is set in 08-565.
0: 0% 1: 5%
2: 10% 3: 15%
4: 20% 5: 25%
6: 30%
571 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the period of time 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-24> unattended to perform
Setting of period of time closed-loop control
unattended when “1” or “2” (valid) is
set in 08-566.
Setting value x 1 (hour)
572 Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 10 M Sets the number of 1
control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-30> accumulated print vol-
Setting of accumulated ume to perform closed-
print volume loop control when “1” or
“2” (valid) is set in 08-
567.
Setting value x 100
(pages)
573 Image Abnormality detection ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality 1
control count (Y) <0-16> detection of image qual-
Display/0 clearing ity control. Accumulat-
ing total of [CE10],
[CE20] and [CE40]
control count (M) <0-16> detection of image qual-
[CE20] and [CE40]
control count (C) <0-16> detection of image qual-
[CE20] and [CE40]
control count (K) <0-16> detection of image qual-
[CE20] and [CE40]

2 - 125
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
583-0 Fuser Pre-running Transport ALL 1 M 0: 3 sec. 1: 6 sec. 4
time at power- motor <0-10> 2: 9 sec. 3: 12 sec.
ON and ready speed 1/1 4: 15 sec. 5: 18 sec.
583-1 status Transport ALL 4 M 6: 21 sec. 7: 24 sec. 4
motor <0-10> 8: 27 sec. 9: 30 sec.
speed 1/2 10: 33 sec.
583-2 Transport ALL 7 M 4
motor <0-10>
speed 1/3
584 Fuser Transport motor speed of ALL 0 M 0: Decelerating to 1/1 1
pre-running at ready status <0-2> 1: Decelerating to 1/2
2: Decelerating to 1/3
585 User Default setting of Original PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1
interface mode (color) <0-4> 1: Text
2: Printed image
3: Photo
4: Map
586 Image Image quality switching PPC 0 SYS Selects the method of 1
when selecting the Image (black) <0-1> image processing when
Smoothing Mode the Image Smoothing is
selected in the original
modes.
0: Processing for
Image Smoothing
1: Processing when
judging as black in
the ACS Mode
587 User Default setting of Density PPC 1 SYS 0: Automatic 1
interface mode (color) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center)
588 User Default setting of Color PPC 1 SYS 0: Auto color 1
interface mode <0-2> 1: Black
2: Full color
589 Image Image quality switching PPC 1 SYS Selects the method of 1
when judging as black in (black) <0-1> image processing when
the ACS Mode the original is judged as
black in the ACS Mode.
0: Processing for
Image Smoothing
1: Processing when
judging as black in
the ACS Mode
595 Image Scanning operation switch- PPC 0 SYS 0: Scanning color/ 1
ing at automatic calibration (color) <0-1> black integrated pat-
tern
1: Scanning color pat-
tern only
597 Image Gamma correction table all PRT - SYS Initializes the status of 3
clearing (color) automatic gamma
adjustment in color
printing.
602 User Screen setting for auto- ALL EUR:0 SYS 0: OFF 1
interface matic energy saver/auto- UC:1 1: ON
matic power OFF JPN:1
<0-1>

2 - 126
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
603 User Setting for automatic ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface duplexing mode <0-3> 1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Two-sided to duplex 2
copying
3: User selection
604 User Default setting for APS/ ALL 0 SYS 0: APS (Automatic 1
interface AMS <0-2> Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selec-
tion)
2: Not selected
605 User Centering printing of pri- PPC 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface mary/secondary direction <0-1> 1: Valid
at AMS
607 User Default setting of RADF PPC 0 SYS 0: Continuous feeding 1
interface mode <0-1> (by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
609-0 Image Binarizing Step -2 ALL 88 SYS Sets the binarizing level 4
level setting <0-255> of each step.
609-1 (When judg- Step -1 ALL 108 SYS When the value 4
ing as black in <0-255> increases, the image
609-2 the ACS Step 0 ALL 148 SYS becomes darker. When 4
Mode) (center) <0-255> the value decreases,
the image becomes
609-3 Step +1 ALL 178 SYS lighter. 4
<0-255> * Refer to 08-268.
609-4 Step +2 ALL 208 SYS 4
<0-255>
610 User Key touch sound of control ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
interface panel <0-1> 1: ON
611 User Book type original priority PPC 0 SYS 0: Left page to right 1
interface <0-1> page
1: Right page to left
page
612 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Not summer time 1
<0-1> 1: Summer time
613 User Paper size selection for PPC EUR: SYS Press the icon on the 9
interface [OTHER] button FOLIO LCD to select the size.
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
614 Network Local I/F time-out period ALL 6 SYS Sets the period of time 1
<1-50> when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or par-
allel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)

2 - 127
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
615 General Size information of main ALL - SYS Displays the sizes of 2
memory and page memory the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each mem-
ory is properly recog-
nized.
616 Counter Counting method in Twin ALL JPN: 1 SYS Sets the counting 1
Color Mode UC: 0 method in Twin Color
(Limitation Function) EUR: 0 Mode with the Limita-
<0-1> tion Function.
0: Count as color
1: Count as black
617 User Print setting without ALL 1 SYS 0: Printed forcibly 1
interface department code <0-2> 1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
618 User Default setting of RADF PPC 0 SYS 0: Same size originals 1
interface original size <0-1> 1: Mixed size originals
619 Paper Time lag before auto-start ALL 4 SYS Sets the time taken to 1
feeding of bypass feeding <0-10> add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: No delay
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
620 User Department management PPC 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (Copier) <0-1> 1: Valid
621 User Department management FAX 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (FAX) <0-1> 1: Valid
622 User Department management PRT 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (Printer) <0-1> 1: Valid
623 User Department management SCN 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (Scanner) <0-1> 1: Valid
624 User Department management PRT 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (List print) <0-1> 1: Valid
625 User Blank copying prevention PPC 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
interface mode during RADF jam- <0-1> 1: ON (Start printing
ming when the scanning
of each page is fin-
ished)
627 User Rotation printing at the ALL 0 SYS 0: Not rotating 1
interface nonsorting <0-1> 1: Rotating
628 User Direction priority of original PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1
interface image <0-1> 1: Portrait
629 User Department management ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting <0-1> 1: Valid
632 User Automatic calibration dis- PPC 1 SYS Sets the disclosing level 1
interface closure level <0-2> of automatic calibration.
0: Service technician
1: Administrator
2: User
633 Data Releasing F200 service ALL 0 SYS 0: Not used 1
overwrite call <0-2> 1: Board installed
kit 2: Service call
634 User Inner receiving tray priority ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal 1
interface at Non-sort Mode <0-1> 1: Inner receiving tray

2 - 128
09/01
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
636 User Width setting for image PPC 0 SYS 0: ON 1
interface shift copying (linkage of <0-1> 1: OFF
front side and back side)
638 General Time differences ALL EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 1 2
UC: 40 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
JPN: 6 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
<0-47> 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
640 User Date display format ALL EUR:1 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1
interface UC:2 1: DD.MM.YYYY
JPN:0 2: MM.DD.YYYY
<0-2>
641 User Automatic Sorting Mode PPC 2 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface setting (RADF) <0-4> 1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
642 User Default setting of Sorter PPC 0 SYS 0: NON-SORT 1
interface Mode <0-4> 1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
643 User Color 1 at twin color selec- PPC 0 SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M 1
interface tion (Select what color (color) <0-6> 3: C 4: R 5: G
black in original is copied) 6: B
644 User Color 2 at twin color selec- PPC 4 SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M 1
interface tion (Select what color (color) <0-6> 3: C 4: R 5: G
other than black in original 6: B
is copied)

2 - 129
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
645 User Correction of reproduction PPC 10 SYS Sets the reproduction 1
interface ratio in editing copy <0-10> ratio for the “X in 1”
printing (including mag-
azine sort) to the
“Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio”.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
646 User Image position in editing PPC 2 SYS Sets the page pasted 1
interface <0-3> position for “X in 1” to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Cornering
1: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Cornering
2: PPC:Cornering/
PRT:Centering
3: PPC:Centering/
PRT:Centering
648 User Returning finisher tray ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not 1
interface when printing is finished <0-1> returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
649 User Magazine sort setting PPC 0 SYS 0: Left page to right 1
interface <0-1> page
1: Right page to left
page
650 User 2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating PPC 0 SYS 0: Horizontal 1
interface order setting <0-1> 1: Vertical
651 User Printing format setting for PPC 2 SYS Hyphen 1
interface Time Stamp and Page <0-3> (with page number)
Number /Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
652 User Cascade operation setting PPC 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
interface <0-1> 1: ON
653 User Cascade operation setting PRT 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
657 User Default setting of printing PPC 0 SYS 0: Short edge 1
interface direction for Time Stamp <0-1> 1: Long edge
and Page Number

2 - 130
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
658 User Auto-start setting for PRT 0 SYS Sets whether or not 1
interface bypass feed printing <0-1> feeding a paper auto-
matically into the copier
when it is placed on the 2
bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatical
feeding)
659 User Auto-start setting for PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not 1
interface bypass feed printing <0-1> feeding a paper auto-
matically into the copier
when it is placed on the
bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatical
feeding)
660 Network Auto-forwarding setting of ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
received FAX <0-1> 1: Valid
661 Network Auto-forwarding setting of ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
received E-mail <0-1> 1: Valid
662 General Clearing of SMS partition ALL - SYS Clears SMS partition. 3
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
663 Counter Counting method in Twin PPC 0 SYS Sets the counting 1
Color Mode <0-2> method of fee charging
or department count in
Twin Color Mode.
0: Count as Twin Color
Mode
1: Count as Black
Mode
2: Count as Full Color
Mode
665 General M/SYS all clearing ALL - M/ Initializes all the adjust- 3
SYS ment modes and setting
modes.
666 General BOX partition clearing ALL - SYS Initializes the Elec- 3
tronic Filing.
667 General /SHA partition clearing ALL - SYS Initializes the shared 3
folder.
669 General System all clearing ALL - SYS Initializes system 3
NVRAM area.
670 General HDD diagnostic menu dis- ALL - SYS Display the HDD infor- 2
play mation
(Chap. 5.3.6)
671 User Size indicator ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1
interface <0-1>

2 - 131
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
672 General Initialization of department - - SYS Initializing of the depart- 3
management information ment management
information
* Enter the code with
the digital keys and
press the [INITIAL-
IZE] button to per-
form the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management infor-
mation is destroyed
for some reason,
“Enter Department
Code” is displayed
on the control panel
even if the depart-
ment management
function is not set
on. In this case, ini-
tialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initial-
ized at the factory.
675-0 Paper Coated Paper Upper ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not 4
feeding Mode setting drawer <0-1> applying the Coated
for paper Paper Mode to each
source paper source.
0: Normal mode
675-1 Lower ALL 0 SYS 1: Coated Paper Mode 4
drawer <0-1> * Coated Paper Mode
- This mode is
selected when the
paper which often
675-2 PFP upper ALL 0 SYS causes the misfeed- 4
drawer <0-1> ing (ex. coated
paper) is used. The
occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
675-3 PFP lower ALL 0 SYS by lengthening the 4
drawer <0-1> jam detection time.
However, the print-
ing speed is low-
675-4 LCF ALL 0 SYS ered since the 4
<0-1> printing cycle is also
lengthened with the
lengthened jam
detection time.

2 - 132
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
676 Paper Bypass copy printing PPC 0 SYS Sets whether or not dis- 1
feeding [COATED] button display <0-1> playing the [COATED]
button on the LCD
screen at bypass feed- 2
ing.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed (The
Coated Paper Mode
is applied by press-
ing the [COATED]
button at bypass
feeding.)
* Coated Paper Mode
- This mode is
selected when the
paper which often
causes the misfeed-
ing (ex. coated
paper) is used. The
occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
by lengthening the
jam detection time.
However, the print-
ing speed is low-
ered since the
printing cycle is also
lengthened with the
lengthened jam
detection time.
677-0 Paper Coated Paper Plain PRT 0 SYS Sets whether or not 4
feeding Mode setting paper <0-1> applying the Coated
at bypass Paper Mode on each
feeding paper type at bypass
677-1 Thick PRT 0 SYS printing. 4
paper 1 <0-1> 0: Normal mode
1: Coated Paper Mode
* Coated Paper Mode
677-2 Thick PRT 0 SYS - This mode is 4
paper 2 <0-1> selected when the
paper which often
causes the misfeed-
ing (ex. coated
677-3 Thick PRT 0 SYS paper) is used. The 4
paper 3 <0-1> occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
by lengthening the
677-4 OHP film PRT 0 SYS jam detection time. 4
<0-1> However, the print-
ing speed is low-
ered since the
677-5 Envelop PRT 0 SYS printing cycle is also 4
<0-1> lengthened with the
lengthened jam
detection time.

2 - 133
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
678 General Setting of banner advertis- ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not dis- 1
ing display <0-1> playing the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is dis-
played alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
679 General Banner advertising display ALL - SYS Maximum 27 letters 11
1 (one-byte character)
680 General Banner advertising display ALL - SYS Maximum 27 letters 11
2 (one-byte character)
681 General Display of [BANNER MES- ALL 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1
SAGE] button <0-1> 1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of “Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679)” and “Ban-
ner advertising dis-
play 2 (08-680)” on
the control panel.
682 Use Offsetting between jobs ALL 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
interface <0-1> 1: Valid
683 General Duplex printing setting ALL 1 SYS When the duplex print- 1
when coin controller is <0-1> ing is short paid with a
used coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is con-
sidered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this set-
ting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
684 General Rebuilding all databases ALL - SYS Rebuilds all databases. 3
685 General Rebuilding all databases ALL - SYS Rebuilds all databases 3
related to Address Book related to the Address
Book.
686 General Rebuilding all databases ALL - SYS Rebuilds all databases 3
related to log related to the logs.
689 FAX Adaptation of paper source FAX 0 SYS 0: Not subjected for 1
priority selection <0-1> APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
690 General HDD formatting ALL - SYS 2: Normal formatting 7
<2>
691 General HDD type display ALL - SYS 0: Not formatted 7
<0-2> 1: Not used
2: Normal format

2 - 134
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
692 Mainte- Performing panel calibra- ALL - SYS Performs the calibration 1
nance tion of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The cali- 2
bration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
693 General Initialization of NIC infor- ALL - SYS Returns the value to the 3
mation factory shipping default
value.
694 General Performing HDD testing ALL - SYS Checks the bad sector. 3
696 Scram- Installation of scrambler ALL 0 - 0: Not installed 2
bler board (Option) <0-1> 1: Installed
board
697 Paper Paper type priority PPC 1 SYS Sets the paper type pri- 1
feeding <1-2> ority during copying.
1: Normal paper
2: Thick paper 1
698 Scram- Entering the key code for ALL - - Start up this code and 5
bler scrambler board have the user enter the
board key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code can-
not be set again on
security grounds.
699 Scram- Erasing all data in HDD ALL - - This setting is effective 3
bler only when the scram-
board bler board is installed.
701 FAX Destination setting for FAX FAX EUR: 5 SYS 0: Japan 1
UC: 4 1: Asia
JPN: 0 2: Australia
Other: 1 3: Hong Kong
<0-25> 4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan

2 - 135
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
702 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 2 SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con- 1
nance function <0-2> trolled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
703 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL - SYS Maximum 256 Bytes 11
nance HTTP server
URL setting
704-0 Interruption of Copying ALL 1 SYS 0: Continues printing 4
stapling oper- <0-1> by switching sort
ation (no sta- setting
ple) 1: Interrupts printing
704-1 Printing / ALL 0 SYS 0: Continues printing 4
BOX print- <0-1> by switching sort
ing setting
1: Interrupts printing
707 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL https:// SYS Maximum 256 Bytes 11
nance HTTP initially-registered device.mf
server p-sup-
URL setting port.com:
443/
device/fir-
streg-
ist.ashx
710 Mainte- Short time interval setting ALL 24 SYS Sets the time interval to 1
nance of recovery from Emer- <1-48> recover from the Emer-
(Remote) gency Mode gency Mode to the Nor-
mal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
711 Mainte- Short time interval setting ALL 60 SYS Unit: Minute 1
nance of Emergency Mode <30-360>
715 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 1230 SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59) 1
nance periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
716 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Prohibited 1
nance Writing data of self-diag- <0-1> 1: Accepted
nostic code
717 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 3 SYS Unit: Minute 1
nance response waiting time <1-30>
(Timeout)
718 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
nance initial registration <0-3> 1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
3: Satellite communi-
cation starts
719 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL - SYS Maximum 10 letters 11
nance tentative password
720 Mainte- Status of remote-con- ALL 0 SYS 0: Not registered 2
nance trolled service initial regis- <0-1> 1: Registered
tration (Display only)
721 Mainte- Service center call function ALL 2 SYS 0: OFF 1
nance <0-2> 1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
723 Mainte- Service center call HTTP ALL - SYS Maximum 256 letters 11
nance server URL setting

2 - 136
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
726 Mainte- HTTP proxy setting ALL 1 SYS 0: Valid 1
nance <0-1> 1: Invalid
727 Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address ALL - SYS 000.000.000.000 - 11
nance setting 255.255.255.255 2
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
728 Mainte- HTTP proxy port number ALL 0 SYS 1
nance setting <0-
65535>
729 Mainte- HTTP proxy ID setting ALL - SYS Maximum 30 letters 11
nance
730 Mainte- HTTP proxy password set- ALL - SYS Maximum 30 letters 11
nance ting
731 Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display ALL 1 SYS 0: Valid 1
nance <0-1> 1: Invalid
732 Mainte- Automatic ordering func- ALL 3 SYS 0: Ordered by FAX 1
nance tion of supplies <0-3> 1: Ordered by E-mail
(Remote) 2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
733 Mainte- Automatic ordering func- ALL - SYS Maximum 32 digits 11
nance tion of supplies Enter hyphen with the
(Remote) FAX number [Monitor/Pause] button
734 Mainte- Automatic ordering func- ALL - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11
nance tion of supplies List: 256 digits
(Remote) E-mail address
738 Mainte- Automatic ordering func- ALL SYS Maximum 50 letters 11
nance tion of supplies
(Remote) User's name
739 Mainte- Automatic ordering func- ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits 11
(Remote) User's telephone number [Monitor/Pause] button
(Remote) User's E-mail address
(Remote) User's address
(Remote) Service number
(Remote) Service technician's name
(Remote) Service technician's tele- [Monitor/Pause] button
phone number
(Remote) Service technician's E-mail
address
(Remote) Supplier's name

2 - 137
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
(Remote) Supplier's address
(Remote) Notes
749 Mainte- Information about supplies ALL SYS Maximum 20 digits 11
nance Part number of toner car-
(Remote) tridge C
750 Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1
nance Order quantity of toner car- <1-99>
(Remote) tridge C
nance Condition number of toner <1-99>
(Remote) cartridge C
752 Mainte- Information about supplies ALL SYS Maximum 20 digits 11
(Remote) tridge M
(Remote) tridge M
(Remote) cartridge M
755 Mainte- Information about supplies ALL - SYS Maximum 20 digits 11
(Remote) tridge Y
(Remote) tridge Y
(Remote) cartridge Y
(Remote) tridge K
(Remote) tridge K
(Remote) cartridge K
nance Part number of toner bag
(Remote)
nance Order quantity of toner bag <1-99>
(Remote)
(Remote) bag
765 Mainte- Automatic ordering sup- ALL JPN: 2 SYS 0: Valid 1
nance plies UC: 0 (FAX/Internet FAX)
(Remote) Display EUR: 2 1: Valid
Others: 2 (FAX/Internet FAX/
<0-2> HTTP)
2: Invalid

2 - 138
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
767 Mainte- Service Notification setting ALL 0 SYS Enables to set up to 3 1
nance <0-2> E-mail
(Remote) addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778) 2
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
768 Mainte- Destination E-mail address ALL - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11
nance 1
(Remote)
769 Mainte- Total counter information ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
nance transmission setting <0-1> 1: Valid
(Remote)
770 Mainte- Total counter transmission ALL 0 SYS 0 to 31 1
nance date setting <0-31>
(Remote)
771 Mainte- PM counter notification set- ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
nance ting <0-1> 1: Valid
(Remote)
772 Mainte- Dealer's name ALL - SYS Maximum 100 letters 11
nance Needed at initial regis-
tration
773 Mainte- Login name ALL - SYS Maximum 20 letters 11
nance Needed at initial regis-
tration
774 Mainte- Display setting of [Service ALL JPN: 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1
nance Notification] button UC: 1 1: Displayed
(Remote) EUR: 0
<0-1>
775 Mainte- Sending error contents of ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
nance equipment <0-1> 1: Valid
(Remote)
776 Mainte- Setting total counter trans- ALL - SYS 1
nance mission interval
(Remote) (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
nance 2
(Remote)
nance 3
(Remote)
nance polling day selection Day-1 <0-31> 1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
1st to 31st of a
month
1st to 31st of a
month
1st to 31st of a
month

2 - 139
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
784 Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
nance polling day selection Sun- <0-1> 1: Valid
day
nance polling day selection Mon- <0-1> 1: Valid
day
nance polling day selection Tues- <0-1> 1: Valid
day
nance polling day selection <0-1> 1: Valid
Wednesday
nance polling day selection <0-1> 1: Valid
Thursday
nance polling day selection Friday <0-1> 1: Valid
nance polling day selection Satur- <0-1> 1: Valid
day
791 Mainte- Information of supplies set- ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
nance ting of toner cartridge C <0-1> 1: Valid
nance ting of toner cartridge M <0-1> 1: Valid
nance ting of toner cartridge Y <0-1> 1: Valid
nance ting of toner cartridge K <0-1> 1: Valid
nance ting of toner bag <0-1> 1: Valid
nance lengthened interval polling <0-1> 1: Valid
(End of month)
816 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL 1 M 0: Disabled 1
resistance detection con- <0-1> 1: Enabled
trol
817 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias ALL 1 M 0: Disabled 1
temperature detection con- <0-1> 1: Enabled
trol
818 Transfer Temperature correction ALL JPN: 1 M 0: No Damp Heater 1
factor table setting UC: 0 1: Damp Heater
EUR: 0 installed
Others: 1
<0-1>
819-0 Develop- Color auto- Y ALL 256 M Sets the target output 4
ment toner sensor (color) <0-1023> value of color auto-
819-1 output setting M ALL 256 M toner sensor to the 4
for initial (color) <0-1023> sleeve in the auto-toner
819-2 developer C ALL 256 M control. (This is set 4
material (color) <0-1023> when performing the
automatic adjustment of
auto-toner sensor.)

2 - 140
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
820-0 Develop- Color auto- Y ALL - M Displays the output 4
ment toner sensor (color) <0-1023> value of the color auto-
820-1 output M ALL - M toner sensor to the 4
display for (color) <0-1023> sleeve in color printing. 2
820-2 developer C ALL - M 4
material (color) <0-1023>
821 Develop- ON/OFF of the mode for ALL 0 M Sets whether or not 1
ment developer material stabili- (color) <0-1> performing an aging to
zation stabilize the status of
developer material
when the toner density
is uneven or the toner
charging amount is low-
ered.
0: ON
1: OFF
822-0 Develop- Number of Y ALL 0 M Displays the number of 4
ment times the (color) <0-255> times the developer
822-1 mode for M ALL 0 M material stabilization is 4
developer (color) <0-255> performed.
822-2 material stabi- C ALL 0 M 4
lization is per- (color) <0-255>
formed
823-0 Develop- Color auto- Y ALL 0 M Displays “1” when the 4
ment toner sensor/ (color) <0-1> abnormal output volt-
light amount age is detected for the
823-1 correction M ALL 0 M color auto-toner sensor 4
voltage abnor- (color) <0-1> light amount correction.
mal detection ([CF40] error)
823-2 C ALL 0 M 0: Normal 4
(color) <0-1> 1: Abnormality
detected
824-0 Develop- Color auto- Y ALL 0 M Displays “1” when the 4
ment toner sensor/ (color) <0-1> abnormal toner density
824-1 toner density M ALL 0 M detection voltage is 4
detection volt- (color) <0-1> detected. ([CF20] error)
824-2 age abnormal C ALL 0 M 0: Normal 4
detection (color) <0-1> 1: Abnormality
detected
849 Fuser Fusing control switching for ALL Other M 1
TWD and SAD models than
TWD and
SAD: 0
TWD and
SAD: 1
<0-1>
858-0 Develop- Color toner Y ALL 0 M Becomes “1” when the 14
ment forced supply (color) <0-1> toner density decreases
858-1 level display M ALL 0 M and it is judged forced 14
(color) <0-1> toner supply is needed.
858-2 C ALL 0 M 0: Normal level 14
(color) <0-1> 1: Forced supply level

2 - 141
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
859-0 Develop- Toner empty Y ALL 0 M Becomes “1” when 14
ment detection (color) <0-1> detecting the toner
859-1 M ALL 0 M empty. 14
(color) <0-1> 0: Normal
859-2 C ALL 0 M 1: Empty detected 14
(color) <0-1>
860-0 Develop- Color auto- Upper limit ALL 20 M Sets the range for judg- 4
ment toner sensor/ (color) <0-1023> ing whether the sensor
860-1 proper range Lower limit ALL 0 M output value when the 4
setting of OFF (color) <0-1023> sensor light source is
level voltage OFF is correct
or not.
ment toner sensor/ (color) <0-255> ing whether the adjust-
proper range ment result of sensor
861-1 setting of Lower limit ALL 40 M light amount is correct 4
standard light (color) <0-255> or not.
amount volt-
age
proper range output value for the ref-
862-1 setting of ref- Lower limit ALL 205 M erence plate is correct 4
erence plate (color) <0-1023> or not.
output
proper range output value for the
863-1 setting of Lower limit ALL 155 M sleeve is correct or not. 4
developer out- (color) <0-1023>
put
864 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ALL - M Displays the sensor 2
ment sensor OFF output value (color) <0-1023> output value when the
display at power ON sensor light source is
OFF at power ON.
865 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ALL - M Displays the sensor 2
ment reference plate output (color) <0-1023> output value with the
value display at power ON standard light amount
for the reference plate
at power ON.
ment toner sensor/ (color) <0-1023> ing whether the differ-
abnormal ence between the
detection sensor output when the
866-1 Develop- potential dif- Lower limit ALL 205 M sensor light source is 4
ment ference set- (color) <0-1023> OFF and the sensor
ting of output for the reference
reference plate is correct or not.
plate output
867 Develop- Color auto-toner control ALL 0 M Sets whether the sen- 1
ment environment and life light (color) <0-1> sor light amount is cor-
amount correction setting rected or not depending
on the environment and
life.
0: Correction
1: No correction

2 - 142
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
868 Develop- Color auto-toner adjust- ALL 4 M Sets the difference from 1
ment ment finishing range set- (color) <0-255> the target value for
ting judging whether the
color auto-toner adjust- 2
ment finishes correctly
or not.
869 Develop- Color auto-toner control ALL 5 M Sets the difference from 1
ment environment and life light (color) <0-255> the target value for
amount correction/correc- judging whether the
tion finishing range setting light amount correction
finishes correctly or not.
870 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ALL 3 M Sets the number of 1
ment setting of number of times (color) <0-255> times of continuous
of error detection at light error detection before
amount correction the light amount correc-
tion abnormality is dis-
played.
871 Develop- Color auto-toner control ALL 0 M Displays the number of 2
ment environment and life light (color) <0-255> times of the reference
amount correction/display plate detection error for
of number of times of refer- the environment and life
ence plate detection error light amount correction.
872 Develop- Color auto-toner control ALL 0 M Displays the number of 2
ment environment and life light (color) <0-255> times of the light
amount correction/display amount control voltage
of number of times of light adjustment error for the
amount control voltage environment and life
adjustment error light amount correction.
873-0 Develop- Color auto- Y ALL 256 M Sets the initial devel- 4
ment toner control/ (color) <0-1023> oper output target
873-1 Develop- developer ini- M ALL 256 M value. 4
ment tial output set- (color) <0-1023>
873-2 Develop- ting C ALL 256 M 4
ment (color) <0-1023>
874 Develop- Color developer life correc- ALL 0 M Sets whether the toner 1
ment tion (color) <0-1> density detection volt-
age correction is per-
formed or not
depending on the
developer life in the
color auto-toner control.
0: Corrected
1: Not corrected
875-0 Develop- Color devel- Y ALL 0 M Sets the correction 4
ment oper life cor- (color) <-512- amount of the toner
rection value 511> density detection volt-
875-1 (segment 0) M ALL 0 M age depending on the 4
(color) <-512- developer life. In this
511> code, the life count
875-2 C ALL 0 M within 0-2000 is set as 4
(color) <-512- the correction amount.
511>

2 - 143
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
876-0 Develop- Color devel- Y ALL -4 M Sets the correction 4
876-1 (segment 1) M ALL -2 M age depending on the 4
876-2 C ALL -2 M within 2001-5000 is set 4
(color) <-512- as the correction
511> amount.
877-2 C ALL -3 M within 5001-10000 is 4
(color) <-512- set as the correction
511> amount.
878-2 C ALL -4 M within 10001-20000 is 4
511> amount.
879-2 C ALL -5 M within 20001-30000 is 4
511> amount.
880-2 C ALL -6 M within 30001-37500 is 4
511> amount.
881-2 C ALL -6 M 37501 or more is set as 4
(color) <-512- the correction amount.
511>

2 - 144
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
900 Version System firmware ROM ver- ALL - - JPN: T410SY0JXXX 2
sion UC: T410SY0UXXX
EUR: T410SY0EXXX
Others: T410SY0XXXX 2
903 Version Engine ROM version ALL - - 410M-XXX 2
905 Version Scanner ROM version ALL - - 410S-XXX 2
907 Version RADF ROM version ALL - - DF-XXXX 2
908 Version Finisher ROM version ALL - - SDL-XX FIN-XX 2
911 Version Finisher punch ROM ver- ALL - - PUN-XXX 2
sion
915 Version FAX board ROM version FAX - - F562-XXX 2
920 Version FROM basic section soft- ALL - - VX.XX/X.XX 2
ware version
921 Version FROM internal program ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
922 Version UI data fixed section ver- ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
sion
923 Version UI data common section ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
version
924 Version Version of UI data lan- ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
guage 1 in HDD
guage 2 in HDD
guage 3 in HDD
guage 4 in HDD
guage 5 in HDD
guage 6 in HDD
930 Version Version of UI data in ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
FROM displayed at power-
ON
guage 7 in HDD
933 Version Web data whole version ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
934 Version Web UI data in HDD ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2
Version: Language 1
Version: Language 2
Version: Language 3
Version: Language 4
Version: Language 5
Version: Language 6
944 Version HD version ALL - - JPN: T410HD0JXXX 2
UC: T410HD0UXXX
EUR: T410HD0EXXX
Others: T410HD0XXXX
945 Network Two-way setting of Raw- ALL 2 UTY 1: Valid 12
Port 9100 <1-2> 2: Invalid

2 - 145
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
947 General Initialization after software ALL - - Perform this code when 3
version upgrade the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
949 General Automatic interruption ALL 0 SYS Sets the number of 1
page setting during black <0-100> pages to interrupt the
printing printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
950 Elec- Start-up method of Elec- ALL 0 SYS Sets the start-up 1
tronic tronic Filing <0-2> method of the Elec-
filing tronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
951 User Image setting for Electronic ALL 0 SYS 0: General 1
interface Filing printing (Only for <0-3> 1: Photograph
color image) 2: Presentation
3: Line art
953 User Access code entry for ALL 0 SYS 0: Renewed automati- 1
interface Electronic Filing printing <0-1> cally
1: Enter every time
954 User Clearing timing for files and ALL 1 SYS 0: Immediately after 1
interface Electronic Filing Agent <0-1> the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
969 User Error sound ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
970 User Sound setting when ALL EUR: 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
interface switching to Energy Saving UC: 1 1: ON
Mode JPN: 0
<0-1>
973 Network PCL line feed code setting PRT 0 SYS Sets the PCL line feed 1
<0-3> code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
975 General Job handling when print- ALL 1 SYS Sets whether pause or 1
ing is short paid with coin <0-1> stop the printing job
controller when it is short paid
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
976 Scanning Equipment name and user ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not 1
name setting to a folder <0-2> adding the equipment
when saving files name and user name to
the folder when saving
files.
0: Not add
1: Add the equipment
name
2: Add the user name

2 - 146
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
978 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: AUTO 1
(Paper feeding drawer) <0-5> 1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer
3: PFP upper drawer 2
4: PFP lower drawer
5: LCF
979 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: Roman-8 1
(PCL symbol set) <0-39> 1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
4: PC-8, Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850, Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura Interna-
tional
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United King-
dom
23: ISO 6: ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Nor-
wegian
29: ISO 69: French
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
983 User JOB STATUS initial screen ALL 0 SYS 0: Print 1
interface setting <0-1> 1: Private
986 General Copy function setting PPC 0 SYS Sets the copy function 1
<0-1> to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid

2 - 147
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
988 Paper Setting of paper size ALL 0 SYS 0: Not switched 1
feeding switching to 13" LG <0-2> 1: LG→13"LG
2: FOLIO→13"LG
995 Mainte- Equipment number ALL 0 SYS This code can be also 11
nance (serial number) display <10 dig- keyed in from the
its> adjustment mode (05-
976).
10 digits
999 Mainte- FSMS total counter ALL 0 SYS Refer to values of total 1
nance <8 digits> counter.
1002 Network Selection of NIC board sta- ALL 1 NIC 1: Not printed out 12
tus information <1-2> when the copier is
restarted
2: Printed out when
the copier is
restarted
1003 Network Communication speed and ALL 1 NIC 1: Auto 12
settings of Ethernet <1-5> 2: 10MBPS Half
Duplex
3: 10MBPS Full
Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half
Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full
Duplex
1006 Network Address Mode ALL 2 NIC 1: Fixed IP address 12
<1-3> 2: Dynamic IP address
3: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
1007 Network Domain name ALL - NIC Maximum 96 letters 12
1008 Network IP address ALL - NIC 000.000.000.000- 12
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1009 Network Subnet mask ALL - NIC 000.000.000.000- 12
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1010 Network Gateway ALL - NIC 000.000.000.000- 12
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1011 Network Availability of IPX ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
<1-2> 2: Not available
1012 Network Network frame type ALL 1 NIC 1: Automatic 12
<1-5> 2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1014 Network Availability of AppleTalk ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1015 Network Zone setting of AppleTalk ALL * NIC Maximum 32 letters 12
*: Wildcard character
1016 Network Availability of LDAP ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1017 Network Availability of DNS ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12

2 - 148
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1018 Network IP address to DNS server ALL - NIC 000.000.000.000- 12
(Primary) 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000) 2
1019 Network IP address to DNS server ALL - NIC 000.000.000.000- 12
(Secondary) 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1020 Network DDNS Desired level ALL 1 NIC 1: Invalid 12
<1-5> 2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
1022 Network From Name Creation set- ALL 0 SYS 0: Not edited 1
ting in SMTP authentica- <0-1> 1: Account name of
tion From Address
+Device name
1023 Network NetBios name ALL MFP_ UTY Maximum 15 letters 12
serial The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
1024 Network Name of WINS server or IP ALL - UTY 000.000.000.000- 12
address (Primary) 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1025 Network Name of WINS server or IP ALL - UTY 000.000.000.000- 12
address (Secondary) 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1026 Network Availability of Bindery ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1027 Network Availability of NDS ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1028 Network Directory service context ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
1029 Network Directory service tree ALL - NIC Maximum 47 letters 12
1030 Network Availability of HTTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1031 Network Port number to NIC HTTP ALL 80 NIC 12
server <1-
65535>
1032 Network Port number to system ALL 8080 NIC 12
HTTP server <1-
65535>
1037 Network Availability of SMTP client ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1038 Network FQDN or IP address to ALL - NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 12
SMTP server
1039 Network TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 NIC 12
client <1-
65535>
1040 Network Availability of SMTP server ALL 1 UTY 1: Available 12
1041 Network TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 UTY 12
server <1-
65535>

2 - 149
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1042 Network E-mail box name to SMTP ALL - UTY Maximum 192 letters 12
server
1043 Network Availability of Offramp ALL 2 UTY 1: Available 12
1044 Network Offramp security ALL 1 UTY 1: Available 12
1045 Network Printing at Offramp ALL 1 UTY 1: Available 12
1046 Network Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1047 Network FQDN or IP address to ALL - NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 12
POP3 server
1048 Network Types of POP3 server ALL 1 NIC 1: Automatic 12
<1-3> 2: POP3
3: APOP
1049 Network Login name to POP3 ALL - NIC Maximum 96 letters 12
server
1050 Network Login password to POP3 ALL - NIC Maximum 96 letters 12
1051 Network E-mail reception interval ALL 5 NIC Unit: Minute 12
<0-4096>
1052 Network TCP port number of POP3 ALL 110 NIC 12
client <1-
65535>
1055 Network TCP port number of FTP ALL 21 UTY 12
client <1-
65535>
1059 Network Availability of FTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1060 Network TCP port number of FTP ALL 21 UTY 12
server <1-
65535>
1063 Network MIB function ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid
1065 Network Setting of read Community ALL public NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
1066 Network Setting of read/Write Com- ALL private NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
munity
1069 Network TRAP destination IP ALL - UTY 000.000.000.000- 12
address 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1070 Network Community setting of ALL public NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
TRAP (via IP)
1073 Network Availability of Raw/TCP ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid
1074 Network TCP port number of Raw ALL 9100 NIC 12
<1-
65535>
1075 Network Availability of LPD client ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid
1076 Network TCP port number of LPD ALL 515 NIC 12
<1-
65535>
1077 Network LPD queue name ALL - NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
1078 Network Availability of IPP ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid

2 - 150
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1079 Network Availability of IPP port ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
number “80” <1-2> 2: Invalid
1080 Network TCP port number of IPP ALL 631 NIC 12
<1- 2
65535>
1081 Network IPP printer name ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
"serial"
1082 Network IPP printer location ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
1083 Network IPP printer information ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
(more)
1085 Network Installer of IPP printer ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
driver
1086 Network IPP printer “Make and ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
Model”
(more)
MFGR
1088 Network IPP message from opera- ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
tor
1089 Network Availability of FTP print ALL 1 NIC 1: Available 12
1090 Network Printer user name of FTP ALL print NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
1091 Network Printer user password of ALL - NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
FTP
1092 Network TCP port number to FTP ALL 21 NIC 12
print server <1-
65535>
1093 Network Login name to Novell print ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 47 letters 12
server serial The network-related
"serial"
1094 Network Login password to Novell ALL - NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
print server
1095 Network Name of SearchRoot ALL - NIC Maximum 31 letters 12
server
1096 Network Scan rate setting of print ALL 5 NIC Unit: Second 12
queue <1-255>
1097 Network Page number limitation for ALL 5 UTY 12
printing text of received <1-99>
Email
1098 Network MDN return mail setting ALL 2 UTY 1: Valid 12
when receiving E-mail <1-2> 2: Invalid
1099 Network Trap destination of IPX ALL - UTY 24 letters 12
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)

2 - 151
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1100 Network Method of SMTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Disable 12
authentication <1-7,10> 2: Plain
3: Login
4; Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
7: NTLM
10: Auto
1101 Network Login name for SMTP ALL - NIC Maximum 64 letters 12
server authentication
1102 Network Login password for SMTP ALL - NIC Maximum 64 letters 12
server authentication
1103 Network Rendezvous setting ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid
1104 Network Link local host name ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 127 letters 12
"serial"
1105 Network Service name setting ALL Refer to NIC Maximum 63 letters 12
contents The network-related
"serial"
<Default value>
e-STUDIO281C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO281C_serial
e-STUDIO351C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO351C_serial
e-STUDIO451C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO451C_serial
1111 Network POP Before SMTP setting ALL 2 NIC 1: Valid 12
<1-2> 2: Invalid
1112 Network Host name ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 63 letters 12
"serial"
1113 Network Windows domain No.1 of ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
user authentication
1114 Network Sending mail text of Inter- ALL 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1
netFAX <0-1> 1: Valid
1117 Network SMB time-out period ALL 300 SYS Unit: Second 1
<1-9999>
1118 General Clearing of TAT partition ALL - SYS 3
1119 Network Initialization of NIC infor- ALL - - Initializes only the infor- 3
mation mation of the Network
setting items.
1121 Network PDC (Primary Domain ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
Controller) name No.1 of
authentication
1122 Network BDC (Backup Domain ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
Controller) name No.1 of
authentication

2 - 152
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1123 Network Windows domain of device ALL 4 UTY 3: ON 12
authentication <3-4> (Domain selected)
4: OFF
(Work group 2
selected)
1124 Network Workgroup name ALL work- UTY Maximum 15 letters 12
group
1125 General Data writing of address ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
book data import <0-1> 1: Valid
(overwriting method)
1126 Counter Validity of interrupt copy- ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
ing when external counters <0-1> 1: Valid
are installed
1128 Network NetwareUserAuthTree ALL - UTY Maximum 47 letters 12
Name1
1129 Network NetwareUserAuthContext ALL - UTY Maximum 127 letters 12
Name1
1130 User Job Build Function ALL 1 SYS Sets the Job Build 1
interface <0-1> Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1131 User Maximum number of time ALL 1000 SYS Sets the maximum 1
interface job build performed <5-1000> number of time a job
build has been per-
formed.
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times
1132 General Default screen selection of ALL 1 SYS Selects the default 1
the User Function menu <0-1> screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
Name2
1135 Paper Default setting of drawers ALL 1 SYS 1: LCF 1
feeding (Printer/BOX) <1-5> 2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
1138 Network LDAP search method set- ALL 0 SYS Sets the search method 1
ting <0-3> when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
1139 Network LDAP authentication set- ALL 0 SYS 0: Not authenticated 1
ting <0-1> 1: Authenticated
1140 User Restriction of the template ALL 0 SYS Selects the restriction of 1
interface function with the adminis- <0-1> the template function
trator privilege usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.

2 - 153
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1141 Network Display of MAC address ALL - SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**) 2
The address is dis-
played as above (6-byte
data is divided by a
colon at every 2 bytes).
Name2
Name3
1145 Mainte- Counter notification ALL - SYS Maximum 32 digits 11
nance Remote FAX setting Enter a hyphen with the
(Remote) [MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Name3
1149 General Enhanced bold for PCL6 ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
<0-1> 1: ON
1370 Image Image quality control time ALL 0 M Counts driving count of 1
process- accumulating counter <8 digits> the drum (image qual-
ing ity control time).
Counts up when drum
motor and image quality
control are ON.
1371 Image Accumulated counter of ALL 0 M Cleared to “0” by the 2
process- output pages since the per- <4 digits> image quality closed-
ing forming of image quality loop control. Counts up
control with the number of
printing job received
after this control.
1372 Image Heater and energizing time ALL 0 M Counts up the heater 1
process- accumulating counter Dis- <8 digits> control time accumu-
ing play/0 clearing lated (when power of
the copier is ON) but
does not count at the
Sleep Mode. When the
counter value of the
fuser belt is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
PM support mode.
1378 Image Fuser roller ready tempera- ALL 0 M Counts up the heater 2
process- ture time accumulating <8 digits> control time accumu-
ing counter lated (on standby).
When the counter value
of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
1380 Image Fuser roller printing tem- ALL 0 M Counts up the heater 2
process- perature time accumulating <8 digits> control time accumu-
ing counter lated (during printing).
When the counter value
of the fuser belt is
sync at PM support
mode.

2 - 154
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1382 Image Fuser roller energy saving ALL 0 M Counts up the heater 2
process- temperature time accumu- <8 digits> control time accumu-
ing lating counter Display/0 lated (at energy saving
clearing mode). When the 2
counter value of the
fuser belt is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
PM support mode.
1385 Image Number of output pages ALL 0 M Counts up when the 1
process- (Thick paper 1) <8 digits> registration sensor is
ing ON. When the counter
value of the fuser belt is
sync at PM support
mode.
sync at PM support
mode.
sync at PM support
mode.
process- (OHP film) <8 digits> registration sensor is
sync at PM support
mode.
1389 Main Main charger wire clean- ALL 0 M Does not count up 1
charger ing counter display/0 clear- <5 digits> when cleaning is not
ing effective.
1390 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of 1
feeding (upper drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
feeding (lower drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
feeding (PFP upper drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.

2 - 155
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
feeding (PFP lower drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
feeding (bypass feed) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
feeding (LCF) <8 digits> times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
1396 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M When the number of 1
feeding upper limit value <8 digits> feeding retry (08-1390
(upper drawer) to 08-1395) exceeds
1397 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M the setting value, the 1
feeding upper limit value <8 digits> feeding retry will not be
(lower drawer) performed subse-
1398 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M quently. In case “0” is 1
feeding upper limit value <8 digits> set as a setting value,
(PFP upper drawer) however, the feeding
retry continues regard-
1399 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M less of the counter set- 1
feeding upper limit value <8 digits> ting value.
(PFP lower drawer) Refer to (Note 1).
1400 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M 1
feeding upper limit value <8 digits>
(bypass feed)
1401 Paper Feeding retry counter ALL 10 M 1
feeding upper limit value (LCF) <8 digits>
1410 Counter Black toner cartridge drive ALL 0 M 1
counts/0 clearing <8 digits>
1412 Counter Counter for tab paper ALL 0 M Counts up when the 1
<8 digits> registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
1414 Image Toner cartridge wrong ALL 0 M 0: ON 1
process- installation detection ON/ <0-1> 1: OFF
ing OFF setting
1415 Image Detection/control that the ALL 0 M Sets ON or OFF of the 1
process- toner cartridge is nearly <0-2> detection/control that
ing empty the toner cartridge is
nearly empty.
0: All colors (Y/M/C/K)
OFF
1: Black (K) ON
2: All colors (Y/M/C/K)
ON
1416 Image Threshold for detecting ALL 322500 M 1
process- that black toner cartridge is <8 digits>
ing nearly empty

2 - 156
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1422 Data HDD data overwriting type ALL 0 SYS Select the type of the 1
over- setting <0-2> overwriting level; LOW,
write kit MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data. 2
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
1424 Data HDD data clearing type ALL 0 SYS Select the type of the 1
over- setting (forcible clearing) <0-2> overwriting level; LOW,
write kit MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
1426 Data Forcible HDD data clearing ALL - - HDD data is cleared in 3
over- the procedure set in 08-
write kit 1424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
1427 Data Forcible NVRAM data all ALL - - When this code is per- 3
over- clearing formed, the equipment
write kit cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
1428 Data Forcible SRAM backup ALL - - When this code is per- 3
over- data all clearing formed, the equipment
write kit cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
1429 User Margin width ALL Front: 7/ SYS This setting is not 10
interface (Top/Bottom, Left/Right) Back: 7 reflected in "Right",
<2-100/- even if the value less
100-100> than 2 is set for "Back".
1430 User Margin width ALL 14 SYS 1
interface (Bookbinding margin) <2-30>
1431 Network ACC ALL 1 SYS 0: ACC prohibited 1
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE) <0-2> 1: Only in the same
for Printer/Box printing paper direction
2: In both same direc-
tion and different
directions
1432 Network Private-print-only mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal 1
<0-1> 1: Private-print-only
mode

2 - 157
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1435 Network "Disable private and proof ALL 0 SYS 0: Function OFF (no 1
print save" function <0-1> restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
1436 Network "Disable fax save" function ALL 0 SYS 0: Function OFF (no 1
<0-1> restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
1440 Network IP Conflict Detect ALL 1 - OFF/ON 12
<1-2> 1: Valid
2: Invalid
1441 Network SNTP Enable ALL 2 - OFF/ON 12
<1-2> 1: Valid
2: Invalid
1442 Network SNTP Polling rate ALL 24 - Data obtaining interval 12
<1-168> (Unit: Hour)
1444 Network Primary SNTP Address ALL - - SNTP server IP 12
Address (Primary)
1445 Network Secondary SNTP Address ALL - - SNTP server IP 12
Address (Secondary)
1446 Network Port number to SNTP ALL 123 - 12
<1-
65535>
1447 Network IPP administrator name ALL - - This should be an 12
account which can con-
trol all IPP jobs.
1448 Network IPP administrator pass- ALL - - This should be the 12
word password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.
1449 Network IPP authentication method ALL 1 - 1: Disabled 12
<1-4> 2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
1450 Network User name for IPP authen- ALL - - This should be the 12
tication account at the time IPP
authentication was per-
formed.
1451 Network Password for IPP authenti- ALL - - This should be the 12
cation password of the
account at the time IPP
authentication was per-
formed.
1464 Network Samba server ON/OFF ALL 1 NIC 1: Samba enabled 12
setting <1-4> 2: Samba disabled
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
1468 General User data management ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
limitation setting (color) <0-1> 1: Enabled

2 - 158
05/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1469 General User data management ALL 0 SYS 0-9,999,999: 1
limitation Setting by num- (color) <7 digits> 0-9,999,999 sheets
ber of printouts
1470 General Device authentication func- ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF 1 2
tion setting <0-1> 1: ON
1471 General User authentication ALL 0 SYS 0: Local 1
method <0-5> 1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
4: Netware
automatic registration func- <0-1> 1: Enabled
tion setting
limitation setting (black) <0-1> 1: Enabled
1474 General User data management ALL 0 SYS 0-9,999,999: 1
limitation Setting by num- (black) <7 digits> 0-9,999,999 sheets
ber of printouts
1476 Network Restriction on Address ALL 0 SYS Some restrictions can 1
book operation by adminis- <0-1> be given on the admin-
trator istrator for operating the
Address book.
0: No restriction
1: Can be operated
only under the
administrator's
authorization
1477 Network Restriction on "To" ("cc") ALL 0 SYS 0: No restriction 1
address <0-3> 1: Can be set from
both of the Address
book and LDAP
server
2: Can be set only
from the Address
book
3: Can be set only
from the LDAP
server
1478 User Display of paper size set- ALL JPN: 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1
interface ting by installation opera- UC: 1 1: Displayed
tion of drawers <0-1>
1479 User Default setting of sharp- ALL 5 SYS 1: -4 2: -3 1
interface ness <1-9> 3: -2 4: -1
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
1481 General User data management ALL - - All the user data in the 3
clearing database and backup
files can be deleted.
1482 General User data department ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
management <0-1> 1: Enabled
1483 General User data recovery ALL - - The data in the data- 3
base is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.

2 - 159
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1484 Network Authentication method of ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
"Scan to Email" <0-2> 1: SMTP authentica-
tion
2: LDAP authentica-
tion
1485 Network Setting whether use of the ALL 0 SYS 0: Not permitted 1
Internet FAX is permitted at <0-1> 1: Permitted
the time of authentication
1487 Network "From" address assign- ALL 0 SYS 0: User name + @ + 1
ment method at the time of <0-2> Domain name
authentication 1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail set-
ting
1489 Network Setting for "From" address ALL 0 SYS 0: Not permitted 1
edit at "Scan to Email" <0-1> 1: Permitted
1491 Network E-mail domain name ALL - SYS 96 + 2 (delimiter) char- 11
acter
* ASCll sequence
only
1492 Paper Detection method of 13" ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
feeding LG for single-size docu- <0-1> 1: Enabled
ment
1493 Network Role Base Access Func- ALL 0 SYS 0: Function off (No 1
tion <0-1> restriction on data
saving and other
operations)
1: Function on (Data
saving and other
operations have
some restrictions)
1494 General Limitation check method ALL 0 SYS 0: Checked at every 1
<0-1> page printed
1: Checked at every
job printed
1495 Mainte- Service call checking ALL 6 - 0: No checking period 1
nance period setting <0-12> specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)

2 - 160
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1496 General Operation setting for User ALL 1 SYS 0 : Disables operation 1
authentication/registration <0-1> setting for User
authentication/regis-
tration 2
1 : Enables operation
setting for User
authentication/regis-
tration
1497 Elec- e-Filing Access Mode (for ALL 0 SYS 0: Mode 1 1
tronic Fil- Client) <0-2> 1: Mode 2
ing 2: Mode 3
1498 FAX Inbound FAX function FAX 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
(Forwarding by TSI) <0-1> (Function disabled)
1: ON
(Function enabled)
1530-0 Counter Number of 1-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
output pages Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed
in black mode printing only in the black mode.
1530-1 2-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed in
printing the black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
Simplex (black) <8 digits> sheets printed in the
printing black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[4IN1].
[4IN1].
Simplex (black) <8 digits> sheets printed only in
printing the black mode.

2 - 161
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
output pages Duplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed
in full color printing only in the full color
mode mode.
Duplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed in
printing the full color mode
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-
ZINE SORT].
Simplex (color) <8 digits> sheets printed in the full
printing color mode using [2IN1]
or [MAGAZINE SORT].
using [4IN1].
printing color mode using
[4IN1].
Simplex (color) <8 digits> sheets printed only in
printing the full color mode.
in twin color printing only in the twin color
mode mode.
printing the twin color mode
ZINE SORT].
Simplex (color) <8 digits> sheets printed in the
printing twin color mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
using [4IN1].
[4IN1].
printing the twin color mode.

2 - 162
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1533-0 Counter Number of 1-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
output pages Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed in
of the printer printing the black mode.
1533-1 or BOX 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 2
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
* When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
1533-2 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[4IN1].
[4IN1].
1533-5 N-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
[N IN1].
printing black mode using [N
IN1].

2 - 163
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
of the printer printing only in the full color
or BOX mode.
1534-1 (Full color) 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
ZINE SORT].
* When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
or [MAGAZINE SORT].
using [4IN1].
[4IN1].
using [N IN1].
printing color mode using [N
IN1].
1535-0 Counter Number of 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
output pages Duplex (black) <8 digits> sheets in the default
of the FAX printing settings.
1535-7 printing 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS 4
(1-UP / Simplex (black) <8 digits>
Duplex print- printing
ing)
1661 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL - - Maximum 32 letters 12
LAN SSID
1662 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Infrastructure 12
LAN Network type <1-2> 2: Ad-Hoc
1663 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 4 - 1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK 12
LAN Security <1-7> 3: WEP 4: NONE
5: WPA 6: WPA2
7: WPA2PSK
1664 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: TKIP 2: AES 12
LAN Encryption system <1-3> 3: Dynamic WEP
1665 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: 100% 2: 50% 12
LAN Transmission output power <1-5> 3: 25% 4: 12.5%
5: min

2 - 164
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1666 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Auto 2: Manual 12
LAN Transmission rate <1-2>
1667 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: 1 2: 2 12
LAN Transmission rate value <1-12> 3: 5.5 4: 11 2
5: 6 6: 9
7: 12 8: 18
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
1668 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Auto 2: Manual 12
LAN Operation channel <1-2>
1669 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 12
LAN Operation channel value <1-11>
1670 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1:64 2: 128 12
LAN WEP bit number <1-3> 3: 152
1671 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 2 - 1: Hex 2: ASCII 12
LAN WEP key entry system <1-2>
LAN WEP key value
LAN WPA-PSK passphrase
1674 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Off 2: Max 12
LAN Sleep mode setting <1-3> 3: Normal
1675 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Long 2: Short 12
LAN Slot-time limitation <1-2>
1676 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 5 - 12
LAN Number of times of soft- <0-1000>
ware retry
1677 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: Long 2: Longshort 12
LAN Preamble <1-2>
1678 Wireless Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 - 1: All 2: 11b 12
LAN Operation mode <1-3> 3: 11g
1679 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - This setting is whether 12
LAN Wireless LAN setting <1-3> the wireless LAN con-
nection is enabled or
disabled.
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
1681 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL - - This should be the path 12
LAN Path name for client certifi- name in full where the
cate client certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
LAN Path name for secret key name in full where the
of client certificate client certificate is
located.
LAN Path name for CA self-cer- name in full where the
tificate CA self-certificate is
located.
1685 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL - - This should be the user 12
LAN EAP user name name when the EAP-
TLS is used.

2 - 165
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1686 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL - - This should be the user 12
LAN EAP user name name when the PEAP
is used.
1689 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 30 - This should be the time- 12
LAN Authentication interval <30- out interval between
65535> EAP responses.
30: 30 seconds
1690 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 60 M The EAP authentica- 12
LAN Holding interval <60- tion will start after hav-
65535> ing been waited in this
period when an EAP
failure was received.
60: 60 seconds
1691 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 3 M When an EAPOL-Start 12
LAN EAPOL-Start <1- packet has been sent
Number of times of packet 65535> and the request ID can-
retry not be received, this
EAPOL-Start packet will
be re-sent for the num-
ber of times set in this
code.
3: 3 times
1692 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 2 - This setting is whether 12
LAN Session resume <1-2> the pre-master key
should be updated or
not upon a TLS re-
negotiation.
1: Session is resumed
2: Session is not
resumed
1693 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1398 - This is a MAC frame 12
LAN MAC Frame size <1-1398> size used in the wire-
less LAN connection.
The data is fragmented
into this size.
1398: 1398 bytes
1696 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL /dev/ - This should be the 12
LAN Device file setting for urandom device file name which
obtaining random number can obtain a seed to ini-
tialize the WEP PRNG
for xsupplicant.
LAN CRL directory designation name of the directory in
full where the CRL file
is located.
1699 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - This setting is for the 12
LAN EAP authentication type <1-3> EAP authentication
type which xsupplicant
can authenticate.
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
1700 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL - - This should be an 12
LAN CN name authentication server
name (basically a
domain name in full).

2 - 166
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1701 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - 1: NO 2: YES 12
LAN CN name check <1-2>
1704 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 0 - The update interval of a 12
LAN Update interval of PTK <0-720> secret key across AP 2
(Pairwise Transient Key) (Access Point) and STA
(Station) can be set.
This interval is for
updating the secret key
from STA.
0: Not updated
1-720: 1-720 minutes of
interval
1705 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - The Ack bit and request 12
LAN Strict packet check <1-2> bit of EAPOL-Key is
checked.
1: Not checked
2: Checked
1706 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - A higher priority is given 12
LAN Priority change at 4-way <1-2> to the xsupplicant task
handshake when a 4-way hand-
shake is started.
1: Priority not changed
2: Priority changed
1707 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 - The encryption capabil- 12
LAN Security level <1-3> ity output in TLS clien-
tHello message can be
selected.
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE
3: HIGH
1708 Selectable security level ALL 1 - These are the security 12
(EAP-TLS) <1-3> level which can be
selected from the user
interface. This setting is
not applied in case of
PEAP. ("LOW" and
"MIDDLE" is manda-
tory for PEAP)
1: LOW + MIDDLE +
HIGH
2: MIDDLE + HIGH
3: HIGH
1710 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
tooth ON/OFF setting <0-1> 1: ON
1711 Blue- Bluetooth ALL MFP SYS Maximum 32 letters 11
tooth Device name
1712 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Not allowed 1
tooth Discovery <0-1> 1: Allowed
1713 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Security function 1
tooth Security <0-1> OFF
1: Security function
ON
1714 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 0000 SYS Maximum 8 digits 11
tooth PIN (8-digit sequence)
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.

2 - 167
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1715 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Not encrypted 1
tooth Data encryption <0-1> 1: Encrypted
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
1719 Blue- Bluetooth ALL 0 SYS 0: Fit page 1
tooth BIP Paper type <0-3> 1: 1/2 size
2: 1/4 size
3: 1/8 size
1720 Network IP address range for IP fil- ALL - - IP filter minimum area 1 12
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 1) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1721 Network IP address range for IP fil- ALL - - IP filter maximum area 12
ter 1
(Maximum area 1) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter I 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 2) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 2
(Maximum area 2) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 3) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 3
(Maximum area 3) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 4) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 4
(Maximum area 4) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 5) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

2 - 168
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
ter 5
(Maximum area 5) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255 2
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 6) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 6
(Maximum area 6) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 7) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 7
(Maximum area 7) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 8) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 8
(Maximum area 8) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 000.000.000.000-
(Minimum area 9) 255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
ter 9
(Maximum area 9) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1738 Network IP address range for IP fil- ALL - - IP filter minimum area 12
ter 10
(Minimum area 10) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

2 - 169
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
ter 10
(Maximum area 10) 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1740 Network SSL setting ALL 2 - 1: Enabled 12
SSL ftp server OFF/ON <1-2> 2: Disabled
1741 Network SSL setting ALL 10443 - SSL HTTP server port 12
HTTP server port number <1- number
65535>
1742 Network SSL setting ALL 2 - 1: Enabled 12
IPP server OFF/ON setting <1-2> 2: Disabled
1743 Network SSL setting ALL 443 - SSL IPP server port 12
IPP server port number <1- number
65535>
1744 Network SSL setting ALL 2 - OFF/ON 12
SSL ftp server OFF/ON <1-2> 1: Valid
2: Invalid
1745 Network SSL setting ALL 990 - Port number to FTP 12
SSL ftp server Port <1- Server
65535>
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON <1-3> 1: Valid
2: Invalid
3: Use imported certifi-
cate
1747 Network SSL setting ALL 636 - Port number to LDAP 12
SSL LDAP Client Port <1- Server
65535>
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON <1-3> 1: Valid
2: Invalid
cate
1749 Network SSL setting ALL 995 - Port number to POP3 12
SSL POP3 Client Port <1- Server
65535>
1750 Network SSL setting ALL 2 - 2: Invalid 12
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON <2-6> 3: Accept all certifi-
cates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
4: Accept all certifi-
cates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
cates of SMTP with
TLS (STARTTLS)
server
cates of SMTPS
(SMTP OverSSL)
server
1751 Network SSL setting ALL 465 - Port number to SMTP 12
SSL SMTP Client Port <1- Server
65535>

2 - 170
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1755 Network Enabling server's IP ALL 2 - Domain Name Server 12
address acquired by DHCP <1-2> option (6)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled 2
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1756 Network Enabling server's IP ALL 2 - NetBIOS over TCP/IP 12
address acquired by DHCP <1-2> Name Server option
(44) = Primary and
Secondary Wins NAME
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1757 Network Enabling server's IP ALL 1 - The Host Name Ven- 12
address acquired by DHCP <1-2> dor Extension option
(12)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
This value is used only
when DHCP is enabled.
1762 Network Enabling server's IP ALL 2 - SNTP Server Option 12
address acquired by DHCP <1-2> (42) NTP Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1764 Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant ALL - - Maximum 255 letters 12
LAN Control sequence setting
of "Cipher Suite"
LAN Path name for user certifi-
cate
LAN Path name entered for CA
self-certificate
1767 Network Enabling server's IP ALL 2 SYS DNS domain name 12
address acquired by DHCP <1-2> Option (15) DNS
domain name of the cli-
ent
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1768 Network Previous IP address ALL - - 000.000.000.000- 12
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)

2 - 171
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1772 General Card reading device set- ALL 0 SYS To enable the e-Bridge 5
ting <8 digits> ID Gate, a card reading
device should be set in
the order of
"ABYYZZZZ". (Enter
the corresponding val-
ues to "A", "B", "YY"
and "ZZZZ".)
- AB:Special setting
- A :Debugging NIC
0: Not used
1: Used
- B :Interface
0: USB connection
1: N/A
- YY: Authentication
00: No authentica-
tion using a noncon-
tact IC card
02: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2003)
03: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2005)
04: Authentication
using a noncontact
IC card (KP-2004)
- ZZZZ: Sub-code
0000: No authenti-
cation using a non-
contact IC card
0001: Use CSN
(Card Serial Num-
ber) of a noncon-
tact IC card
0002: Use the Data
Area Address Infor-
mation of a noncon-
tact IC card

2 - 172
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1773 General Card reader format infor- ALL - SYS To access the data in 5
mation -1 the noncontact IC card,
the Key Information
"LLLL" and the Sector 2
Number "MMMM"
should be set.
The "LLLL" should be
set first, and then
"MMMM".
KP-2003:
LLLL: System code
(hexadecimal number)
MMMM: Service code
KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
1774 General Card reader format infor- ALL - SYS The data of the block 5
mation -2 number in the noncon-
tact IC is set.
KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU
(hexadecimal number)>
PP:1st block
Q: 1st block beginning
byte
R: 1st block ending-
byte
SS:2nd block
T: 2nd block begin-
ning byte
U: 2nd block ending
byte
KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block num-
ber
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
* If the 2nd block/area is

not used, set the SSTU
to "FFFF" (hexadeci-
mal number), the bse
to"FFF" (hexadecimal
number).

2 - 173
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1775 General Card reader format infor- ALL - SYS Security key 5
mation -3 “KKKKKKKKKKKK” (12
digits) <hexadecimal
number> in the [Key
Information] of the [Sec-
tor Number] set in the
code 08-1773 should
be entered.
1776 General Card authentication LDAP ALL 0 SYS LDAP server number 1
server <0-100> for the card authentica-
tion when a noncontact
IC card is used should
be set.
1777 General Card authentication LDAP ALL - SYS LDAP search index 11
search index when a noncontact IC
card is used is set.
1778 General Hang-up period of control ALL 1 SYS 0: No hang-up 1
panel at the 3rd misentry of <0-7> 1: 0.5 minutes (= 30
administrator's password seconds)
2: 1 minute
3: 3 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: 10 minutes
6: 15 minutes
7: 30 minutes
1779 Network Default data saving direc- ALL 0 SYS 0: Local directory 1
tory of "Scan to File" <0-2> 1: REMOTE 1
2: REMOTE 2
1781-0 Network Notification of When job ALL 0 SYS Sets the notification 4
scan job completed <0-1> method of scan job
1781-1 On error ALL 0 SYS completion. 4
<0-1> 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1782 Network File name format of "Save ALL 0 SYS Sets the naming 1
as file" and Email transmis- <0-6> method of the file of
sion "Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [FileName]-[Data]-
[Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page]-
[Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName]-
[Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[File-
Name]
4: [Page]-[FileName]-
[Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[File-
Name]
6: [HostName]_[Data]-
[Page]

2 - 174
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1783 Network Date display format of the ALL 0 SYS Sets the data display 1
file name of "Save as file" <0-5> format of the file of
and Email transmission "Save as file" and Email
transmission. 2
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
1: [YY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
5: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS][mm0]
The order of [YY], [MM]

and [DD] varies
depending on the set-
ting of the code 08-640
(Data display format).
1784 Network Single page data saving ALL 0 SYS Sets the directory 1
directory at "Save as file" <0-1> where the file of "Save
as file" is saved.
0: Save it under a sub-
folder
1: Save it without cre-
ating a subfolder
1785 Network Page number display for- ALL 4 SYS Sets the digit of a page 1
mat of the file of "Save as <3-6> number attached on the
file" and Email transmis- file.
sion 3-6: 3-6 digits
1786 Network Extension (suffix) format of ALL 3 SYS Sets the extension dig- 1
the file of "Save as file" <3-6> its of the file to be
saved.
3: Auto
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
1800-0 Image Color toner Y ALL 70 M Sets the motor driving 4
process- forced supply (color) <0-255> time of the developer
1800-1 ing time setting M ALL 70 M unit at the time of the 4
(color) <0-255> color toner forced sup-
1800-2 C ALL 70 M ply. 4
(color) <0-255> 0-255: Setting value x
0.1 seconds
1801 Image Color toner forced supply ALL 7 M Sets the number of 1
process- count setting (color) <1-10> times of the color toner
ing forced supply.

2 - 175
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1802-0 Image Start up set- Level ALL 3 M Sets the performing 4
process- ting of the <2-8> level of the developer
ing developer material stabilizing
material stabi- operation.
1802-1 lizing mode. Pattern ALL 50 M Set the interval time 4
interval <0-100> between performances
of developer material
stabilizing operation.
1802-2 Number of ALL 10 M Set the number of 4
repeating <0-20> repeating times of the
time developer material sta-
bilizing operation.
1911 Finisher Manual stapling time-out ALL 15 M 3-30sec. 1
period <3-30> (In increments of 1sec.)
1912 Finisher Finisher model switching ALL 0 M 0: MJ-1023 1
setting value <0-1> 1: MJ-1101
1913 General Page number addition on ALL 0 SYS 1
multipage file names of <0-1>
"File/Email"
1914 General Maximum number of deci- ALL 2 SYS 0: 0 digit 1
mals in extension fields <0-6> 1: 1 digit
2: 2 digits
3: 3 digits
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
1915 Network Filing size for Network ALL 0 SYS 0: Eliminates 2 mm 1
scanning function <0-1> from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
1916 General Default saving/attachment ALL 0 SYS 1
files of "File/Email" <0-1>
1920 Network Device domain name of ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
device authentication
1921 Network Windows domain No. 2 of ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
user authentication
1922 Network Windows domain No. 3 of ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
user authentication
1923 Network LDAP authentication ALL 1 NIC 1: Windows Server 12
Server type <1-2> 2: Not Windows Server
1924 Network LDAP authentication ALL - NIC Sets a user attribute 12
User attribute name.
1925 Network Execution of user authenti- ALL 2 SYS 0: Forcible execution 1
cation when the user ID is <0-2> 1: Execution impossi-
not entered ble (pooled in the
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
1926 FAX Tab/cover sheet printing at ALL 0 SYS Sets on or off of the 1
FAX reception <0-1> printing function of spe-
Printing stop function cial sheets such as tab
or cover sheet of FAX,
Email or list print.
0: Function off
1: Function on

2 - 176
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1927 Network LDAP server attribute ALL eBMUser SYS Up to 32 letters 11
name setting for card Card
authentication
1928 Network Role Based Access ALL 0 SYS 5 2
LDAP search index <0-
4294967
295>
1929 User Key arrangement for lan- ALL 0 SYS 0: QWERTY layout 1
interface guage 1 <0-2> (for EUR)
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1931 User Key arrangement for lan- ALL EUR: 2 SYS 0: QWERTY layout 1
interface guage 3 UC: 0 (for EUR)
JPN: 0 1: QWERTZ layout
<0-2> 2: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTZ layout
2: AZERTY layout
1936 Network AppleTalk device name ALL MFP- UTY Maximum 32 letters 12
serial The Network-related
"serial".

2 - 177
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1937 Network User name and password ALL 0 SYS 0: User name and 1
at user authentication or <0-2> password of the
"Save as file" device
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registra-
tion information
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
1938 General Reformatting process due ALL - - Use this setting to refor- 7
to a version change of SYS <0-2> mat the specific parti-
ROM tion whose file system
has been changed in
Ver.2, at the version up/
downgrade of the SYS
ROM.
No reformatting pro-
cess shall be used in
any cases other than
this version change.
0: Waiting (No refor-
matting)
1: dosFs to catFs (Ver-
sion upgrade from
Ver.1 to Ver.2 or
later)
2: catFs to dosFs (Ver-
sion downgrade
from Ver.2 or later to
Ver.1)
1940 General STAGE port number SCN 20080 SYS Port number used for 1
<0- the remote scanning is
65535> set.
1941 Blue- Bluetooth ALL EUR: 6 SYS 0: Ledger 1: Legal
tooth BIP Paper size UC: 2 2: Letter 3: Computer
JPN: 6 4: Statement 5: A3
<0-13> 6: A4 7: A5
8: A6 9: B4
10: B5 11: Folio
12: Legal13"
13: LetterSquare
1950 Network SMB signature for SMB ALL 1 UTY 1: Auto 12
server <0-3> 2: Valid
3: Invalid
1951 Network SMB signature for SMB cli- ALL 1 UTY 1: Auto 12
ent <0-3> 2: Valid
3: Invalid
1952 Network Device name for device ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
authentication

2 - 178
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1953 Network Password for the device ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
name used for device
authentication
1954 Network PDC2 of user authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 2
tion
1955 Network BDC2 of user authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
tion
1956 Network PDC3 of user authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
tion
1957 Network BDC3 of user authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
tion
1958 Network PDC of device authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
tion
1959 Network BDC of device authentica- ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12
tion
1960 General KS Filter operation mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled 1
<0-1> 1: Enabled
1961 General KS/KSSM setting all clear- ALL - - Does not reset the 3
ing value of the code 08-
1960 but resets those
of the codes 08-1963 to
1994.
1963 General KS Filter Emulation Mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Auto 1
<0-2> 1: KS
2: KSSM
1964 General KS Filter Paper Size ALL 1 SYS 0: A3 1
<0-5> 1: A4
2: B4
3: B5
4: Letter
5: Legal
1965 General KS Filter Orientation ALL 0 SYS 0: Portrait 1
<0-1> 1: Landscape
1966 General KS Filter Copies ALL 1 SYS 1
<1-999>
1967 General KS Paper Source ALL 0 SYS 1
<0-1>
1968 General KS Duplex Mode ALL 0 SYS 1
<0-2>
1970 General KS CPI (English CPI/ ALL 1 SYS 0: (5/10) 1
Hangle CPI) <0-10> 1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
1971 General KS LPI ALL 60 SYS Key in the value 10 1
<30-160> times as the desired
font size.
(e.g.: Key in "45" for a
font size 4.5.)

2 - 179
06/08
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1972 General KS Type Face ALL 0 SYS 0: MYUNGJO 1
<0-5> 1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
1973 General KS Font Size ALL 96 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 10.0.)
1974 General KS Zoom ALL 100 SYS 1
<20-400>
1975 General KS CR/LF Mode ALL 2 SYS 0: CR->CR, 1
<0-3> LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
1976 General KS Top Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 4.0.)
1977 General KS Left Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 4.0.)
1978 General KS Auto Wrap ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
<0-1> 1: ON
1979 General KS Han Mode ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
<0-1> 1: ON
1980 General KS Han Code ALL 0 SYS 0: Wansung 1
<0-1> 1: Johap
1984 General KSSM CPI ALL 1 SYS 0: (5/10) 1
(English CPI/ Hangle CPI) <0-10> 1: (6/12)
2: (6.7/13.3)
3: (6.9/13.8)
4: (7.5/15)
5: (8.3/16.7)
6: (9/18)
7: (10/10)
8: (10/20)
9: (12/24)
10: (15/30)
1985 General KSSM LPI ALL 60 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 4.5.)

2 - 180
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1986 General KSSM Type Face ALL 0 SYS 0: MYUNGJO 1
<0-5> 1: GOTHIC
2: GUNGSEO
3: GULLIM 2
4: GRAPH
5: SAMMUL
1987 General KSSM Font Size ALL 96 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 10.0.)
1988 General KSSM Zoom ALL 100 SYS 1
<20-400>
1989 General KSSM CR/LF Mode ALL 2 SYS 0: CR->CR, 1
<0-3> LF->LF
1: CR->CR+LF,
LF->LF
2: CR->CR,
LF->CR+LF
3: CR->CR+LF,
LF->CR+LF
1990 General KSSM Top Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 4.0.)
1991 General KSSM Left Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 1
font size.
font size 4.0.)
1992 General KSSM Auto Wrap ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
<0-1> 1: ON
1993 General KSSM Han Mode ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1
<0-1> 1: ON
1994 General KSSM Han Code ALL 0 SYS 0: Wansung 1
<0-1> 1: Johap
3635 General Proof copy function setting ALL 1 SYS Sets the proof copy 1
<0~1> function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3722 Network Device authentication ALL 60 NIC Applied to the device 12
PDC/BDC time-out period <1-180> authentication
(Unit: Seconds)
3723 Network User authentication PDC/ ALL 30 NIC Applied to the user 12
BDC time-out period (Unit: <1-180> authentication
Seconds)
3724 Network Windows domain authenti- ALL 1 NIC 1: Auto 12
cation of device/user <1-3> 2: Kerberos
authentication 3: NTLMv2
3725 Network IPP max connection ALL 16 NIC 12
<1-16>
3726 Network IPP active connection ALL 10 NIC 12
<1-16>
3727 Network LPD max connection ALL 10 NIC 12
<1-16>

2 - 181
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3728 Network LPD active connection ALL 10 NIC 12
<1-16>
3729 Network ATalk PS max Connection ALL 10 NIC 12
<1-16>
3730 Network ATalk PS active Connec- ALL 10 NIC 12
tion <1-16>
3731 Network Raw TCP max connection ALL 10 NIC 12
<1-16>
3732 Network Raw TCP active connec- ALL 10 NIC 12
tion <1-16>
3736 Network DNS Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at DNS client
connection
3737 Network DDNS Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at DDNS cli-
ent connection
3738 Network HTTP Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at HTTP cli-
ent connection
3739 Network FTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout 12
(SCAN) <1-180> occurred at FTP client
connection
3740 Network SNTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at SNTP client
connection
3741 Network SMTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at SMTP client
connection
3742 Network POP3 Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at POP3 client
connection
3743 Network LDAP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout 12
<1-180> occurred at LDAP cli-
ent connection
3744 Network POP3 Authentication ALL 1 NIC POP3 authentication 12
method <1-3> method setting
1: Disable (Default)
2: NTLM
3: Kerberos
3745 General Secure DDNS Primary ALL - NIC Login name for login 12
Login Name <1-128> with the Primary DDNS
3746 General Secure DDNS Primary ALL - NIC Login password for 12
Login Password <1-128> login with the Primary
DDNS
3747 General Secure DDNS Secondary ALL - NIC Login name for login 12
Login Name <1-128> with the Secondary
DDNS
3748 General Secure DDNS Secondary ALL - NIC Login password for 12
Login Password <1-128> login with the Second-
ary DDNS
3749 General DPWS Friendly Name ALL - NIC MFP name indicated in 12
DPWS search result
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx
[NIC serial number]

2 - 182
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3750 General DPWS Printer Name ALL - NIC Printer name used for 12
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value> 2
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Printer-
[NIC serial number]
3751 General DPWS Scanner Name ALL - NIC Scanner name used for 12
installing the printer
with DPWS
<Default value>
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIOxxx Scanner-
[NIC serial number]
3752 General DPWS Printer Information ALL - NIC Information regarding 12
DPWS printer
<Default value> NULL
3753 General DPWS Scanner Informa- ALL - NIC Information regarding 12
tion DPWS scanner
<Default value> NULL
3754 Network Switching DPWS Printer ALL 1 NIC DPWS printer /DPWS 12
setting <1-3> secure printer function
is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3: Security enabled
3755 Network Switching DPWS Scanner ALL 1 NIC DPWS scanner function 12
setting <1-2> is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3757 Network DPWS Discovery Port ALL 3702 NIC Port number used for 12
Number <1- DPWS Discovery
65535>
3758 Network DPWS Metadata ALL 50081 NIC Port number used for 12
Exchange Port Number <1- DPWS Metadata
65535> Exchange
3759 Network DPWS Print Port Number ALL 50082 NIC Port number used for 12
<1- DPWS Print
65535>
3760 Network DPWS Scan Port Number ALL 50083 NIC Port number used for 12
<1- DPWS Scan
65535>
3765 Network DPWS Print Max numbers ALL 10 NIC Maximum numbers 12
of connection <1-20> received from more
than one connection
request in the DPWS
print
3766 Network DPWS Print Max numbers ALL 10 NIC Maximum numbers of 12
of reception <1-20> data received from
more than one clients in
the DPWS print
3767 Network Switching IPv6 setting ALL 2 NIC IPv6 function is 12
<1-2> switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled

2 - 183
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3768 Network Switching IP(IPv6) ALL 2 NIC IP(IPv6) Address 12
Address Acquisition <1-2> Acquisition setting is
switched.
1: Manual
2: Auto configuration
3769 Network Link Local Address ALL - NIC Link Local Address is 12
<0-16> displayed. Unique IP
address (128 bits) is set
using Mac address.
3770 Network IPv6 Address ALL 0 NIC DHCPv6 Address in 12
<0-16> Manual/Auto configura-
tion is displayed.
3771 Network Prefix display setting ALL 0 NIC The range of Prefix dis- 12
<0-128> play is set.
3772 Network Default Gateway setting ALL 0 NIC Default Gateway of 12
<0-16> DHCPv6 Address in
Manual/Auto configura-
tion is set.
3773 Network Displaying previous ALL 0 NIC The previous DHCPv6 12
DHCPv6 Address <0-16> Address is displayed.
3774 Network DHCPv6 Option setting ALL 2 NIC DHCPv6 Option is 12
<1-2> switched when the
Manual is set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3775 Network Stateless Address Auto ALL 1 NIC Stateless Address Auto 12
Configuration <1-2> Configuration is
switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3776 Network Stateless Address setting ALL 2 NIC When Prefix sent from 12
continuation <1-2> router is changed,
Stateless Address is
continued to be set.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3777 Network Stateless Address setting ALL 2 NIC IP Address is acquired 12
<1-2> by both Stateless and
State full Address.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3778 Network Acquiring DHCPv6 Option ALL 2 NIC When Stateless 12
<1-2> Address is selected, an
option is acquired from
DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3779 Network State full Address setting ALL 2 NIC IP Address is acquired 12
<1-2> from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3780 Network State full Option setting ALL 2 NIC An option is acquired 12
<1-2> from DHCPv6 server.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3781 Network Primary DNS Server ALL 0 NIC Registration of Primary 12
Address Registration <0-16> DNS Server Address

2 - 184
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3782 Network Secondary DNS Server ALL 0 NIC Registration of Second- 12
Address Registration <0-16> ary DNS Server
Address
3783 Network Selecting SAMBA Protocol ALL 2 NIC Either IPv6 or IPv4 is 12 2
<2-3> selected to use
SAMBA.
2: IPv6
3: IPv4
3784 Network DSN Server resolve type ALL 4 NIC Either "ip6.arpa" or 12
<1-4> "ip6.int" is selected for
the name resolution in
DNS.
1: "ip6.arpa" only
2: "ip6.int" only
3: In case of error with
"ip6.int", "ip6.arpa"
is requested.
4: In case of error with
"ip6.arpa", "ip6.int"
is requested.
3785 Network DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with ALL 2 NIC Either IPv4 only or IPv6 12
IPv6 <1-2> together with it is
selected to operate
Print, Scan and Secu-
rity related with DPWS.
1: Multi (IPv4 and
IPv6)
2: IPv4
3793 Network Switching LLTD setting ALL 2 NIC LLTD function is 12
<1-2> switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3794 Network Switching LLMNR setting ALL 2 NIC LLMNR function is 12
<1-2> switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3796 Network DPWS EventRate ALL 5 NIC Sets the value of 12
<1~600> DPWS event rate from
1 to 600.
3804 Scanner List Analysis Logic of Scan ALL 0 SYS Acquisition of Contents 1
to File (FTP) <0-1> in Host side is switched
by Scan to File (FTP).
0: NLST
1: LIST
3805 Scanner Department Management ALL 3 SYS Department Manage- 1
setting by Remote Scan <0-3> ment is set when
Remote Scan is per-
formed.
0: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI OFF
1: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI OFF
2: w/o GUI OFF,
w/ GUI ON
3: w/o GUI ON,
w/ GUI ON

2 - 185
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3810 Network Direct SMTP communica- ALL 0 SYS When an Internet Fax is 1
tion setting <0-1> sent, Direct SMTP com-
munication is set.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When "0: Disabled" is

set, an Internet Fax is
sent using an SMTP
server.
When "1: Enabled" is

set, direct SMTP com-
munication is enabled
and an Internet Fax is
sent to MFPs on the
intranet without using
an SMTP server. Since
no SMTP server is
used, the SSL encryp-
tion and SMTP-AUTH
function cannot be used
for internet Fax trans-
mission.
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.
3811 Network Image encrypting at the ALL 0 SYS When Direct SMTP 1
Direct SMTP communica- <0-1> communication is per-
tion formed, an attached
image is encrypted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3812 Scanner Dummy full mode at the ALL 0 SYS When an Internet Fax is 1
Internet Fax transmission <0-1> sent, the resolution ratio
and the paper size of an
attached image are set
to the full mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If "1: Enabled" is set in
08-3810, set "1:
Enabled" in 08-3812 as
well.
3815 Scanner XPS file thumbnail addition ALL 1 SYS Thumbnail is added to 1
<0-1> the XPS file produced
by the Scan function.
0: Not added
1: Only the top page
added
3816 Scanner XPS file paper size setting ALL 1 SYS The paper size of the 1
<0-1> XPS file produced by
the Scan function is set.
0: Scanned image size
1: Standard size

2 - 186
07/04
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3817 Scanner PDF file version setting ALL 4 SYS The version of PDF file 1
<0, 1, 4> produced by the Scan
function is set.
0: PDF V1.3 2
1: PDF V1.4
4: PDF V1.7
3818 Scanner DPWS Scan operation ALL 1 SYS The operation mode in 1
mode <0-1> the DPWS Scan func-
tion is switched.
0: Batch type
1: Serial type
3819 General Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 2 SYS The processing mode 1
processing mode (STD) <0-2> of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
processing mode (FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
processing mode (S-FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
processing mode (U-FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/
Internet Fax is
switched.
0: High speed/Low
image quality
1: Standard
2: Low speed/High
image quality
3823 General Processing mode thresh- ALL 254 SYS Image quality adjust- 1
old for network Fax/Inter- <0-255> ment when "Standard"
net Fax (STD) [Standard] is set for the Network
Fax/Internet Fax pro-
cessing mode (STD)
net Fax (FINE) [Standard] is set for the Network
Fax/Internet Fax pro-
cessing mode (FINE)

2 - 187
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
net Fax (S-FINE) is set for the Network
[Standard] Fax/Internet Fax pro-
cessing mode (S-FINE)
net Fax (U-FINE) is set for the Network
[Standard] Fax/Internet Fax pro-
cessing mode (U-FINE)
old for network Fax/Inter- <0-255> ment when "Low speed/
net Fax (STD) [Low speed/ High image quality" is
High image quality] set for the Network Fax/
Internet Fax process-
ing mode (STD)
net Fax (FINE) [Low High image quality" is
speed/High image quality] set for the Network Fax/
ing mode (FINE)
net Fax (S-FINE) [Low High image quality" is
ing mode (S-FINE)
net Fax (U-FINE) [Low High image quality" is
ing mode (U-FINE)
3831 Network Mode switching for Role ALL 0 SYS 0: Require eBMUser- 1
Based Access Control <0-1> Role attribute
function 1: User available
LDAP attribute
3833 General Home directory function ALL 0 SYS Function to store a file 1
<0-1> in the user's home
directory
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3834 General Backup file encryption ALL 0 SYS When the backup file is 1
<0-1> created from TopAc-
cess, it is encrypted.
0: Enabled (Encryp-
tion)
1: Disabled (No
encryption)
3837 General Display switching for the ALL 0 SYS The display method of 1
machine name/computer <0-1> the machine name/
name shown in the notifi- computer name shown
cation in the event-related
notification is switched.
0: IP address
1: NetBIOS name/
FQDN

2 - 188
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3840 General Electronic License Key ALL - - Licenses for Electronic 3
Registration License Key are regis-
tered.
3841 General Electronic License Key ALL - - Registered licenses for 3 2
Deletion Electronic License Key
are deleted.
3842 General Electronic License Key ALL - - All licenses stored in 3
Display the ELK jig are dis-
played.
3845 Network SNMP Trap Enterprise OID ALL 0 SYS Trap Enterprise OID is 1
mode setting <0-1> enabled for existing
models.
0: Normal (Not
enabling for exist-
ing models)
1: Enabled for existing
models
3847 FAX FAX mistransmission pre- FAX 0 SYS FAX mistransmission 1
vention <0-1> prevention function is
switched.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
3848 FAX Restriction on Address FAX 0 SYS Availability of destina- 1
Book destination setting <0-1> tion selection from the
Address Book is
switched as one of FAX
mistransmission pre-
vention functions when
setting FAX destina-
tions.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
3849 FAX Restriction on destination FAX 0 SYS Availability of direct 1
direct entry <0-1> entry is switched as one
of FAX mistransmis-
sion prevention func-
tions when setting FAX
destinations.
0: OFF (Disabled)
1: ON (Enabled)
3850 General Remote Scan ALL 3 SYS User authentication on 1
User authentication <0-3> Remote Scan driver is
switched according to
the availability of GUI.
0: OFF (No GUI) / OFF
(GUI installed)
1: ON (No GUI) / OFF
(GUI installed)
2: OFF (No GUI) / ON
(GUI installed)
3: ON (No GUI) / ON
(GUI installed)
3851 User Template display ALL 0 SYS The order of displaying 1
interface <0-1> templates on the LCD
screen is switched.
0: Order of IDs
1: Alphabetical order

2 - 189
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3852 General Automatic summer time ALL 0 SYS Automatic summer time 1
change <0-1> change on the day pre-
viously set is switched.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3853 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS Summer time is started 1
Offset value <0-7> as follows when 08-
3852 is enabled.
0: +2:00 1: +1:30
2: +1:00 3: +0:30
4: -0:30 5: -1:00
6: -1:30 7: -2:00
3854 General Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The month in which 1
Starting month <1-12> summer time is started
is set.
1: January
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
3855 General Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The week in which 1
Starting week <1-5> summer time is started
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last
3856 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The day on which sum- 1
Starting day <0-6> mer time is started is
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
3857 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The time at which sum- 1
Starting time <00-23> mer time is started is
set.
00-23
3858 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The minute at which 1
Starting minute <00-59> summer time is started
is set.
00-59

2 - 190
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3859 General Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The month in which 1
Ending month <1-12> summer time is ended
is set.
1: January 2
2: February
3: March
4: April
5: May
6: June
7: July
8: August
9: September
10: October
11: November
12: December
3860 General Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The week in which 1
Ending week <1-5> summer time is ended
is set.
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
5: Last
3861 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The day on which sum- 1
Ending day <0-6> mer time is ended is
set.
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
3862 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The time at which sum- 1
Ending time <00-23> mer time is ended is
set.
00-23
3863 General Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The minute at which 1
Ending minute <00-59> summer time is ended
is set.
00-59
3864 Network Disclosing Telnet Server ALL 0 SYS Disclosure of Telnet 1
function <0-1> Server function is
switched.
0: Not disclosed
1: Disclosed
3865 Network Availability of Telnet Server ALL 2 NIC Availability of Telnet 12
<1-2> Server is switched.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
3866 Network Telnet Server ALL 23 NIC A port number for Tel- 12
TCP port number <1- net Server is set.
65535>
3867 Network Telnet Server ALL Admin NIC A user name for the Tel- 12
Server administrator's user <Maxi- net Server administra-
name mum 15 tor is confirmed.
letters>

2 - 191
07/11
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
3868 Network Telnet Server ALL System NIC A password for the Tel- 12
Server administrator's <Maxi- net Server administra-
password mum 15 tor is set.
letters>
4016-0 Paper ACC function Copying ALL 0 SYS Sets whether the ACC 4
feeding when a <0~1> function is enabled only
drawer is for automatic drawer
specified selection or enabled
when a particular
drawer is specified as
4016-1 Printing / ALL 0 SYS well. 4
BOX print- <0~1> 0: Enabled only for
ing automatic drawer
selection
1: Enabled when a
drawer is specified
output pages Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed
in black mode printing only in the black mode.
6810-1 / Large size 2-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[4IN1].
[4IN1].

2 - 192
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
in full color printing only in the full color
mode / Large mode. 2
ZINE SORT].
or [MAGAZINE SORT].
using [4IN1].
[4IN1].
in twin color printing only in the twin color
mode / Large mode.
ZINE SORT].
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
using [4IN1].
[4IN1].
printing the twin color mode.

2 - 193
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
output pages Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed in
of the printer printing the black mode.
6813-1 or BOX / 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
Large Duplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed in
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
[4IN1].
[4IN1].
[N IN1].
printing black mode using [N
IN1].

2 - 194
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
of the printer printing only in the full color
or BOX / mode. 2
6814-1 Large 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
(Full color) Duplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed in
ZINE SORT].
or [MAGAZINE SORT].
using [4IN1].
[4IN1].
using [N IN1].
printing color mode using [N
IN1].
6815-0 Counter Number of 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of 4
output pages Simplex <8 digits> output pages in the
of the FAX printing default settings.
6815-7 printing / 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS 4
Large Duplex <8 digits>
printing
8517 General Remote Scan User authen- ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF (A user always 1
tication automatic login <0~1> enters manually
(current method))
1: ON (Previous
authentication infor-
mation will be used)
8535 Network Storing network logs in the ALL 2 SYS Stores the network logs 1
HDD <1~2> of SRAM in the HDD
when network-related
trouble occurred.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
8536 Network Data size when storing net- ALL 30 SYS Specifies the size of 1
work logs in the HDD <1~30> network logs to be
stored in the HDD.
1-30:1-30 MB

2 - 195
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
9047 General Process control flag setting ALL 0 SYS 0: No change of man- 1
of easy setup (manual <0-2> ual unpacking
unpacking adjustment) adjustment
1: OFF status of man-
ual unpacking
adjustment flag
2: Returns to the initial
unpacking mode
9051 User Panel calibration setting ALL 0 SYS Switches whether the 1
interface value display <0~1> screen for displaying
panel calibration set-
ting values is displayed
or not.
0: Disabled (screen
not displayed)
1: Enabled (screen
displayed)
9117 Network Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: OFF 1
(Blank page will not be <0-1> 1: ON
printed)
9359 User Printing resume after jam ALL 0 SYS 0: Auto resume 1
interface releasing <0-1> 1: Resume by users
9394 Network Single-page option for stor- ALL 0 SYS 0: Sets 1 page as 1 file 1
ing File and sending Email <0-1> 1: Makes a file based
on the original
9629 Network Attribute name for LDAP ALL eBMUser SYS 11
Role Based Access R
<->
9739 Mainte- Remote service ALL 0 SYS 0: RDMS toner empty 1
nance Toner-end notification <0-2> notified immediately
1: RDMS toner empty
notified once a day
2: RDMS toner empty
not notified
9798 Network Temporary communication ALL - SYS Sets a temporary com- 11
password setting munication password.
The password can be
entered in alphanu-
meric characters (A to
Z, a to z, 0 to 9) up to
10 digits. The entered
password is displayed
with “*” on the touch
panel and the self-diag-
nostic lists. (Maximum
10 digits, minimum 5
digits)
9819 General STAGE SSL ALL 1 SYS When remote scanning 1
<0-1> is performed, the SSL
communication is car-
ried out.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (SSL com-
munication)
9822 General STAGE SSL port number ALL 20443 SYS When remote scanning 1
<0- is performed using SSL
65535> communication, the
SSL port number is set.

2 - 196
09/02
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
9828 General Remote scanning mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Batch 1
<0-1> 1: Sequential
9829 General Department management ALL 0 SYS Decide the default limi- 1
limitation setting <0-3> tation setting when the 2
new department code is
created.
0: No limit
1: Limited only in the
black mode
2: Limited in the color
mode
3: Limited in the black/
color mode
9847 Finisher Hole punching setting ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
<0-1> 1: Valid
9880 General Total counter transmission ALL 0 SYS 0 to 31 1
date setting (2) <0-31>
9881 General Day of total counter data ALL 0 - 1 byte 00000000(0)- 1
transmission <0-127> 01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit -
Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
9882 General Display mode of the used ALL 1 SYS 0: All files search 1
capacity on the e-Filing <0-1> mode
administrator page 1: Performance priority
mode
9885 General New/Old FROM identifica- ALL - - 0: Old FROM 2
tion <-1-1> 1: New FROM
-1: Error
9886 Scanner Decimal point indication for SCN EUR: 0 SYS 0: Comma 1
Enhanced Scan Template UC: 1 1: Period
JPN: 1
<0-1>
9888 Scanner Permission setting for SCN 0 SYS 0: Prohibited 1
changing the scan parame- <0-1> 1: Accepted
ter when recalling an
extension
9889 General Acceptance of data cloning ALL 0 SYS Acceptance of the 2
using USB storage device <0-1> usage of the USB data
cloning tool
0: Accepted
1: Not accepted
9891 User Warning message on the ALL 1 SYS 0: No warning notifica- 1
interface touch panel when PM <0-1> tion
(Periodic Maintenance) 1: Warning notification
time has come
9946 General E-mail transmission retry ALL 3 SYS The number of times of 1
number <0-14> E-mail communication
retry for Scan to E-mail
and Internet Fax is set.
9947 General E-mail transmission retry ALL 1 SYS When E-mail transmis- 1
interval <0-15> sion retry for Scan to E-
mail and Internet Fax is
performed, the interval
is set.
0 min - 15 min

2 - 197
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
9954 General Control box counter / job ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1
list printing operation (Indi- <0~1> 1: Valid
vidual customer)
9980 Network Receiver's address fixing ALL 0 SYS Fixes the receiver's 1
function at authentication <0~1> address (“To: Destina-
tion” field) when the
user authentication and
E-mail authentication
are enabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note:
In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding.
When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the trans-
fer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannnot be reached for the 2nd
transfer proccess.
After that, the toner image fomation is retried while the paper is waited.
In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on
the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed.
Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit
value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as "0" (no limit).
The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at
earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.

2 - 198
09/02
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.6)
Note:
In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.
Setting mode (08)

Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value> 2
1500 Pixel Standard paper size setting ALL EUR: 0 SYS Selects the standard 1
counter UC: 1 paper size to convert it
JPN: 0 into the pixel count (%).
<0-1> 0: A4
1: LT
1501 Pixel Pixel counter all clearing ALL - SYS Clears all information 3
counter related to the pixel
counter.
1502 Pixel Service technician refer- ALL - SYS Clears all information 3
counter ence counter clearing related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
1503 Pixel Toner cartridge reference ALL - SYS Clears all information 3
counter counter clearing related to the toner car-
tridge reference pixel
counter.
1504 Pixel Pixel counter display set- ALL 1 SYS Selects whether or not 1
counter ting <0-1> to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1505 Pixel Displayed reference set- ALL 0 SYS Selects the reference 1
counter ting <0-1> when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference
1: Toner cartridge ref-
erence
1506 Pixel Toner empty determination ALL 0 SYS Selects the counter to 1
counter counter setting <0-1> determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
1507 Pixel Threshold setting for toner ALL 500 SYS Sets the number of out- 1
counter empty determination (Out- <0-999> put pages to determine
put pages) toner empty. This set-
ting is valid when “0” is
set at 08-1506.
1508 Pixel Threshold setting for toner ALL 21500 SYS Sets the number of out- 1
counter empty determination (Pixel <0- put pages to determine
counter) 60000> toner empty. This set-
ting is valid when “1” is
set at 08-1506.
1509 Pixel Pixel counter clear flag/ ALL 0 SYS Becomes “1” when 08- 2
counter Service technician refer- <0-1> 1502 is performed.
ence
1510 Pixel Service technician refer- ALL - SYS Displays the date on 2
counter ence cleared date which 08-1502 was per-
formed.
1511 Pixel Toner cartridge reference ALL - SYS Displays the date on 2
counter cleared date (Y) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.

2 - 199
05/07
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter cleared date (M) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter cleared date (C) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter cleared date (K) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter count started date (Y) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter count started date (M) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter count started date (C) (color) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter count started date (K) which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
1547 Pixel Number of output pages/ PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
counter fullcolor (color) output pagesconverted
(Service technicianrefer- to the standard paper
ence) sizein the copy function,
full color modeand ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
counter black (Service technician (black) output pages con-
reference) verted to the standard
paper sizein the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
1549 Pixel Number of output pages/ PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
counter fullcolor (Service techni- (color) output pages con-
cian reference) verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color mode
reference.
[Unit. page]
reference.
[Unit. page]

2 - 200
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1551 Pixel Number of output pages/ FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
paper size in the FAX 2
reference.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (K) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
tridge reference) verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
counter black (Toner cartridge ref- (black) output pages con-
erence) verted to the standard
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (K) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit. page]
erence.
[Unit. page]
1556 Pixel Number of output pages/ FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
paper size in the FAX
erence.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (Y) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit. page]

2 - 201
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter full color (Y) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (M) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner M and
ence.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (M) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner M and
ence.
[Unit. page]
counter full color (C) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner C and
ence.
[Unit. page]
1562 Pixel Number of output pages/ ALL <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
counter full color (C) (Toner car- (color) output pages con-
mode, toner C and
ence.
[Unit. page]
1563 Pixel Toner cartridge Y replace- ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
counter ment counter (color) time of the toner car-
tridge Y replacement.
1564 Pixel Toner cartridge M replace- ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
tridge M replacement.
1565 Pixel Toner cartridge C replace- ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
tridge C replacement.
1566 Pixel Toner cartridge K replace- ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of 2
counter ment counter time of the toner car-
tridge K replacement.

2 - 202
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1577 Pixel Average pixel count/full PPC 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
technician reference) 10000> function, full color
mode, all toner and ser- 2
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
cian reference) 10000> function, full color
mode, toner Y and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (M) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner M and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (C) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner C and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner K and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1582 Pixel Average pixel count/full PRT 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
technician reference) 10000> function, full color
mode, all toner and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (M) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 203
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter color (C) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K) (Service techni- (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1587 Pixel Average pixel count/full PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
technician reference) (color) 10000> printer function, full
color mode, all toner
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Service techni- PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
cian reference) (color) 10000> printer function, full
color mode, toner Y and
service technician refer-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (M) (Service techni- PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
color mode, toner M
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (C) (Service techni- PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
color mode, toner C
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K) (Service techni- PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
color mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1592 Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- pixel count in the copy
ence) 10000> function, black mode
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 204
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1593 Pixel Average pixel count/black PRT 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- pixel count in the printer
and service technician 2
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1594 Pixel Average pixel count/black FAX 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- pixel count in the FAX
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1595 Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Service technician refer- PRT/ <0- pixel count in the copy/
ence) FAX 10000> printer/FAX function,
(black) black mode and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1596 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
nician reference) 10000> tion, full color mode, all
toner and service tech-
nician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (Y) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
erence) 10000> tion, full color mode,
toner Y and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (M) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner M and service
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (C) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner C and service
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (K) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner K and service
[Unit: 0.01%]
1601 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech- (color) <0- count in the printer
nician reference) 10000> function, full color
mode, all toner and ser-
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 205
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter (Y) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the printer
erence) 10000> function, full color
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (M) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (C) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (K) (Service technician ref- (color) <0- count in the printer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1606 Pixel Latest pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- count in the copy func-
ence) 10000> tion, black mode and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1607 Pixel Latest pixel count/black PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- count in the printer
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1608 Pixel Latest pixel count/black FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Service technician refer- (black) <0- count in the FAX func-
ence) 10000> tion, black mode and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
reference) 10000> function, full color
mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 206
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner M and 2
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner C and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the copy
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1613 Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- pixel count in the copy
10000> function, black mode
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K)+black (Toner car- <0- pixel count in the copy
tridge reference) 10000> function, full color/black
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
mode, toner C and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 207
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the printer
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1619 Pixel Average pixel count/black PRT 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- pixel count in the printer
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K)+black (Toner car- <0- pixel count in the printer
tridge reference) 10000> function, full color/black
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
reference) (color) 10000> printer function, full
color mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
color mode, toner M
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge PRT <0- pixel count in the copy/
color mode, toner C
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter color (K)+black (Toner car- PRT/ <0- pixel count in the copy/
tridge reference) FAX 10000> printer/FAX function,
black mode, toner K
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1625 Pixel Average pixel count/black FAX 0 SYS Displays the average 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- pixel count in the FAX
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 208
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
ence) 10000> tion, full color mode,
toner Y and toner car- 2
tridge reference.
[Unit:0.01%]
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner M and toner car-
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner C and toner car-
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the copy func-
toner K and toner car-
tridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the printer
ence) 10000> function, full color
mode, toner Y and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the printer
mode, toner M and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the printer
mode, toner C and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer- (color) <0- count in the printer
mode, toner K and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1634 Pixel Latest pixel count/black FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- count in the FAX func-
10000> tion, black mode and
ence. [Unit: 0.01%]

2 - 209
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1639 Pixel Latest pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- count in the copy func-
10000> tion, black mode and
ence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1640 Pixel Latest pixel count/black PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black) <0- count in the printer
erence.
[Unit: 0.01%]
1641-0 Pixel Pixel count 0-5% PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data 14
counter distribution/ (color) are divided into 10
1641-1 full color (Y) 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) output pages in each
1641-2 10.1-15% PPC <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In 14
(color) this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
1641-3 15.1-20% PPC <8 digits> SYS tion, full color mode and 14
(color) toner Y are displayed.
1641-4 20.1-25% PPC <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page] 14
(color)
1641-5 25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1641-6 30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1641-7 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1641-8 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1641-9 80.1- PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)
1642-1 full color (M) 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) toner M are displayed.
(color)
1642-5 25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1642-6 30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1642-7 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1642-8 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1642-9 80.1- PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)

2 - 210
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1643-1 full color (C) 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) output pages in each 2
(color) toner C are displayed.
(color)
1643-5 25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1643-6 30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1643-7 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1643-8 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1643-9 80.1- PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)
1644-1 full color (K) 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) toner K are displayed.
(color)
1644-5 25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1644-6 30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1644-7 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1644-8 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1644-9 80.1- PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)

2 - 211
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1645-0 Pixel Pixel count 0-5% PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data 14
1645-1 full color (Y) 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
1645-2 10.1-15% PRT <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In 14
tions in the printer func-
1645-3 15.1-20% PRT <8 digits> SYS tion, full color mode and 14
(color) toner Y are displayed.
1645-4 20.1-25% PRT <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page] 14
(color)
1645-5 25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1645-6 30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1645-7 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1645-8 60.1-80% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1645-9 80.1- PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)
1646-1 full color (M) 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) toner M are displayed.
(color)
1646-5 25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1646-6 30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1646-7 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1646-8 60.1-80% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1646-9 80.1- PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)

2 - 212
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1647-1 full color (C) 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) output pages in each 2
(color) toner C are displayed.
(color)
1647-5 25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1647-6 30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1647-7 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1647-8 60.1-80% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1647-9 80.1- PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)
1648-1 full color (K) 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(color) toner K are displayed.
(color)
1648-5 25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1648-6 30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1648-7 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1648-8 60.1-80% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(color)
1648-9 80.1- PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (color)

2 - 213
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
counter distribution/ (black) are divided into 10
1649-1 black 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(black) output pages in each
(black) this code, the distribu-
1649-3 15.1-20% PPC <8 digits> SYS tion and black mode 14
(black) aredisplayed.
(black)
1649-5 25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1649-6 30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1649-7 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1649-8 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1649-9 80.1- PPC <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (black)
1650-1 black 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(black) output pages in each
1650-3 15.1-20% PRT <8 digits> SYS tion and black mode are 14
(black) displayed.
(black)
1650-5 25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1650-6 30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1650-7 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1650-8 60.1-80% PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1650-9 80.1- PRT <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (black)

2 - 214
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cation tion able
e
value>
1651-0 Pixel Pixel count 0-5% FAX <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data 14
1651-1 black 5.1-10% FAX <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of 14
(black) output pages in each 2
1651-2 10.1-15% FAX <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In 14
tions in the FAX func-
1651-3 15.1-20% FAX <8 digits> SYS tion and black mode are 14
(black) dis-played.
1651-4 20.1-25% FAX <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page] 14
(black)
1651-5 25.1-30% FAX <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1651-6 30.1-40% FAX <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1651-7 40.1-60% FAX <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1651-8 60.1-80% FAX <8 digits> SYS 14
(black)
1651-9 80.1- FAX <8 digits> SYS 14
100% (black)

2 - 215
<<PM support mode related code>>
• The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Sub-code 0 is equivalent to sub-code 6.
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
• When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".

2 - 216
PM management set- Date of previous
Items ting <Procedure 4> replacement Remarks
*Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Photoconductive drum 1150-0 to 8 1151 <Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000 2
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Drum cleaning blade 1158-0 to 8 1159 <Default values of code 1158
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Drum cleaning brush 1166-0 to 8 1167 <Default values of code 1166
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Main charger grid 1174-0 to 8 1175 <Default values of code 1174
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Main charger wire 1182-0 to 8 1183 <Default values of code 1182
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Main charger wire clean- 1190-0 to 8 1191 <Default values of code 1190
ing pad (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Ozone filter 1198-0 to 8 1199 <Default values of code 1198
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Developer material 1200-0 to 8 1201 <Default values of code 1200
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 116,000/116,000/
116,000

2 - 217
08/04
Developer material Y 1202-0 to 8 1203 <Default values of code 1202
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
Developer material M 1204-0 to 8 1205 <Default values of code 1204
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
Developer material C 1206-0 to 8 1207 <Default values of code 1206
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
Transfer belt cleaning 1232-0 to 8 1233 <Default values of code 1232
blade (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 337,000/337,000/
337,000
2nd transfer roller 1240-0 to 8 1241 <Default values of code 1240
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 200,000/240,000/
300,000
Sub-code 4: 312,000/312,000/
312,000
Pressure roller 1250-0 to 8 1251 <Default values of code 1250
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Oil roller 1258-0 to 8 1259 <Default values of code 1258
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Cleaning roller 1260-0 to 8 1261 <Default values of code 1260
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Pressure roller separation 1270-0 to 8 1271 <Default values of code 1270
finger (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000

2 - 218
Fuser belt 1272-0 to 8 1273 <Default values of code 1272
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/ 2
285,000
Fuser belt guide 1276-0 to 8 1277 <Default values of code 1276
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Pickup roller 1282-0, 1, 2, 8 1283 <Default values of code 1282
(RADF) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
Feed roller 1284-0,1,2,8 1285 <Default values of code 1284
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
Separation roller 1286-0, 1, 2, 8 1287 <Default values of code 1286
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
(Upper drawer) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pickup roller 1292-0,1,2,8 1293 <Default values of code 1292
(Lower drawer) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
(LCF) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller 1302-0, 1, 2, 8 1303 <Default values of code 1302
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000

2 - 219
06/08
Separation roller 1306-0,1,2,8 1307 <Default values of code 1306
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000
(PFP upper drawer) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
(PFP lower drawer) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
(Bypass unit) (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pressure roller 1838-0 to 8 1839 <Default values of code 1838
discharge brush (e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000

2 - 220
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is dis-
played).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
2
Fig. 2-3
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-
ton.)
• Key in “1” to copy the value of the total

counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A) (B)
Fig. 2-4

2 - 221
• Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup
counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A) (B)
Fig. 2-5
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.

2 - 222
2.2.6 Pixel counter
1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge). 2
2) Factors affecting toner consumption
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:

- Original/Data coverage
- Original/Data density
- Original/Print mode
- Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.

2 - 223
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the
copy function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Original coverage Original density

Toner consumption
Toner consumption
TEXT PRINTED Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual

/PHOTO TEXT PHOTO IMAGE MAP density density density density density density
-5 -1 Center +1 +5
Original mode Density setting
Fig. 2-6 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
3) Details of pixel counter

- Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and ser-
vice technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference

This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output
pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold.
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting
mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new
toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and
replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner
cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503).

2 - 224
06/08
Service technician reference
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-
1502).
- Print count (number of output pages)

The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by 2
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).
The examples of conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
- Pixel count (%)

Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission

Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission


2 - 225
06/08
- Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)
There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)

The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)

The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
- Type of calculated data

Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each
function and color.
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).
See after-mentioned “5)-Display in the setting mode (08)” for details.
{: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference
Full color/Twin color
Magen
Yellow Cyan Black Magen Black
ta Total Yellow Cyan Black
ta
Copier function { { { { { { { { { {
Printer function { { { { { { { { { {
FAX function - - - { - - - - - {
Total { { { { { { { { { {
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
- Setting related with the pixel counter function

Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
Pixel counter display setting

Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
Display reference setting

The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or
service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
Determination counter of toner empty

This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is
detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is
not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.
Pixel counter clearing

There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.

2 - 226
06/08
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption
The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
Standard number of output pages (K)

Y
Number of output pages per cartridge (Page)
Y/2 Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)
X/2
Y/10
X/10
6% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig. 2-7 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge

2 - 227
06/08
5) Pixel counter confirmation
- Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service techni-
cian reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of
08-1505.)
Fig. 2-8
Fig. 2-9 Reference selection screen
When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is dis-
played.
[TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed.
[SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is dis-
played.
[SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is dis-
played.

2 - 228
07/05
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.
Fig. 2-10 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.
Fig. 2-11 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.
Fig. 2-12 Information screen of service technician reference (black)

2 - 229
06/08
- Data list printing
The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2005.6.14 09:55
SERVICEMAN
No DATE Col. PPC PRN FAX TOTAL

0 20050614 Y Print Count [LT/A4] 12345 23456 --- 45678
1 20050614 Y Average Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 --- 45678
2 20050614 Y Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 --- 45678
9 20050614 K Print Count [LT/A4] 12345 23456 12345 45678

10 20050614 K Average Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
11 20050614 K Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
Fig. 2-13 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2005.6.14 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE Col. PPC PRN FAX TOTAL

0 20050614 Y Print Count [LT/A4] 12345 23456 --- 45678
1 20050614 Y Average Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 --- 45678
2 20050614 Y Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 --- 45678
9 20050614 K Print Count [LT/A4] 12345 23456 12345 45678

10 20050614 K Average Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
11 20050614 K Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 23456 12345 45678
Fig. 2-14 Data list of service technician reference

2 - 230
- Display in the setting mode (08)
Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see P. 2-87 "2.2.5 Setting mode (08)".
Print count, pixel count

Full color/Twin color Black
(at color)
Black
Yellow Magenta Cyan Black +
Black 2
Copier Print count 1557 1559 1561 1552 1553 -
function (page)
Average pixel count 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614
(%)
Latest pixel count 1626 1627 1628 1629 1639 -
(%)
Printer Print count 1558 1560 1562 1554 1555 -
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 1630 1631 1632 1633 1640 -
(%)
FAX function Print count - - - - 1556 -
(page)
Average pixel count - - - - 1625 -
(%)
Latest pixel count - - - - 1634 -
(%)
Total Average pixel count 1621 1622 1623 - - 1624
(%)
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)

Black
Total Yellow Magenta Cyan Black
Copier Print count 1547 - - - - 1548
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1606
(%)
Printer Print count 1549 - - - - 1550
function (page)
(%)
Latest pixel count 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1607
(%)
FAX function Print count - - - - - 1551
(page)
Average pixel count - - - - - 1594
(%)
Latest pixel count - - - - - 1608
(%)
Total Average pixel count 1587 1588 1598 1590 1591 1595
(%)
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)

2 - 231
Pixel count distribution
Black
Yellow Magenta Cyan Black
Copier Print count distribution 1641 1642 1643 1644 1549
function (page)
Printer Print count distribution 1645 1646 1647 1648 1650
function (page)
FAX function Print count distribution - - - - 1651
(page)
Table 2-204 Pixel count code table
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed divid-
ing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed.
08-1563: Toner cartridge Y
08-1564: Toner cartridge M
08-1565: Toner cartridge C
08-1566: Toner cartridge K
Toner cartridge reference count started date

The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed.
Service technician reference cleared date

The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed.
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date

The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.

2 - 232
07/11
2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
Classification Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08)

User interface [AMS]
605
[X in 1]
650
[Color specification]
643, 644 2
[Indicator]
671
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Counter]
202
[Cascade]
652, 653
[ACS]
268
[Screen]
207, 602
[Administrator]
263
[Feeding setting]
658, 659
[Language]
220, 221
[Original counter]
302
[Original direction]
628
[Copy volume]
300
[Automatic calibration]
632
[Default setting]
276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,
284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 503, 585, 587,
588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 1479
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Security level]
1708
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Timer]
204, 205, 206
[Template]
1140, 3851
[Image shift]
636, 1429, 1430
[Tray reset]
648
[Panel calibration]
9051
[Date]
640
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Displaying number]
342

2 - 233
09/02
User interface [Job Build]
1130, 1131
[File]
209, 218, 219
[Department management]
617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629
[Black-free]
343
[Book duplexing]
611
[Box printing]
951, 953, 954
[Paper size]
613
[Blank copy prevention]
625
[JOB STATUS]
983
[Keyboard layout]
1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935
[Jam releasing]
9359
[PM]
9891
Scanner [Log table] [E-mail]
361, 362 272, 273
[Image position] [Enhanced template]
305, 306 9886, 9888
[Carriage position]
359, 360
[Fixed value]
363, 364
[Shading position]
350, 351
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
Fax [Function]
1498, 1926, 3847, 3848, 3849
[Destination]
701
[Default setting]
274
[Priority drawer]
689

2 - 234
07/04
Image [Binarization] [ACS]
700, 701, 702 609-0 to 4
[ACS] [Image quality]
1065, 1066, 1675, 1676 586, 589
[RGB] [Gamma correction]
1080, 1081, 1082 597
[Color deviation correction] [Error diffusion / Dither]
417-0 to 3, 418-0 to 3, 953-0 to 3, 502
954-0 to 3, 955-0 to 3, 956-0 to 3 [Automatic calibration] 2
[Image density] 595
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, [Default setting]
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 550
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, [Smoothing]
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 561, 562
1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1560,
1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1570, 1571,
1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582,
1583, 1584
[Pixel size]
663
[Color balance]
1010-0 to 2, 1011-0 to 2, 1012-0 to 2,
1013-0 to 2, 1014-0 to 2, 1015-0 to 2,
1016-0 to 2, 1017-0 to 2, 1018-0 to 2,
1019-0 to 2, 1020-0 to 2, 1021-0 to 2,
1022-0 to 2, 1023-0 to 2, 1024-0 to 2,
1025-0 to 2, 1026-0 to 2, 1027-0 to 2,
1028-0 to 2, 1029-0 to 2, 1030-0 to 2,
1031-0 to 2, 1032-0 to 2, 1033-0 to 2,
1034-0 to 2, 1035-0 to 2, 1036-0 to 2,
1037-0 to 2, 1038-0 to 2, 1039-0 to 2,
1040-0 to 2, 1041-0 to 2, 1779-0 to 2,
1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2,
1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2,
1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2,
1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2,
1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2,
1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2,
1798-0 to 2
[Gamma adjustment]
580, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1642, 1643
[Gamma balance]
590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2,
596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2,
599-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2,
882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2
[Highlight pen]
1769, 1770, 1771, 1772
[Reproduction level adjustment]
1725
[Maximum text density]
1630, 1631, 1632, 1633
[Background/Black density]
1075, 1076, 1077
[Background processing]
600, 601, 602, 848, 853, 858, 1070, 1071,
1072, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,
1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698,
1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709,
1710, 1711, 1712
[Sharpness]
604, 605, 606, 667-0 to 4, 840, 841, 842, 843,
1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739,
1740, 1741, 1757

2 - 235
07/04
Image [Smudged/faint text]
648, 654, 655
[Black reproduction switching]
1761
[Toner saving]
664, 665, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058
[Toner amount]
1046-0 to 1, 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1,
1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1612, 1613,
1614, 1615, 1616
[Reproduction ratio]
884, 1060
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438, 439
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832,
833, 835, 836, 837, 838
Image control [Temperature/Humidity] [2nd transfer]
393 544, 545, 546, 548
[Color/Black developer] [Abnormality detection]
338, 339, 372, 373, 386-0 to 3 573, 574, 575, 576
[Contrast voltage] [Contrast voltage]
330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3, 554, 556, 558
381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3, [Automatic starting]
1811-0 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3 559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571,
[Performing] 572
394, 395, 396, 398-0 to 3 [Smoothing]
[Sensor] 560
388, 389, 391-0 to 3, 390-0 to 3, 392 [Setting]
[Main charger] 549, 551
334, 335, 385-0 to 3, 1805-0 to 3, [Drum]
1806-0 to 3, 1807-0 to 3, 1808-0 to 3, 552, 553
1809-0 to 3, 1810-0 to 3 [Laser power]
[Background voltage] 555, 557
1804-0 to 3, 1813-0 to 3, 1814-0 to 3
[Laser power]
331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3,
383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3,
1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 1817, 1819,
1820, 1821
Drive system [Exit motor]
424, 425
[Transport motor]
426, 427
[Main motor]
421, 422

2 - 236
07/04
Feeding [Aligning amount] [Feeding setting]
system 448-0 to 3, 449-0 to 3, 450-0 to 3, 254, 255, 619
452-0 to 3, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2, [Paper source]
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 480, 481, 1135, 1431, 4016-0 to 1
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 3, 470-0 to 3, [detection]
471-0 to 3, 472-0 to 3, 473, 474-0 to 2, 449, 1492
475-0 to 9 [Setting]
[Paper pushing amount] 988
466-0 to 7, 467 [Coated paper Mode] 2
675-0 to 4, 676, 677-0 to 5
[Paper size]
224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256
[Paper type]
697
[Paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471
[Paper retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
Laser [Write start] [Polygonal motor]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
494, 495, 496, 498-0 to 1 488, 489, 490
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
Main charger [Grid] [Cleaning]
241, 242, 243, 244 511, 1389
Developer [Auto-toner] [Color auto-toner]
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 819-0 to 2, 820-0 to 2, 823-0 to 2,
[Color auto-toner] 824-0 to 2, 858-0 to 2, 859-0 to 2,
207, 208 860-0 to 1, 861-0 to 1, 862-0 to 1,
[Timing adjustment] 863-0 to 1, 864, 865, 866-0 to 1, 867, 868,
499 869, 870, 871, 872, 873-0 to 2, 874,
875-0 to 2, 876-0 to 2, 877-0 to 2,
878-0 to 2, 879-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2,
881-0 to 2, 1414, 1800-0 to 2, 1801
[Stabilization]
821, 822-0 to 2, 1802-0 to 2
[Toner nearly empty]
1415, 1416

2 - 237
09/02
Transfer [1st transfer] [1st transfer]
210, 245, 250, 251, 281, 1829-0 to 2, 816
1831, 1832, 1833, 1836, 1847, 1848, [2nd transfer]
1849, 1850-0 to 3, 1861, 1862-0 to 3, 487, 817
1863, 1864 [Temperature correction]
[2nd transfer] 818
224, 225, 226, 227-0 to 3, 229-0 to 3,
230-0 to 1, 231-0 to 1, 232-0 to 1,
234-0 to 3, 236-0 to 3, 237-0 to 1,
238-0 to 1, 239-0 to 1, 252, 253, 254, 255,
275, 276, 277-0 to 3, 279-0 to 3,
290-0 to 1, 291-0 to 1, 292-0 to 1,
293-0 to 4, 294-0 to 3, 296-0 to 3,
297-0 to 1, 298-0 to 1, 299-0 to 1,
1822-0 to 4, 1823-0 to 3, 1825-0 to 3,
1826-0 to 1, 1827-0 to 1, 1828-0 to 1,
1839-0 to 1, 1840-0 to 1, 1841-0 to 1,
1842-0 to 3, 1845-0 to 1
[Cleaning]
284, 285
[Temperature/humidity]
247, 248, 270
Fuser [Temperature]
409, 411, 410-0 to 1, 412-0 to 1,
413-0 to 1, 416, 422, 436, 437-0 to 1,
438-0 to 1, 458, 460
[Time]
415-0 to 1, 428-0 to 1, 459
[Status counter]
400
[TWD and SAD models]
849
[Transport speed]
430, 431, 432
[Pre-running]
417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1, 440-0 to 1,
441-0 to 1, 461, 526-0 to 1, 583-0 to 2, 584
Image [Counter]
processing 1370, 1371, 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382,
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388
RADF [Aligning amount] [Switchback]
354, 355 462
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
[Volume]
367, 368
Finisher [Binding/Folding position] [Stapling]
468-0 to 2 704-0 to 1, 1911
[Finisher model switching]
1912
[Hole punching]
9847

2 - 238
Network [AppleTalk]
1014, 1015, 1936, 3729, 3730
[Bindery]
1026
[Community]
1065, 1066
[DDNS]
1020, 1112, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748
[DHCP] 2
1755, 1756, 1757, 1762, 3772, 3773,
3774, 3778, 3779, 3780
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782, 3784
[DPWS]
3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754,
3755, 3756, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760,
3761, 3762, 3763, 3764, 3765, 3766,
3785, 3796
[E-mail]
265, 1097, 1098, 1477, 1478, 1489, 1491,
3837, 9946, 9947, 9980
[File]
1779, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786, 9394
[FTP]
1055, 1059, 1060, 1089, 1090, 1091,
1092, 3739
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032, 3738
[IP Conflict]
1440
[IP Filter]
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737,
1738, 1739
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,
1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 3725, 3726
[IPv6]
3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3770
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[IP address]
1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1767,
1768, 3769
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1923, 1924, 3506, 3507, 3743,
9629
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077, 3727, 3728
[MAC address]
1141
[MIB]
1063
[NDS]
1027
[Netware]
1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148
[Network logs]
8535, 8536

2 - 239
09/02
Network [NIC]
1002
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[PCL setting]
973
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051,
1052, 3742, 3744
[RawPort]
945
[Raw/TCP]
1073, 1074, 3731, 3732
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 978, 979, 9117
[Rendezvous]
1103, 1104, 1105
[Role Base Access]
1493, 1928, 3831
[Samba]
1464, 3783, 3833
[SearchRoot]
1095
[SMB]
1023, 1024, 1025, 1117, 1124, 1950, 1951
[SMTP]
1022, 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041,
1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111, 3741
[SNTP]
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740, 3845
[SSL]
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745,
1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751,
9819, 9822
[TRAP]
1069, 1070
[InternetFAX]
266, 1114, 1485, 3812, 3819, 3820, 3821,
3822, 3823, 3824, 3825, 3826, 3827,
3828, 3829, 3830
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[Function]
1432, 1435, 1436
[Automatic transferring]
660, 661
[Initialization]
1119
[Scan job]
1781-0 to 1, 1915, 1940, 3804, 3815,
3816, 3817, 3818, 8517
[Direct SMTP]
3810, 3811
[Speed and settings]
1003
[Data retention period]
259, 260, 264
[Domain]
1113, 1121, 1122, 1123
[Authentication]
1139, 1484, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922,
1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955,
1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 3722, 3723, 3724

2 - 240
09/02
Network [Print queue]
1096
[Frame type]
1012
[Prefix]
3771
[Temporary communication password]
9798
[Local I/F] 2
614
[LLTD]
3793
[LLMNR]
3794
[Telnet]
3864, 3865, 3866, 3867, 3868
Wireless LAN [Supplicant]
1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685, 1686,
1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696,
1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705,
1706, 1707, 1764, 1765, 1766
[Driver]
1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666,
1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672,
1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678
Bluetooth [Data encryption]
1715
[Setting]
1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714
[BIP]
1719, 1941

2 - 241
09/02
Counter [HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
[External counter]
381, 1126
[Counter copy]
257
[Count method]
616, 663
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[Black toner cartridge drive]
1410
[Paper size]
301-0 to 16, 303-0 to 16, 304-0 to 16,
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 309-0 to 16, 310-0 to 16,
311-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Tab paper]
1412
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Large/Small size]
317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2,
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2,
326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2
[n-UP printing]
1530-0 to 7, 1531-0 to 7, 1532-0 to 7,
1533-0 to 7, 1534-0 to 7, 1535-0 to 7,
6810-0 to 7, 6811-0 to 7, 6812-0 to 7,
6813-0 to 7, 6814-0 to 7,
6815-0 to 7
Version [FAX]
915
[HDD]
944
[Engine]
903, 905, 907
[System]
900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935,
936, 937, 938, 939
[Finisher]
908, 911

2 - 242
07/11
Maintenance [Equipment number] [FSMS]
976 258, 999
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[PM counter]
223, 251, 252, 375, 376
[Error history]
253
[Equipment number] 2
995
[Emergency Mode]
710, 711
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719,
720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771,
772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 780,
781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788,
789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796,
1145, 1495, 9739, 9880, 9881
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750,
751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758,
759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 765
[Downloading]
797
[Telephone]
250
[Panel calibration]
692
Scrambler [HDD]
board 699
[Key code]
698
[Installation]
696
Electronic [Setting]
Filing 267, 270, 950, 976, 1497
Data overwrite [HDD]
kit 1422, 1424, 1426
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
[Releasing F200]
633

2 - 243
07/11
General [HDD]
271, 670, 690, 691, 693, 694
[SYS ROM]
1938
[TAT partition]
1118
[Address book]
1125
[Data encryption]
3834
[Proof copy]
3635
[Card authentification]
1776, 1777, 1927
[Card reader]
1772, 1773, 1774, 1775
[Administrator’s password]
1778
[Clearing]
665, 669
[Summer time]
3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857,
3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863
[Destination]
201
[Initialization]
947
[Setting]
949, 975, 986, 1132, 1470, 1471, 1494
[Speed switching]
497
[Counter / Job list print]
9954
[Data cloning]
9889
[Databases]
684, 685, 686
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Date/Time]
200, 638
[File]
288
[Department management]
672
[BANNER MESSAGE button]
681
[Memory]
615
[Enhanced bold]
1149
[User data management]
1468, 1469, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481,
1482, 1483, 1496
[Line]
203
[Duplex printing]
683
[File/Email]
1913, 1916
[Extension fields]
1914

2 - 244
09/02
General [KS/KSSM setting]
1961
[KS]
1960, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967,
1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974,
1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980
[KSSM]
1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989,
1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 2
[Remote scanning]
3850, 9828
[Filing box]
9882
[FROM]
9885
[Easy setup]
9047
[Electronic license key]
3840, 3841, 3842

2 - 245
2 - 246
3. ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)

This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing compo-
nents which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be
obeyed in priority.
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.
Parts to be replaced
Developer material Laser optical unit Drum Transfer belt
Drum cleaning blade Main charger wire 1st transfer roller
Drum cleaner brush Main charger grid 2nd transfer roller 3
Image quality sensor
Item to be adjusted Code in mode 05
3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206

3.3 Adjustment of image quality control / 396
Automatic initialization of image quality control
3.4 Image dimensional adjustment

Order Items Code in mode 05
1 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452,
455, 457, 458, 459,
460, 461, 462, 463
2 3.4.3 (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 401
3 Printer (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position 411
4 related (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 421
5 adjustment (d) Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment 284
6 (e) Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment 285
441, 440, 444
7 (f) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
443, 442, 445
(g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at
8 498
duplexing
9 3.4.4 (a) Image distortion –
10 Scanner (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 405
11 related (c) Image location of primary scanning direction 306
12 adjustment (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 340
13 (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction 305
14 (f) Top margin 430
15 (g)Right margin 432
16 (h) Bottom margin 433

3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC) 1642, (1643, 580)
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT) 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003

3.5.2 Color deviation adjustment (PPC) 417, 418 (A3/LD)
3.6.1 Color deviation adjustment (PRT) 953, 954, 955, 956 (A4/LT)
Adjust the image quality if necessary. ( Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7)
END
Fig. 3-1

ADJUSTMENT
3-1
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.

Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be dis-
played.
[0] [5] 100% A A3

[POWER] TEST MODE
(3) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M
203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C
100% 200 A3
(Code) [START] TEST MODE
(4) Adjustment for “K” (Magnetometric sensor control)

• The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later.
(B) K: xxxV
(C)
(A) K: zzzV
(B): Current sensor voltage (V)

(C): No display
(A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference
voltage

ADJUSTMENT
3-2
Note:
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).
• In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor out-
put control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C).
(B) K: xxxV
(C) K: yyy
(A) K: zzzV

(C): Sensor output control value (bit value) 3
(A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage
Note:
Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity.
• In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color.
(5) Adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” (light sensor control)
• In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the num-
ber of colors to be adjusted).
(B) Y:
(C)
(A) Y:

(C): No display

ADJUSTMENT
3-3
Note:
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).
• After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged.
Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material
is displayed in (C).
(B) Y: xxxV
(C) Y: yyy
(A) Y: zzzV

(C): Sensor output control value (bit value)
• In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have
finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory.
(6) Standard of adjustment value range

(A): Adjustment reference voltages (V)
Humidity(%) K Y M C
29.9 or below 2.47 1.25 1.25 1.25
30.0-44.9 2.49
45.0-59.9 2.50
60.0-74.9 2.69
75.0 or above 2.86
Note:
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-
tion is not performed.
(B): Current sensor voltages (V)

Humidity(%) K Y M C
29.9 or below 2.37-2.57 1.15-1.35 1.15-1.35 1.15-1.35
30.0-44.9 2.39-2.59
45.0-59.9 2.40-2.60
60.0-74.9 2.59-2.79
75.0 or above 2.76-2.96
Note:
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-
tion is not performed.
(7) Turn the power OFF.
(8) Install the toner cartridges.

ADJUSTMENT
3-4
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control
(1) When unpacking
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality con-
trol (05-396)” procedure.
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Automatic initialization of
image quality control (05-396)” procedure.
• Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Laser optical unit
• Image quality sensor • Transfer belt • 1st transfer roller
• 2nd transfer roller • Main charger • Main charger grid
• Drum cleaning blade • Drum cleaner brush
Note:
When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, “Automatic initialization of image
3
quality control (05-396)” should be done first.
(3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced,
do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395)” procedure before "Auto-
matic gamma adjustment".
Code Item to be adjusted Contents
395 Forced performing of <Procedure>
image quality closed-loop 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
control → Adjustment Mode
2) Key in [395] and press the [START] button.
3) "WAIT" is displayed.
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the
initial state of Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appro-
priate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.
396 Automatic initialization of <Procedure>
image quality control 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
→ Adjustment Mode
2) Key in [396] and press the [START] button.
3) "WAIT" is displayed.
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to
initial state of the Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take
appropriate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.

ADJUSTMENT
3-5
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment
3.4.1 General description

There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this
image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)".
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
1) Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463
Printer Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 401
related (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)
adjustment Primary scanning data laser writing start position 411
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 421
(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment 284
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment 285
Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445
Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing 498
Scanner Image distortion -
related Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 405
adjustment
Image location of primary scanning direction 306
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 340
Image location of secondary scanning direction 305
Top margin 430
Right margin 432
Bottom margin 433

ADJUSTMENT
3-6
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (nor-
mal copy mode).
<Operation keys> <Display>
100% A A3
0 5 TEST MODE
POWER
1
Digital keys : Key in codes. Code No.
100% XXX A3
START 3
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Key in adjustment YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly keyed in.
values. (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
( CLEAR Use to make corrections) Current adjustment value
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored

100% A A3
or replacing values YYY. TEST MODE
INTERRUPT
FAX 100% A A3
Test copy
START Wait Warming Up
If the test copy does not

satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and 100% A A3
repeat the adjustment COPYING
procedure.
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
Fig. 3-2

ADJUSTMENT
3-7
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
PFP PFP Bypass feed
Upper Lower
Paper type Weight upper lower LCF ADU
drawer drawer Black Color
drawer drawer
Plain paper 64-80 g/m2 450 (*4) 452 (*4) 448 (*4) 449 (*4) 457 455 (*1) 458 (*1)
17-20 lb.
Thick 81-105 g/m2 469 (*4) 470 (*4) 471 (*4) 472 (*4) 473 474 (*1) 460 (*1)
paper 1 21-28 lb.
Thick 106-163 g/m2 - - - - - - 461 475
paper 2 29-43 lb. (*1) (*3)
Thick 164-209 g/m2 - - - - - - 462 475
paper 3 44-55 lb. (*2) (*3)
OHP film - - - - - - - 463 475
(*1) (*3)
Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size
(*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 3: Post card
(*3) 0: Long size of thick paper 2 1: Middle size of thick paper 2
2: Short size of thick paper 2 3: Long size of thick paper 3
4: Middle size of thick paper 3 5: Short size of thick paper 3
6: Long size of OHP film 7: Middle size of OHP film
8: Short size of OHP film 9: Post card
(*4) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 1 3: Short size 2
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-329 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
Short size 1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches or shorter)
Short size 2: 204 mm or shorter (8.0 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.
<Procedure>
(Not necessary for LCF)

[0][5] (Code) [START] (Sub-code) [START] Current value Enter new
[Power] displayed value
[SET] or [Drawer [POWER]

[INTERRUPT] (*5) +[FAX]
selection] OFF/ON
Stores in memory (Test print) (Exit)
(*5) 1: Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode

3: Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode
55: Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode
56: Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode
57: Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode
58: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode
59: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Black Mode
60: Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode
Note:
If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding
may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew,
an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to
the above and select the appropriate value.

ADJUSTMENT
3-8
3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.
1 21
A
6
B, E
2
3
Feeding direction
6
C
22
Fig. 3-3
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment
Tolerance
A 200 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))”
B 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)”
C 200 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment
of main motor rotation speed (Printer))”
D 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position”
E 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”

ADJUSTMENT
3-9
05/11
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed (Printer))
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.→ (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [401]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed.
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.))
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed
(Printer))
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the
grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(4) Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
* Confirm that the input value is [153]. If not, key in [153].
→ (Key in [153])
→ (Key in the code [421]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (recommended values: 110 to 140 / acceptable values: 0 to 255))

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 10
* When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image
may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image
may become lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image.
→ “100% A” is displayed
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/6
steps).
[D] Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.
* Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi- 3
ciency of the transfer belt.
Adjustment (code) Input value
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction
110 111-120 121-130 131-140
reproduction ratio (421)
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing
147 143 141 137
adjustment (284)
<Procedure>
→ (Key in a value)
[E] Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment

This adjustment has to be performed after “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio (421)” Acceptable values are 88 to 168. The larger the value is, the later the transfer belt cleaning
unit release timing becomes.
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.
* Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi-
ciency of the transfer belt.
Adjustment (code) Input value
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction
110 111-120 121-130 131-140
reproduction ratio (421)
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing
147 143 141 137
adjustment (285)
<Procedure>
→ (Key in a value)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source.
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and accept-
able values.
Order for Paper Acceptable
Code Paper size Remarks
adjustment source value
1 Lower
441 A3/LD 0 to 80
drawer
2 Upper
440 A4/LT 0 to 40
drawer
3 PFP or LCF 444/443 A4/LT 0 to 40
4 Bypass feed 442 A4/LT 0 to 40
5 Duplexing 445 A3/LD 0 to 40 Paper fed from the lower drawer
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code shown above) → [START]
→ (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
→ [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step).
[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[G-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [0] → [START]
→ "100% A" is displayed.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 12
[G-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper
(2) Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [1] → [START]
→ "100% A" is displayed 3
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to E>

[0] [5] [Power ON] → [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) → [FAX]
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
→ Key in the same value for 05-410.
C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.5 mm/6 steps)
D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) → 52±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step)
441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),
442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13
3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment
[A] Image distortion
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig. 3-4
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.
(3) Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 14
(4) Make an adjustment in the order of step 1
and 2.
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)
Step 1
In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW).
In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Carriage-2
3
Fig. 3-5
Step 2
In case of C: Adjustment screw
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). for the mirror-1 (Rear)
In case of D:
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Carriage-1
Fig. 3-6
(5) Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
• Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E
The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to
page 3-19.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1
mm/step).
[C] Image location of primary scanning direction
(4) Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 10 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance B is within 10±0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [306]) → [START]
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[D] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(4) Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance C is within 150±0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.22 %/step).
[E] Image location of secondary scanning direction
(4) Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance D is within 10±0.5 mm.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 16
<Procedure>
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14
mm/step).
[F] Top margin
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer. 3
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-7
[G] Right margin
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
07/04
<Procedure>
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-8
[H] Bottom margin
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press the [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm.
<Procedure>
→ (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge
becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-9

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 18
• Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1
Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1.
1) Points to be measured in the chart
D
Feeding direction
C
B
Fig. 3-10
<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON] → (Chart TCC-1) → [FAX] → [START] (A3/LD, 100%, Black and Text/
Photo)
A: 05-405 → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
B: 05-306 → 5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
C: 05-340 → 150±0.5 mm (0.3 mm/step)
D: 05-305 → 10±0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
2) Checking areas of the chart and their descriptions
[9] [1] [8] [10]
[2] [5] [2]

[3] [3]
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART [7] [2]

No.TCC-1
[1]
[1]
[6]
[4] [6]
[3]
[14] [11]
[7] [12] [7]

[7]
[2] [13]
[1] [8]
Fig. 3-11
[1] Grid patterns : For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section
[2] YMCK patches : For checking uniformity
[3] Resolution patterns : For checking resolution
[4] Gradation pattern : Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)
Coverage: 10-100%
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance
[5] Color registration pattern : For checking color registration
[6] Pictures : For checking color reproduction and moire
[7] Magnification lines : For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary
scanning directions
[8] Center lines : Center lines for A4/LT sizes
[9] Arrow : A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass
(place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.)
[10] Halftone band : For checking uniformity
[11] White text on the black : For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid
solid
[12] Text : For checking reproduction of text
[13] Thin lines : For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm)
[14] Note area : For recording the date, conditions, etc.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 20
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjust-
ment:
• Laser optical unit • Photoconductive drum • Developer material
• Main charger wire • Main charger grid • Transfer belt
• 1st transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade • Drum cleaner brush 3
• Image Quality sensor
(2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
• 2nd transfer roller
Notes:
1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjust-
ment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the adjust-
ment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need
to be adjusted individually.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>

1642 Automatic gamma <Procedure>
(1643) adjustment 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment
(580) Mode
2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] but-
ton to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.
Pattern No. Pattern Remarks

4 Color/black integrated When performing code 1642
10* Black When performing code 580
5* Color When performing code 1643
* This adjustment is performed only when "3.5.12 Beam level conversion
setting" is performed. Usually, only the adjustment with the color/black
integrated pattern (05-1642) is performed.
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the
original glass. In the cases of patterns 4 and 5, place the chart aligning its
side with 2 black squares against the original scale.
In the case of pattern 10, place the chart aligning its black side of the grada-
tion pattern against the original scale.
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

→ The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic
gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the
[ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the
control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch
chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed
inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
3.5.2 Color Deviation Adjustment
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted as follows.
There are 2 methods to adjust color deviation; using "Test pattern 63 (for A3/LD size paper)" or "Test
pattern 68 (for A4/LT size paper)" (adjustment method 1), and using "Test pattern 64 (for A3/LD size
paper)" (adjustment method 2). Adjust using either one of these methods.
* Only adjustment method 1 can be used for A4/LT paper.
Adjustment Paper size,

Type Printing Image Procedures
method Number of pages
1 Test pattern 63 (A3/LD) Ladder A3/LD, 2 pages 05-63-[FAX]

Test pattern 68 (A4/LT) Ladder A4/LT, 4 pages 05-68-[FAX]
2 Test pattern 64 (A3/LD) Block A3/LD, 2 pages 05-64-[FAX]
Note:
Follow the procedure in the order below for the color deviation adjustment.
If you start in the middle of the procedure, continue the subsequent steps.
E.g.: If you start with step 2 (A3/LD, 2nd sheet), perform steps 3 to 6.
Order Test pattern
1 A3/LD, 1st page
2 A3/LD, 2nd page
3 A4/LT, 1st page
4 A4/LT, 2nd page
5 A4/LT, 3rd page
6 A4/LT, 4th page

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 22
Adjustment method 1
<Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)>
Test pattern (Ladder)
3
Feeding direction
[Test pattern]
Details of A
Use the image position of M as a
reference and align the image positions of
Y, C and K with this reference.
Details of B
[Details of adjustment area]
Fig. 3-12
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is
printed correctly.)
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.
Order Test pattern Code
1 1st page 417
2 2nd page 418

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment
Mode)
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.
• Select A3/LD size. Key in “63” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern
are printed out.
• Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.
• Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.
• Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
Sub code 0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)
• Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
Notes:
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by
0.0423 mm.
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation
amount of each edge so that it is uniformed.
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected to that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of adjustment.
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.
<Adjustment procedures (for A4/LT size paper)>

Use “Test pattern 68” for the adjustment method to adjust a color deviation.
* Perform this adjustment after <Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)> is performed.
printed correctly.)
1 1st page 953
2 2nd page 954
3 3rd page 955
4 4th page 956
Mode)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 24
• Select A4/LT size. Key in “68” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 4 pages of the test pattern
are printed out.
Notes:
0.0423 mm.
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing 3
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation
amount of each edge so that it is made uniform.
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of the adjustment.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
Adjustment method 2
Test pattern (Block)
Pattern on the leading edge side
Feeding direction
Pattern on the trailing edge side

[Test pattern]
K C M
K Y The colors overlap
Rejection Y C (Adjustment is needed).
K C M
K C M
The colors are allowed to con-
Acceptation Y K Y C tact each other.
K C M
K C M
Optimal condition Y K Y C Equal gap between the image
positions of each color is the
K C M
optimal condition.
Gap: approx. 0.169 mm

Adjust the image positions of K, C and Y so that the colors do not overlap.
[Details of adjustment area]
Fig. 3-13
printed correctly.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 26
1 1st page 417
2 2nd page 418
Mode)
• Select A3/LD size. Key in “64” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern
are printed out. 3
Notes:
0.0423 mm.
2. Adjust the image positions of black (K), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) so that these colors do not
overlap one another.
3. If patterns on both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation amount of
each edge so that it is made uniform. (i.e. Adjust it so as to make the upper-side gap of the
pattern on the leading edge and lower-side gap of the pattern on the trailing edge equal, and
to make the lower-side gap of the pattern on the leading edge and upper-side gap of the pat-
tern on the trailing edge equal.)
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of the adjustment.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
3.5.3 Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
Original mode
Color Item to be
Text/ Printed Remarks
mode Text Photo Map adjusted
Photo Image
Full 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
Color mode center value the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
mode dark step the dark side becomes.
value Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter
mode light step the light side becomes.
1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker
mode the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Color Original mode Item to be
Remarks
mode Text/Photo Text Photo adjusted
Black 503 504 501 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
mode center value the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
508 510 509 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
mode dark step the dark side becomes.
505 507 506 Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter
mode light step the light side becomes.
514 515 512 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker
mode the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment".
<Procedure>
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 28
3.5.4 Color balance adjustment
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The adjust-
ment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high
density.

Original mode
Item to be
Color Text/ Printed Remarks
Text Photo Map adjusted
Photo Image
Yellow 1779-0 1780-0 1781-0 1782-0 1783-0 Low density The larger the value is,
the darker the color to
1779-1 1780-1 1781-1 1782-1 1783-1 Medium density
be adjusted becomes.
1779-2 1780-2 1781-2 1782-2 1783-2 High density Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128) 3
Magenta 1784-0 1785-0 1786-0 1787-0 1788-0 Low density
1784-1 1785-1 1786-1 1787-1 1788-1 Medium density
1784-2 1785-2 1786-2 1787-2 1788-2 High density
Cyan 1789-0 1790-0 1791-0 1792-0 1793-0 Low density
1789-1 1790-1 1791-1 1792-1 1793-1 Medium density
1789-2 1790-2 1791-2 1792-2 1793-2 High density
Black 1794-0 1795-0 1796-0 1798-0 1798-0 Low density
1794-1 1795-1 1796-1 1798-1 1798-1 Medium density
1794-2 1795-2 1796-2 1798-2 1798-2 High density
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] but-
ton.
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
0: Low density (L)
1: Medium density (M)
2: High density (H)
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.
→ The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
3.5.5 Gamma balance adjustment
The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following:
low density, medium density and high density.

Color Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
mode Text/Photo Text Photo
Black 590-0 591-0 592-0 Low density The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
590-1 591-1 592-1 Medium density
adjusted becomes darker.
590-2 591-2 592-2 High density Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Note:
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.
3.5.6 Offsetting adjustment for background processing

The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.

Original mode
Color
Text/ Printed Item to be adjusted Remarks
mode Text Photo Map
Photo Image
Full 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 Automatic density The larger the value is, the
Color adjustment for back- darker the background
ground becomes. (Automatic)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255.
(Default: 128)
1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 Automatic density The larger the value is, the
adjustment for text darker the text becomes.
(Automatic)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 Manual density The larger the value is, the
adjustment for back- darker the background
ground becomes. (Manual)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 Manual density The larger the value is, the
adjustment for text darker the text becomes.
(Manual)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 30
3.5.7 Judgment threshold for ACS
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at a color
mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the
RADF.

1675 Item to be adjusted The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at
Judgment threshold the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as
for ACS when origi- color.
nal is set manually Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 70)
1676 Judgment threshold
for ACS when origi- 3
nal is set on RADF
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make
adjustment.
<Procedure>
3.5.8 Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.

Code Color mode Original mode Contents
1737 Full Color Text/Photo • The larger the value is, the sharper the image
becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the
1738 Text
image becomes.
1739 Printed Image • The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to
appear.
1740 Photo
• The acceptable values are 0 to 31.
1741 Map The center value is 16.
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
604 Black Text/Photo
605 Text
606 Photo
1757 Auto Color Text/Photo
ment.
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
3.5.9 Setting range correction
The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.

Original mode
Text/Photo Photo Text
570 571 572 Range correction for The following are the default values set
original manually set for each original mode.
on the original glass Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
One's place: Automatic density mode
Ten's place: Manual density mode
693 694 695 Range correction for
The setting conditions possible are as
original set on the
follows:
RADF
Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
ment.
<Procedure>
3.5.10 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a Black Mode can be set at the following
codes.

Original mode
Text/Photo Photo Text
532 533 534 Background peak for When the value increases, the back-
range correction ground (low density area) of the image
is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 40)
ment.
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 32
05/11
3.5.11 Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.

Original mode
Text/Photo
648 Adjustment of When the value increases, the faint
smudged/ faint text text is improved. When the value
decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
(Default: 30)
3
ment.
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the stan-
dard when the setting value is changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
3.5.12 Adaptation to highlighter

Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes;
highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed.

Code One touch adjustment Remarks
1769 Vivid 0: Default (Vivid / Clear / Warm / Cool)
1: Highlighter 1
1770 Clear
2: Highlighter 2
1771 Warm
1772 Cool
Note:
The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33
3.5.13 Beam level conversion setting
The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the
dot size.

Code One touch adjustment Remarks
667-0 Beam level 0/4 The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced accord-
667-1 Beam level 1/4
ingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
667-2 Beam level 2/4 (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, Level 3/
4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.
Notes:
1. When this adjustment is performed, “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Black Mode)” (05-
580) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at Black Mode varies. The
result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black integrated pattern. Namely, each auto-
matic gamma adjustment of Black Mode (05-580) or of Color Mode (05-1643) needs to be
performed individually after this adjustment.
2. After this adjustment, set “1” in 08-595 so that the correction result of the Black Mode is not
reflected on “Automatic Calibration”.
3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
4. Usually, beam level 4 is most effective on all black modes.
3.5.14 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type

The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.

Code Paper type Remarks
1612 Plain paper The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing
1613 Thick paper 1
offsetting, etc).
1614 Thick paper 2 Acceptable values : 0 to 255.
(Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 249,
1615 Thick paper 3
Thick paper 2: 237, Thick paper 3: 237, OHP film: 249)
1616 OHP film
Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 34
3.5.15 Maximum text density adjustment
The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows.

Color Code Item to be adjusted Remarks
Yellow 1630 Maximum text density The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density
of each color to be adjusted becomes.
Magenta 1631
Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)
Cyan 1632
Black 1633
ment using the following procedure. 3
Note:
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Density adjustment”.
3.5.16 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment

Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode, Auto color mode and Gray scale mode can be
adjusted.
Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to "Photo oriented 1", "Photo oriented 2",
"Text oriented 1" or "Text oriented 2" in the following codes.

Mode
Item to be adjusted Contents
Text/Photo
1725 Text/Photo reproduc- 0: Default
tion level adjustment 1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction level
higher than that of the Photo oriented 1)
2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level
higher than that of the Default)
3: Equivalent to the Default
4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than
that of the Default)
5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than
that of the Text oriented 1)
Notes:
• The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the
Photo oriented 1 or Photo oriented 2. (The text reproduction level in Photo oriented 2 is lower
than that in Photo oriented 1.)
• Changing the setting value from default value to the Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 causes
image noise in the printed photo image with few lines per inch. (Photo oriented 2 causes more
image noise than Photo oriented 1.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35
3.5.17 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode
Black reproduction can be switched at the Twin color (Black/Red) copy mode.

Mode
Twin color copy mode Item to be adjusted Contents
(Black/Red)
1761 Black reproduction 0: Default
switching 1: Black reproduction oriented
Note:
The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is "1".
3.5.18 Background adjustment(Black Mode)

Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes.
Original mode Item to be
Remarks
Text/Photo Photo Text adjusted
600 602 601 Background 1 to 9: The larger the value is, the
adjustment background becomes lighter.
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 36
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjustment:
• Laser optical unit • Photoconductive drum • Developer material
• Main charger wire • Main charger grid • Transfer belt
• 1st transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade • Drum cleaner brush
• Image Quality sensor 3
2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
• 2nd transfer roller
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment
of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".

Color Code Remarks
1000 Automatic <Procedure>
1001 gamma 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ? Adjustment
1002 adjustment Mode
1003 2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button
to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.
Pattern No. Language/Resolution Remarks
47 PS/600x600dpi When performing code 1000
48* PS/1200x600dpi When performing code 1001
49 PCL/600x600dpi When performing code 1002
50* PCL/1200x600dpi When performing code 1003
* Perform the adjustment only when the expansion memory has been
installed.
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the origi-
nal glass, with its side, on which two black squares are present, aligned
against the original scale.
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. ? The scanner reads the chart
automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx.
30 sec.).
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown.
Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press
the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display.
When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then,
check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or
if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and after-
ward.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
08/04
3.6.2 Color deviation adjustment
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted.
For the adjustment procedures, see Chapter 3.5.2 “Color Deviation Adjustment”.
Note:
Since color deviation adjustment in the copying function is in common with that in the printer
function, it does not need to be done if already performed in the copying function.
3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)

The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is per-
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Language and screen
Color Smoot Smoot
Detail Detail Item to be adjusted Remarks
mode h h
(PS) (PCL)
(PS) (PCL)
Black 596-0 597-0 598-0 599-0 Low density The larger the value is, the
596-1 597-1 598-1 599-1 Medium density
adjusted becomes darker.
596-2 597-2 598-2 599-2 High density Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 38
3.6.4 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by
selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.

PS PCL
Color 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi Density Remarks
Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail
Yellow 1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 Low The larger
the value
1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1022-1 1026-1 1030-1 1034-1 1038-1 Medium
is, the
1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-2 1026-2 1030-2 1034-2 1038-2 High darker the
color to be
Magenta 1011-0 1015-0 1019-0 1023-0 1027-0 1031-0 1035-0 1039-0 Low
adjusted
3
1011-1 1015-1 1019-1 1023-1 1027-1 1031-1 1035-1 1039-1 Medium becomes.
Acceptable
1011-2 1015-2 1019-2 1023-2 1027-2 1031-2 1035-2 1039-2 High
values:
Cyan 1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1024-0 1028-0 1032-0 1036-0 1040-0 Low 0 to 255.
(Default:
1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1024-1 1028-1 1032-1 1036-1 1040-1 Medium
128)
1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-2 1028-2 1032-2 1036-2 1040-2 High
Black 1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1025-0 1029-0 1033-0 1037-0 1041-0 Low
1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-1 1029-1 1033-1 1037-1 1041-1 Medium
1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2 1029-2 1033-2 1037-2 1041-2 High
Note:
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment".
3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text

The smudged/faint text at the Black Mode is adjusted.
Language
Remarks
PS PCL
654 655 When the value increases, the smudged text is improved.
When the value decreases, the faint text is improved.
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
(6) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
3.6.6 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode
The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode.
Black mode Language
PS PS PCL PCL Remarks
PS PCL
600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi
664 665 1055 1056 1057 1058 The smaller the value is, the lighter
the density of image becomes.
(Default: 176)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.
3.6.7 Dot size adjustment in black printing

The dot size is adjusted in primary scanning direction in black printing.

Code Remarks
663 The smaller the value is, the dot size becomes smaller.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 255)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.
3.6.8 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type

The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
Code
Paper type Remarks
PS PCL
1046-0 1046-1 Plain paper The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing
1047-0 1047-1 Thick paper 1
offsetting, etc).
1048-0 1048-1 Thick paper 2 Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick
paper 1:
1049-0 1049-1 Thick paper 3
255, Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 200)
1050-0 1050-1 OHP film
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment”.
Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
3.6.9 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing

The state of calibration in color printing mode is initialized at the Setting Mode (08-597). This setting is
to be performed when a defect occurs in “Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1000 to 1003)”. The cause
of defect is presumed as an image failure (jittering or uneven image density) at the patch chart for
gamma adjustment.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 40
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment

The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is per-
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.

Original mode
Item to be Gray Scale
Black Black Black Remarks
adjusted mode
Text/Photo Text Photo
Low density 880-0 881-0 882-0 883-0 The larger the value is, the
Medium density 880-1 881-1 882-1 883-1
adjusted becomes darker. 3
High density 880-2 881-2 882-2 883-2 Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.
Color Original mode Item to be
Remarks
mode Text/Photo Text Photo adjusted
Black 845 846 847 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the
center value image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
855 856 857 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the
dark step value dark side becomes.
(Default: 20)
850 851 852 Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter the
light step value light side becomes.
(Default: 20)
860 861 862 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker the
image becomes.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 42
3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode)
The adjustment level of background center value and the control of background adjustment button are
adjusted.

Code Item to be adjusted Remarks
848 Center value The larger the value is, the background becomes darker. The smaller the value
is, the background becomes lighter.
858 Dark step value The larger the value is, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
853 Light step value The larger the value is, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
3
<Procedure>
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ‡ The equipment goes
3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode)

The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background adjust-
ment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.
For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background
center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
After adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
Code Original mode Remarks

1070 Text The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.
1071 Printed Image
1072 Photo
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at color
modes. The adjustment is available for both the manually-set original and the original used with the
RADF.
1065 Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even
for ACS when origi- at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be
nal is set manually judged as color.
1066 Judgment threshold
for ACS when origi-
nal is set on RADF
<Procedure>:
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
Code Color mode Original mode Contents
1086 Full Color Text • The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes;
while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
1087 Printed Image
• The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.
1088 Photo • The acceptable values are 0 to 31.
The center value is 16.
840 Black Text/Photo
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
841 Text
842 Photo
843 Gray Scale -
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 44
3.7.7 Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
Black
Original mode Gray Item to be

Remarks
Scale adjusted
Text/
Text Photo
Photo
825 826 827 828 Range correc- The following are the default values set for each origi- 3
tion for original nal mode.
manually set on Photo/Text: 12, Text: 12, Photo: 12, Gray Scale: 12
the original glass Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
830 831 832 833 Range correc- Tens place: Manual density mode
tion for original The setting conditions possible are as follows:
set on the RADF Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
<Procedure>
3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction at the Black Mode can be set at the follow-
ing codes.
Black
Original mode Gray Item to be
Remarks
Scale adjusted
Text/
Text Photo
Photo
835 836 837 838 Background When the value increases, the background (low density
peak for range section) of the image is not output.
correction Acceptable vales: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 56, Text: 48, Photo: 16, Gray
Scale: 32)
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45
3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density
The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.
1075 Text The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
1076 Printed Image
1077 Photo
Note:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.
<Procedure>
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection

The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.
1080 Text Remarks
0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB
1081 Printed Image
(Default: 0)
1082 Photo
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 46
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black)
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in
Scanning Function for black image.
Code Remarks
884 When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.
* 0.1%/step
<Procedure>
3
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color)
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in
Scanning Function for color image.
Code Remarks
1060 When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.
* 0.1%/step
<Procedure>

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting

The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-350) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging,
development, transfer and drum cleaning.
The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.
CH1: Main charger wire
CH2: Main charger grid bias
CH3: Color developer bias
CH4: Black developer bias
CH5: 1st transfer roller bias
CH6: 2nd transfer roller bias
CH7: Cleaning blade bias
Note:
Never move the variable resistance on the board since the output adjustment has been per-
formed at the shipment for the high-voltage transformer supplied as a service part. Also do not
perform the setting change when the high-voltage power supply is replaced.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 48
06/08
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section
3.9.1 Carriages
(1) Installing carriage wires

When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Bracket for carriage-1

3
Idler pulley
Wire pulley Hook
Tension spring
Fig. 3-14
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-15
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the
carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
(2) Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions
• Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.
• Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the car-
riage-2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2 Pulley bracket
[Rear] [Front]
Exit side frame
Enlarged view of carriage

B A
Fig. 3-16
• Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
frame and screw up the front/rear side of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear] [Front]
Exit side frame
Bracket Bracket
Enlarged view of carriage

D C
Fig. 3-17

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 50
(3) Assembling carriage wires
Winding the wire around the wire pulley:
• Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley.
One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
• Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
- 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
- 4 turns toward the boss side
Notes:
Pay attention to the followings when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
• Do not twist the wire.
• Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
• Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them. 3
2 turns 4 turns 4 turns 2 turns
Ball terminal Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook Hook
Color: Silver Color: Black
[Rear] [Front]
Fig. 3-18
• After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 51
Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.
Arm
Wire holder jig
Wire holder jig
Fig. 3-19

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 52
3.9.2 Lens unit
(1) Replacing the lens unit

• The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in
the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the
whole unit.
• When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 6 screws indicated with the arrows.
Fig. 3-20
• Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown
below).
Fig. 3-21
(2) Installation of lens unit
Follow the procedure below when installing and replacing the lens unit.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 53
<Procedure>
1) Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with 2 screws.
2) Match the center scale of the plate in which the unit is to be installed and the rightmost scale of
the adjusting hole on the lens unit plate.
[Rear]
Screw
[Front]
Fig. 3-22
3) Tighten 5 screws securely to fix the lens unit while pushing it to the rear side and fix 2 ground
wires with the screws.
[Rear]
Screw
Screw
Screw
[Front]
Fig. 3-23

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 54
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding

<Procedure>
• The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. → Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A)
direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]
Feeding direction 3
Center
[Front]
Fig. 3-24
• The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. → Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B)
direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Center
[Front]
Fig. 3-25

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 55
• Bypass feeding
1) Loosen the screen.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screw.
(A) (B)
Fig. 3-26
• Drawer feeding
1) Loosen 2 screws.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screws.
(B)
(A)
Fig. 3-27

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 56
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit)

Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig
Adjusting procedure:
(1) Take off the black developer unit from the equipment.
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer
material cover. Then discharge the devel- Developer
oper material. material cover
Screw
Fig. 3-28
(3) Remove 2 screws, release the hook and take

off the doctor blade cover.
Screw
Doctor blade
cover Screw
Fig. 3-29

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 57
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert
the gauge “0.55” of the doctor sleeve jig
between the developer sleeve and doctor Developer sleeve Screw
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the
screws.
Doctor-sleeve
jig
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-30
(5) Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-sleeve

jig into the gap between the developer
sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that Developer sleeve
the gauge can move smoothly in the front/
rear direction. In addition, confirm that the Doctor blade
gauge “0.60” cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve
jig
Fig. 3-31
Notes:
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the
doctor blade.
2. While reattaching the black developer unit cover, set the latches securely.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 58
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit)
Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig
Adjusting procedure:
(1) Take off the color developer unit from the equipment.
(2) Remove 2 screws, release 5 hooks and take
off the developer material cover. Then dis- Developer material cover
charge the developer material. Screw
Screw
Fig. 3-32
(3) Remove 4 screws and the toner-scattering

prevention seal holder.
Screw
Toner-scattering prevention
seal holder
Fig. 3-33
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert

the gauge “0.55” of the doctor-sleeve jig Developer sleeve Screw
between the developer sleeve and doctor
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the
screws.
Doctor blade
Doctor-sleeve jig
Fig. 3-34

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 59
(5) Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-sleeve
jig into the gap between the developer Developer sleeve
sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that
the gauge can move smoothly in the front/ Doctor blade
rear direction. In addition, confirm that the
gauge “0.60” cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Fig. 3-35
Notes:
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the
doctor blade.
2. While reattaching the color developer unit cover, set the latches securely.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 60
3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the stop position of the black developer unit lift up/down lever devi-
ates from the reference and a CEB0 error occurs.
The reference position means that the rib of the developer unit cover and the cutout of the black devel-
oper unit lift up/down lever are not overlapped as shown in Figure "A". (The cutout is in the 9 o'clock
position.)
B
A
Cutout
Rib
3
C
Black developer unit

lifting lever
Adjustment procedure
(1) Perform 03-460 Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement)
and check the stop position of the black developer unit lifting lever. At this time, check the devia-
tion amount between the rib and the cutout of the lever.
(2) The stop position is "B" (the cutout is lower than the reference position):
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) smaller so that the stop position is closer to the
reference. Making the value smaller by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.
Note:
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 0 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the
clutch.
(3) The stop position is "C" (the cutout is upper than the reference position):
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) larger so that the stop position is closer to the
reference. Making the value larger by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.
Note:
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 8 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the
clutch.
Note:
If an error occurs even though this adjustment is performed, other causes may be considered.
Examine and check the defect according to the methods in troubleshooting.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 61
05/07
Code to be used for the adjustment
Code Classifi- Items Function Default RAM Contents Proce-

cation <Accept- dure
able
value>
499 Develop Black developer unit ALL 4 M Changes the lift up/down 1
-ment lift up/down timing <0-255> timing of the black devel-
adjustment oper unit when a CEB0
error occurs.
Note:
Do not input more than 8 for acceptable value. (If a number from 9 to 255 is input, it is processed
as 8.)
Relation between adjustment value and changing amount

Adjustment Changing amount for default value
value (Turning degree of black developer unit lift up/down lever)
0 Turning 32 degrees CW (approx. 12 mm in the lever circumference)
4 Default value
5 Turning 8 degrees CCW (approx. 3 mm in the lever circumference)
* CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counter Clockwise

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 62
05/07
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF Position

Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1) Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins

(the positioning pins are installed to the back 3
side of the hinge which is on the left side of
the RADF).
Fig. 3-36
(2) Remove the platen sheet.
Fig. 3-37

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 63
(3) Close the RADF and check if the positioning
pins fit the holes on the RADF.
Fig. 3-38
[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
(1) Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the

rear side.
Fig. 3-39
(2) Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-40

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 64
(3) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
3
Fig. 3-41
(4) Position the pins with the holes on the RADF

by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes
when the RADF is closed.
Fig. 3-42
(5) Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-43

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 65
(6) Loosen the hole position adjustment screws
on the right hand side.
Fig. 3-44
(7) Match the screw hole positions.
Fig. 3-45
(8) Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear

side.
Fig. 3-46

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 66
(9) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
3
Fig. 3-47
(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass

and align it to the top left corner.
Close the RADF gently and open it to check
if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig. 3-48

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 67
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF Height
Note:
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1) Close the RADF.

(2) Light the exposure lamp.
• Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously.
• Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given
length of time.
(3) Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass
"B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
[Tolerance of the gap]

Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm
Front side: 0 mm
0.2-0.5 mm
0 mm
A A
B B
Fig. 3-49
[B] Adjustment
(1) Close the RADF.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 68
(2) Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges.
• Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered
Fig. 3-50
• Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig. 3-51

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 69
3.12.3 Adjustment of Skew
Note:
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Fig. 3-52 Chart (Original)
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 70
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-53
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
Fig. 3-54 Fig. 3-55
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 71
Duplex copying:
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-56
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-
", and if "D", shift it to "+".
Fig. 3-57 Fig. 3-58
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 72
3.12.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position
Note:
[A] Checking
Simplex copying:
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy. 3
Duplex copying:
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
E F
Fig. 3-59 Chart (Original)

Fig. 3-60 Copy
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 73
Duplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
3.12.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position

Note:
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Fig. 3-61
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 74
Note:
3
Fig. 3-62

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 75
3.12.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio
Note:
[A] Checking
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig. 3-63

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 76
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height “A” becomes 100 mm or
less (within the empty weight falling limit).
A
3
Fig. 3-64
Fig. 3-65

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 77
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)
3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Adjust the front jogging plate to the home
position. ON
• Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC
board as shown in Fig. 3-1301.
• Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PC board.
- The front jogging plate moves to the
home position. Fig. 3-66
(3) Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home

position. ON
• Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC
board as shown in Fig. 3-1302.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-67
• Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller
PC board. Rear jogging plate home position
- The rear jogging plate moves to the
home position.
Fig. 3-68
(4) Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 78
(5) Remove the processing tray.
(6) Loosen the screw on the home position sen-
sor plate at the front. Home position
Screw sensor plate
Fig. 3-69
(7) Adjust the position of the front jogging plate

home position sensor (S6) with reference to Sensor
the index.
EX. 1
If the width is 319 mm in step (2), the differ- A B
ence from the standard is +2 mm, it requires
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of
arrow A by 2 mm.
EX. 2
If the width is 316 mm in step (2), the differ-
ence from the standard is -1 mm; it requires
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of
arrow B by 1 mm.
Fig. 3-70

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 79
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate
(1) Without removing the processing tray unit,

loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jog- Screw Rear jogging plate
ging plate.
Fig. 3-71
(2) Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the

processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging
plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between 0 mm to 0.5 mm
the paper and the front end of the rear jog-
ging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0.5 mm.) Paper
Screw
Butted Rear jogging

plate
Fig. 3-72
(3) With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the
same manner.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 80
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag
If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjust-
ment.
(1) Remove the processing tray unit.

(2) Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear
jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the Jogging plate
adjusting plate Screw
adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Adjusting plate Screw Jogging plate Adjusting plate

adjusting plate
Fig. 3-73
(3) Tighten the screw so that the overlap

between the flag of the front/rear jogging Sensor Sensor flag
rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0
mm.
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-74

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 81
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt
(2) Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach
the grip unit. Screw Grip unit Screw
Fig. 3-75
(3) Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate.

(The tension arm plate will be pulled under Screw Tension arm plate
tension by the tension spring.)
Fig. 3-76

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 82
(4) Move the returning roller shaft to its lower
limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, Screw Tension arm Returning
tighten the screw on the tension arm plate. plate roller shaft
Fig. 3-77
(5) Check to make sure that the returning roller

shaft moves smoothly. Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-78

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 83
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate
(2) Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.
(3) Remove the stack tray.
(4) Remove the stack tray drive unit.
(5) Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate
so that it is in view through the hole in the
side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fix-
ing screw. (Perform the same for the front
and the rear.)
Screw
Stack tray guide lever

fixing plate
Fig. 3-79
Note:
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray
guide lever
Fig. 3-80

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 84
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle
(1) Remove the front cover.
Fig. 3-81
(2) Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.
Fig. 3-82
(3) The tension becomes loose.

While pushing the bracket down, hold the
tray and move it up or down, to adjust the
angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a
visual check.
Fig. 3-83

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 85
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing
screw of the bracket.
Fig. 3-84
Note:
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped
tooth.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 86
3.13.7 DIP switch functions
You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board
appropriately.
Initiating Operations
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on dur-
ing operation).
Setting Item Operation To stop
Delivery motor The delivery roller rotates in a specific • Press SW2 again.
ON speed. • Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing The stack delivery lever moves to its • Turn OFF the joint
ON motor (stack home position and stops. sensor (S4).
delivery lever)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing The returning roller moves to the home • Turn OFF the joint
ON motor (returning position and stops. sensor (S4).
roller)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front jogging When not at the The front jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
ON plate motor home position moves to its home sensor (S4).
position and stops.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When at the The front jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
home position moves over a specific sensor (S4).
position and stops at
the home position.
Rear jogging When not at the The rear jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
ON plate motor home position moves to the home sensor (S4).
position and stops.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When at the The rear jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
home position moves over a specific sensor (S4).
distance and stops.
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves up and stops • Press SW2 again.
ON motor (up) when the upper stack tray upper limit • Turn OFF the joint
sensor turns ON. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves down and • Press SW2 again.
ON motor (down) stops when the lower stack tray lower • Turn OFF the joint
limit sensor turns ON. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves up and stops • Press SW2 again.
ON motor (up) when the lower stack tray upper limit • Turn OFF the joint
sensor is turned ON. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 87
Setting Item Operation To stop
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves down and • Press SW2 again.
ON motor (down) stops when the lower stack tray lower • Turn OFF the joint
limit sensor is turned ON. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stapler motor The stapler motor stops after the stapling • Press the stapler
ON operation. safety switch
(S14).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Shipping posi- The upper and lower stack trays move to • Turn OFF the joint
ON tion operation the shipping position and stop. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note:
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 88
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)

Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position
must be changed for some reason.
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.

(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON ON
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4 paper LT paper
Fig. 3-85
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
• When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
(5) Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stop-
per.
(6) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against
the paper.
• When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward.
• When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward.
(7) When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once to store the adjustment in memory.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104.
(9) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 89
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position
must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when
the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type.
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.

(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4/front stitch A4/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4-R/front stitch A4-R/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT/front stitch LT/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT-R/front stitch LT-R/rear stitch
Fig. 3-86
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
• When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
(5) Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the
rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment
plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and
repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment.
(6) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled
paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once again.
(7) Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is
needed, proceed to the step 9).
(8) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.
• When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.
• When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 90
(9) After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the
alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the
rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value
is stored in memory.)
• The staple position adjustment is completed.
(10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board.
(11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)

The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper posi-
tioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position).
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the 3
settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you
must change the folding position.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional
puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
(2) Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 3-87
(3) Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 91
(4) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-88
(6) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)
(7) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.
(8) Close the inlet cover.
(9) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
• The saddle stitcher unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 92
(10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform
“positive width adjustment” or “negative width adjustment” to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
• If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform “positive width adjustment.”
• If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform “negative width adjustment.”
Positive Width Adjustment Negative Width Adjustment
Mark Mark
Folding position Stitching position 3
L
L
Stitching position Folding position
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm". Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
Fig. 3-89
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
• If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
• If for “positive width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropri-
ate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
• If for “negative width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings Setting
Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 (in units of 0.5 mm)
OFF ON ON +3
OFF ON OFF +2
OFF OFF ON +1
OFF OFF OFF 0
ON OFF ON -1
ON ON OFF -2
ON ON ON -3
Do not use the following setting

Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8
ON OFF OFF
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 93
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.
Code Paper size Remarks
468-0 A4-R / LT-R When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right
page. (0.25mm/step)
468-1 B4
Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)
468-2 A3 / LD
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding B: When the upper side of the folding is
is longer than the lower side shorter than the lower side
Paper feeding direction Paper feeding direction
Fig. 3-90
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)

Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photo-
sensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit).
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-91
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
• Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alter-
nately.
(5) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(6) Turn OFF the power.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 94
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that
the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed
when the punch driver PC board has been replaced.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1 2 3 4
3
Fig. 3-92
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board to select the number of punch holes.
• The items in the following table are displayed repeatedly from top to bottom each time SW602
is pressed.
Number of punch holes LED601/LED602
2 hole (E) Blinks 1 times per cycle
2/3 hole (N) Blinks 2 times per cycle
4 hole (F) Blinks 3 times per cycle
4 hole (S) Blinks 4 times per cycle
(5) Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
• Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
(6) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(7) Turn OFF the power.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 95
3.15 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)
Note:
Before performing each adjustment, make sure that all covers (incl. those of the finisher and host
machine) are closed. Otherwise, the power is not supplied to the finisher and the adjustment may
not be performed properly.
3.15.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position

Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the alignment position must
be changed for some reason.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-93
Adjusting for Adjusting for

A4 size paper LT size paper
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-94
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops.
(It stops at the position of -5 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 96
06/08
(5) Press the [Button1] to adjust the alignment position.
Every time the [Button1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 1 step (0.419 mm/step) toward the
“+ “direction. (The gap between the alignment plates becomes narrower.)
Adjustment range is from -5 to +5 steps.
If the [Button1] is pressed when the alignment position is at the “+5 step”, the plate will return to
the home position and then moves to the position of “-5 step”.
LED3 LED2 LED1
3
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-95
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding adjust-
ment value.
Number of Blinking Adjustment Value

1 -5
2 -4
3 -3
4 -2
5 -1
6 0
7 +1
8 +2
9 +3
10 +4
11 +5
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(9) Install the board access cover.

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 97
06/08
3.15.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position
Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the stapling position must be
changed for some reason.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-96
When adjusting the rear When adjusting the rear

side for A4 size paper side for LT size paper
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
When adjusting the front When adjusting the front

side for A4 size paper side for LT size paper
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-97
The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the
position of -20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 98
06/08
(5) Press [Button 1] to adjust the stapling position.
Every time [Button 1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 4 steps (0.45 mm) toward the "+"
direction. (It moves toward the rear side.)
Adjustment range is from -20 to +20 steps. If [Button 1] is pressed when the alignment position is
at the “+20 steps”, the plate will return to the home position and then moves to the position of “-
20 steps”.
Note:
Stapling for checking the position can be done by pressing [Button 2] with sheets placed on the
finishing tray. (stapled on the rear side)
LED3 LED2 LED1
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-98
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
Number of blinking Adjustment value

1 -20
2 -16
3 -12
4 -8
5 -4
6 0
7 +4
8 +8
9 +12
10 +16
11 +20

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 99
06/08
3.15.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings
Set this mode if the trailing edge of the paper gets caught by the exit section of the finisher while B4-
size recycled paper is used. This mode increases the paper exiting speed when the paper exits to the
movable tray in the sort mode, or to the stationary tray in the non-sort mode.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-99
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-100

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 100
06/08
(5) Press [Button1] and [Button2] as described in the following table to set the B4-size recycled
paper mode. Press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as below to set the B4-size recy-
cled paper mode.
Note:
Be sure to press [Button1] and [Button2] the correct number of times.
Press [Button1] and [Button2] simultaneously to cancel the operation.
LED3 LED2 LED1
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-101
B4-size recycled paper mode
Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks
1 Button1 1
2 Button2 1 Confirms the input value
3 Button1 8
Note:
To change settings from the B4-size recycled paper mode to the normal mode, perform steps (1)
through (4), and then press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as shown below to set
the normal mode.
Normal mode
Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks
1 Button1 1
3 Button1 6
(6) When the settings are stored normally, [LED1] on the control panel is lit. [LED1] blinks, if an error
occurs. In this case, turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step (4).

ADJUSTMENT
3 - 101
06/08
ADJUSTMENT
3 - 102
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4.1 PM Support Mode

The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts
after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use
of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider
not only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
In addition, the drum rotates 4 times at color modes to transfer the images of 4 colors on the transfer
belt, overlaying one after another. Therefore, the number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page
for printing at color mode.
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part
(the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts) and replacement record and to do a
counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103). 4
4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen
[ 1 ] Operational flow
PM support mode activated

[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[RETURN] pressed [2] [START]
Main unit chosen

[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed [RETURN]

pressed
Main unit chosen

[CANCEL] pressed [RESET] Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear screen
Clear finished
[CANCEL]
Counter clear pressed
confirmation displayed
Sub unit chosen
[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 4-1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-1
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10 9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 4-2
1 Displaying of the main unit name

2 Back to the PM support mode activation screen
3 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters 9 and 7 , including all sub unit
(parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are cleared.
4 Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit
5 Moving to the next/previous page
6 Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the
unit parts
7 Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
8 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
9 Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1,000)
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “_” is displayed and “CHECK SUB-
UNIT” is displayed at the top
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.
10 Displaying of the number of output pages / develop counts (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.)
and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed

4-2
Notes:
1. “—” is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
2. “—” is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the
paper source is different depending on the structure of options.

4-3
2) Sub screen
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 4-3
1 Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
2 Back to the main screen
3 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
4 Moving to the next/previous page
5 Displaying of the present number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000)

“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.
6 Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the
sub unit (parts)
7 Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)

“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
8 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
9 Displaying of the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts and previous
replacement date for a chosen sub unit

4-4
3) Clear screen
1 2
Fig. 4-4
4
1 When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen..
2 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages/develop counts”
and Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.

4-5
[ 3 ] Access tree
Note:
The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.
Main screen Sub-screen
Drum/cleaner unit Drum [DRUM]

[CLEANER/DRUM] Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE]
Drum cleaner brush [DRUM BRUSH]
Main charger unit Main charger grid [GRID]

[MAIN CHARGER] Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE]
Main charger wire pad [WIRE CLEANING PAD]
Ozone filter Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]

[FILTER]
Black developer unit Developer material K [BLACK DEVELOPER]

[BLACK DEVELOPER]
Color developer unit Developer material Y [YELLOW DEVELOPER]
[COLOR DEVELOPER] Developer material M [MAGENTA DEVELOPER]
Developer material C [CYAN DEVELOPER]
Transfer belt cleaning unit Transfer belt cleaning blade [BELT CLEANING BLADE]
[TRANSFER BELT CLEANER]
2nd transfer roller unit 2nd transfer roller [2nd TRANSFER ROLLER]
[2nd TRANSFER]
Fuser unit Fuser belt [FUSER BELT]

[FUSER] Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER]
Oil roller [OIL ROLLER]
Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER]
Separation finger [PRESS ROLLER FINGER]
Fuser belt guide [BELT GUIDE]
Pressure roller discharge brush [PRESS ROLLER ERASER BRUSH]
Upper drawer Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(1st CST.)]

[1st CST.] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(1st CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(1st CST.)]
Lower drawer Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]

[2nd CST.] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]
Bypass unit Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(SFB)]

[SFB] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(SFB)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(SFB)]
RADF Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(RADF)]

[RADF] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(RADF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(RADF)]
LCF Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(LCF)]

[LCF] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(LCF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(LCF)]
PFP upper drawer Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]

[3rd CST.] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]
PFP lower drawer Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.)]

[4th CST.] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(4th CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(4th CST.)]

4-6
Note:
When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is
reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET] but-
ton is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry
counter is also reset simultaneously.
The feeding retry counter:

• Upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1390)
• Lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1391)
• PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1392)
• PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1393)
• Bypass unit Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1394)
• LCF Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1395)

4-7
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts
after they were replaced before. However, its drive counts is also to be considered when replacing the
parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part
may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the
part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replace-
ment with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed
roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of out-
put pages and the drive counts.
The number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page for printing at color modes. This “4” is “develop
counts”.
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
• The parts in RADF • The parts in the drum/cleaner unit

• The parts in feeding system • The parts in the transfer belt unit
• The parts in the 2nd transfer unit
• Developer material
• The parts in the fuser unit
Replace the part. Check the drive counts at PM

support mode. Yes
Replace the part.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?
No
The part is still usable.
Replace the part after the drive

counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig. 4-5
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
Yes
Does it exceed the specified drive count? Replace the part.
No
Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”.
Fig. 4-6

4-8
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure
(1) Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S-
2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2 : [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [2] Æ [START]
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [103] Æ [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST

XX-XX-'XX 11:28
UNIT OUTPUT PAGES/ PM OUTPUT PAGE/ DRIVE COUNTS PM DRIVE COUNTS

DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS
DRUM 22220 200000 30948 320000

DRUM BLADE 22220 200000 30948 320000
DRUM BRUSH 22220 200000 30948 320000
GRID 22220 200000 30948 320000 4
MAIN CHARGER WIRE 22220 200000 30948 320000
WIRE CLEANING PAD 22220 200000 30948 320000
Fig. 4-7
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.

4-9
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling
Overhaul each equipment with the following timing.
e-STUDIO281c: When the number of output pages has reached 300,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)
(1) Replace all the supplies.

(2) Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
(3) Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
(4) Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if neces-
sary.
(5) Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.

4 - 10
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Symbols/value used in the checklist
Cleaning Lubrication/Coating Replacement Operation check
A: Clean with alcohol L: Launa 40 Value: O: After cleaning or

B: Clean with soft pad, SI: Silicon oil Replacement replacement,
cloth or vacuum W1: White grease cycle confirm there is
cleaner (Molykote X5-6020) (output pages or no problem.
W2: White grease develop counts)
(Molykote HP-300) R: Replace if
AV: Alvania No.2 deformed or
FL: Floil (GE-334C) damaged
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]

Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Exceptionally, the lubrication for the
drum unit, main charger, color developer unit and 1st transfer unit must follow the PM cycle of
each unit.
e-STUDIO251c:every 100,000 sheets
e-STUDIO351c:every 120,000 sheets 4
e-STUDIO451c:every 150,000 sheets
2. Value under "Replacement" indicates the replacement cycle, and when the cycle is different
for each product, values are indicated in the order of e-STUDIO251c, e-STUDIO351c and e-
STUDIO451c.(KS= x 1,000 sheets, KD= x 1,000 developments)
3. The replacement cycle of the parts for the charge, development and 1st transfer in copying
process is not indicated by the number of output pages (sheet), but the develop counts
(development). The number of output pages is counted as “4 developments” for 1 page for
printing at color mode, and “1 development” at black-and-white mode.
4. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
5. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
6. Page-Item (P-I) is described in the column of the Parts list.
A. Scanner
Lubrication/ Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Remarks
Coating (KS) check <P-I>
A1 Original glass B or A 25-1 *a1
A2 ADF original glass B 25-2 *a1
A3 Mirror-1 B
A4 Mirror-2 B
A5 Mirror-3 B
A6 Reflector B
A7 Lens B 11-10
A8 Exposure lamp R O 26-6
A9 Automatic original B O 11-12
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet B or A R
(front and rear)

4 - 11
05/11
B. Laser unit
B1 LSU slit glass B
C. Feed unit
C1 Pickup roller 80 18-20
C2 Feed roller 80 18-24
C3 Separation roller AV, W2 80 18-5 *c1
C4 Transport roller A R
C5 Paper guide B
C6 Drive gear W1 *c2
(tooth face and shaft)
C7 GCB bushing bearing L
C8 One side of the plastic W1
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
C9 Registration roller A R 23-15,34
C10 Paper dust removal B R 23-2,30 *c10
brush
D. Automatic duplexing unit

D1 Transport roller (upper, A R 43-7,
middle and lower) 36,56
D2 One side of the GCB L
shaft is inserted
D3 One side of the plastic W1
shaft is inserted
D4 Paper guide B 43-46
E. Bypass feed unit

E1 Pickup roller 80 22-26
E2 Feed roller 80 22-37
E3 Separation roller AV, W2 80 21-1 *e1
E4 Bypass tray B
E5 Drive gear (shaft) W1
E6 GCB bushing bearing L
E7 Transport roller A R 22-4,40

4 - 12
05/07
F. Main charger
Coating (KD) check <P-I>
F1 Main charger case B *f1
F2 Main charger wire 130/160/200 O 28-15 *f1
F3 Contact point of termi- B 28-4,9
nals
F4 Charger wire cleaning 130/160/200 28-12
pad
F5 Main charger grid 130/160/200 28-21
G. Drum/Cleaner related section

G1 Photoconductive drum 130/160/200 103-1 Refer to
Chapter
4.8.2 4
G2 Drum stay B *g1
G3 Whole cleaner unit B
G4 Drum cleaning blade 130/160/200 32-10 *g2
G5 Drum cleaner brush 130/160/200 32-5 *g2
G6 Recovery blade B R 32-26 *g3
G7 Used toner auger drive W1

section
G8 Discharge LED B 28-32
G9 Ozone filter 130/160/200 14-31
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing G1 and G4.
H. Toner bag
H1 Toner bag 50 103-6

4 - 13
I. Black developer unit
I1 Whole black developer B

unit
I2 Black developer unit W1

drive section
I3 Developer material (K) 100/120/150 103-2 *i1
I4 Front shield B R 34-39
I5 Oil seal (4 pcs.) AV R 34-3,15 *i2
I6 Guide roller B or A 34-17
I7 Toner cartridge drive W1

gear
I8 Side shield B R 34-37,38
I9 Front bearings of mix- AV R 34-8 *i3

ers
J. Color developer unit / Revolver unit

J1 Whole color developer B
unit (Y, M and C)
J2 Color developer unit W1
drive section
(Y, M and C)
J3 Developer material 24/30/37.5 103-3 *j1
(Y, M, and C)
J4 Front shield B R 33-24
(Y, M and C)
J5 Oil seal AV R 33-4,14 *j2
(4 pcs. for each color)
J6 Toner cartridge drive W1
gear (Y, M and C)
J7 Revolver drive gear W1
J8 Color auto-toner sen- B AV 36-18 *j3
sor
J9 Side shield B R 33-39,40
J10 Polarity adjustment FL 33-9 *j4
plate
J11 Color toner cartridge B 36-104 *j5
sensor
J12 Front bearings of mix- AV R 33-12 *j6
ers

4 - 14
K. Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit
K1 Transfer belt B R 29-31
K2 1st transfer roller R 29-14
K3 Drive roller A R 30-7 *k1
K4 2nd transfer facing A R 30-15 *k1
roller
K5 Transfer belt home B 29-9 *k2
position sensor
(2 pcs.)
K6 Transfer belt cleaning 130/160/200 31-8
blade
K7 Transfer belt recovery B R 31-16 *k3
blade
K8 Blade seal (front side) 130/160/200 31-10
K9 Blade seal (rear side) 130/160/200 31-12 4
K10 Blade mylar (front 130/160/200 31-9
side)
K11 Blade mylar (rear side) 130/160/200 31-11
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing K1, K2 and K6.
L. 2nd transfer roller unit

L1 2nd transfer roller 200/240/300 13-19
L2 Paper guide B
L3 Image quality sensor B 23-24 *l1
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing L1.

4 - 15
M. Fuser unit
M1 Fuser belt 100/120/150 39-1
M2 Pressure roller 100/120/150 42-5
M3 Separation finger 100/120/150 42-25 *m1
M4 Oil roller 100/120/150 42-22
M5 Cleaning roller 100/120/150 42-11
M6 Thermistor (3 pcs.) A R *m2
M7 Fuser unit drive gear W1
M8 Exit roller A
M9 Fuser belt guide 100/120/150 42-18
M10 Separation roller W2 41-2 *m3
M11 Pressure roller dis- 100/120/150 39-1
charge brush
N. RADF (MR-3018)
1 Pickup roller A 120 5-1
2 Separation roller A 120 4-10
3 Feed roller A 120 5-1
4 Registration roller A
5 Intermediate transfer A
roller
6 Front read roller A
7 Platen roller A
8 Rear read roller A
9 Reverse registration A
roller
10 Exit/reverse roller A
11 Platen sheet B or A
O. PFP (KD-1011)
O1 Pickup roller A 80 5-29
(upper/lower)
O2 Feed roller A 80 5-26
(upper/lower)
O3 Separation roller A AV, W2 80 5-112 *o1
(upper/lower)
O4 Drive gear W1
(tooth face)

4 - 16
P. LCF (KD-1012)
P1 Pickup roller A 160 4-30
P2 Feed roller A 160 4-28
P3 Separation roller A 160 5-12
P4 Drive gear W1
(tooth face)
Q. Finisher (MJ-1101)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000) check (P-I)
Q1 Stack transport roller-1 A
Q2 Stack transport roller-2 A
Q3 Buffer roller A
Q4 Exit roller A 4
Q5 Entrance roller A
Q6 Transport roller A
Q7 Paddle 1,000
Q8 Paper holder cam W3 *q1
Q9 Buffer tray shaf W3 *q2
Q10 Stapler carrier shaft W3 *q3
Q11 Rack & pinion gear W3 *q4
(Aligning plate)
Q12 Movable tray drive gear W3 *q5
Q13 Buffer tray guide W3 *q6
Q14 Finishing tray shaft W3 *q7

4 - 17
06/08
A2 A4 A5 A8 A6 A3 A1 A7 A10
K6 D1
K7 A9
K8 M8 M1 M3 M11 M2
K9 K3 K5 K2 G5
K10 D4
J8 G1 K11 G6 G3 M5
G7 G9
J11 M4
G4
M6 K5
J1
J3
J4
D1
J5
J9 K4
J10 L2
L1
J12
C9, C10
D1
E7
E1 E4
I1
I3
I4
I5 E2
I6
I8 E3
C4
I9
C2
C4
C3
C2
C3
F5 F2 F1 G8 K1 B1 C1 C5
F4 F3
Fig. 4-8 Front side

4 - 18
N5 N9 N4 N3 N2 N1
N6 N7 N8 N10 N11
Fig. 4-9
O1 O2
O3
O2
O3
O1
Fig. 4-10 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)

4 - 19
P1 P2
P3
Fig. 4-11 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
[Front side] [Rear side]
Q3 Q8 Q9 Q4
Q14
Q12
Q2
Q5
Q6
Q11 Q7
Q13
Q1
Q10
Fig. 4-12 Finisher (MJ-1101)

4 - 20
06/08
Remarks “*” in the Preventive Maintenance Check List
* a1. Original glass, ADF original glass
Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on
the mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original
glass.
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
* c1, o1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP)

Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply white grease

Apply grease on the
inner surface
Fig. 4-14
Fig. 4-13
* c2. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of moly-
cote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.

4 - 21
05/07
* c10. When installing the intermediate guide after cleaning the paper dust removal brush
attached to it, check whether 2 hooks are fitted in and boss "A" in the figure is inserted into
its groove correctly.
A A A
Fig. 4-15
* e1. Separation roller (SFB)
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the

inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-16 Fig. 4-17
* f1. Main charger case / Main charger wire

Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly,
and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 373 mm).
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not twist the wire.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.

4 - 22
* g1. Drum stay
If toner accumulates on the drum stay, take off the drum stay from the process unit and
clean it with an electric vacuum cleaner. Also, remove any toner stains around the drum
stay with a cloth.
Drum stay
4
Fig. 4-18
* g2. Drum cleaning blade / Drum cleaner brush

Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as
the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade and brush with new ones if poor
images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages
which have been made.
* g3. Recovery blade

Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade
get damaged.
* i1, j1. Developer material

After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and
then image quality control initialization (Ch.3.2).
* i2, j2. Oil seal

Mixer unit (Rear side of mixers-1 & -2) 2 pcs.
Developer sleeve 2 pc.
Notes:
1. Lubricate the oil seal only when the oil seal is replaced
2. When exchanging the oil seal of the mixer unit, replace "i3, j6. Front bearings of mixer" at the
same time.

4 - 23
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2).
(1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mount-

ing hole section of the developer frame or Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.) Outside
(2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
• Amount: About two small drops
(3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside. Inside Grease
Oil seal
Fig. 4-19
* i3, j6. Front bearings of mixers

When exchanging the oil seals (rear side of mixer-1 and -2) replace the front bearings of
mixer-1 and -2 at the same time. Since the oil seal is attached to the front bearings of
mixer-1 and -2, apply grease when replacing them referring to *i2, j2.
* j3. Color auto-toner sensor

Clean the color auto-toner sensor as follows:
1) Pull the sensor case of the color auto-toner sensor unit toward you, then remove 1
screw to take off the sensor shutter. Clean the surface of the sensor with a cotton swab
or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in.
Sensor shutter
Sensor case
Color auto-toner sensor
Fig. 4-20
2) Clean the reference plate of the sensor shutter by blowing off the toner dust with the
blower brush or the air spray cleaner etc.

4 - 24
05/11
Note:
When you clean the reference plate, never touch it directly with the cleaning brush etc. as the
surface of the reference plate is fragile.
Reference plate
Fig. 4-21
* j4. Polarity adjustment plate

Apply two-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the polarity adjustment plate (feeding
terminal). 4
Fig. 4-22
* j5. Color toner cartridge sensor

Perform the cleaning of the surface of the color toner cartridge sensor when you replace
the color developer unit (e-STUDIO281c: 24,000 sheets / e-STUDIO351c: 30,000 sheets /
e-STUDIO451c: 37,500 sheets).
* k1. Transfer belt drive roller -1, -2

Fully clean up the toner and such adhered to the roller with alcohol since an image failure
may occur if there are any bolts remaining on the roller.
Blot
Fig. 4-23

4 - 25
* k2. Transfer belt home position sensor
Clean each surface of transfer belt home position sensors (2 pcs.) with a dry cloth when
replacing the transfer belt.
Transfer belt
home position sensor-1
Fig. 4-24
Transfer belt
home position sensor-2
Fig. 4-25
* k3. Transfer belt recovery blade

Clean the surface of transfer belt recovery blade with a cloth soaked in water and tightly
squeezed, and the wipe it with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade.
If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of
output pages.
* l1. Area around image quality sensor

Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Do not touch the sensor head
inside the shutter.
* m1. Separation finger

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is
any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning.
The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly.
Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.

4 - 26
* m2. Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the ther-
mistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
* m3. Separation roller

When replacing the transfer belt, apply some White Molykote (HP-300) on both ends of
the separation roller shaft.
Fig. 4-26
* q1. Paper holder cam

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) all around the paper holder
cam.
Paper holder cam
Fig. 4-27

4 - 27
06/08
* q2. Buffer tray shaft
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray
shaft.
Buffer tray shaft
Fig. 4-28
* q3. Stapler carrier shaft

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire stapler carrier
shaft.
Stapler carrier shaft
Fig. 4-29

4 - 28
06/08
* q4. Rack gear, pinion gear (Aligning plate)
* q5. Finishing tray shaft
1) Take off the metal shield plate.
* If the hole punch unit is installed, take it off beforehand.
2) Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate
has been removed.
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the
rack and pinion gears which drive the aligning plate, and the entire finishing tray shaft.
Finishing tray shaft
Rack gear
4
Pinion gear
Fig. 4-30
* q6. Movable tray drive gear

Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the
gear-A and gear-B.
Gear B
Gear A
Fig. 4-31

4 - 29
06/08
* q7. Buffer tray guide
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray
guide (inside of the folded section of the plate).
Buffer tray guide
Fig. 4-32

4 - 30
06/08
4.5 PM KIT
KIT name Component Part name Qty.

EPU-KIT-281C Drum cleaning blade BL-3511D 1
Main charger wire WIRE-CHARGR-373 1
Main charger grid GRID-220 1
Drum cleaner brush B-281C 1
Ozone filter FILTER-OZ-SPB-600 1
Charger wire cleaning pad ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350 1
Belt cleaning blade* BL-281CTR 1
DEV-KIT-281CCLR Developer material (Y) D-281C-Y 1
Developer material (M) D-281C-M 1
Developer material (C) D-281C-C 1
Cleaning jig JIG-CLEAN-DOC 1
DEV-KIT-281C Developer material (K) D-3511-K 1
4
Cleaning jig JIG-CLEAN-DOC 1
2nd transfer roller CR-281CTR2 1
FR-KIT-281C Fuser belt BT-3511-FU 1
Pressure roller HR-3511-L 1
Separation finger SCRAPR-FUS-350 1
Oil roller SR-3511U 1
Cleaning roller B-281CU 1
Fuser belt guide COLOR-HR-IN-N 2
Pressure roller discharge brush BRUSH-FUS-PR 1
ROL-KIT-16CST Pick up roller ROLLER-PICK-AT 1
Feed roller K-ROLL-FEED 1
Separation roller K-ROLL-SPT 1
ROL-KIT-1010 Pick up roller ROL-PICK-UP 1
Feed roller ROL-PAPER-FED-F 1
Separation roller ROL-PAPER-FED-S 1
DF-KIT-3018 Pick up roller ASYS-ROL-FEED 1
Feed roller ASYS-ROL-FEED 1
Separation roller ASYS-ROL-RET 1
* The following seals and Mylar sheets are attached to the Belt cleaning blade.
Name Part name Qty.
Blade seal (front side) SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-F-1 1
Blade seal (rear side) SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-R-1 1
Blade mylar (front side) ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-F-1 1
Blade mylar (rear side) ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-R-1 1

4 - 31
05/07
4.6 Jig List
Parts list
Item
Page Item
Door switch jig 101 1
Test chart (A4) 101 3
Test chat (LT) 101 3
Test chart No. TCC-1 (A4) 101 2
Test chart No. TCC-1 (LT) 101 2
Doctor blade cleaning jig 101 4
Downloading jig (DLM board) 102 1
Wire holder jig 101 5
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs) 102 2
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs) 102 3
ROM writer adapter (For 1881) 102 4
ROM writer adapter (For 1931) 102 5
Doctor sleeve jig 101 7
Developer material nozzle 101 8
Belt tenstion jig (spring) 101 20

4 - 32
4.7 Grease List
Parts list
Grease name Part name Volume Container
Page Item
SI Silicon oil ASM-SILICONE-1M 100 cc Bottle 101 8
L Launa 40 OIL-LAUNA40-100 100 cc Oiler 101 9
W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020) MOLYKOTE-100 100 g Tube 101 12
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) ASM-PG-HP300-S 100 g Bottle 101 10A
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) GREASE-HP-S 10 g Bottle 101 10B
AV Alvania No.2 ASM-PG-ALV2 100 g Tube 101 11
FL Floil (GE-334C) ASM-PG-GE334C-S 20 g Bottle 101 13

4 - 33
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies
4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies

1) Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2) Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3) Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade

This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser belt / Pressure roller

Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5) Oil roller / Cleaning roller

Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
They should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.
6) Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum

1) Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photosensitive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare
hands.
2) Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced
with a new one, the drum counter (setting mode (08-1150-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
This clearing can be performed in PM support mode.
Notes:
1. Application of patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade.
If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be dam-
aged.
2. When paper fibers or thread adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.

4 - 34
08/04
3) Installation of equipment and storage of drum
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemi-
cals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such
as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density
immediately after being installed in the equipment.
4) Cleaning the drum

At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated clean-
ing cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface
inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting
cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.
5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface

If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy image will
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a
new drum will be necessary.
4
6) Collecting used photoconductive drums
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the
relevant local regulations or rules.
4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt
cleaning blade
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush

Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands.
4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt

1) Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2) Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the transfer belt surface.
3) Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or any other organic solvent.
4) Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.
5) When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder sufficiently and evenly.
Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency.
6) When replacing the transfer belt, clean the drive roller-1 drive roller-2, and tension roller with a sol-
vent such as alcohol, and then attach the transfer belt.

4 - 35
4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller
Fuser belt
- Do not touch the fuser belt surface with bare hands.
- Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the fuser belt surface.
- Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt.
- Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt.
Pressure roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
- Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be dam-
aged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
2) Checking
- Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary.
- Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
- Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.
- Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
- Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
- Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller.
- Check the fuser belt for proper transportation.
- Check the pressure roller for proper rotation.
3) Cleaning procedure
When the fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are
still warm.
Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.
4) Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit

After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor
scratched.
A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.
Note:
Never rotate the fuser belt in the reverse direction as it will cause deformation of the thermistor
and discharge brush.
4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers.
2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment

Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt sur-
face. When its surface is stained with toner, check the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily
adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/clean-
ing rollers should be replaced with new ones.
The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over
a long period of time. Replace them after the specified number of output pages have been made.

4 - 36
4.8.8 Checking and cleaning of discharge brush
Be careful not to bend the end bristle of the brush as it may cause the bad contact with the pressure
roller.
2) Checking
Replace the discharge brush with a new one if toner is stick to it regardless of the number of output
pages, as the performance of the brush may have been deteriorated.

4 - 37
4 - 38
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
When any of the PC boards or the HDD requires replacement, refer to “5.3 Replacement of PC Boards
and HDD”.
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code
5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section)

[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
| YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.
È 2) Check if the intermediate guide is installed properly. (Chap. 4.4 *c10)
NO
Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt entering under the receiving tray?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the intermediate guide installed properly? (Chap. 4.4 *c10)
È NO Æ Install the intermediate guide correctly.
YES
Is there any paper jammed in the fuser unit?
| YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.
È 2) Check if there is any abnormality on the paper transport path. 5
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit sensor.
|
| 6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-108/158)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration clutch.
|
È
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1
05/07
[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Check the exit roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-2
05/07
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the ADU clutch working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch. 5
|
È
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-3
06/08
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Are the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor working?
(Perform the output check: 03-204 and the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the bypass feed clutch.
|
| 6) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-4
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.
|
| 6) Replace the LGC board. 5
È
YES
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-5
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.
|
È
YES
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-6
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-
| nected.
| 2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-
| connected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
| circuited or open circuited.
| 6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
| 7) Replace the PFP board.
|
È
YES
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is discon-
| nected.
| 2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
5
| board is disconnected.
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
|
È
YES
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-7
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is discon-
| nected.
| connected.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon-
| nected.
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
|
È
YES
Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-8
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is dis-
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
| 6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.
| 7) Replace the LCF board.
|
È
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
| 2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
| 5
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the LCF feed clutch.
|
È
YES
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn
out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5-9
5.1.3 Paper transport jam
[E200] Upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E210] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E300] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E330] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E3C0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
NO
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check: 03-439, 440)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper transport clutches (high/low speed)
| are disconnected.
| circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed).
È
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 10
[E220] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E310] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E340] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E3D0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are
| disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open 5
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 11
[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
[E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
È
YES
Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are
| disconnected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
È
YES
When the paper fed from the PFP:
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
| 6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 12
[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-
| nected.
| connected.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
5
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
|
È
YES
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 13
[E510] ADU transport stop jam
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?
NO
Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is dis-
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
| 6) Replace the ADU entrance sensor.
| 7) Replace the ADU board.
|
È
YES
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connectors CN437 and CN434 on the DRV board is discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short
|
| 6) Replace the exit motor.
| 7) Replace the DRV board.
|
È
YES
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the ADU motor.
È
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are
worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 14
[E520] Stop jam in the ADU
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?
NO
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.
|
È
YES
Is the ADU clutch working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 5
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
|
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 15
06/08
[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding
When the paper is fed from any of the upper drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU:
NO
When the paper is fed from the upper drawer:
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
|
YES
When the paper is fed from the ADU:
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.
YES
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 16
When the paper is fed from any of the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
NO
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensors working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper/lower drawer feed sensors are discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the upper/lower drawer feed sensors.
È
YES
[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding

NO 5
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 17
5.1.4 Other paper jam
[E030] Power-ON jam
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.
Is there any paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table)
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table.)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the sensor.
|
È
NO
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers.

(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test Mode/Input check
Registration area Jam access cover Registration sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]
Upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Exit area Fuser cover Exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]
ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]
ADU exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]
Feeding area Side cover Lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
(equipment)
Bypass unit Bypass unit Bypass feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]
LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor-1 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer

[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the
drawer setting and the one in the drawer.
* Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 18
[E090] Image data delay jam
1) Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.
2) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
3) Check if the connectors connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are dis-
connected.
4) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
5) Check if the harnesses connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are open-
circuited.
6) Replace the HDD, SYS board, SLG board and PLG board.
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path

Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.
Is there any paper on the transport path?
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table)
| 2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the sensor.
5
|
È
YES
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers

(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test Mode/Input check
Registration area Jam access cover Registration sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]
Upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Exit area Fuser cover Exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]
ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]
ADU exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]
Bypass unit Bypass unit Bypass feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]
Feeding area Side cover Lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
(equipment)
LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor-1 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]
Finisher Finisher door Sensors in the finisher -

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 19
5.1.5 Cover open jam
[E400] Jam access cover open
Is the jam access cover open?
È YES Æ Remove paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
È
YES
[E410] Front cover open jam

Is the front cover open?
È YES Æ Shut the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the front cover opening/closing switch.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 20
[E420] PFP side cover open jam
Is the PFP side cover open?
È YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is dis-
| connected.
| connected.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
|
È
YES
1) Replace the PFP board.
5
[E430] ADU open jam
Is the ADU open?
È YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the ADU.
NO
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected.
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the ADU opening/closing switch.
|
È
YES
1) Replace the ADU board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 21
[E440] Side cover open jam
Is the side cover open?
NO
Is the side door switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the side door switch.
|
È
YES
[E450] LCF side cover open jam

Is the LCF side cover open?
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is dis-
| connected.
| connected.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
| 6) Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
|
È
YES
1) Replace the LCF board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 22
[E480] Bridge unit open jam
Is the Bridge unit open?
È YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit.
NO
Is the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection
| switch is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 23
5.1.6 RADF jam
[E712] Jam not reaching the original registration sensor
Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out?
È YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
È YES Æ Flatten and set it again.
NO
Is the original registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the original registration sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the original registration sensor.
|
| 6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E713] Cover open jam in the read ready status

Are the RADF jam access cover or front cover opened in read ready status?
È YES Æ Close the cover
NO
NO
Is the RADF jam access cover sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover sensor is discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the RADF jam access cover sensor.
È 6) Replace the RADF board.
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 24
[E714] Feed signal reception jam
Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])
È YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
NO
Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [7]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.
| 2) Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the empty sensor.
È
YES
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor 5

Are the registration roller and read roller stained?
È YES Æ Clean the rollers.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 25
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)
[E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning)
Is the read roller stained?
È YES Æ Clean the roller.
NO
Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor.
È
YES
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor

Is the registration roller stained?
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 26
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor
Is the read roller stained?
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
È
YES
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor

Is the exit roller stained?
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
5
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
|
È
YES
[E860] RADF jam access cover open

Is the RADF jam access cover opened?
È YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover.
NO
Is the RADF jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover switch is discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the RADF jam access cover switch.
È 6) Replace the RADF board.
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 27
[E870] RADF open jam
Is the RADF opened?
È YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF.
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?
È NO Æ Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor.
YES
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is discon-
| nected.
| circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 28
5.1.7 Finisher jam
[ 1 ] Jam in bridge unit

[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit?
NO
Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C], /[0]/[A])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are
| disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
|
circuited.
|
|
| circuited.
| 6) Replace the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2.
È
YES 5
Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.
|
È
YES
Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated?
(Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
È NO Æ Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
YES
Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 29
[ 2 ] Paper jam in finisher section
[EA10] Paper transport delay jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-
cuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
| 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
| 3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 30
MJ-1101
È ÆYES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
l ÆYES • Reconnect the connector securely.
l • Reinstall the sensor correctly.
È • Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the gap between the flapper and entrance roller shaft other than 0.60±0.20mm when the
gate solenoid (SOL2) is pulled?
È ÆYES Adjust the gap.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) dis-
connected or open circuited?
Is the harness between the gate solenoid (SOL2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
È • Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board. 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 31
06/08
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam
MJ-1022
NO
cuited?
NO
È
YES
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
| 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
| 3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
MJ-1101
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
l ÆYES • Connect the connector securely.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 32
06/08
[EA21] Paper size error jam
MJ-1101
NO
Is the paper size used shorter than the size specified in the specifications?
È ÆYES Use the paper size specified in the specifications.
NO
sensor (S1)?
sensor (S2)?
NO
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
NO 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 33
06/08
[EA30] Power-ON jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
NO
cuited?
NO
È
YES
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
NO
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 34
[EA31] Transport path paper remaining jam
MJ-1101
NO
sensor (S2)?
NO
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
NO
[EA32] Exit paper remaining jam

MJ-1101
5
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the finishing tray
paper detection sensor (S12)?
NO
Is the harness between the finishing tray paper detection sensor (S12) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 35
06/08
[EA40] Door open jam
MJ-1022
NO
Is the finisher connected with the equipment?
È NO Æ Connect the finisher with the equipment.
YES
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open cir-
cuited?
NO
Is the joint sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the joint sensor.
È
YES
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is either of the covers upper or front of the finisher closed?
È NO Æ Close the door.
YES
Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper/front cover opening sen-
sors (PI31 and PI32) open circuited?
NO
Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
È
YES
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open
circuited?
| YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
È
NO
Is the front cover switch working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the front cover switch securely.
| 2) Replace the front cover switch.
È
YES
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open
circuited?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 36
È
NO
Are the upper and front door switches working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the upper and front door switches securely.
| 2) Replace the upper/front door switches.
È
YES
MJ-1101
Is the front cover or stationary tray cover opened?
l ÆYES • Close the front cover.
È • Close the stationary tray cover.
NO
Is there any breakage of the front cover hook which switches the front cover switch (SW1) to
ON?
È ÆYES Replace the handle cover.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front cover
switch (SW1)?
Is there an incorrect installation or breakage of the stationary tray cover opening/closing switch
(SW2)?
l ÆYES • Connect the connector securely. 5
NO
Is the harness between the front cover switch (SW1) / stationary tray opening/closing switch
(SW2) and the finisher control PC board (CN16) disconnected or open circuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 37
06/08
[EA50] Stapling jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-
pling tray?
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
È YES Æ End.
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor
(S17) open circuited?
NO
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the stapling home position sensor.
È
YES
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-
pling tray?
NO
È YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
NO
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the staple home position sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 38
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment, or on the fin-
ishing tray?
NO
È ÆYES End.
NO
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the stapler interference sensor (S11) is
moved?
È ÆYES Reinsert the clip which fixes the actuator from the side of it.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
NO 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 39
06/08
[EA60] Early arrival jam
MJ-1022
NO
cuited?
NO
È
YES
MJ-1023/1024
NO
cuited?
NO
È
YES
MJ-1101
NO
sensor (S1)?
NO
Is the harness between the entrance sensor (S1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) dis-
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 40
06/08
[EA70] Stack delivery jam
MJ-1022
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home posi-
tion sensor (S8) open circuited?
NO
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor
| securely.
| 2) Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.
È
YES
[EA70] Stack exit belt home position error

MJ-1101
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stack exit
belt home position sensor (S9)?
5
NO
Is the harness between the stack exit belt home position sensor (S9) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 41
06/08
[EAF0] Stack return jam
MJ-1022
NO
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position
sensor (S3) open circuited?
NO
Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor
| securely.
| 2) Replace the returning roller home position sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 42
[ 3 ] Paper jam in saddle stitcher section
[EA80] Stapling jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle
stitcher section or equipment?
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples
stuck in the stapling unit?
È YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7 open circuited?
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely.
| 2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.
È
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5
[EA90] Door open jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
È NO Æ Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 43
[EAA0] Power-ON jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?
NO
Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], the vertical path paper sen-
sor [PI17] and the delivery sensor[PI11]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical
path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the
actuator.)
È
YES
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam

MJ-1024
equipment?
NO
Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor
[PI11]) open circuited?
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 44
[EAC0] Transport delay jam
MJ-1024
equipment?
NO
cuited?
NO
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.
| 3) Replace the sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 45
[ 4 ] Paper jam in puncher unit
[E9F0] Punching jam
MJ-1023/1024
NO
Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI63) open circuited?
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the punch home position sensor.
È
YES
Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)

Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
È ÆNO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
È ÆNO Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
È ÆNO Correct the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M3).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 46
06/08
[ 5 ] Other paper jam
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam
Is the main motor rotating normally?
È
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam

Is the finisher working?
È YES Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment
side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller
PC board is open circuited.
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EB30] Ready time-out jam

Is there paper in the equipment? 5
È NO Æ Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
È NO Æ Connect them properly.
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
È NO Æ Connect the harness properly.
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher discon-
nected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
È NO Æ Connect the pin or replace the harness.
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 47
[ED10] Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
[ED11] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error

NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch sideways adjustment
motor (M2) correct?
YES
1) Replace the sideways adjustment motor (M2).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 48
07/11
[ED12] Shutter home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the shutter is opened/closed?
È ÆYES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the shutter open-
ing/closing sensor (S4)?
NO
Is the harness between the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4) and the finisher control PC
board (CN13) disconnected or open circuited?
NO
Is the harness between the shutter clutch (CLT1) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) dis-
NO
5
[ED13] Front alignment plate home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front align-
ment plate home position sensor (S7)?
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7) and the finisher
control PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 49
06/08
[ED14] Rear alignment plate home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the rear align-
ment plate home position sensor (S8)?
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8) and the finisher
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
NO
[ED15] Paddle home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paddle is rotated?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the paddle home
position sensor (S3)?
NO
Is the harness between the paddle home position sensor (S3) and the finisher control PC
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) discon-
nected or open circuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 50
06/08
[ED16] Buffer tray home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the buffer tray
home position sensor (S5)?
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray home position sensor (S5) and the finisher control PC
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
NO
5

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 51
06/08
5.1.8 Drive system related service call
[C010] Main motor abnormality
Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J581 of the main motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
|
are short circuited or open circuited.
|
5) Replace the main motor.
|
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN336-8 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-152 pin is always “L”.
[C020] Developer motor abnormality

Is the developer unit motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-112/162)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J578 of the developer motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC
| board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
5) Replace the developer motor.
|
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-B6 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.
[C030] Transport motor abnormality

Is the transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-123/173)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J582 of the transport motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC
|
board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
5) Replace the transport motor.
|
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-A7 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 52
5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor abnormality
Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.
| 4) Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is discon-
| nected.
|
5) Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is discon-
|
nected.
|
| circuited.
| 8) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
| LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
| 9) Replace the PFP motor.
| 10)Replace the PFP board.
| 11)Replace the LGC board.
|
È
YES
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
| circuited.
|
5
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
| LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
| 3) Replace the PFP motor.
|
|
|
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always “L” level.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always “L”
level.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 53
[C130] Upper drawer tray abnormality
[C140] Lower drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the tray-up motor.
|
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[6]/[G])
| 3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
| circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 6) Replace the tray-up sensor.
È
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 54
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the tray-up motor.
È
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H])
| 4) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
|
circuited.
| 5
| 7) Replace the tray-up sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 55
[C180] LCF tray-up motor abnormality
Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the LCF tray-up motor.
È
YES
Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
| 4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 7) Replace the sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 56
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality
Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
| circuited.
|
|
| 6) Replace the LCF end fence motor.
È
YES
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
| connected.
| 4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
|
circuited.
| 5
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 57
[C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality
Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is discon-
| nected.
| 4) Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is discon-
| nected.
|
5) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
| circuited.
| 7) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF
| board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
| 8) Replace the LCF transport motor.
| 10)Replace the LGC board.
|
È
YES
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always “L” level.
4) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always
“L” level.
5) Replace the LCF transport motor.
6) Replace the LCF board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 58
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error
Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267)
| YES Æ 1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
| 2) Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.
| 3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lens unit.
|
| 6) Replace the SLG board.
È
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short cir-
cuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the SLG board.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time 5
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a posi-
tion other than home position?
È YES Æ Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
| YES Æ The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
| 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
È
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short circuited or open
circuited.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 59
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call
Note:
Note:
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control cir-
cuit and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
[C411/C412] Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON

1.Check the power voltage
(1) Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated volt-
age?)
2.Check the thermistors
(1) Check if the connectors are disconnected.

(2) Check if the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are in contact with the surface of the fuser
roller properly?
(3) Check if the harnesses of the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are open circuited.
3. Check the heater
(1) Check if the IH coil is broken.

(2) Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected.
(3) Check if the thermostat is blown.
(4) Check if the connectors on the IH control board are disconnected (AC input connector and LGC
I/F connectors CN455).
(5) Check if the IH control board is abnormal.
• Replace the IH control board.
4. Check the LGC board
(1) Check if the connectors CN334 are disconnected.

(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
5. Clear the status counter

After repairing the matter which caused the error [C411/C412], perform the following:
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in "400", then press [START].
(3) Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C411/C412]).
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 60
[C443/C445/C446/C447/C449] Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
1,2.3. Check the thermistors, Heater and LGC board
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2 and 3 for [C411/C412].

Change the current status counter value (08-400) "3", "5" , "6" , "9" , "19" , "21" , "22" , "23" , "24" , "25"
, "27" or "29" to "0" for [C44X], taking the same procedure as that for [C41X].
• The status counter value is as follows in the following cases.
- The error occurred during warming-up: "3", "5" or "6"
- The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7"
- The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 240°C or higher, the temperature
detected by the side thermistor is 250°C or higher or the temperature detected by the edge
thermistor is 270°C or higher: "9", "19", "21", "22", "23", "25", "27" or "29".
- The error occurred during printing: "24" or "25"
- The error occurred during energy saving: "26" or "27"
- A paper jam occurred: "28" or "29"
[C471/472/475] IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormality

1. Check the AC input voltage
Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range.
(especially when the heater becomes ON after the power is turned ON (the copier is warming up))
2. Check the thermostat

Check if the thermostat is blown. 5
3. Check the IH control board
(1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH control board, the LGC I/F connectors CN455 is dis-
connected?
(2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown.
(3) Replace the IH control board.
(1) Check if the connector CN334 are disconnected.

(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.

Change the values "10", "11", "12" of the status counter (08-400) to "0".
[C480] Overheating of IGBT
1. Check the operation of the IH control board cooling fan

Check if the IH control board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?)
2. Check the IH board
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate is normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Replace the IH board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 61
Change the values “12”, “15” or “18” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "12"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "18"
(When the only one side of IH coil is energized continuously for 15 seconds)
[C490] IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality
1. Check the IH board
(2) Replace the IH board.
2. Check the IH coil
(1) Check if the coil is broken or short out.

(2) Replace the IH coil.

Change the values “13”, “16” or “19” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "13"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "19"
When the problem is solved, [C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the
main switch so the status counter does not have to be changed to "0".
The value of the status counter remains the same until the next service call overwrites the value.
[C4B0] IGBT overheating abnormality

(2) Check if NVRAM is mounted.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 62
5.1.12 Communication related service call
[C550] RADF I/F error
(1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the RADF board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the IPC board.
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher
(1) Check if the specified finisher is attached.

5
(2) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is discon-
nected or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
(5) Replace the IPC board.
(6) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[F070] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
[F110] Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU

[F111] Scanner response abnormality
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 63
5.1.13 RADF related service call
No service call for the RADF (MR-3018).
5.1.14 Circuit related service call
[C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board
(1) Check if the connector CN117 on the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector CN357 on the LGC board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and the LGC board (CN357) is open
circuited.
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality

Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON?
È NO Æ Leave it for a while and see how.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited
or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.
[C950] Memory of the LGC board abnormality, ID abnormality
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN 343 on the SYS board are completely inserted or not dis-
connected.
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(4) Replace the NVRAM.
(6) Replace the DRV board.
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).
[C960] Connection error between the LGC board and the DRV board, ID abnormality
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN343 on the LGC board are completely inserted or not dis-
connected.
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the DRV board (J434) and the LGC board (CN360) is open cir-
cuited.
(4) Check if the harness connecting the LGC board (CN331) and the high-voltage transformer
(J480) is open circuited.
(6) Replace the DRV board.
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 64
[C9E0] Connection error between the SLG board and the SYS board
(1) Check if the connector CN18 of the SLG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector CN102 of the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SLG board (CN18) and the SYS board (CN102) is open cir-
cuited.
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared.)
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
[F091] NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Take off the FAX board if installed.

(2) Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
Note:
Be sure to start up with the Setting Mode (08), not the normal mode immediately after the 5
NVRAM replacement or clearing, and then perform the following steps.
(3) When “NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE” is displayed on the LCD, check the destination
and then press the [START] button. If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one and
then press the [START] button.
(4) After the confirmation message is displayed, press the [INTERRUPT] button.
(5) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
(6) Perform the counter copying (08-257 Sub-code: 1).
(7) Perform the initialization at the software version upgrade (08-947).
(8) Check the serial number after performing “Equipment number display” (08-995). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incor-
rect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(9) Initialize the NIC information (08-693).

(10) Turn the power OFF and then start up with the Adjustment mode (05).
(11) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner” (05-364).
(12) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PPC> (05-1642). (using [4][FAX] test pattern)
(13) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PRT-PS> (05-1000). (using [47][FAX] test pattern)
(14) Perform “Automatic gamma adjustment” <PRT-PCL> (05-1002). (using [49][FAX] test pattern)
(16) Install the FAX board taken off in step (1).
* If the FAX board has not been installed, the following steps are not necessary.
(17) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(18) Set the destination with “Destination setting of FAX machine” (08-701).
(19) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
(20) Perform “FAX Set Up” (1*-100).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 65
09/01
(22) Turn the power ON.
(23) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] Æ [ADMIN] Æ [FAX] Æ [INITIAL SETUP]
(24) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board

Note:
Be sure to start up with the Setting Mode (08), not the normal mode immediately after the
(3) When “NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE” is displayed on the LCD, enter the number
for the model type and then press the [START] button. Select “1” for a system ROM version ear-
lier than V3.3, and “2” for V3.3 or later.
(4) Check the destination displayed on the LCD and then press the [START] button. If the destina-
tion is incorrect, key in the correct number and then press the [START] button.
(5) After the confirmation message is displayed, press the [INTERRUPT] button.
Note:
address.

(19) Set the destination with “Destination setting of FAX machine” (08-701).
(25) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F350] SLG board abnormality
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 66
09/02
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call
[CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality
Is the polygonal motor rotating?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the harness is open circuited or the connector pin is disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Replace the laser optical unit.
|
|
È
YES
Is the printed image distorted?
| YES Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is almost disconnected.
| 2) Check if the harness is almost open circuited or the connector pin is almost
| disconnected.
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
|
5) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
|
È
NO 5
2) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
3) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
4) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded.
6) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
7) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
8) Replace the laser optical unit.
[CA20] H-Sync detection error

Is the cable (flexible flat type) between the connector (CN345) on the LGC board and connec-
tor (CN201) on the LDR board open circuited, broken or disconnected?
| YES Æ 1) Reconnect the cable.
| 2) Check if the connector on the LGC board hold the cable securely.
È
NO
1) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
2) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
3) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.
4) Check if the equipment is grounded.
5) Check if the conductor pattern is short circuited or open circuited.
7) Replace the laser optical unit.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 67
06/08
5.1.16 Finisher related service call
[CB10] Entrance motor abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the entrance roller is rotated?
NO
NO
1) Replace the entrance motor (M1).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB11] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB11] error when the [ED16] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed while the buffer
roller is lifted up?
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
NO
1) Replace the buffer tray guide motor (M3).
[CB12] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer roller is rotated?
È ÆYES Fix the drive mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer roller drive motor (M6) and the finisher control PC board
NO
1) Replace the buffer roller drive motor (M6).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 68
06/08
[CB20] Delivery motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?
È NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct?
È NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly?
È NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the delivery motor.
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?
È NO Æ Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/
M38) correct?
È NO Æ Correct the wirings. 5
YES
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?
È NO Æ Fix the lift mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.
[CB30] Movable tray shift motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the movable tray is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray shift motor (M7) and the finisher control PC board
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
position A, B, and C sensors (S13, S14, and S15)?
l ÆYES • Replace the harness.
È • Reinstall the sensor correctly.
• Replace the sensor.
NO
1) Replace the movable tray shift motor (M7).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 69
06/08
[CB31] Movable tray paper-full detection error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection
sensor (S17) is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
paper-full detection sensor (S17)?
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray paper-full detection sensor (S17) and the finisher
NO
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
YES
1) Replace the rear aligning plate motor.
[CB40] Front alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
NO
Replace the front alignment motor (M9).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 70
06/08
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality
MJ-1022/1023/1024
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES
1) Replace the stapler.
[CB50] Stapler home position error

* You receive a [CB50] error when the [EA50] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
NO
5
[CB51] Stapler shift home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stapler unit
home position sensor (S10)?
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit home position sensor (S10) and the finisher control PC
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 71
06/08
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) cor-
rect?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
È YESÆ Fix the lift mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stapler shift motor.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
NO
1) Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
È YESÆ End.
NO
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CB80] RAM abnormality

MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
È ÆYES End.
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 72
06/08
[CB81] Flash ROM abnormality
MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
È ÆYES End.
NO
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
[CB90] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?
YES
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5
[CBA0] Stitch motor (front) abnormality
[CBB0] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
È NO Æ Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) and stitcher motors (M7/M6) on the front
and rear stitchers working normally?
È NO Æ Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
[CBC0] Alignment motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?
YES
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the alignment motor (M5).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 73
[CBD0] Guide motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?
YES
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the guide motor (M3).
[CBE0] Paper folding motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)
working normally?
È NO Æ Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1024
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?
YES
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 74
[CC00] Sensor connector abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller
PC board?
È NO Æ Connect them to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher con-
troller PC board?
È NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly
connected to the ground?
È NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
End.
[CC10] Microswitch abnormality

MJ-1024
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) nor-
5
mal?
È NO Æ Replace the switches.
YES
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is
it 24V?
È NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board correct?
YES
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher

MJ-1024
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?
È YESÆ End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
È NO Æ Connect the wiring.
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 75
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality
MJ-1022
[Procedure 1]
Is the tension of the drive belt normal?
È NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
| NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
È contacts.
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
È YESÆ Attach the spring.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) cor-
rect?
YES
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly?
YES
1) Replacing the stack processing motor.
[Procedure 2]
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
| NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
È contacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
È YESÆ Attach the spring.
NO
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?
È NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?
YES
1) Replace the stack processing motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 76
06/08
[CC30] Stack transport motor abnormality
* You receive a [CC30] error when the [EA70] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport belt is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
NO
1) Replace the stack transport motor (M5).
[CC31] Transport motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC31] error when the [ED12] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport roller -1 and -2 are rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the transport motor (M2) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) dis-
connected or open circuited? 5
NO
1) Replace the transport motor (M2).
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?
YES
Is the swing mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the swing motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 77
06/08
[CC41] Paper holder cam home position abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holder cam is rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the paper holder home position sensor (S6) and the finisher control PC
NO
1) Replace the paper holder home position sensor (S6).
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?
YES
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller
PC board correct?
YES
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
YES
1) Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).
[CC51] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality

* The [CC51] error will be displays when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and sideways adjustment motor
(M2) correct?
YES
1) Replace the punch sideways adjustment motor (M2).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 78
06/08
[CC52] Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality
* The [CC52] error will be displays when the [ED10] error occurs three times in succession or
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality 5

MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working nor-
mally?
È NO Æ Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 79
06/08
[CC61] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error
* The [CC61] error will be displays when the [E9F0] error occurs three times in succession or
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
YES
[CC71] Punch ROM checksum error

Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short cir-
cuited?
È ÆYES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
[CC72] Punch RAM read/write error

cuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 80
06/08
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality)
Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct?
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
È YES Æ Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the front jogging motor.
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)

Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)
correct?
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
5
YES
1) Replace the front aligning plate motor.
[CC80] Rear alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC80] error when the [ED14] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
NO
1) Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 81
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) cor-
rect?
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?
È NO Æ Level them.
YES
Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly?
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
YES
Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S23) and stack
processing safety switch (S26) working properly?
È NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 82
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) cor-
rect?
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?
YES
Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly?
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
YES
Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working
properly?
È NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
YES
5
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the motor.
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality

MJ-1022
Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct?
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
È YESÆ Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the rear jogging motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 83
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?
È NO Æ Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?
È YESÆ Fix the shutter mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) cor-
rect?
YES
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?
È YESÆ Fix the rear end assist mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the rear end assist motor.
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality

MJ-1023/1024
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) cor-
rect?
YES
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?
È YESÆ Fix the gear change mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the gear change motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 84
06/08
[CDE0] Paddle motor abnormality
* You receive a [CDE0] error when the [ED15] error occurs three times in succession or during
the initial operation.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem with the paddle is rotated?
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) discon-
nected or open circuited?
NO
1) Replace the paddle motor (M8).
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit

MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?
È YESÆ End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?
È NO Æ Correct the wiring. 5
YES
[CE00] Punch communication error

Is the harness between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and the finisher control PC
board disconnected or open circuited?
È ÆYES Replace the harness. Correct the wiring.
NO
cuited?
NO

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 85
07/04
[CF10]
<Undefined error code processing>
MJ-1022/1023/1024
1) Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
2) If not as in step 1, check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected correctly.
3) If the error has still not been recovered in step 2, check if there is any defect in the LGC
board, IPC board or finisher control board. If not, replace the LGC board, IPC board or fin-
isher control board.
<Communication module SRAM writing failure>

MJ-1101
2) Check if the MJ-1101 (08-1912) is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3) Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short cir-
cuited.
circuited.
6) Try to update the finisher firmware again.
7) Replace the converter PC board.
MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is connected)

2) Check if the MJ-1101 (08-1912) is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3) Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the hole punch control PC board and the finisher control
PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short cir-
cuited.
circuited.
7) Check if the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board is open circuited or
short circuited.
8) Try to update the finisher firmware again.
9) Replace the converter PC board.
10)Replace the finisher control PC board.
11)Replace the hole punch control PC board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 86
5.1.17 Image control related service call
(1) Based on the procedure of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] described below, check the status and
take appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop
control according to the following procedure.
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [395], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control
has finished normally.
(2) After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [573], and then press the [START] button.
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.
7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] 5
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level)

Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN338 on the LGC board dis-
connected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between
the LGC board and the switching power supply open circuited?
È YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?
È NO Æ Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.
YES
1) Replace the image quality sensor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 87
[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level)
1) Check if the transfer belt or transfer belt unit are securely installed.
2) Check for any abnormal stain caused by poor cleaning, large flaw or break on the transfer belt sur-
face.
3) Check if the drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If any abnormality is found, correct any mechan-
ical problem.
Is the connectors CN338 on the LGC board disconnected?
Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or the surface of the sensor
stained?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open circuited?
Is the shutter of image quality sensor opening and closing normally?
Is the shutter damaged?
| YESÆ <Procedure>
| 1) Take off the transfer belt unit so that the image quality sensor unit can be
| easily seen.
| 2) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power
| ON.
|
3) Key in “430”.
|
4) The shutter is opened and closed repeatedly by pressing the [START] but-
|
| ton repeatedly.
|
| Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. Clean the sensor.
| Replace the shutter if it is damaged.
| Replace the shutter solenoid if its operation is defective.
|
È
NO
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?
| NO Æ Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.
È
YES
1) Replace the image quality sensor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 88
[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality
(1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)"
to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color.
(2) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3)” to
check if the low-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color. The values under 320 for Y, M
and C, and under 220 for K are defined as low-density pattern abnormality.
| 320 or above (Y, M and C) | Under 320 (Y, M and C)
| 220 or above (K) | Under 220 (K)
| È
| Low-density pattern abnormality
| Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct the
| transfer belt around its cleaning blade.
|
|
|
È
|
| To (9)
È
(3) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3)” to
check if the high-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color and identify the color which
pattern is abnormal. If the value is 630 or above, it is defined as high-density pattern abnormality.
(4) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image 5
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “0” (Invalid).
(5) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)”.
(6) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and check the patch of
the color identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (Note).
| Normal | Abnormal
| È
| Correct the items related to the image.
| |
| È
|
To (9)
È
(7) Replace the image quality sensor.
(8) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “1” (Valid).
(9) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)” and make sure it is
completed normally. (Error [CE40] does not appear.) Then perform “Automatic gamma adjust-
ment“ ( Chapter 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).
(10) Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to
576)".
Note:
Abnormal image:
Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots, Poor transfer, Uneven image
density, Faded image (low density), Uneven light distribution, Blotched image.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 89
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality
Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sen-
sor disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ?
NO
1) Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormality

Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the drum thermistor disconnected?
NO
1) Replace the drum thermistor.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 90
05/07
5.1.18 Copy process related service call
[C360] Charger cleaner motor abnormality
(1) Check if the main charger is installed normally.

(2) Check if the charger wire is broken.
(3) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner front/rear position detection switch is
disconnected.
(4) Check if the cleaning pads are damaged or removed.
(5) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner motor is disconnected.
(6) Replace the charger cleaner motor.
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality
(1) Is the main charger installed securely?

(2) Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.
(3) Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.
(4) Check if any foreign matter is on the charger wire or main charger grid.
[CEA0] Revolver home position detection abnormality

Is the revolver home position sensor working properly? 5
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connector of the revolver home position sen-
| sor is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
| open circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the revolver home position sensor.
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 91
[CEB0] Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality
Check the timing of the black developer lifting clutch (stop position), and adjust it if it deviates.
( P. 3-61 "3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment")
È
Is the black developer lifting clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-433)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the black developer lifting clutch is disconnected.
| open circuited.
| circuited.
|
5) Replace the black developer lifting clutch.
|
È
YES
Are the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing
detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[C], /[1]/[B]
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the black developer contact position detection
| sensor or black developer contact timing detection sensor are discon-
| nected.
| open circuited.
|
|
| circuited.
| 5) Replace the black developer contact position detection sensor and black
| developer contact timing detection sensor.
|
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 92
[CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality
Is the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-435)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer contact clutch
| are disconnected.
| open circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch.
È
YES
Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor working properly?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[A])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position
| detection sensor are disconnected.
| open circuited.
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor.
5
È
YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 93
[CEE0] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (Normal speed)
[CEE1] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (When decelerating)
If the error [CEE0] has occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-1. If the error [CEE1] has
occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-2.
Is there any stain or scratch on the reflection tape inside the transfer belt?
| YES Æ Clean the transfer belt or replace it.
È Replace the cleaning pad if it is excessively stained.
NO
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 stained?
È YES Æ Clean them.
NO
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 working properly?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[H])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the transfer belt home posi-
| tion sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected.
| open circuited.
|
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the transfer belt home position sensor-1 and -2.
È
YES
[CEF0] Revolver motor abnormality
Is the revolver motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-450)

| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the revolver motor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connectors CN435 and CN434 on the DRV board are discon-
| nected.
| 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-
| cuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short
|
| 6) Replace the revolver motor.
| 7) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.
|
È
YES
1) Check if the teeth of the revolver motor gear or the revolver unit gear do not get chipped or
cracked.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short circuited or
open circuited.
3) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 94
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call
[CF20] Toner density detection voltage abnormality
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-824-0 to 08-
824-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.
Is the developer material transported properly?
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter
| is mixed in.
| 2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.
| 3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?
È YES Æ Clean it.
NO
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor
| shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 5
| cuited.
| 4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
|
|
| circuited.
| 7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of
| color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.
|
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?
| NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and
| face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
È
YES
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-824-0 to 08-824-2 from “1” to “0” to
clear the abnormality.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 95
[CF30] Reference plate detection voltage abnormality
Are the reference plate and color auto-toner sensor stained?
È YESÆ Clean them.
NO
| circuited.
|
|
| circuited.
|
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?
| NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor
| holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
È
YES
2) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light
amount correction target value (05-207)”.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 96
[CF40] Light amount correction voltage abnormality
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-823-0 to 08-
823-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.
Is the developer unit inserted properly?

È NO Æ Insert it properly.
YES
Is the developer material transported properly?
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?
| NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter
| is mixed in.
| 2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.
| 3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?
È YES Æ Clean it.
NO
5
| cuited.
|
|
| circuited.
|
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?
| NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and
| face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
È
YES
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-823-0 to 08-823-2 from “1” to “0” to
clear the abnormality.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 97
[CF50] Color auto-toner sensor abnormality
Are the connector of color auto-toner sensor, joint connector and connector CN356 on the LGC
board connected normally?
| NO Æ 1) Reconnect the connectors.
| 2) Correct or replace if the connector pins are disconnected or harnesses are
| open circuited.
È
YES
Are the color auto-toner sensor and reference plate stained?
È YES Æ Clean them.
NO
| cuited.
|
circuited.
|
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?
| NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder
| and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
È
YES
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of color auto-toner
sensor light amount (05-208)”.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 98
05/11
5.1.20 Other service call
[F100] HDD format error
(1) Check if the HDD is mounted.

(2) Check if the specified HDD is mounted.
(3) Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
(4) Check if the connectors CN112, CN113 on the SYS board is disconnected.
(5) Replace the harness.
(6) Format the HDD. (Key in "2" at 08-690.)
(7) Replace the HDD.
[F101] HDD unmounted

[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD data error
[F105] HDD other error
(1) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.

(2) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open circuited.
(3) Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.
5
[F106] Point and Print partition damage
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
(3) Restart the equipment.
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
[F107] / SHR partition damage

Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[F108] /SHA partition damage

Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[F120] Database abnormality
(1) Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)

(2) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in “2” at 08-690.)
* When “Rebuilding all databases (08-684)” is performed, all data in the Address Book and Mail-
box are deleted. Make sure to back up these data in advance of rebuilding and restore the data
after rebuilding.
[F130] Invalid MAC address

Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 99
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off
Clear the service call “F200”. (Key in “0” at 08-633.)

* When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off from the equipment, the service call “F200”
occurs.
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initializa-
tion.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initializa-
tion. Note that some of data cannot be backed up ( Page 5-1).
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error

[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
[1C11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error

[1C13] Message transmission error
[1C14] Invalid parameter

When a template is used, form the template again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity

Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
[1C20] System management module access abnormality

[1C21] Job control module access abnormality
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 100
[1C30] Directory creation failure
[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality

Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing

Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure

Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure

Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset 5

Reset the Terminal IP address.
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.
[1C65] SMTP address unset

Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[1C66] Server time-out error

Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C67] NIC time-out error

[1C68] NIC access error
[1C6D] System error
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
[1C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[1C6A] HOST NAME error

Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 101
07/11
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if the SMTP authentication method is correct.
Check if there are any illegal characters in the Terminal mail address.
Select the correct SMTP authentication method. Delete the illegal characters and reset the mail
address. Then try again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure

Reset the mail box.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
[1CC1] Power failure

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 102
07/11
[ 2 ] RFC related error
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)

[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.

Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)

Check the capacity of the mail box in the mail server.
Select “Text “of the original modes for the original data or lower the resolution level and then retransmit.
Or divide the original data into several pieces and retransmit them.
5
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 103
07/11
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error
[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module
[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in BOX partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
[2B21] Exceeding file capacity

the job again.
[2B50] Image library error

[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted

Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Set-
ting Mode (08-666).
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of cli-
ent's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2B51] List library error

Check if the Function List can be printed out.
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[2BA0] Invalid Box password

Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing
(opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 104
07/11
[2BA1] A paper size or a color mode not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being
selected
Check the paper size or color mode.
[2BB1] Power failure

[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error

[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages

Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents

Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders

Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 105
07/11
[ 4 ] E-mail related error
[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
690).
[2C11] Insufficient memory

[2C12] Message reception error

[2C13] Message transmission error
[2C14] Invalid parameter

[2C15] Exceeding file capacity

the job again.
[2C20] System management module access abnormality

[2C30] Directory creation failure

[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality

[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
[2C43] Encryption error

[2C44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing


TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 106
07/11
[2C61] Address Book reading failure
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset

Reset the Terminal IP address.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.
[2C65] SMTP address unset

Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
[2C66] Server time-out error

[2C67] NIC time-out error

[2C68] NIC access error
[2C6D] NIC system error
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board. 5
[2C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)

Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C71] SMTP authentication ERROR

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
[2C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 107
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received

Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2CC1] Power failure


TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 108
07/11
[ 5 ] File sharing related error
[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion fail-
ure (in case of [2DA6])
690).
[2D11] Insufficient memory

[2D12] Message reception error

[2D13] Message transmission error
[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter

[2D15] Exceeding document number 5

Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
[2D20] System management module access abnormality

[2D21] Job control module access abnormality
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality
[2D60] File library access abnormality
[2D30] Directory creation failure

[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality

If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using
the Setting Mode (08-667).
[2D43] Encryption error

[2D44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 109
[2D62] File server connection error
Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path

Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D64] Login failure
Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed

Delete some documents in the folder.
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing

[2D67] FTP service not available

Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available

Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2DC1] Power failure


TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 110
[ 6 ] E-mail reception related error
[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error

[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error

The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error

The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error

[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,
etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one. 5
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption

This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF

Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error

The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error

These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error

These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error

The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 111
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error

The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,
LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error

These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error

These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
[3C70] Power failure error

Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3D10] Destination address error

Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error

Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error

This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
[3E10] POP3 server connection error
Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error

Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error

Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3E40] POP3 Login Type ERROR

Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 112
[402F] Page memory size error
This error occurs when the expansion memory is not installed or the expansion memory has an abnor-
mality.
Check if the expansion memory exists or not, or it is correctly installed.
[4031] HDD full failure during printing

[4032] Private-print-only error

Select "Private", and then perform the printing again.
[4033] Printing data storing limitation error

Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error

Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4035] Local file storing limitation error

Select "Remote" (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.
[4036] User authentication error

Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
5
[A221] Print job cancellation
This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.
[A222] Print job power failure

[A290] Limit over error (black)

Clear the limit counter (black).
[A2A0] Limit over error (color)

Clear the limit counter (color).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 113
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image
1) Color deviation
<Symptoms>
Original mode Location Phenomena
All modes Color blurred in outline of white text or Color
illustration on a colored background deviationÆ
Text Mode Outline in black text on a colored White voidÆ

Text/Photo Mode background
Photo Mode Color blurred in outline of line or text Color

Map Mode deviationÆ
Fig. 5-1
Cause/Section Step Check Item Measure Remark

1 Test printing (A3/LD) Output the built-in grid pattern For the fol-
lowing
checks
Drum rotation 2 Check the main motor operation in Replace the main motor.
abnormality the test mode (03) to see if there is
any rotation abnormality of the drum.
3 Check the main motor operation in Reconnect the connectors.
the test mode (03) to see if there is Replace the harnesses.
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the LGC board.
Inadequate 4 Check the value set for main motor Reset main motor speed to 128.
main motor rotation speed. (Is the value signifi-
rotation speed cantly different from the default
value?)
Drum coupling 5 Loose coupling, damage, deforma- Check if they are installed prop-
and coupling tion erly or replace the couplings.
on the equip-
ment side
Transfer belt 6 Deformation or damage of the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
fer belt or stains on the transfer belt.
7 Is there any abnormality of the trans- Clean or replace the sensor.
fer belt home position sensor?
8 The reflection tape is stained or dam- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
aged.
9 Are the couplings on the transfer belt Tighten the screws if they loosen,
side loosen, damaged or deformed? or replace the couplings.
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller Clean or replace the drive roller.
11 Does the rib of the transfer belt over- Adjust the position of the transfer
lap the collar on both edge of the belt.
drive roller?
12 Is the belt edge damaged or stained? Clean or replace the transfer belt.
13 Peeling of the cleaning blade Replace the cleaning blade.
(Large driving load)
14 Is the transfer belt unit installed nor- Check and correct the installing.
mally?
(Is the unit properly grounded?)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 114
Laser optical 15 Check the grid pattern. Are the lines Replace the laser optical unit. Fθ lens
unit of the primary scanning direction characteris-
warped? tic defect or
reflection
mirror warp
High-voltage 16 Check the connection of the high- Correct or replace the terminal if
transformer voltage supply terminal of the 1st or it is loosened or damaged.
2nd transfer rollers.
* If the desired image has not been obtained with the above measures or the more qualified image is
needed, adjustment the "deviation amount" in the adjustment mode (05). (Refer to 3.5.2 Color devi-
ation adjustment)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 115
2) Uneven pitch and jitter image
<Symptoms>
Original mode Location Phenomena
All modes Occurs cyclically at right Uneven pitch
angles to paper feeding
direction Feeding
direction
Fig. 5-2

1 Test printing (A3/LD) Output the built-in halftone For the following
and grid patterns. checks
Drum 2 Are there uneven pitches approx. Replace the main motor.
283 mm?
3 Is there any damage on the drum Clean or replace the
surface? drum.
Drum rotation 4 Check the main motor operation in Replace the main motor.
abnormality the test mode (03) to see if there is
any rotation abnormality of the drum.
5 Check the main motor operation in Reconnect the connec-
the test mode (03) to see if there is tors.
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the harnesses.
Inadequate 6 Check the value set for main motor Reset main motor speed
main motor rotation speed. (Is the value signifi- to 128.
rotation speed cantly different from the default
value?)
Drum coupling 7 Loose coupling, damage, deforma- Tighten the screws if they
tion loosen. Or replace the
couplings.
Transfer belt 8 Is the belt tension of the driving unit Adjust the tension of the Check the halftone
normal? transfer belt. pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 2.5 mm)
9 Deformation or damage of the trans- Replace the transfer belt. Check the halftone
fer belt pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 75 mm)
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller Clean or replace the drive Check the halftone
roller. pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 75 mm)
11 Large driving load due to the peeling Replace the cleaning
of the cleaning blade blade.
Laser optical 12 Check the halftone pattern to see if Replace the laser optical Check the halftone
unit there are uneven pitches of approx. unit. pattern.
0.3 mm each in the whole image. (Uneven pitch:
approx. 0.3 mm)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 116
3) Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance
Check gray balance. Check image density.
Check color reproduction. Check color reproduction.
Fig. 5-3
Cause/Section Step Check items Measures Remarks

Density / Color 1 Check the image density / color Perform the enforced performing of
reproduction / reproduction / gray balance. image quality closed-loop control
Gray balance (05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer density 2 Check the density of printer output Output the test patterns and check See step 5
image. them. if defect
Color: using 04-231 for each color occurs.
Black: using 04-113
Scanner 3 Check if the original glass, mirrors Clean it.
or lens is dirty.
Parameter 4 Check the image processing Adjust the color balance (color).
adjustment value parameters. Adjust the image density.
Printer output 5 Is there any faded image (low den- Perform the troubleshooting proce-
image abnormal sity)? dures against the faded image.
Is there any fog in the background? Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the background fog-
ging.
Is there any blotch image? Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the blotch image.
Is there any poor transfer? Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the poor transfer.
Is there any poor cleaning of the Correct the transfer belt area.
transfer belt? (Check inside the (Refer to Service Manual)
equipment.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 117
4) Background fogging
Fig. 5-4

Density repro- 1 Check the gradation reproduction. Perform the forced performing of
duction image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer section 2 Check the printer output image. Output the test patterns and check See step 6
them. if defects
Color: using 04-231 for each color occur.
Black: using 04-113
Scanner 3 Check if the original glass, mirrors Clean it.
or lens is dirty.
Parameter 4 Check the image processing Check the value of offsetting
adjustment value parameters. adjustment for background pro-
cessing (color), background adjust-
ment (black) and background peak
adjustment for range correction
(black).
5 Adjust the image processing While checking the above encircled
parameters. image, adjust the reproduction level
by the offsetting adjustment for
background processing (color),
background adjustment (black) and
background peak adjustment for
range correction (black).
Cover 6 Is the cover installed properly? Correct it.
(Is the drum exposed to the exter-
nal light?)
Auto-toner 7 Is the auto-toner sensor normal? Check the operation of autotoner
sensor and readjust.
8 Is the toner supply operating con- Check the motor and circuits.
stantly?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 118
Main charger 9 Is the main charger output normal? Check the circuits.
output
Developer bias 10 Is the developer bias proper? Check the circuits.
Developer unit 11 Is the contact between the drum Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap
and developer material proper? and pole position.
Developer mate- 12 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer mate-
rial/Toner/Drum material, toner and drum? rial, toner and drum.
13 Have the developer material and Replace the developer material and
drum reached their PM life? drum.
14 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in
toner cartridge 35oC or less without the environment within specifica-
dew? tion.
Drum cleaning 15 Is the drum cleaned properly? Check the drum cleaning blade
blade pressure.
Transfer belt 16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the spring of the transfer
cleaning blade contacted and released properly? belt cleaner clutch is removed or if
any connector is disconnected.
Otherwise replace the clutch.
17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Check if the blade pressure spring
proper contact with the transfer is installed.
belt?
Toner dusting 18 Is the toner accumulated on the Remove the toner and clean the
seals of the developer unit? seals.
5
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 119
5) Moire/lack of sharpness
B
A
Fig. 5-5
Moire
Density repro- 1 Check the gradation Perform the forced performing of
duction reproduction. image quality closed-loop control
gamma adjustment.
Parameter 2 Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment
adjustment value ing parameters. value.
3 Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-
ing parameters. cled images A and B, decrease
moire by sharpness adjustment.
Printer section 4 Check the printer output Output the test patterns and check When defects occur,
image. them. perform the corre-
Color: using 04-231 for each color sponding trouble-
Black: using 04-113 shooting procedures.
Lack of sharpness
Density repro- 1 Check the gradation Perform the forced performing of
duction reproduction. image quality closed-loop control
gamma adjustment.
Parameter 2 Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment
adjustment value ing parameters. value.
3 Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-
ing parameters. cled image A, increase sharpness
by sharpness adjustment.
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 120
6)Toner offset
Black solid
Feeding direction
Approx.
173 mm
Shadow image
Fig. 5-6
5
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)
Fuser unit 1 Is the pressure between the Check the pressure removal
fuser belt and pressure roller parts and pressure mechanism.
proper?
2 Is the thermostat in contact? Establish its contact.
3 Is there scratch on the fuser belt Replace the fuser belt or the
or pressure roller surface? pressure roller.
4 Has the fuser belt or pressure Replace the fuser belt or the
roller reached its PM life? pressure roller.
5 Is the fuser roller temperature Check and correct the control cir-
proper? cuit.
Paper 6 Is the paper type corresponding Use the proper type of paper or
to its mode? select the proper mode.
7 Using recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Developer mate- 8 Is the specified developer used? Use the specified developer and
rial toner.
Scanner 9 Are the mirrors, original glass or Clean them.
lens dirty?
Image quality 10 Is the control activated? Check the image quality control
control related codes.
Density 11 Is the density too high? Perform the forced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
gamma adjustment.
Printer density 12 Check the density of printer out- Output the test patterns and When defects
put image. check them. occur, perform
Color: the correspond-
using 04-231 for each color ing trouble-
Black: shooting
using 04-113 procedures.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 121
7) Blurred image
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-7
Cause/Section Step Check items Measures
Scanner 1 Is the scanner bedewed? Clean it.
Drum 2 Is the drum bedewed or dirty? Wipe the drum with dry cloth.
* Be sure never use alcohol or other
organic solvents because they have
bad effect on the drum.
Ozone exhaust 3 Is the ozone exhaust fan operating prop- Check the connection of the connector.
erly?
4 Is the ozone filter stained or damaged? Replace it.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 122
8) Poor fusing
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-8
5
IH electric 1 Check if the connector contacts properly. Correct it.
power/control 2 Is the IH coil shorted or broken? Replace the IH coil or IH control board.
abnormal Is the IH control board normal?
3 Are the connectors on the LGC board and Reconnect them.
joint connectors connected properly?
4 Is the LGC board normal? Replace the LGC board.
5 Is the harness between the LGC board Replace the harness.
and IH board short circuited or open cir-
cuited?
Pressure 6 Are the pressure springs working prop- Check/adjust the pressure springs.
between fuser erly?
belt and pres-
sure roller
improper
Fuser roller tem- 7 Is the temperature of fuser roller too low? Check/correct the setting value of fuser
perature roller temperature.
Clean or replace the thermistors.
Check/correct the related circuit.
Developer mate- 8 Using the specified developer material Use the specified developer material and
rial and toner and toner? toner.
Paper 9 Is the paper damp? Change the paper.
10 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or select the
mode? proper mode.
11 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 123
9) Blank print
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-9

High-voltage 1 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit,
transformer defective? or replace the transformer.
(1st/2nd transfer 2 Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
roller and devel- ness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
oper bias) Is the harness open circuited?
Developer unit 3 Is the developer unit installed securely? Check/correct the developer sleeve cou-
pling engaging.
4 Do the developer sleeve and mixer Check/correct the developer drive sys-
rotate? tem.
5 Is the developer material properly trans- Remove foreign matter from the devel-
ported? oper material, if any.
6 Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Check the developer pole position.
7 Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect? Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig.
Drum 8 Is the drum rotating? Check that the drum shaft is inserted.
Check the drum drive system.
9 Is the drum grounded? Check the contact of the grounding plate.
Transfer unit 10 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Check if the contact releasing lever is at
the drum? releasing position. Check the installation
of the transfer belt.
11 Is the transport of the transfer belt nor- Check the installation of the transfer belt
mal? or transport mechanism.
12 Is the releasing movement of the transfer Check the installation of the transfer belt
belt cleaner is normal? (Does the cleaning cleaning blade. Check the operation of
blade stay in contact?) the transfer belt cleaner clutch.
13 Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and Check the connection of the connector of
released properly? 2nd transfer roller contact clutch and open
circuit of harness.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 124
Switching power 14 Is the power supply output (5.1VD) nor- Replace the switching power supply.
supply mal?
Harnesses for 15 Are the connectors securely connected? Reconnect the connectors securely.
SLG, SYS, LGC Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.
and LDR boards circuited?
Laser optical unit 16 Was the protection seal of slit removed Remove the protection seal.
when replacing the unit?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 125
10)Solid print
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-10

Exposure lamp 1 Does the exposure lamp light? Check the contact of the inverter connec-
Inverter tor.
If the inverter does not work, replace it.
If the lamp does not work, replace it.
Main charger 2 Is the main charger securely installed? Reinstall it securely.
3 Is the main charger wire open circuited? Replace it.
High-voltage 4 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit,
transformer defective? or replace the high-voltage transformer.
(main charger 5 Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
wire/grid bias) ness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?
Harnesses for 6 Are the connectors securely connected? Reconnect the connectors securely.
SLG, SYS and Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.
LGC boards circuited?
Scanner 7 Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Remove it.
Bedewing of 8 Is the scanner or the drum bedewed? Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
scanner and Keep the power cord plugged so that the
drum damp heater can work.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 126
11)White banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-11
5

Laser optical unit 1 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit Clean the slit glass.
glass?
Main charger 2 Is there foreign matter on the charger Remove foreign matter.
grid grid?
Developer unit 3 Is there foreign matter inside the doctor Remove foreign matter.
blade?
4 Is there foreign matter on the drum seal? Remove foreign matter.
5 Is the drum seal of developer unit in Modify the position of drum seal or
proper contact with the drum? replace it.
Drum 6 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the Replace the drum.
drum surface?
Transfer unit 7 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the Replace the transfer belt.
transfer belt surface?
8 Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.
tact with the transfer belt surface?
9 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con- Check if the spring of the transfer belt
tacted and released properly? cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace
the clutch.
10 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Check if the blade pressure spring is
proper contact with the transfer belt? installed.
11 Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st/2nd Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller.
transfer roller?
Transport path 12 Does the toner image touch foreign mat- Remove foreign matter.
ter after transfer, before entering the fuser
unit?
Discharge lamp 13 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone Replace the discharge lamp.
out?
Scanner 14 Is there foreign matter or dust in the opti- Clean the lens and mirrors.
cal path?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 127
12)White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-12

Main charger 1 Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove foreign matter.
2 Is the terminal contact poor? Clean or adjust the terminals.
Drum 3 Is there any abnormalities on the drum Replace the drum.
surface?
Discharge lamp 5 Is the discharge lamp lighting properly? Replace the discharge lamp or clean ter-
minals.
Developer unit 6 Is the developer sleeve rotating correctly? Check the developer drive system, or
Is there any abnormalities on the sleeve clean the sleeve surface.
surface?
7 Is the connection of developer bias supply Correct it.
terminal normal?
Drive systems 8 Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt jit- Check each drive system.
tery?
High-voltage 9 Is the high-voltage transformer output Check/correct any electric leakage and
transformer defective? related circuits.
(main charger If the high-voltage transformer does not
wire/grid, 1st/ work, replace it.
2nd transfer
roller and devel-
oper bias)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 128
13)Skew (slantwise copying)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-13
5

Drawer/LCF 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly installed? Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly.
2 Is too much paper loaded in the drawer or Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less.
LCF? (2500 sheets or less/stack for LCF)
3 Is the paper corner folded? Change the paper direction and reinsert it.
4 Are the drawer or LCF side guides prop- Adjust the side guides.
erly set?
Paper feed roller 5 Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty? Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or
replace the roller.
Rollers 6 Is each roller improperly fixed to the Check and reinstall E-rings, pins, clips
shaft? and setscrews.
Aligning amount 7 Is the aligning amount proper? Increase the aligning amount.
Registration 8 Is the registration roller spring removed? Mount the spring correctly. Clean the
roller roller if it is dirty.
Pre-registration 9 Is the pre-registration guide improperly Correct it.
guide installed?
2nd transfer 10 Is the 2nd transfer front guide installed Correct it.
front guide properly?
RADF 11 Is the RADF installed and adjusted prop- Reinstall and readjust it.
erly?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 129
14)Color banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-14

Scanner 1 Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.
2 Is there dust or stain on the shading cor- Clean it.
rection plate or ADF original glass?
Main charger 3 Is there foreign matter on the charger Remove foreign matter.
grid?
4 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger grid.
5 Is there foreign matter on the main Remove foreign matter.
charger?
6 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.
7 Is there foreign matter inside the charger Remove foreign matter.
case?
8 Is the inner surface of charger case dirty? Clean inside.
9 Are the pads of charger wire cleaner stop- Correct the position.
ping at the position other than their home
position?
Cleaner 10 Is there paper dust on the cleaning blade Clean or replace the paper dust removal
edge? brush for the registration roller.
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.
11 Is the cleaning blade contact improper? Correct it.
12 Is toner recovery defective? Clean the toner recovery auger section.
Transfer unit 13 Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.
tact with the transfer belt surface?
14 Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer Clean or replace it.
belt cleaning blade?
the clutch.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 130
Fuser unit 17 a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser a. Clean or replace them.
belt and pressure roller surface? b. Clean the thermistor.
b. Is the thermistor dirty?
Drum 18 Are there scratches on the drum surface? Replace the drum.
Laser optical unit 19 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit Remove foreign matter or dust.
glass?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 131
15)Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-15

Main charger 1 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.
Fuser unit 2 Is the fuser belt, pressure roller or oil roller Clean them.
dirty?
High-voltage 3 Is the high-voltage transformer output Check the circuit and replace the highvolt-
transformer defective? age transformer if not working.
(main charger 4 Is each joint of high-voltage output loos- Reconnect each joint.
wire/grid and ened? (Check if any electric leakage is
transfer roller causing noise.)
bias)
Drum 5 Is there deep scratch on the drum sur- Replace the drum, especially if the
face? scratch has reached the aluminum base.
6 Are there fine scratches on the drum sur- Check and correct the contact of cleaning
face (drum pitting)? blade and recovery blade.
2nd transfer 8 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating nor- Clean the roller area or replace the roller.
roller mally?
Scanner 9 Is there foreign matter on the carriage Remove foreign matter.
rail?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 132
16)White spots
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-16
5

Developer unit/ 1 Is the toner density of developer material Check and correct the auto-toner sensor
Toner cartridge proper? and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of toner is sufficient
in the toner cartridge.
2 Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper? Adjust the gap.
Developer mate- 3 Using the specified developer material, Use the specified developer material,
rial/Toner/Drum toner and drum? toner and drum.
4 Have the developer material and drum Replace the developer material and drum.
reached their PM life?
5 Is the storage environment of the toner Use the toner cartridge stored in the envi-
cartridge 35oC or less without dew? ronment within specification.
6 Is there any dent on the surface of the Replace the drum.
drum?
7 Is there any film forming on the drum? Clean or replace the drum.
8 Is the drum bedewed? Wipe the drum surface with a piece of dry
cloth.
Transfer unit 9 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Remove foreign matter.
surface?
10 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Clean the transfer belt unit.
drive roller?
Main charger 11 Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove it.
12 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.
High-voltage 13 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output.
transformer defective?
(main charger
wire/grid, devel-
oper 1st/2nd
transfer roller
bias)
Paper 14 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or select the
mode? proper mode.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 133
17)Poor transfer
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-17

Transfer unit 1 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean it.
ers dirty?
2 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Correct it.
the drum ?
3 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.
with the transfer belt?
4 Is there any deformation or abnormalities Replace the belt.
on the transfer belt?
5 Is the high-voltage fed to the 2nd transfer If any contact failure occurs in the feeding
roller correctly? area (e.g. the conductive bushing and
spring come off), correct it.
Paper 6 Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled? Reinsert paper with reverse side up or
change paper.
7 Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp? Change paper.
* Avoid storing paper in damp place.
Registration 8 Is the registration roller malfunctioning? Clean the roller, remount the spring, or
roller replace defective clutch-related parts.
Aligning amount 9 Is the aligning amount proper? Inckease the aligning amount
High-voltage 10 Is the high-voltage transformer output Check the circuit and adjust the trans-
transformer defective? former output.
(1st/2nd transfer 11 Are the high-voltage harness and termi- Correct them if loosened.
roller bias) nals in proper contact?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 134
18)Uneven image density
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-18
5

Main charger 1 Is the main charger dirty? Clean it or replace the charger wire.
Transfer unit 2 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean the belt.
ers dirty?
3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Correct it.
the drum?
4 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with Correct it.
the transfer belt? (Is the roller tilted?)
5 Is there any abnormalities or deformation Replace the transfer belt.
on the transfer belt?
Laser optical unit 6 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit Clean the slit glass.
glass?
Discharge lamp 7 Is the discharge lamp dirty? Clean it.
8 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone Replace it.
out?
Developer unit 9 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
with the drum?
10 Is the developer unit pressure mechanism Check the mechanism.
malfunctioning?
11 Is the transport of developer material Remove foreign matter if any.
poor?
Scanner section 12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF open? a. Close the platen cover or RADF.
b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or lens b. Clean them.
dirty?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 135
19)Faded image (low density)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-19

Toner empty 1 Is the “ADD TONER” symbol blinking? Replace the toner cartridge.
Auto-toner circuit 2 Is there enough toner in the cartridge? Check the auto-toner circuit function.
3 Is the toner density of developer material
too low?
Toner motor 4 Is the toner motor malfunctioning? Check the motor drive circuit.
Toner cartridge 5 Are there any abnormalities in the toner Replace the toner cartridge.
cartridge?
Developer mate- 6 Has the developer material reached its Replace developer material.
rial PM life?
Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact Check the developer unit installation.
with the drum? Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole
position.
Main charger 8 Is the main charger dirty? Clean it or replace the charger wire.
Drum 9 Is there film forming on the drum surface? Clean or replace the drum.
10 Has the drum reached its PM life? Replace the drum.
Transfer unit 11 Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd trans-
roller reached its PM life? fer roller.
High-voltage 12 Is the high-voltage transformer output set- Adjust the high-voltage transformer out-
transformer tings improper? put.
(developer bias) 13 Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
ness securely connected? Is the harness Replace the high-voltage harness.
open circuited?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 136
20)Image dislocation in feeding directio
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-20
5

Adjustment error 1 Is same dislocation on every copy? Adjust the scanner/printer using the
of scanner or Adjustment Mode.
printer section
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty, or is the Clean the roller with alcohol.
spring removed? Reinstall the spring.
3 Is the registration motor malfunctioning? Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they
are not engaged properly.
4 Is the registration roller clutch operating Replace the registration roller clutch.
normally? (Is the timing of operation
delaying?)
Paper feed 5 Are the paper feed clutch and transport Check the circuit or the clutch and
clutch, Transport clutch malfunctioning? replace them if necessary.
clutch
Aligning amount 6 Is the aligning amount proper? Decrease the aligning amount.
Pre-registration 7 Is the pre-registration guide improperly Reinstall the guide.
guide installed?
Transfer belt 8 Is there any stain or scratch on the reflec- Clean or replace it.
tion tape?
9 Is the lens of the transfer belt home posi- Clean or replace it.
tion sensor stained?

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 137
21)Image jittering
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-21

- 1 Is the toner image on the drum proper? If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise
perform step 4 and after.
Registration 2 Is the registration roller rotating normally? Check the registration roller section and
roller its springs.
Transfer unit 3 Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller Check the drive system and replace the
operating normally? transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller if neces-
sary.
Fuser unit 4 Are the fuser roller and pressure roller Check the drive system.
rotation proper? Replace the fuser belt, fuser roller and
Is the fuser belt transportation proper? pressure roller if necessary.
Drum 5 Is there large scratch on the drum? Replace the drum.
Scanner 6 Is the slide sheet defective? Replace it.
7 Are there any abnormalities on the car- Replace the feet.
riage feet?
8 Is the tension of timing belt inappropriate? Correct the tension.
9 Is the carriage drive system malfunction- Check the carriage drive system.
ing?
10 Are any mirrors loosely installed? Install them properly.
Drum drive sys- 11 Is the drum drive system malfunctioning? Check the drum drive system.
tem Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bush-
ings if they have dirt or scratches.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 138
22)Poor cleaning
Note:
Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-22

Developer mate- 1 Is the specified developer material used? Use the specified developer material and
rial toner.
Cleaner 2 Is there paper dust on the drum cleaning Clean it.
blade edge?
3 Is the drum cleaning blade peeled? Replace the blade.
Check and replace the drum.
4 Is the cleaning brush rotating normally? Check the brush driving section.
Clean the brush area.
5 Is the cleaning brush damaged? Replace the brush and clean the brush
Is there foreign matter on the brush? area. Check the drum and replace if there
is any abnormality.
Transfer belt 6 Is there paper dust on the edge of transferClean or replace it.
cleaner belt cleaning blade?
7 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade peeled? Replace the blade.
the clutch.
Toner recovery 10 Is the toner recovery defective? Clean the toner recovery auger.
auger Check the cleaning blade pressure.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 139
Fuser unit 11 Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller dam- Replace them.
aged?
Have the roller reached their PM life?
12 Is there any bubble-like defect on the Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify
fuser belt (173 mm pitch on the image)? the heater control circuit.
13 Have the fuser belt and pressure roller Replace them.
reached their PM life?
14 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and Check and adjust the pressure mecha-
pressure roller proper? nism.
15 Is the temperature of fuser roller proper? Check/correct the setting value of fuser
roller temperature.
Clean or replace the thermistors.
Check and correct the circuit.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 140
23)Uneven light distribution
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-23
5

Original glass 1 Is the original glass dirty? Clean the glass.
Main charger 2 Are the main charger wire, grid and case Clean or replace them.
dirty?
Discharge lamp 3 Is the discharge lamp dirty? Clean it.
Scanner 4 Are the reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, Clean them.
lens, etc. dirty?
Exposure lamp 5 Is the exposure lamp tilted? Adjust the installed position of the lamp.
6 Is the lamp discolored or degraded? Replace it.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 141
24)Blotched image
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-24

Paper 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its Check the paper type and mode.
mode?
2 Is paper too dry? Change paper.
Transfer unit 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Correct it.
the drum?
4 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.
with the transfer belt?
5 Are there any abnormalities on the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
fer belt?
High-voltage 6 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output. Replace the trans-
transformer abnormal? former, if necessary.
(1st/2nd transfer
roller bias)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 142
25)Stain on the paper back side
Feeding direction
Printing side of 1st page

The edge of image
cut off.
5
Feeding direction
Back side of 2nd page

Fig. 5-25

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 143
06/08
Image adjust- 1 Is the margin adjustment of image cor- Adjust the margin.
ment/setting rect?
2 Is the margin adjustment of image correct Adjust the margin.
when the paper size is not selected in
bypass feeding?
3 Is the margin adjustment of image at Adjust the margin. (05-434)
duplexing correct?
4 Is the image location in primary/second- Adjust the location.
ary scanning direction correct?
5 Is the reproduction ratio of image in pri- Adjust the reproduction ratio.
mary/secondary scanning direction cor-
rect?
6 Is the tab setting correct? Correct the setting.
Paper feeding / 7 Does the size of paper in the drawer or Use the appropriate paper size or correct
Transport area LCF correspond to the setting? the size setting.
8 Is the width between the slides in the Correct the position of the slides.
drawer correct (too wide)?
9 Is the width between the slides of the Correct the width.
bypass tray correct (too wide)?
10 Is the sideways deviation adjustment for Adjust the deviation.
drawers or slides of the bypass tray cor-
rect?
11 Is the paper aligning amount sufficient? Adjust the aligning amount.
12 Are the feed roller and transport roller Clean or replace the rollers.
dirty or worn out?
13 Does the paper mode correspond to the Use the appropriate paper type or paper
paper type? mode.
14 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Transfer unit 15 Is there any stain caused by a poor clean- Clean the transfer belt.
ing, etc. on the transfer belt?
tacted or released properly? cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
the clutch.
18 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating properly? Clean the area around the roller.
Otherwise replace the roller.
19 Is there any foreign matter or stain on the Clean or replace the roller.
2nd transfer roller?
20 Has the 2nd transfer roller reached to its Replace the 2nd transfer roller.
PM life?
Fuser unit 21 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
dirty?
22 Is the rib of transport guide dirty? Clean the rib.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 144
06/08
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS>

The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the DRV board, the SYS board and the SLG
board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time.
If more than one of the LGC board, the DRV board and the SYS board require replacement, replace
them in the following procedure.
1) First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2) Turn the power ON and confirm that "READY" is displayed.
3) Turn the power OFF.
4) Replace another board that requires replacement.
5) Repeat steps 2 to 4.
The LGC board and DRV board can be replaced without other settings.
When the HDD requires replacement, see “5.3.1 Replacing HDD”.
When the SYS board requires replacement, see “5.3.2 Replacing SYS board”.
When the SLG board requires replacement, see “5.3.3 Replacing SLG board”.
When NVRAM requires replacement or clearing, see “5.3.4 NVRAM replacing and clearing”.
5.3.1 Replacing HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD>

When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to
5
recover them after replacing.
Notes:
1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users’ data/information
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
3. When 08-690 is performed, the HDD self-certificate is not available, so the SSL-related set-
ting becomes disabled.
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 145
06/08
(1) Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibil-
ity and the measure of the backup.
• Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Archive them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
As for the backup in Box data, all data (selectable by the box) can be backed up / restored
in one go by using "e-Filing Backup/Restore Utility".
• F-code information, Template registration information, Address book
- Back them up in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• Department management data
- Export them in “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception))
- Export them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.)
• Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
- Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to
the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
• Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
- Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be
kept.)
• Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data)
- If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
• FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data)
- Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
• Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)
- The data cannot be backed up.
(2) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” (content of Function Mode (13) setting)
list.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
• Press the [LIST] button.
• Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
(3) Print out the “FUNCTION” list.

• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
• Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
• Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
• Press the [FUNCTION] button. The list is outputted.
(4) Replace the HDD.
(5) Update of HDD program data and UI data.

• Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON. When “Firmware Version Up
Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.
• Update with the USB storage. See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for details.
• Format the HDD. (Setting Mode (08-690: 2))
* When the FAX unit (GD-1150) is installed. Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*). Per-
form the 1*-100 (FAX Set Up), 1*-102 (Clearing the image data) of the FAX Clearing Mode.
• Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. See “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjust-
ment” for details.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 146
(6) Ask users to reset the user’s setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
• Printer driver
- Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• F-code information, Template registering information, Address book
- Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess
• Department management data
- Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
• When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with "Create self-
certificate" of TopAccess.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address
• When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with "Install Certificate for Wireless LAN" of TopAc-
cess.
CA certificate
User certificate 5
(7) Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, per-
form the re-setting.
• Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the
procedure of (2).)
• While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
• Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
• Turn the power OFF.
(8) Referring to the “FUNCTION” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
• Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
• Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
• Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 147
05/11
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board
<<CAUTION IN REPLACING the SYS board>>

Perform the following procedures and settings when the SYS board is replaced.
<After replacing the SYS board>
(1) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2) Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3) Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM update.
Note:
Be sure to start up with the Setting Mode (08), not the normal mode immediately after the System
ROM update, and then perform the following steps.
(5) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of set
tings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
• When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(6) [If a scrambler board has already been installed]

Perform 08-698 (Entering the key code for scrambler board). Have the user enter the key code.
(7) Perform 08-200 (date and time setting) to set Date/Time.
(8) Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the num-
ber on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995.
(9) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).

* If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (14).
(11) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*)

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 148
09/01
(12) Perform 1*-102 (Clearing the image data).
Notes:
Following image data are deleted when 1*-102 is performed.
• Images of fax polling transmission
• Images of fax Mailbox and box information
• Images of fax transmission
• Images of fax reception
(15) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
5.3.3 Replacing SLG board
<CAUTION IN REPLACING SLG BOARD>

When the SLG board has been replaced, “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board
→ SLG board (05-363)” must be performed.
5.3.4 Replacing or clearing NVRAM

<<Caution in replacing or clearing NVRAM>>
When NVRAM has been replaced or cleared (“System all clearing (08-669)”), the setting must be per- 5
formed according to the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure to start up with the Setting Mode (08), not the normal mode immediately after the
Note:
address.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 149
09/01

(16) Set the destination with Destination setting of FAX machine (08-701).

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 150
08/12
5.3.5 Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.
<<Cautions when disposing of the HDD>>

Before disposing of the HDD of the equipment, be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing)
and confirm that deleting of the HDD data is completed.
• Check that the percentage is 100% and “HDD Erase [OK]” appears on the upper left of the screen.
• Check that the version (SYS V1.0) is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
* When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased. 5
<<Caution when disposing of the SYS board>>
Before the SYS board is disposed, the following codes can be performed.
• 08-1427 (Forcible NVRAM data all clearing)
• 08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing)
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 151
05/07
5.3.6 HDD information display
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer Model name HDD serial number
- Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.

- "---" is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.
2) Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-108 or 120 occurred).
Result
Description Diagnosis
ID VALUE
05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD replacement
c5 0 is not required.
05 From 1 to 999 Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered. HDD replacement
c5 0 is not required.
05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a HDD replacement
c5 1 or more possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.) is recommended.
05 Either one is at High possibility of physical failure HDD replacement
c5 least 1000. is recommended.
05 All values are dis- High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness or HDD replacement
c5 played as "-------". SYS board may be one of the causes.) is recommended.
3) ID=05 and c5
ID Name Description Remarks
05 Re-allocated Sector Count The number of sectors reassigned This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to This value tends to increase at
be reassigned HDD failure.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 152
4) Description of each ID
ID Name Meaning
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
02 Throughput Performance This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
07 Seek Error Rate This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance dur-
ing normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads. 5
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c2 Temperature This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallo-
cation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrect-
able sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate) This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 153
5.4 Other errors
1) Operation cannot be performed (operation from the control panel is not successful) after installing
the option(s) such as Wireless LAN module, Scrambler board and/or Parallel board.
- Check if the optional board is installed properly.
2) The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to “Enabled”.
- The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNC-
TIONS] → [ADMIN] → [WIRELESS LAN] → [SETTING CHECK].
Confirm the settings with the administrator.
* “NIC INITIALIZING” does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it dis-
appears after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the
Wireless LAN did not succeed even though “NIC INITIALIZING” disappears.
* The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is
not found or security settings are not correct.

TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 154
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.
Firmware Stored Update method
Master data Hard disk USB Storage Device
(HDD program data, UI data)
System ROM System control PC board USB Storage Device
(System firmware, OS data, UI (SYS board) * When replacing the system
data) * The system firmware is stored control PC board (SYS
into the hard disk from the board), update with Download
FROM basic section software jig.
version “V1.01/2.30”.
Engine ROM Logic PC board USB Storage Device
(Machine firmware) (LGC board) * Update with Download jig also
possible.
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC USB Storage Device
(Scanner firmware) board * Update with Download jig also
(SLG board) possible.
RADF ROM RADF control PC board Download jig
(RADF firmware) (MR-3018)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board Download jig
(Finisher firmware) (MJ-1101/MJ-1023/ MJ-1024)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board Download jig
(Saddle stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)
Hole punch unit ROM Hole punch control PC board Download jig
(Hole punch unit firmware) (MJ-6101)
FAX ROM FAX board Download jig
(FAX firmware) (GD-1200/1201)
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions. 6
• Updating with the download jig

P. 6-2 "6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig"
• Updating with the USB Storage Device
P. 6-37 "6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device"
Notes:
• Before updating the firmware, check the FROM basic section software version (perform the
code 08-920).
• For updating with the USB Storage Device; The firmware can be updated to the latest version
by storing the update program together with the firmware data file for updating in the USB
Storage Device.
• For updating with the download jig; Before the FROM basic section software is updated from
"V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier version to the latest one, update it to "V1.01 / 2.30" first. Select all of
the SYS, OS, UI and HDD when updating "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier versions.
• Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the FAX board. The
latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and fin-
isher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware
version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.
• The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and
then write the suitable version of the firmware.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-1
08/12
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.
Two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Download jig
Firmware Stored
Batch update Individual update
System ROM System control PC board PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 -
(SYS board) (48 MB)
* The system firmware is <Two download jigs are
stored into the hard disk needed.>
from the FROM basic sec-
tion software version
“V1.01/2.30”.
Engine ROM Logic PC board K-PWA-DLM-320
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC K-PWA-DLM-320
board
(SLG board)
RADF ROM RADF control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(MR-3018)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(Finisher firmware) (MJ-1101/MJ-1023/MJ-1024)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(Saddle stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)
Hole punch unit ROM Hole punch control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(Hole punch unit firmware) (MJ-6101)
FAX ROM FAX board (GD-1200/1201) - K-PWA-DLM-320
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P. 6-4 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
P. 6-20 "6.1.3 K-PWA-DLM-320"

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-2
08/12
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector Connector
(for SYS board (for ROM writer
connection) adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig. 6-1 Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Important:
• To perform update, two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) are needed.
• The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on
the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the
data to these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P. 6-18 "6.1.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector Mark for ROM LED

installation direction
6
ROM
Fig. 6-2 Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Be sure that the ROM is installed in the correct direction.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-3
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
The firmware of the equipment except for the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in
a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board
according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board or
scanning section control PC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.

<Updating System ROM>
• System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
• OS data (FROM basic section software)
• UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>

Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>

Scanner ROM data
[A] Update procedure

Important:
• Use two “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2” for the download jigs.
• Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.

P. 6-18 "6.1.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-3

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-4
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN105, CN106) on the SYS board.
Connector
Download jig 1
Download jig 0
Fig. 6-4
Download jig number Connector name

Download jig 0 CN105
Download jig 1 CN106
(5) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier:
Fig. 6-5

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-5
06/08
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.01 / 2.30" or later:
Fig. 6-6
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.

“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update it individually.
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
Types of Firmware version to be updated.>
"V1.00/8.22" or earlier: "V1.01/2.30" or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
1. UI Update
2. System Firmware Update
Engine ROM 3. Engine Firmware Update 2. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 4. Scanner Firmware Update 3. Scanner Firmware Update
Example: Updating the system ROM

Fig. 6-7

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-6
06/08
Fig. 6-8
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 6-9
Status display during update Status display when update is completed

OS Update ....... OS Update ......................Completed
UI Data Update ....... UI Data Update ...............Completed
SysFirm Update ....... SysFirm Update ..............Completed
Engine MAIN Update ......Flash Update Engine MAIN Update ......Completed
Scanner Firm Update......Flash Update Scanner Firm Update......Completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-7
06/08
Fig. 6-10

OS UI Update ....... OS UI Update.................Completed
Engine MAIN Update......Flash Update Engine MAIN Update..... Completed
Scanner Firm Update..... Flash Update Scanner Firm Update..... Completed
(8) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
Fig. 6-11

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-8
06/08
Fig. 6-12
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and cleaning the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
Fig. 6-13

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-9
06/08
Fig. 6-14
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.

• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.

08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON

08-903: Engine ROM version

08-905: Scanner ROM version

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 10
06/08
[C] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is
"V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier)
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
［System ROM］［Engine ROM］［Scanner ROM］
0. OS Update 3. Engine Firmware Update 4. Scanner Firmware Update
1. UI Data Update
2. System Firmware Update
Update Completed
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.

Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously 6
Select items to be updated and press the

[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Engine ROM] and
[Scanner ROM] in parallel.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 11
06/08
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been

updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-
played and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 12
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..
Completed”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware

Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,

“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..
Completed”.
When all data has been updated, “Update

Completed” is displayed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 13
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Failed items Error message

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 14
[D] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is
"V1.01 / 2.30" or later)
[System ROM] [Engine ROM] [Scanner ROM]
1. OS UI Update 2. Engine Firmware Update 3. Scanner Firmware Update
Update Completed
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously

[START] button.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 15
06/08
been updated, “OS UI Update…Completed” is
displayed.

Completed”.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 16
06/08
Completed”.


FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 17
06/08
6.1.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter

(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-15
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer ROM writer adapter

Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP/1881UXP PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)
(or equivalent)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)
(or equivalent)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881] [PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Fig. 6-16 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 Fig. 6-17 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 18
08/04
• Precaution when writing the data
- Consider two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) as “Download jig 0” and “Down load jig 2”
and do not mix them up when writing.
- Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
- When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if
it is not set.
- The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written.
Important:
When an error such as "Over current detects" appears while the data are being written to the
download jig and the writing cannot be finished, set the writing voltage (VID) to 12 V and then
write them.
File Name
Rotary Switch Flash ROM
Download jig 0 Download jig 1
1 jigu0-1.bin jigu0-0.bin ROM1
4 N/A N/A ROM4
5 N/A N/A ROM5
6 N/A N/A ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 19
08/04
6.1.3 K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.

Engine ROM data

Scanner ROM data
<Updating RADF ROM>

RADF ROM data
<Updating Finisher ROM>

• Finisher firmware
• Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>

FAX ROM data
[A] Update Procedure

Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.

Make sure the direction is correct ( P. 6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320").
Connector cover
Fig. 6-18

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 20
(4) Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-19
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-20
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 21

(3) Take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Fig. 6-21
Cover plate
Fig. 6-22

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 22
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-23
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
6
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 23
<Updating RADF ROM>


(3) Take off the RADF rear cover.
RADF rear cover
Fig. 6-24
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN81) on the RADF control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-25
(6) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at an interval
of approx. 0.8 sec.). The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is
assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed or
the LED blinks fast (at an interval of approx. 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and
check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 24
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1023/1024)>
Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the fin-
isher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Remark:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
• MJ-1023 (Console type):

Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
• MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.

(3) Take off the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover Finisher rear cover
[MJ-1023] [MJ-1024]
Fig. 6-26
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 25
06/08
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-27
(5) Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is com-
pleted, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
Fig. 6-28
<Updating Finisher Firmware>

Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>

Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 26
Important:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-29
LED
Processing status
LED103 LED102 LED101
0% or above OFF OFF ON
15% or above OFF ON OFF
30% or above OFF ON ON
45% or above ON OFF OFF
6
60% or above ON OFF ON
75% or above ON ON OFF
90% or above ON ON ON
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download sec-
tion (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9) Install the finisher rear cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 27
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1101)>
(1) Attach the ROM to the download jig

Make sure that the ROM and its direction are correct.
P. 6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320"
Board access cover
Fig. 6-30
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
Download jig
Fig. 6-31
(5) Turn ON the power while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 28
06/08
(6) When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking in approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update is failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed.
In this case, turn the power OFF and check the following items.
Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
(7) Turn the power OFF and remove the download jig.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 29
06/08
<Updating Hole punch unit ROM (MJ-6101)>
1. Checking the hole punch position

Follow the procedure below to check the stopping position of the paper transport during the punching
operation before updating the firmware, as the value for the position is defaulted when the firmware is
updated.
(1) Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(2) Remove the finisher board access cover and change the setting of the DIP-SW1 (SW1) on the
finisher control PC board as shown in the figure below.
ON
SW1
1 2 3 4
Fig. 6-32
(3) The LED1 on the finisher control panel starts blinking as you turn the power of the equipment
ON. Count the number of times the LED1 blinks. When the number of blinks is "6", this indicates
that the value for the stopping position is defaulted. If the number is other than "6", record the
number of blinks, because it will be needed to reset the value after the firmware is updated.
2. Firmware update
Update the firmware using the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).
(1) Attach the ROM to the download jig.

Make sure that the ROM and its direction are correct.
P. 6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-320"

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 30
06/08
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher board access cover.
Board access cover
Fig. 6-33
(4) Release the latches and take off the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit.
6
Rear lower cover
Fig. 6-34
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover of the hole punch unit.
Rear cover
Fig. 6-35

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 31
06/08
(6) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the finisher control PC board.
Download jig
Fig. 6-36
(7) Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to ON.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 6-37
(8) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously. Updating starts and the LED on the
download jig lights.
(9) When the update is completed normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking. The LED on
the download jig starts blinking in approx. 20 seconds after the update started. It is assumed that
the update is failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 30 seconds have elapsed.
In this case, turn the power OFF and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and
restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Is the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board set properly?
• Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
• Is the connector (CN12) on the finisher control PC board connected properly?
• Are the connector (CN15) on the finisher control PC board and the connector (CN1) on the
hole punch control PC board connected properly?
(10) Turn the power OFF and remove the download jig.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 32
06/08
(11) Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to OFF.
Note:
When the number of blinks is other than "6" (which indicates that the adjustment value is "0") at
the section "1. Checking the hole punch position", follow the steps of "5.1 Stopping Position
Adjustment" in the MJ-6101 Service Manual to adjust the value to the one that has been set
before the update.
(12) Change the settings of the DIP-SW1 and -SW2 on the hole punch control PC board according to
the model as shown in the figure below.
MJ-6101E MJ-6101N
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
MJ-6101F MJ-6101S
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 6-38
(13) Install the rear cover of the hole punch unit.
(14) Install the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit. 6
(15) Install the finisher board access cover.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 33
06/08
<Updating FAX ROM>
Important:
• Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for mainte-
nance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number informa-
tion. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
• Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( P. 6-3 " K-PWA-DLM-
320").
Connector cover
Fig. 6-39
Cover plate
Fig. 6-40

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 34
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-41
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
6
cover.
(9) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 35
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.


<Updating RADF ROM>

08-907: RADF ROM version
<Updating Finisher ROM>

08-908: Finisher ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>

08-915: FAX ROM version

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 36
6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Model specific
Firmware Stored Data file name
folder name
Master data Hard disk 1, 2, 3 ... n
* The file name should be consecutive
numbers from 1 to “n” without file
extension. The capacity of each file
is approx. 8 MB. However, the file
capacity of “n” (last number) may be
28_451C less than 8 MB.
System ROM System control PC board firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
(SYS board)
* The system firmware is stored
into the hard disk from the
FROM basic section software
version “V1.01/2.30”.
Engine ROM Logic PC board firmImage2.bin
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 37
06/08
Important:
• Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updat-
ing. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).
( P. 2-27 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)")
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color
Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the
most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or
Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equip-
ment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device.
• The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
• Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
• Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
• The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-
teed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 38
Update program
The firmware can be updated to the latest version without considering the current one by storing the
update program together with the firmware data file for updating in the USB Storage Device.
Name File name Stored
Tool object for updating mentusb.o root
Update program dlFirmWare_28_451C [28_451c] folder

(Model specific folder)
USB Storage Device
mentusb.o
28_451c
dlFirmWare_28_451C
firmImage0.bin
firmImage1.bin
firmImage2.bin
1
2
3
:
Fig. 6-42
Important:
• The "mentusb.o" file stored in the root of the USB storage device is a common file in e-
STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO452 Series and e-STUDIO282 Series. To save the firmware of
more than one model into one USB storage device, one "mentusb.o" file stored in the root of 6
USB storage device is sufficient.
• Be careful not to mix up the "mentusb.o" file because there is a file whose name is the same
in the localization tool.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 39
07/05
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
• Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data ( P. 6-37
"6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(3) Take off the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-43
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device

USB connector (host)
Fig. 6-44

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 40
When the update program is used, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-45
After the update program is finished being loaded, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-46
Note:
If the "dlFirmWare_28_451C" file of the update program is not stored in the USB storage device
though "mentusb.o" file exists, or the loading of the update program fails, the following screen
appears. In this case, check if the update program is correctly stored and repeat step (5) and
after.
Fig. 6-47

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 41
07/05
(6) Check the items to be updated.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. “*” is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (When the FROM basic section software version of the equip-
ment is "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier: All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings. When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.01 / 2.30" or
later: All items are selected in the default settings.)
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier:
Fig. 6-48
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
0. OS Update firmImage0.bin is written.
1. HDD Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update firmImage0.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
4. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
5. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 42
07/05
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.01 / 2.30" or later:
Fig. 6-49
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
1. OS UI Update firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin are written.
2. HDD SYS Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
3. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
4. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
6
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or turn OFF the
power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Fig. 6-50

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 43
06/08
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following mes-
sage is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Note:
"If you still want to continue, Please Push Start Key" will not be displayed if the FROM basic sec-
tion software version of the equipment is "V1.01 / 2.30" or later.
Fig. 6-51
If an attempt to update the FROM basic section software "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier version to the
latest firmware version without the update program, the following screen appears. In this case,
store "mentusb.o" and "dlFirmWare_28_451C", which are the files for update program, in the
specified folder and repeat step (5) and after.
Fig. 6-52

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 44
07/05
(7) Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update individually.
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
Types of Firmware version of the equipment>
"V1.00/8.22" or earlier "V1.01/2.30" or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
(OS data)
System ROM 2. UI Data Update
(UI data)
Master data 1. HDD Update 2. HDD SYS Update
System ROM 3. System Firmware Update
(System firmware)
Engine ROM 4. Engine Firmware Update 3. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 5. Scanner Firmware Update 4. Scanner Firmware Update
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM

Fig. 6-53
Fig. 6-54
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 45
06/08
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 6-55

OS Update ....... OS Update .................... Completed
HD Data Update ....... HD Data Update ............Completed
UI Data Update ....... UI Data Update ..............Completed
SysFirm Update ....... SysFirm Update .............Completed
Engine MAIN Update .....Flash Update Engine MAIN Update .... Completed
Scanner Firm Update..... Flash Update Scanner Firm Update..... Completed
Fig. 6-56

OS UI Update....... OS UI Update...................... Completed
HDD SYS Update....... HDD SYS Update ............... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .....Flash Update Engine MAIN Update........... Completed
Scanner Firm Update..... Flash Update Scanner Firm Update ..........Completed

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 46
06/08
(9) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
Fig. 6-57
Fig. 6-58

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 47
06/08
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating ( P. 6-37 "6.2
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device")?
• Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
Fig. 6-59
Fig. 6-60
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
(11) Perform the initialization of the updating data.

• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [INITIALIZE] button.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 48
06/08
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating Master data>

08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD

08-900: System ROM version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON

<Updating Scanner ROM> 6


FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 49
[C] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version of the equip-
ment is "V1.00 / 8.22" or earlier)
[System ROM] [Master data] [Engine ROM] [scanner ROM]
0. OS Update 1. HDD Update 4. Engine 5. Scanner

Firmware Update Firmware Update
2. UI Data Update
3. System
Firmware Update
Update Completed

Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
The initial screen is displayed and the recogni-

tion of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly, the

screen for selecting update items is displayed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 50
06/08
[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Master Data], [Engine ROM]
and [Scanner ROM] in parallel.

been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 51
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-
played and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.

Completed”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware

Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 52
File name of Total files
master data
Copies
When the [Master Data] has been updated,

“HD Data Update…Completed” is displayed.

Completed”.


FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 53
* If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 54
[D] Display during the update (When the FROM basic section software version of the equip-
ment is "V1.01 / 2.30" or later)
[System ROM] [Master data] [Engine ROM] [Scanner ROM]
1. OS UI Update 2. HDD SYS Update 3. Engine 4. Scanner

Firmware Update Firmware Update
Update Completed
The initial screen is displayed and the recogni-

tion of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly, the

screen for selecting update items is displayed.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 55
06/08
[START] button.
When the [OS data] / [UI data] has been

updated, “OS UI Update…Completed” is dis-
played.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 56
06/08
Completed”.
File name of Total files

master data
Copies
When the [Master Data] / [System firmware]

has been updated, “HDD SYS Update…

Completed”.


FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 57
06/08
* If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 58
06/08
6.2.1 Appendix
[A] Assist Mode

This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1) NVRAM flag clearing (“Clear NvRAM flags.”)

Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may acci-
dentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the
download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2) Data storage partition formatting (“Format Loader Partition.”)

When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not nor-
mally necessary.)
(3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is neces-
sary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously. 6
• The following screen is displayed.
Fig. 6-61
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.

FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 59
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 60
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7.1 Output Channel

The followings are three output channels which are not linked with the cover switch.
1) +3.3V
+3.3VA: CN464 Pins 9, 10 and 11
Output to the SYS board
+3.3VB: CN464 Pins 15 and 16
+3.3VB: CN466 Pin 3
Output to the LGC board
+3.3VB: CN467 Pins 17 and 18
Output to the SLG board
2) +5.1V
+5.1VA: CN464 Pins 21, 22, 23 and 24
+5.1VB: CN464 Pin 19
+5.1VB: CN466 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)
+5.1VB: CN467 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the RADF
+5.1VB: CN467 Pins 21 and 22
+5.1VB: CN468 Pin 4
Output to the finisher
+5.1VB: CN469 Pin 5
Output to the FIL board
3) +12V
+12VA: CN464 Pin 5
Output to the SYS board 7
+12VB: CN464 Pin 3
+12VB: CN466 Pin 16
+12VB: CN471 Pin 1
Output to the FAX unit

POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-1
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the cover switch.
1) +5.1V
+5.1VD: CN466 Pin 11
2) +24V
+24VD1: CN465 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit (via LGC board)
Output to the PFP/LCF
+24VD1: CN470 Pin 1
Output to the power supply cooling fan
Output to the DRV board
Output to the RADF
+24VD4: CN467 Pins 10, 12 and 14
+24VD5: CN468 Pin 2
Output to the finisher
Output voltage by the type of connector

Main switch line
Connector Destination Voltage
CN464 SYS board +3.3VA, +3.3VB, +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +12VA,
+12VB
CN466 LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), +3.3VB, +5.1VB, +12VB
Bridge unit (via LGC board)
CN467 SLG board, RADF +3.3VB, 5.1VB
CN468 Finisher +5.1VB
CN469 FIL board +5.1VB
CN471 FAX unit +12VB
Cover switch line

Connector Destination Voltage
CN465 LGC board, DRV board, PFP/LCF (via LGC +24VD1, +24VD2
board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)
CN466 LGC board +5.1VD
CN467 SLG board, RADF +24VD3, +24VD4
CN468 Finisher +24VD5
CN469 PFP/LCF +24VD1
CN470 Power supply cooling fan +24VD1

POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-2
7.2 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part
using the following table.
Voltage Board/Unit Part Fuse type
+24VD1 LGC Polygonal motor F3:8A (Semi time-lag)
Tray-up motor
ADU motor
Main motor
Developer motor
Transport motor
Drum cleaner brush motor
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor
Toner motor
Laser unit cooling fan
IH control board cooling fan
Ozone exhaust fan
Internal cooling fan
2nd transfer roller contact clutch
Bypass feed clutch
Registration clutch
Upper transport clutch (high speed)
Upper transport clutch (low speed)
Lower transport clutch (high speed)
Lower transport clutch (low speed)
Upper drawer feed clutch
Lower drawer feed clutch
ADU clutch
Color developer toner supply clutch
Color developer drive clutch
Black developer drive clutch
Black developer lifting clutch
Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch
Bypass pickup solenoid
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid 7
Discharge LED
Key copy counter / Copy key card
Charger cleaner motor
Power supply Power supply cooling fan
PFP/LCF
Bridge unit
+24VD2 DRV Revolver motor F4:8A (Semi time-lag)
Exit motor
+24VD3 RADF
+24VD4 SLG Exposure lamp (lamp inverter) F5:8A (Semi time-lag)
CCD drive circuit (CCD board)
Scanner unit cooling fan
Scan motor
+24VD5 Finisher

POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-3
7.3
IH
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

F3
+24VD1 CN465 LGC board, Bridge unit (via LGC board)
+24VD1 CN469 PFP/LCF
+24VD1 CN470 Power supply cooling fan
F4
Cover +24VD2 CN465 DRV board
Main switch opening/closing
Breaker +24VD3 CN467 RADF
interlock switch
Regulator
F1
F5
Live +24VD4 CN467 SLG board
Noise
FIL board filter
CN460
Neutral +24VD5 CN468 Finisher
+5.1VD CN466 LGC board
+3.3VA CN464 SYS board

+3.3VB CN464 SYS board
7-4
Switching regulator
+3.3VB CN466 LGC board
Fig. 7-1
+3.3VB CN467 SLG board
+5.1VA CN464 SYS board

Configuration of Power Supply Unit
+5.1VB CN464 SYS board

+5.1VB CN468 Finisher
F2
+5.1VB CN469 FIL board
Noise
CN460 filter ICP1
Regulator
+5.1VB CN466 LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),

Bridge unit (via LGC board)
+5.1VB CN467 SLG board, RADF
+12VA CN464 SYS board
+12VB CN464 SYS board

+12VB CN466 LGC board
+12VB CN471 FAX unit

8. REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.
(1) Auto Supply Order

Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail.
(2) Service Notification

Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
8.1 Auto Supply Order
8.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.
(1) Placing an Order

There are two ways to place an order.
• FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
• E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
(2) Order Intervals

When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner con-
tainer full detection.
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
(3) If Order Failure Occurs

If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.

REMOTE SERVICE
8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.
Note:
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
(1) Self-diagnosis (08) Setting

As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required.
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*
2: Invalid (Default)
When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)
(2) Touch Panel Setting

Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
• Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-MAIL E-mail address of supplier (*3)
CUSTOMER Customer information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER Supplier information
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN Service technician information
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.

REMOTE SERVICE
8-2
• Detailed setting for the order
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
***** TONER ORDER Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER)
PART NUMBER Part number to be ordered
CONDITIOIN The number of conditions (*)
QUANTITY The quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER ON/OFF setting of order for each part
* The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
• FAX number of this equipment (common information)

[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME ID name of this equipment
FAX NUMBER FAX number of this equipment
• E-mail information of this equipment (common information)

[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS E-mail address of this equipment (*)
FROM NAME E-mail username of this equipment
* When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is
not sent.
(3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the
setting list.
[USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]

REMOTE SERVICE
8-3
8.1.3 Setting procedure
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".
(2) Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(4) Press the [ADMIN] button.

• When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
Fig. 8-1
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 8-2
(6) Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.

REMOTE SERVICE
8-4
(7) The SERVICE screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-3
(8) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig. 8-4
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-5

REMOTE SERVICE
8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
[FAX NUMBER] Input the FAX number of supplier.

(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not
input the number.)
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of supplier.

(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the address.)
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.

(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SER-
VICE screen.)
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-6
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME] Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS] nput the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME] Input the name of supplier.
[ADDRESS] Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.

REMOTE SERVICE
8-6
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-7
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME] Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
Fig. 8-8

REMOTE SERVICE
8-7
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig. 8-9
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.
(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-10
(23) Press the [YELLOW(Y)] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
Fig. 8-11

REMOTE SERVICE
8-8
(24) Input the order information of TONER.
[PART NUMBER] Toner number
[CONDITION] The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number
specified for the CONDITION.
[QUANTITY] Quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF] Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automati-
cally or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-12
(27) Press the [MAGENTA(M)] / [CYAN(C)] / [BLACK(K)] / [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and
then input the order information in the same way.
Fig. 8-13
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information.
(29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.

REMOTE SERVICE
8-9
Note:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items 08 code Contents
The transmitting way of order 732 0: Ordered by FAX
[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF] 1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
SUPPLIER 733 Maximum 32 digits
[FAX NUMBER]
SUPPLIER 734 Maximum 192 letters
[E-MAIL]
CUSTOMER 738 Maximum 50 letters
[NAME]
CUSTOMER 739 Maximum 32 digits
[TEL NUMBER]
[E-MAIL]
[ADDRESS]
[NAME]
[ADDRESS]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 742 Maximum 5 digits
[NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 743 Maximum 50 letters
[NAME]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 744 Maximum 32 digits
[TEL NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN 745 Maximum 192 letters
[E-MAIL]
Remarks 748 Maximum 128 letters
[DESCRIPTION]
YELLOW(Y) TONER 755 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
YELLOW(Y) TONER 757 1-99
[CONDITION]
YELLOW(Y) TONER 756 1-99
[QUANTITY]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 752 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 754 1-99
[CONDITION]
MAGENTA(M) TONER 753 1-99
[QUANTITY]
CYAN(C) TONER 749 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
CYAN(C) TONER 751 1-99
[CONDITION]
CYAN(C) TONER 750 1-99
[QUANTITY]
BLACK(K) TONER 758 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 10
07/11
BLACK(K) TONER 760 1-99
[CONDITION]
BLACK(K) TONER 759 1-99
[QUANTITY]
USED TONER CONTAINER 761 Maximum 20 digits
[PART NUMBER]
USED TONER CONTAINER 763 1-99
[CONDITION]
USED TONER CONTAINER 762 1-99
[QUANTITY]
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format

The sample of order sheet is as follows.
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99

CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER QUANTITY

TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
MAGENTA : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
YELLOW : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 (*1)
BLACK : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
USED TONER CONTAINER : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

SERIAL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 8
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL BLACK TWIN COLOR FULL COLOR

PRINT COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
Fig. 8-14

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 11
(2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
Date&Time: '05-06-14 00:17

Customer Number: S01 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
SerialNumber: 1234567890
Device FAX Number:
Device Email: aaa@linux.nam1.local
OrderInformation:
YELLOW PartNumber: YELLOW-03 Quantity:17
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 141
(*1)
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 7
Fig. 8-15
(3) Result list

ORDER XXXXXXXXX
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER QUANTITY

TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
MAGENTA : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
YELLOW : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 (*1)
BLACK : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
USED TONER CONTAINER : XXXXXXXXXXXX 99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................

.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

SERIAL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL BLACK TWIN COLOR FULL COLOR

PRINT COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
Fig. 8-16

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 12
8.2 Service Notification
8.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
• Total Counter Transmit

When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).
• Service Call Transmit (E-mail only)

When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call
error.
• PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2 Setting
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are avail-
able. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774 Setting of notification display

0: Invalid (Default)
1: Valid

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 13
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 8-17
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.
Fig. 8-18
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig. 8-19

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 14
(4) Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".
• When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffec-
tive.
Fig. 8-20
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.
• When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig. 8-21
• Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig. 8-22

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 15
(6) Press the [ON] button to notify or the [OFF] button not to notify each item for E-mail and FAX.
When Total Count Transmit is set to ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure.
Fig. 8-23
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.
The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
• Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
• Notify Date 1
• Notify Date 2
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
• Day of the week ([Sunday] to [Saturday] buttons)

Pressing the buttons ([Sunday] to [Saturday]) of the desired day makes transmission on every
specified day. More than one day can be selected.
* This does not affect the settings of "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date 2".

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 16
• Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ([DATE] button)
Pressing the [DATE] button sets up to 2 dates on which you wand to send data.
* This is not affected by the specified day of the week.
Fig. 8-24
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [SET]
button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
• Time setting ([CHANGE] button)

Pressing the [CHANGE] button sets the time at which you wand to send data.
This is the time when data are sent with "Day of the week", "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date
2".
Fig. 8-25
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute
column of "Time" and press the [SET] button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
After all the settings are completed, press the [ENTER] button. The display returns to the screen
in step (5).

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 17
07/05
(7) Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).

Service Notification setting 767 0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX
E-mail address 1 768 Maximum 192 letters
FAX number 1145 Maximum 32 digits
Total Counter Transmit setting 769 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
Total counter transmission date setting 770 0 to 31
Total counter transmission date setting(2) 9880 0 to 31
Day of total counter data transmission 9881 1 byte
00000000(0)-01111111(127)
From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Fri-
day, Saturday
Total counter transmission interval setting 776 00:00-23:59
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Service Call Transmit setting 775 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
PM Counter Transmit setting 771 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 18
07/05
8.2.3 Items to be notified
The items to be notified are shown below.
1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the
same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
1 Date : 01/01/2007 12:34
2 Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
3 SerialNumber : 1234567890
4 Total Counter : 00004787
5 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : Supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
6 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
7 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
ChargeCounterFormat:
8 LargeSizeChargeCount 1
9 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
PMCounterFormat:
10 LargeSizePMCount 1
11 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0
Charge Counter:
Large Small
<Print Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
12 Copy 00000000 00000000
13 Print 00000000 00000000
Twin Color ------------------------------------
14 Copy 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
15 Copy 00000000 00000000
16 Print 00000000 00000000
17 List 00000000 00000000
18 FAX 00000000 00000000
<Scan Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
19 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
20 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
Twin Color ------------------------------------
21 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
22 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
23 FAX Scan 00000000 00000000
24 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
<FAX Counter>
25 Transmit 00000000 00000000
26 Receive 00000000 00000000
Periodical Maintenance Counter: 8
27 Set PM 00150000
28 Current PM 00004787
29 Set PMTime 00000000
30 CurrentPMTime 00000000
31 Printer Error History:
Date Time ErrorCode
-----------------------------------------------
12/13/2006 16:44 F110
12/12/2006 22:28 F110
12/12/2006 22:23 F110 (*1)
11/15/2006 22:23 F110
10/25/2006 11:12 F110
Fig. 8-26

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 19
07/05
1 Date
2 Machine model name
3 Serial number
4 Total counter value
5 Supplier information
6 Customer information
7 Service technician information
8 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10 Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11 Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
13 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)
14 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
15 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
16 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
17 Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
18 Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
20 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
21 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
22 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
23 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
24 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
25 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
26 Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
27 PM count setting value
28 PM count present value
29 PM driving count setting value
30
1 PM driving count present value
31
1 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 20
07/05
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX
*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION".
Sheet 1
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
1 DATE : '07-01-01 12:34

2 MACHINE MODEL : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
3 SERIAL NUMBER : 1234567890
4 TOTAL COUNTER : 00004787
CUSTOMER NAME : CUSTOMER_NAME

CUSTOMER ADDRESS : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
5
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER : 1234567890
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER : svc12
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
6
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER : 0987654321
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
SUPPLIER NAME : SUPPLIER_NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
7
SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER : 5544332211
SUPPLIER E-MAIL : supplier_emailaddress@ccccc.xxx
Sheet 2
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT PM COUNTER FORMAT
8 LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT :1 LARGE SIZE PM COUNT :1

9 LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION :1 LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION :0
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER

FULL COLOR LARGE SMALL FULL COLOR LARGE SMALL
12 COPY 00000000 00000000 20 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
13 PRINT 00000000 00000000 21 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
TWIN/MONO COLOR LARGE SMALL TWIN/MONO COLOR LARGE SMALL
14 COPY 00000000 00000000 22 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
15 PRINT 00000000 00000000 23 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
BLACK LARGE SMALL BLACK LARGE SMALL
16 COPY 00000000 00000000 24 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
17 PRINT 00000000 00000000 25 FAX SCAN 00000000 00000000
18 LIST 00000000 00000000 26 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000
19 FAX 00000000 00000000
FAX COUNTER PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
27 TRANSMIT
LARGE
00000000
SMALL
00000000 29 SET PM : 00000000
8
28 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000 30 CURRENT PM : 00000000
31 SET PM TIME : 00000000
32 CURRENT PM TIME : 00000000
33 PRINTER ERROR HISTORY
DATE TIME ERROR CODE DATE TIME ERROR CODE

06/12/13 16:44 F110
06/12/12 22:28 F110
06/12/12 22:23 F110 (*2)
06/11/15 22:23 F110
06/10/25 11:12 F110
Fig. 8-27

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 21
07/05
1 Date
3 Serial number
4 Total counter value
8 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10 Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11 Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
13 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)
14 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
15 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (TWIN COLOR)
16 Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
17 Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
18 Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
19 Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
20 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
21 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
22 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
23 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (TWIN COLOR)
24 Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
25 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
26 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
27 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
28 Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
29 PM count setting value
30
1 PM count present value
31
1 PM driving count setting value
32 PM driving count present value
33 History of error

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 22
07/05
3) Service Call Transmit
Subject: Service Call Notification
1 Date: 01/01/2007 12:34

Machine Name: e-STUDIO451c SerialNumber:1234567890
2 3
4 Function: Printer
5 Severity: Error
6 ErrorCode: XXXX
7 Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
8 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
9 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
11 Printer Error History:
Date Time ErrorCode

------------------------------------------
12/13/2006 16:44 F110
12/12/2006 22:28 F110
(*1)
12/12/2006 22:23 F110
11/15/2006 22:23 F110
10/25/2006 11:12 F110
8
Fig. 8-28

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 23
07/05
1 Date (When an error occurs)
3 Serial number
4 Function: Fixed at "Printer"
5 Severity: Fixed at "Error"
6 Error code
7 Error message: The content of error is displayed.
11 History of error

REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 24
07/05
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in
a batch.
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.
Storage location Program file name

Root directory rootusb, clone_28_451c
Important:
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
• The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data clon-
ing operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Imple-
menters Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only)
* Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were origi-
nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
• The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equiv-
alent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
• Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is differ-
ent, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
• If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter val-
ues are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied. 9
• Before starting data cloning, check that “Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage
device (08-9889)” is set at "0" (Accepted). If this is set at "1" (Not accepted), data cloning is
disabled. In this case, ask the administrator to enable it on the TopAccess menu.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.

DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-1
07/11
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup)
Important:
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
• Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-
aged and the operation not carried out properly.
• Back up or restore SRAM data only for the same equipment in the same ROM version. If
SRAM data are restored into the other equipment, problems such as overlapping serial num-
bers may occur.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
• Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(2) Write the program file.

• Write the data cloning program into the root directory.
USB storage device

Fig. 9-1

9-2
07/11
<User Data Backup>
(5) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-3
(6) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.

• In case of backup, select one of the following items.
<Backing up User data>
Select "1: User Data Back Up".
<Backing up Setting item>
Select "3: Setting Back Up".
<Backing up SRAM data>
Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.

9-3
07/11
(7) Press the [1] button.
The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-4

9-4
05/11
(8) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
• To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Backing up Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
<Backing up Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Backing up 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Backing up Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Backing up User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-5

9-5
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)
(9) Press the [Start] button.

The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-6
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-7
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.

9-6
05/11
<Setting Backup>
Fig. 9-8
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-9

9-7
07/11
The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-10
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.

• To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Backing up Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.

9-8
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)

Fig. 9-11
pleted.
Fig. 9-12

9-9
05/11
<SRAM Data Backup>
Fig. 9-13
Notes:
Fig. 9-14

9 - 10
07/11
The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-15
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys.

• To back up the data individually, select the following item.
<Backing up SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)

Fig. 9-16

9 - 11
05/11
pleted.
Fig. 9-17

9 - 12
05/11
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore)
Important:
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
• Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-
aged and the operation not carried out properly.
USB storage device

Fig. 9-18

9 - 13
05/11
<User Data Restore>
Fig. 9-19
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-20
(4) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.

• In case of restore, select the following items.
<Restoring User data>
Select "2: User Data Restore".
<Restoring Setting item>
Select "4: Setting Restore".
<Restoring SRAM data>
Select "6: SRAM Data Restore".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.

9 - 14
07/11
The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-21

9 - 15
05/11
(6) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.
• To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
• To restore the data individually, select the following items.
Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually.
<Restoring Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Restoring Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
<Restoring Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Restoring 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Restoring Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Restoring User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-22

9 - 16
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)

The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-23
(8) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-24
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not cop-
ied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] → [ADMIN] → Enter the password → 9
[COUNTER] → [DEPARTMENT SETTING] → Enter the password → [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.

9 - 17
05/11
<Setting Restore>
Fig. 9-25
Notes:
Fig. 9-26

9 - 18
07/11
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-27
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.

• To restore the data individually, select the following items.
<Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Restoring Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
Note:
Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were
backed up.

9 - 19
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)

Fig. 9-28
pleted.
Fig. 9-29

9 - 20
05/11
<SRAM Data Restore>
Fig. 9-30
Notes:
Fig. 9-31

9 - 21
07/11
The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-32
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys.

• To restore the data individually, select the following item.
<Restoring SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)

Fig. 9-33

9 - 22
05/11
pleted.
Fig. 9-34

9 - 23
05/11
[C] Confirmation of the error
"Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
• Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?
Fig. 9-35
Error number Error content

ERROR 1 Copy error
ERROR 2 I/F error
ERROR 3 USB memory full error
ERROR 4 Working folder error
ERROR 5 File not found error
ERROR 6 Security error
ERROR 7 Checksum error
ERROR 8 Model check error
ERROR 9 Version check error
ERROR 10 Destination check error
ERROR 11 Serial number check error

9 - 24
05/11
[D] Backup file
Backed up data files are encrypted.
<User data file>

The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item File name
Address book BACKUP_ADDR.sct
Mailbox BACKUP_MBOX.sct
Template BACKUP_TEMP.sct
Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch BACKUP_ALL.sct
Department management information BACKUP_Department.sct
User management information BACKUP_User.sct
<Setting data file>

The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item File name
Network / Print service network.sct
SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX scan.sct
Notification setting notice.sct
Directory Service ldap.sct
FAX setting fax.sct
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting wl.sct, bl.sct
<SRAM data file>

The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it.
Data item File name
SRAM sram.sct
* In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item File name
User data user_data.txt
Setting item data setting_data.txt
SRAM data sram_data.txt
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
• File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)

Line 1: Version 9
Line 2: Serial number
Line 3: Date

9 - 25
05/11
9 - 26
J595
J655 J460 PS-ACC
N AC(N:MAIN) AC(MAIN) AC(N:MAIN)
A D B 1
Inlet GND
B AC-DC DC
NF
(AC IN) L AC(L:MAIN) AC(MAIN) AC(L:MAIN) F2
C C A 4
J469
1
MAIN-SW
FG J622 2
(Main switch) Not used
3
G F AC(N:DOOR)
2A 1B 3 4
+5.1VB
AC-DC DC 5
NF
J653
AC(L:DOOR) F1 SG
1A 2B 6 6
BREAKER
COV-INTLCK-SW
J647 J546 Fuser
Cover opening/closing AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN-YHM(N)
3 3 1
10.1 AC Wire Harness
( interlock switch ) 2 2
AC-IN(L) AC-IN-YHM(N)
1 1 2
THERMO-FSR
IH-COIL
CN451 CN453 J643
A
CN450 CN452 J642
B PS-IH
CN493
CN454 J644

AC(N)
4 PWA-F-FIL
3 J644
2
AC(L)
1
05/11
10 - 1
Fig. 10-1
Scanner
AC(N)
THERMO-SCN-DH J64
1 1
AC(L) J61 J62 SCN-R-DH
2 2
CN432
AC(N:SCN) DH-SCN-N
1 1 1 1 1
CN497 AC(L:SCN) DH-SCN-L SCN-L-DH
2 2 2 2 2
SG
3 3 J652 J60 J63
2
RY
+5.1VB
1
J657 THERMO-DRM-DH
ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/
DRM-N ASU/TWD/KRD model:
4 2
DRM-L DRM-DH Standard
5 1
6 NAD/MJD model:
Option
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
CN433
1
2 Not used
3
3 3
2 2
1 1
J650
+5.1VB (DC LINE)
SG
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

10
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Download jig (SYS2) Download jig (SYS1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PWA-F-LGC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CN106
CN105
J646 J646
A (LGC) A
2 1 2 MAIN-SW
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
/CS
/CS
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
RDX
RDX
1 2 1 (S41)
/WRX
/WRX
RMSL
RMSL
CS0-A
CS0-B
CS0-A
CS0-B
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
CN354
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/F0
I/F2
I/F4
I/F6
SG
WE
CSIP2
+5.1VB
IPCSW
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/F01
I/F03
I/F05
I/F07
SG
OE
IPRST
+5.1VB
SG
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
PWA-F-SYS CN124 RSTSW
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
+24VD1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
(SYS) 1 2 J590
Option Not used FANOZ
CN352
Slot [1] : CN803
2 3 2 2 OZN-FAN-MOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PG
SG
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Slot [0] : CN802 +24V M
J1 CN349
4 1 1 (M18)
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
FANIH
FLCTR
+5.1VB
BKCTR
CN120 CN336 J581
CTRON
MNCTR
+24VD1
CN2 A1 TRST# 5
MCRUM
EXTCTR
CTRCNT
SG +5.1VB +24VD1
CTRCNT2
1 A2 +12VA CN107 CN107 1 2 2 HDD-FAN-MOT 13 1 IPC board 6 J591
CN123 +12V M SG
2 A3 TMS CN801 2 1 1 (M21) 12 2 2 2 IH-FAN-MOT
CN122 Option Option MAMON (Finisher) M
3 A4 TD1 CN121 VREF 1 93 SG 11 3 1 1 (M17)
10.2 DC Wire Harness
CN116 CN9 or CN4 CN401 CN118 MAMCLK

4 A5 +5.1VA 1 1 +3.3VA 1 SG DQ0 2 94 DQ4 CN602 10 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDD CN501 CN600 +12VA MAMCW
J2
5 A6 INTA# 2 2 +3.3VA 2 DQ0 SG 3 95 DQ5 1 20 1 1 CN348 9 5
NC 1 1 TXOUT 1 1 TXOUT2 D[0] 1 1 SG MAMPL
SG
SG
NC
NC
NC
NC
6 A7 INTC# 3 3 +3.3VA 3 DQ1 DQ1 4 96 VDD 2 19 2 2 8 6
TXD
RXD
NC 2 2 RXIN 2 2 +5VA D[2] 2 2 SG 1 1 D[0] MAMGA MAIN-MOT Coin controller
F-CNT
7 A8 +5.1VA 4 4 SG 4 DQ2 DQS0 5 97 DM0 3 18 3 3 7 7 M Copy key card
D- 3 3 CML 3 3 +12VB D[4] 3 3 +5.1VA 2 2 D[2] PG (M6)
8 A9 RESERVED 5 5 -12VA 5 DQ3 DQ2 6 98 DQ6 4 17 4 4 6 8
CNT-GND
D+ 4 4 LD 4 4 +3.3VB D[6] 4 4 3 3 D[4] PG CN342 J204
9 A10 +3.3VA 6 6 -12VA 6 +3.3VA VDD 7 99 DQ7 5 16 5 9 J583 J648 CN351 +24VD1
NC 5 5 EXTRG 5 5 MOD2DMA-1 RD-0 5 5 CN114 4 4 D[6] +24VD1 Option KTCR0 5 1
10 A11 RESERVED 7 7 +5.1VA 7 DQ4 DQ3 8 100 SG 6 15 4 10 1 4 1 4 PG
NC 6 6 ATT3DB 6 6 SG A[0] 6 6 /RESET 5 5 RD-0 +24VD1 +24VD1 4 2
11 8 8 +5.1VA 8 DQ5 NC 9 101 NC 7 14 1 1 3 11 2 3 2 3 POMCK M/DC-POL
DETACH 7 7 RLADJ1 7 7 MEM2CS-0 A[2] 7 7 SG 6 6 A[0] MAMBL Key copy counter KTCRC 3 3 M
12 9 9 +3.3VA 9 DQ6 NC 10 102 NC 8 13 2 2 2 12 3 2 3 2 POMON (M4)
NC 8 8 RLADJ2 8 8 +5.1VB A[4] 8 8 DD7 7 7 A[2] NC SG 2 4
13 A14 +3.3VAUX 10 10 IDSEL0 10 DQ7 SG 11 103 NC 9 12 3 3 1 13 4 1 4 1 POMPL
SG 9 9 RGCLK 9 9 MEMRD2-0 A[6] 9 9 DD8 8 8 A[4] 1 5
14 A15 RST# 11 11 OPBINT(0) 11 DQ8 DQ8 12 104 VDD 10 11 4 4
NC 10 10 AG 10 10 CLKOE-1 A[8] 10 10 DD6 9 9 A[6] CN337 J578
15 A16 +3.3VA 12 12 SG 12 SG DQ9 13 105 DQ14 11 10 5 5 Option Option
NC 11 11 -12VB 11 11 TXEN2-1 A[10] 11 11 DD9 10 10 A[8] NC NC J598
16 A17 GNT# 13 13 IDSEL1 13 DQ9 DQS1 14 106 DQ13 12 9 6 6 B12 12
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 DD5 11 11 A[10] +24VD1 RXD FG
17 A18 SG 14 14 SG 14 DQ10 VDD 15 107 DM1 13 8 7 7 B11 11 1 CN345
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 DD10 12 12 A[12] +24VD1 SG CN455 CN334 CN201
Bluetooth module
18 A19 PME# 15 15 PCICLK(3) 15 DQ11 CK1 16 108 VDD 14 7 8 8 B10 10 2 J626 SG
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 DD4 13 13 A[14] PG TXD IH2ON 20 1
19 A20 AD[30] 16 16 SG 16 DQ12 /CK1 17 109 DQ14 15 6 9 9 B9 9 3 1 A1 A13 A1 +5.1VD CN202
B NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 DD11 14 14 A[16] PG SG +5VSW 19 2 CN203 B
20 A21 +3.3VA 17 17 REQ(1) 17 DQ13 SG 18 110 DQ15 16 5 10 10 B8 8 4 2 A2 A12 A2 +5.1VD +5.1VB
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 DD3 15 15 A[18] NC FG H1PWR1 18 3 3 1
21 A22 AD[28] 18 18 REQ(0) 18 +3.3VA DQ10 19 111 CKE1 17 4 11 11 B7 7 DEV-MOT 5 3 A3 A11 A3 SG BEAMDT PWA-F-SNS
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 DD12 16 16 SG DVMPL M F-CNT H1PWR2 17 4 2 2
22 A23 AD[26] 19 19 +3.3VA 19 DQ14 DQ11 20 112 VDD 18 3 12 12 B6 6 (M11) 6 4 A4 A10 A4 WRLVL SG (SNS)
NC 18 18 ANSDET 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 DD2 17 17 SG DVMCW Finisher CNT-GND H1PWR3 16 5 1 3
23 A24 SG 20 20 AD[31] 20 DQ15 CKE0 21 113 NC 19 2 13 13 B5 5 7 5 A5 A9 A5 SG
NCU board [Line1]

SG 19 19 REVA 19 19 A[4] D[3] 19 19 DD13 18 18 D[1] DVMCLK +5.1VB H2PWR1 15 6
Scrambler board
24 A25 AD[24] 21 21 AD[29] 21 NC VDD 22 114 DQ20 20 1 14 14 B4 4 8 6 A6 A8 A6 SG
20 20 REVB 20 20 A[2] D[5] 20 20 DD1 19 19 D[3] DEVMON SG H2PWR2 14 7
25 A26 IDSEL 22 22 SG 22 NC DQ16 23 115 A12 15 15 B3 3 9 7 A7 A7 A7 PIDT1
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 DD14 20 20 D[5] SG NC PS-IH H2PWR3 13 8
Download jig (FAX)

26 To Slot [0] A27 +3.3VA 23 23 AD[27] 23 SG DQ17 24 116 SG 16 16 B2 2 10 8 A8 A6 A8 PIDT0
22 22 FXTHOOK 22 22 +5.1VB BOOTCS-0 22 22 DD0 21 21 D[7] +5.1VB +24VD5 (IH) 12 9
Download jig (LGC)

27 A28 AD[22] 24 24 AD[25] 24 NC DQS2 25 117 DQ21 17 17 HDD B1 1 11 SG
23 23 +5.1VA 23 23 CEP1RST-0 A[1] 23 23 DD15 22 22 CS2-0 PG CN456 11 10 PWA-F-LDR
28 A29 AD[20] 25 25 +3.3VA 25 NC SG 26 118 A11 18 18 (HDD) 12 WRAPC
24 24 AG 24 24 +5.1VB A[3] 24 24 SG 23 23 A[1] J582 IH1ON 10 11 (LDR)
29 A30 SG 26 26 C/BE[3] 26 +3.3VA A9 27 119 DM2 19 19 1 A9 A5 A9 SHDWN
25 25 +5VA 25 25 SG A[5] 25 25 NC(KEY) 24 24 A[3] +5.1VB SG 9 12
30 A31 AD[18] 27 27 AD[23] 27 /WE DQ18 28 120 VDD 20 20 A12 1 2 A10 A4 A10 SG
26 26 -12VB 26 26 CEPCLK A[7] 26 26 MDARQ 25 25 A[5] SG IHDUTY 8 13
31 A32 AD[16] 28 28 SG 28 DQMB0 A7 29 121 DQ22 CN110 21 21 A11 2 3 A11 A3 A11 +5.1VD
27 27 AG 27 27 SG A[9] 27 27 SG 26 26 A[7] FDMON H1ERR1 7 14
32 A33 +3.3VA 29 29 AD[21] 29 DQMB1 VDD 30 122 A8 TXD+ 1 22 22 A10 3 4 A12 A2 A12 +5.1VD
28 28 +12VB 28 28 D[0] A[11] 28 28 /DIOW 27 27 A[9] FDMCK H1ERR2 6 15
33 A34 FRAME# 30 30 AD[19] 30 /CS0 DQ19 31 123 DQ23 TXD- 2 23 23 A9 4 5 A13 A1 A13 SG
29 29 +24VB 29 29 D[2] A[13] 29 29 SG 28 28 A[11] FDMCW 5 16
34 A35 SG 31 31 +3.3VA 31 NC A5 32 124 SG RXIN+ 3 24 24 A8 5 +5.1VB
LAN connector 30 30 PG 30 30 D[4] A[15] 30 30 /DIOR 29 29 A[13] FDMPL TRSP-MOT 4 17
35 A36 TRDY# 32 32 AD[17] 32 SG DQ24 33 125 A6 GND 4 25 25 A7 6 M BEAMDT
(10BASE-T/ 31 31 D[6] A[17] 31 31 SG 30 30 A[15] FDMGA (M9) 3 18
36 A37 SG 33 33 C/BE[2] 33 A0 SG 34 126 DQ28 GND 5 26 26 A6 7 SG
100BASE-TX) 32 32 D[8] ROMDET0-0 32 32 IORDY 31 31 A[17] PG 2 19
37 A38 STOP# 34 34 SG 34 A2 DQ25 35 127 DQ29 RXIN- 6 CN9 or CN4 27 27 A5 8 Fuser J635 SG
33 33 D[10] +5.1VB 33 33 SG 32 32 ROMDT-0 PG +5VSW +5VSW 1 20
38 A39 +3.3VA 35 35 IRDY 35 A4 DQS3 36 128 VDD GND 7 CN502 28 28 A4 9 1 13 B1 B13 B1
34 34 D[12] LEDDL-0 34 34 /DMACK 33 33 +5.1VB +24VD1 STHU- STH-
39 A40 RESERVED 36 36 +3.3VA 36 A6 A4 37 129 DM3 GND 8 1 1 TXB 29 29 A3 10 THMS-SUB-FBLT 2 12 B2 B12 B2
35 35 D[14] SG 34 34 ROMLD-1 +24VD1 STHU+ STH+
40 A41 RESERVED 37 37 DEVSEL 37 A8 VDD 38 130 A3 2 2 RXIN 30 30 A2 11 (THM3) 3 11 B3 B11 B3
36 36 SG CN701 CN101 INTRQ NC SSTH- ETH-
A42 SG 38 38 SG 38 A10 DQ26 39 131 DQ30 3 3 CML 31 31 A1 THMS-EDGE-FBLT 4 10 B4 B10 B4 J666
37 37 MOD2DET-0 +5.1VB RESERVED SSTH+ ETH+
A43 PAR 39 39 LOCK 39 BA1 DQ27 40 132 SG 4 4 LD 1 1 32 32 (THM1) 5 9 B5 B9 B5 3 1 CCL-MOT
38 38 SG DA1 DA1 Option THMU- MTH- M
A A44 AD[15] 40 40 PERR 40 +3.3VA A2 41 133 DQ31 CN115 5 5 ER/HK 2 2 33 33 J510 THMS-MAIN-FBLT 6 8 B6 B8 B6 2 2 (M13)
39 39 DREQC2-1 +5.1VB /PDIAG NC THMU+ MTH+ NC NC
A45 +3.3VA 41 41 +3.3VA 41 +3.3VA SG 42 134 CB4 VBUS 1 6 6 ATT3DB 3 3 34 34 1 (THM2) 7 7 B7 B7 B7 J674 J665 1 3
40 40 DACKC2-0 DD0 DA0 CN353 NC NC NC NC CN339
A46 AD[13] 42 42 SERR 42 CLK0 A1 43 135 CB5 D- 2 USB connector 7 7 RLADJ1 4 4 35 35 2 8 6 B8 B6 B8 6 1 6 1 J667
41 41 RXIN2 +5.1VB DA2 PG NC NC NC CLMCCW
C A47 AD[11] 43 43 +3.3VA 43 SG CB0 44 136 VDD D+ 3 (Device) 8 8 RLADJ2 5 5 36 36 1 3 9 5 B9 B5 B9 26 5 2 5 2 2 CCL-R-POS-SW C
42 42 AG DD3 /CS0 +24VD1 FUSSW FUSSW NC
A48 SG 44 44 C/BE[1] 44 NC CB1 45 137 CK0 SG 4 9 9 RGCLK 6 6 37 37 2 4 10 4 B10 B4 B10 25 4 3 4 3 1 (S26)
43 43 -12VB +5.1VB /CS1 GASOL SG SG CLMCW
MODEM board
A49 AD[09] 45 45 AD[14] 45 /CS2 VDD 46 138 /CK0 10 10 AG 7 7 38 38 3 5 3 11 3 B11 B3 B11 24 3 4 3 4 J668
44 44 AG DD6 /DASP NC NC EXIT-SNR EXTSW EXTSW SG
A50 SG 46 46 SG 46 DQMB2 DQS8 47 139 SG 11 11 -12VB 8 8 39 39 4 6 2 12 2 B12 B2 B12 23 2 5 2 5 2 CCL-F-POS-SW
45 45 MD2INT-1 +5.1VB SG RLTRS (S40) +5.1VB +5.1VB SG
A51 SG 47 47 AD[12] 47 DQMB3 A0 48 140 DMB 12 12 AG 9 9 40 40 5 7 Job separator / 1 13 1 B13 B1 B13 22 1 6 1 6 1 (S25)
MOD2CS-0 DD9 RLCSW SW1
DDR DIMM
46 46
A52 C/BE[0]# 48 48 AD[10] 48 NC CB2 49 141 A10 CN111 13 13 +12VB 10 10 6 8 Offset tray / 21 J550
47 47 MOD2RST-0 SG NC NC SW2
A53 +3.3VA 49 49 M66EN 49 +3.3VA SG 50 142 CB6 VBUS0 1 14 14 NC 11 11 Standard 7 9 Bridge unit 20 1 1 K-DEV-LIFT-CLT
48 48 SG DD12 A RLCNT CN332 +24VD1
A54 AD[06] 50 50 SG 50 NC CB3 51 143 VDD D- 2 15 15 16Hz 12 12 8 10 19 2 2 (CLT11)
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG CN113 JSPSW NC +5.1VB
A55 AD[04] 51 51 AD[8] 51 NC BA1 52 144 CB7 D+ 3 16 16 AG 13 13 CN357 9 11 J512 A1 18 J520 J574
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG SG SG SG/CPSW2 SG CLKDVP
A56 SG 52 52 AD[7] 52 NC DQ32 53 145 SG SG 4 USB connector 17 17 CI 14 14 A1 A30 10 12 10 1 A2 17 1 3 1
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG MCNT RLHSW NC NC NC USTFL USD-TNR-FLL-SNR
A57 AD[02] 53 53 +3.3VA 53 NC VDD 54 146 DQ36 VBUS1 5 (Host) 18 18 ANSDET 15 15 A2 A29 11 13 J579 9 2 A3 16 2 2 2
52 52 A[18] SG IDTA0 +5.1VB DVCTNR DRCLB (S20)
AD[5]
NCU board [Line2]

A58 AD[00] 54 54 54 SG DQ33 55 147 DQ37 D- 6 19 19 REVA 16 16 A3 A28 12 14 4 8 3 A4 15 3 1 3
53 53 A[17] SG IDTA1 RLC2S AG SG
A59 +3.3VA 55 55 AD[3] 55 DQ16 DQS4 56 148 VDD D+ 7 20 20 REVB 17 17 A4 A27 13 15 COLR-ATTNR-SNR 3 7 4 A5 14 J536
54 54 A[15] SG IDTA2 DVTNALD BMDRCB
A60 REQ64# 56 56 SG 56 DQ17 DQ34 57 149 DM4 SG 8 21 21 NC 18 18 A5 A26 (S10) 2 6 5 A6 13 1 1 DRM-CLN-MOT
55 55 A[13] +3.3VB IDTA3 +5.1VB M
A61 +5.1VA 57 57 AD[1] 57 DQ18 SG 58 150 DQ38 22 22 NC 19 19 A6 A25 1 5 6 A7 2 2 (M8)
56 56 A[11] INTRQ SG SLDVTNA
A62 +5.1VA 58 58 +3.3VA 58 DQ19 BA0 59 151 DQ39 23 23 +5.1VA 20 20 A7 A24 J580 4 7 A8 J558
57 57 A[9] +3.3VB IDTA4 CN356 CN480 +24VD1
B1 -12VA 59 59 +5.1VA 59 +3.3VA DQ35 60 152 SG 24 24 AG 21 21 A8 A23 ATTNR- 3 3 3 8 A9 1 1 CST-U-TR-H-CLT
58 58 A[7] +5.1VA IDTA5 HVCLK SLDVTNB
PCI slot
B2 TCK 60 60 SG 60 DQ20 DQ40 61 153 DQ44 CN112 25 25 +5VA 22 22 A9 A22 1 19 SHUT-SOL 2 2 2 9 A10 2 2 (CLT14)
59 59 A[5] -12VB IDTA6 CCON CN481 J615 (SOL1) CKSLS
B3 SG 61 61 +3.3VA 61 NC VDD 62 154 /RAS VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 A10 A21 2 18 1 1 1 10 A11 J557
60 60 A[3] SG IDTA7 GVR 1 1 Main charger wire bias
B4 TDO 62 62 +3.3VA 62 NC /WE 63 155 DQ45 D- 2 27 27 AG 24 24 A11 A20 3 17 J669 1 1 CST-U-TR-L-CLT
61 61 A[1] +12VB SG CDVDON STFAN
B5 +5.1VA 63 63 +3.3VA 63 CKE1 DQ41 64 156 VDD D+ 3 28 28 +12VB 25 25 A12 A19 4 16 CN482 J616 INTRNL-FAN-MOT 2 2 B1 2 2 (CLT13)
Internal 62 62 CPURST-0 DA0 IDTA8 CDVAON M (M20)
+24VD2
CN2 B6 +5.1VA 64 64 SG 64 SG /CAS 65 157 /CS0 SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 A13 A18 5 15 1 1 Main charger grid bias 1 1 B2 J526
USB connector 63 63 CEP2INT-1 DA2 IDTA9 CDVVR
1 BUSY B7 INTB# 65 65 +12VA 65 DQ21 SG 66 158 /CS1 VBUS1 5 30 30 NC 27 27 A14 A17 6 14 J529 1 1 RGST-CLT
(for Data overwrite kit) 64 64 +5.1VB IDECS IDTA10 KDVDON CN483 J611 +24VD1 +24VD1
2 SELECT B8 INTD# 66 66 +12VA 66 DQ22 DQ55 67 159 DMS D- 6 28 28 A15 A16 7 13 TRBLT-CLN-CLT 1 1 B3 12 2 2 (CLT12)
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 IDTA11 KDVAON 1 1 Developer bias (color) CLBUCP +24VD1
3 NACK B9 PRSNT1# 67 67 +5.1VA 67 DQ23 DQ42 68 160 SG D+ 7 29 29 A16 A15 8 12 (CLT1) 2 2 B4 11
66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 SG KDVVR CLMFCU
4 NFAULT B10 RESERVED 68 68 +5.1VA 68 SG DQ43 69 161 DQ46 SG 8 CN503 30 30 A17 A14 9 11 CN484 J612 J514 J641 10
67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 IDTA12 TC1ON PS-HVT SG CLKDVR
5 PEERR B11 PRSNT2# 69 69 +3.3VA 69 DQ24 VDD 70 162 DQ47 + 31 31 A18 A13 10 10 1 1 Developer bias (black) 3 4 1 B5 9
1 68 68 D[1] DD5 IDTA13 TC1VR (HVT) COLR-TNR-SNR CTNR +24VD1
D 6 DATA[0] 70 70 OPBINT(1) 70 DQ25 NC 71 163 NC - 32 32 A19 A12 11 9 2 3 2 B6 8 D
2 69 69 D[3] DD7 IDTA14 TC2ON CN485 J613 (S9) +5.1VB +24VD1
7 DATA[1] 71 71 +3.3VA 71 DQ26 DQ48 72 164 VDD 33 33 A20 A11 12 8 1 2 3 B7 7 J617 J551
70 70 D[5] DD8 IDTA15 TC2VR 1 1 Transfer bias (1st) NC NC NC CLMFDH
8 DATA[2] B14 RESERVED 72 72 PCIRST 72 DQ27 DQ49 73 165 DQS2 34 34 A21 A10 13 7 1 4 B8 6 6 1 1 1 K-DEV-CLT
71 71 D[7] DD10 SG ECON NC CLCDVR
9 DATA[3] B15 SG 73 73 +3.3VA 73 +3.3VA SG 74 166 DQS3 Speaker 35 35 A22 A9 14 6 CN486 J610 B9 5 5 2 2 2 (CLT10)
CN401 72 72 D[9] DD11 IPOS0 HVTSTS NC +24VD1
10 DATA[4] B16 CLK 74 74 PCICLK(4) 74 DQ28 /CK2 75 167 NC 36 36 A23 A8 15 5 1 1 Transfer bias (2nd) B10 4 4 3 J549
NC 73 73 D[11] DD13 IPOS1 +24VD1 NC +24VD1
11 DATA[5] B17 SG 75 75 +3.3VA 75 DQ29 CK2 76 168 VDD 1 37 37 A24 A7 16 4 B11 3 3 4 1 1 COLR-DEV-CLT
+12VB 74 74 D[13] DD14 IPOS2 PG CN487 J614 CLRGST
12 DATA[6] B18 REQ# 76 76 GNT(1) 76 DQ30 VDD 77 169 DM6 2 38 38 A25 A6 17 3 2 2 5 2 2 (CLT9)
-12VB 75 75 D[15] DD15 IPOS3 TC1MON 1 1 Cleaning blade bias CLCTNS
13 DATA[7] B19 +3.3VA 77 77 GNT(0) 77 DQ31 DQS6 78 170 DQS4 3 39 39 A26 A5 18 2 1 1 6 J538
CN812 NC 76 76 +5.1VB /DIOR +3.3VB TC1LV CN333
14 NINIT B20 AD[31] 78 78 SG 78 SG DQ50 79 171 DQS5 4 40 40 A27 A4 19 1 J589 J522 1 1 COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT
NC 77 77 +5.1VB /DIOW CCODE0 FAN1
15 NSTROB B21 AD[29] 79 79 PME 79 CLK2 DQ51 80 172 VDD 4 5 41 41 A28 A3 LSU-FAN-MOT 2 2 A1 A17 A1 2 2 (CLT8)
NC 78 78 CEP2CS-0 /DMACK CCODE1 M +24VD1
16 NSELIN B22 SG 80 80 AD[30] 80 NC SG 81 173 NC 3 6 42 42 A29 A2 (M16) 1 1 A2 A16 A2
AG 79 79 DREQD2-1 /DLDCS0 SG J567 J517-1
17 NAUTDF B23 AD[27] 81 81 +3.3VA 81 NC(WP) VDD-ID 82 174 DQ60 CN810 2 7 43 43 A30 A1 J621 J521
+12VB SG 80 80 DACKD2-0 /RESET SG TEMPS CN341 NC NC
18 HLH B24 AD[25] 82 82 AD[28] 82 SDA DQ56 83 175 DQ61 1 1 8 44 44 B1 B30 4 A3 A15 A3 6 1 2 2 CST-U-FEED-CLT
PG FAX DMARQ MMPI1 SG CLFED1
19 SG B25 +3.3VA 83 83 AD[26] 83 SCL DQ57 84 176 SG power relay 45 45 B2 B29 TEMP/HUMI-SNR 3 A4 A14 A4 B17 5 2 1 1 (CLT2)
2 NC +5.1VB HUMIS +24VD1
20 SG B26 C/BE[3]# 84 84 SG 84 +3.3VA VDD 85 177 DM7 NC board 46 46 B3 B28 (S19) 2 A5 A13 A5 B16 4 3 J620
3 CN811 CN702
1st
FXWUP CBSY +5.1VB SG

21 SG B27 AD[23] 85 85 AD[24] SG DQS7 86 178 DQ62 +24V 47 47 B4 B27 J584 1 A6 A12 A6 B15 3 4 3
DIMM [1]
85
drawer
05/11
1 1 SG CMD CN344 Option +5.1VB CUFLS NEMP-U-SNR
22 SG B28 SG 86 86 +3.3VA DQ32 DQ58 87 179 DQ63 PG 48 48 B5 B26 2 J661 A7 A11 A7 B14 2 5 2
DIMM [0]
86
Parallel interface kit

2 2 FAX board SG SACK LCCNT NC USTFL2 +5.1VB (S31)
23 SG B29 AD[21] 87 87 +3.3VA 87 DQ33 DQ59 88 180 VDD NC NC 49 49 B6 B25 28 4 1 A8 A10 A8 B13 1 6 1
PC interface (IEEE1284)
3 3 NC NC SERR SCSWB SG
24 SG To Slot [0] or [1] B30 AD[19] 88 88 AD[22] 88 DQ34 SG 89 181 SA0 50 50 B7 B24 27 6 Not used 2 A9 A9 A9 J519
JPD model only SBSY RETS7
25 SG B31 +3.3VA 89 89 AD[20] 89 DQ35 NC 90 182 SA1 B8 B23 26 8 3 J569 J516-2 1
STS RETS6 DRTMP+ +5.1VB CST-L-TRY-SNR
26 SG B32 AD[17] 90 90 SG 90 +3.3VA SDA 91 183 SA2 B9 B22 25 10 A10 A8 A10 B12 1 7 2
CACK RETS5 DRTMP- CLTOP (S28)
27 SG B33 C/BE[2]# 91 91 AD[18] 91 DQ36 SCL 92 184 VDD-SPD B10 B21 24 12 J636 A11 A7 A11 B11 2 6 3
CERR RETS4 ATSDET SG
28 SG B34 SG 92 92 AD[16] 92 DQ37 B11 B20 23 14 J576 1 6 A12 A6 A12 B10 3 5 J518
2nd
CN20 CN19 SG RETS3 PG +5.1VB

drawer
29 SG B35 IRDY# 93 93 +3.3VA 93 DQ38 SG CN16 J47 CN12 B12 B19 22 16 4 2 5 A13 A5 A13 B9 4 4 1
1 1 +5VAPS PEFCLK-M RETS2 ATS CLEMP EMP-L-SNR
30 SG B36 +3.3VA 94 94 FRAME 94 DQ39 SG MDT[0] 1 1 3 1 B13 B18 21 18 K-ATTNR-SNR 3 3 4 A14 A4 A14 B8 5 3 2
2 2 APS-R APSR-0A SG RETS1 +24VD1 SG (S30)
31 SG B37 DEVSEL# 95 95 SG 95 DQ40 +3.3VA MDT[2] 2 2 2 2 B14 B17 20 20 (S13) 2 4 3 A15 A3 A15 B7 6 2 3
3 3 (S5) SG CN18 CN100 IRCLK1 RETS0 ATSVR SG NC NC
32 SG B38 SG 96 96 TRDY 96 SG +3.3VA MDT[4] 3 3 1 3 B15 B16 19 22 1 5 2 A16 A2 A16 B6 7 1 J553
4 4 +3.3VB SG SIZE3 SG CUSW
E 33 SG B39 LOCK# 97 97 SG 97 DQ41 +3.3VA MDT[6] 4 4 J46 B20 B20 B16 B15 18 24 6 1 A17 A1 A17 B5 1 CST-U-SW E
5 5 +5VAPS SRXD-1 IVSYNC0 SIZE2 SG
1st
34 SG B40 PERR# 98 98 STOP 98 DQ42 +3.3VA MRD-0A 5 5 3 4 B19 B19 B17 B14 17 26 J596 B4 2 (S33)
drawer
6 6 APS-C APSC-0A STXD-1A SG SIZE1 CLSW

35 SG B41 +3.3VA 99 99 +3.3VA 99 DQ43 CN119 CN119 SG DLAD[0] 6 6 2 5 B18 B18 B18 B13 16 28 LP-ERS 2 J554 B3
7 7 (S4) SG MMPIO-1 INSYNC0 SIZE0 +24VD1 NC J552
36 PLH B42 SERR# 100 100 +3.3VA 100 DQ44 NC DLAD[2] 7 7 1 6 B17 B17 B19 B12 15 30 (ERS) 1 1 10 B1 B17 B1 B2
8 8 SCTS-0 SG SG PFP/LCF ERSLP NC 1 CST-L-SW
B43 +3.3VA 101 101 SG 101 DQ45 TIP 1 63 +3.3VA BDI[9] MAD[4] 8 8 J45 B16 B16 B20 B11 14 29 J539 2 9 B2 B16 B2 B1
2nd
9 9 +5VAPS SRTS-0A IDCLK +5.1VB +5.1VB 2 (S34)

drawer
B44 C/BE[1]# 102 102 SG 102 +3.3VA RING 2 64 FRAME BDI[8] MAD[6] 9 9 3 7 B15 B15 B21 B10 13 27 1 3 8 B3 B15 B3
10 10 APS3 APS3-0A SYSRST-0 SG PFRST K-DEV-POS-SNR BLK J568 J516-1
B45 AD[14] 103 103 PAR 103 DQ46 BPMJ-3 3 65 CLKRUN BDI[7] MAD[8] 10 10 2 8 B14 B14 B22 B9 12 25 2 4 7 B4 B14 B4 J518
11 11 (S3) SG SYSCNT-0 IHDEN0 DRV0 (S11) SG NC NC
B46 SG 104 104 AD[15] 104 DQ47 BPMJ-1 4 66 TRDY BDI[6] MAD[10] 11 11 1 9 B13 B13 B23 B8 11 23 3 5 6 B5 B13 B5 7 1 3
12 12 SG SG DRV1 +5.1VB SG EMP-U-SNR
B47 AD[12] 105 105 +3.3VA 105 NC BPMJ-6 5 67 SERR BDI[5] MAD[12] 12 12 J44 B12 B12 B24 B7 10 21 J537 6 5 B6 B12 B6 A17 6 2 2
13 13 +5VAPS VSYNC+ IVDEN0 DRV2 KDS CUEMP (S29)
B48 AD[10] 106 106 AD[13] 106 NC BPMJ-2 6 68 STOP BDI[4] MAD[14] 13 13 3 10 B11 B11 B25 B6 9 19 1 7 4 B7 B11 B7 A16 5 3 1
14 14 APS2 APS2-0A PHSYNC- SG DRV3 K-DEV-TIM-SNR SG +5.1VB
B49 M66EN 107 107 AD[11] 107 SG BPMJ-7 7 69 SG BDI[3] MAD[16] 14 14 2 11 B10 B10 B26 B5 8 17 2 8 3 B8 B10 B8 A15 4 4 J519
15 15 (S2) SG SG NC(RESERVE1) DRV4 (S12) SG
B50 SG 108 108 SG 108 NC BPMJ-4 8 70 +3.3VA BDI[2] MAD[18] 15 15 1 12 B9 B9 B27 B4 7 15 3 9 2 A14 3 5 3
1st drawer
16 16 MSRCKOUT+ RESERVE2 DRV5 CUTOP CST-U-TRY-SNR

B51 SG 109 109 AD[9] 109 NC BPMJ-8 9 71 PERR BDI[1] SG 16 16 B8 B8 B28 B3 6 13 J638 10 1 A13 2 6 2
17 17 TXOUT0- ARST0 DRV6 J649 +5.1VB (S27)
B52 AD[08] 110 110 SG 110 +3.3VA BPMJ-5 10 72 DEVSEL BDI[0] SG 17 17 J43 B7 B7 B29 B2 5 11 THMS-DRM 1 A12 1 7 1
18 18 +5VAPS SG SG DRV7 PG
B53 AD[07] 111 111 C/BE[0] 111 /CAS LED1 GRNP 11 73 C/BE[1] SG MDT[1] 18 18 3 13 B6 B6 B30 B1 4 9 4 (THM4) 2 J620
19 19 APS1 APS1-0A TXOUT1+ SCSWC PG
B54 +3.3VA 112 112 +3.3VA 112 DQMB4 LED2 YELP 12 74 SG SG MDT[3] 19 19 2 14 B5 B5 3 7 3 J575 J637 J570 J517-1 1
20 20 (S1) SG TXOUT2- CLKB 24VD1 +5.1VB +5.1VB NEMP-L-SNR
B55 AD[05] 113 113 AD[6] 113 DQMB5 ENABLE/DISABLE 13 75 AD[14] GDI[9] MDT[5] 20 20 1 15 B4 B4 2 5 2 3 8 1 B9 B9 B9 A11 1 6 2
21 21 NC SG CN117 CN464 CLKC 24VD1 TRBLT-HP-SNR1 MARKS CLFLS (S32)
B56 AD[03] 114 114 AD[4] 114 /CS1 LED2 YELN 14 76 AD[15] GDI[8] MDT[7] 21 21 16 B3 B3 1 3 1 2 7 2 B10 B8 B10 A10 2 5 3
Download jig (SLG)

22 22 A4 series only SDCLKOUT+ PWRDN NC (S15) SG SG
B57 SG 115 115 SG 115 /RAS CHSCND 15 77 SG GDI[7] CSO2-0 22 22 B2 B2 24 1 1 1 6 3 B11 B7 B11 A9 3 4 J521
23 23 TXOUT3- PWREN BMBCOR +24VD1
2nd drawer
B58 AD[01] 116 116 AD[2] 116 SG RSV 16 78 AD[13] GDI[6] DLAD[1] 23 23 B1 B1 23 2 J530 B12 B6 B12 A8 4 3 1 1 CST-L-FEED-CLT
24 24 NC SG +24VD1 CLFED2
B59 +3.3VA 117 117 AD[0] 117 A1 INTB 17 79 AD[12] GDI[5] DLAD[3] 24 24 A20 A20 22 3 CN466 CN346 BELT-CLN-MOT 1 5 4 B13 B5 B13 A7 5 2 2 2 (CLT3)
25 25 CN13 NC +12VB M +5.1VB NC NC
B60 ACK64# 118 118 +3.3VA 118 A3 +5.1VA 18 80 AD[11] GDI[4] MAD[5] 25 25 J49 A19 A19 21 4 +5.1VB (M2) 2 4 5 B14 B4 B14 6 1 J571
26 26 +5.1VB SG SG 1 1 MARKL TUP2
B61 +5.1VA 119 119 +5.1VA 119 A5 +3.3VA 19 81 AD[10] GDI[3] MAD[7] 26 26 1 8 A18 A18 20 5 SG J659 B15 B3 B15 A6 2 TRY-MOT
27 27 HOME-SNR HOME-1A SG +12VA 2 2 SG TUP1 M
B62 +5.1VA 120 120 +5.1VA 120 A7 INTA 20 82 SG GDI[2] MAD[9] 27 27 2 7 A17 A17 19 6 +3.3VB 3 3 6 B16 B2 B16 A5 1 (M10)
28 28 (S6) SG SG SG 3 3 CN331 TRBLT-HP-SNR2 NC NC NC +24VD1
121 A9 RSV 21 83 SG GDI[1] MAD[11] 28 28 3 6 A16 A16 18 7 SG J645 J513 2 2 7 B17 B1 B17 A4 J618 J573
29 29 SG SG 4 4 SG (S16) CLMFCL
122 A11 RSV 22 84 AD[09] GDI[0] MAD[13] 29 29 A15 A15 17 8 PWRFNL B13 3 1 3 1 1 8 A3 4 1 1 1 CST-L-TR-H-CLT
30 30 NC +3.3VA 5 5 RVLHP REVLV-HP-SNR +24VD1
123 BA0 SG 23 85 AD[08] SG MAD[15] 30 30 J50 A14 A14 16 9 SG B12 2 2 2 A2 3 2 2 2 (CLT16)
F 31 31 +5.1VB SCNT-1 +3.3VA 6 6 +5.1VB (S8) CLMFDL F
124 +3.3VA +3.3VA 24 86 C/BE[0] SG MAD[17] 31 31 1 5 A13 A13 15 10 PDWN B11 1 3 1 A1 2 3 J572
32 32 PLTN-SNR PLTN-1A VSYNC- SG 7 7
125 CLK1 CLK 25 87 AD[07] RDI[9] ROMDT-0 32 32 2 4 A12 A12 14 11 PWRFNH Automatic duplexing unit 1 4 1 1 CST-L-TR-L-CLT
J423 J427 J526 J527 J523 CN103 33 33 (S7) SG SG +3.3VA 8 8 J434
126 A12 RST 26 88 +3.3VA RDI[8] +5.1VB 33 33 3 3 A11 A11 13 12 NC +5.1VB J564 2 2 (CLT15)
CCFL+ XSCL-1A 34 34 PHSYNC+ SG 9 9 B10 B1
1 A15 A1 A15 1 127 SG SG 27 89 +3.3VA RDI[7] LED-0 34 34 A10 A10 12 13 SG EEPCLK ADU-CLT 2 2 FG FG
LP-1A 35 35 MSRCKOUT- SG 10 10 B9 B2 CN435
2 A14 A2 A14 2 128 CKE +3.3VA 28 90 AD[05] RDI[6] A9 A9 11 14 +5.1VD EEPCS J587 (CLT7) 1 1 JPD model only
CCFL- WF-1A 36 36 SG +3.3VB 11 B8 B3 +24VD2 CN213 J675
LCD back light

3 A13 A3 A13 3 129 /CS3 REQ 29 91 AD[06] RDI[5] J55 A8 A8 10 15 NC SG 1 1 J312
YD-1A 37 37 FANSLG TXOUT0+ +3.3VB 12 B7 B4 RVMA SG 3
A12 A4 A12 4 130 DQMB6 GNT 30 92 AD[04] RDI[4] SCAN-FAN-MOT 2 2 2 A7 A7 9 16 NC EXTC1 2 2 3 1 CLING-SNR
J422 INVGND 38 38 M +24VD4 TXOUT1- SG 13 B6 B5 RVMC ADU-TRL-SNR ADUFL 2
A11 A5 A11 5 131 DQMB7 +3.3VA 31 93 RSV RDI[3] (M15) 1 1 1 A6 A6 8 17 AG CN350 EXTMC 3 3 REVLV-MOT 2 2 (S45)
YD BZON-0A 39 39 SG SG 14 B5 B6 RVMD M (S39) +5.1VB J639 J525 1
1 A10 A6 A10 6 132 A13 SG 32 94 AD[02] RDI[2] A5 A5 7 18 NC EXTMA 4 4 (M12) 1 3
XL CPPOW-1A 40 40 TXOUT2+ SG 15 2 B4 B7 RVMB 1 8 1 8
2 A9 A7 A9 7 133 +3.3VA AD[31] 33 95 AD[03] RDI[1] A4 A4 6 19 +12VB SG 5 5 J592 CN214 CN338
XR LDCLK-1A 41 41 J30 CN15 SDCLKOUT0- +5.1VB 16 1 B3 B8 +24VD2 SG CN340 2 7 2 7 J559
(CCD)
3 A8 A8 A8 8 134 NC PME 34 96 AD[00] RDI(0) A3 A3 5 20 RVMPHC 6 6 3 1 J544 SG
YU LDDAT-1A 42 42 SCNM-BB SG +5.1VA B2 B9 ADUFU ADUCL B20 3 6 3 6 1 1 2TR-CONT-CLT
4 A7 A9 A7 9 135 NC AD[29] 35 97 +5.1VA SCLK-0 1 1 1 A2 A2 4 21 RVMPHA ADU-TRU-SNR 17 1 B17 CUPE1
2 2
Touch panel
PWA-F-CCD
LDLTH-1A 43 43 +24VD4 TXOUT3+ +5.1VA B1 B10 +24VD1 B19 4 5 4 5 2 2 (CLT5)
Wireless LAN module

A6 A10 A6 10 136 NC RSV 36 98 RSV WIP SDO-0 2 2 2 A1 A1 3 22 (S38) +5.1VB CN211 16 2 B16 +5.1VB
J424 RVMPHB 1 3
LDON1-0A 44 44 SCNM-B +5.1VA A13 A1 ADCOV B18 5 4 5 4 J561
FRAWE A5 A11 A5 11 137 NC SG 37 99 AD[01] CEBLUE-0 SCAN-MOT 3 3 3 2 23 RVMPHD CN215 1 15 3 B15 NC
1 LDON0-0A 45 45 M SCNM-AB +5.1VA A12 A2 CN437 J594 ADTRT B17 6 3 6 3 1
LOAD A4 A12 A4 12 138 SG AD[30] 38 100 RSV WIP SCLK-0 (M1) 4 4 4 1 24 RVMC1 J588 +24VD1 2 14 4 B14 NC TR2-POS-SNR
2 SG 46 46 +24VD4 A11 A3 EXTMC 2 1 ADCNT B16 7 2 7 2 2
CP A3 A13 A3 13 139 DQ48 AD[27] 39 101 SG SDO-0 5 5 5 CN10 SG 1 1 FDMA 3 13 5 B13 NC (S18)
3 +5.1VA 47 47 SCNM-A A10 A4 +24VD2 3 2 SG B15 8 1 8 1 3
SG A2 A14 A2 14 140 DQ49 +3.3VA 40 102 SG CEGREEN-0 6 6 6 CN465 CN335 EXTMD 2 2 FDMB 4 12 6 B12 +24VD1
4 +5.1VA 48 48 1 A9 A5 PWA-F-DRV EXTMA ADU-MOT 4 3 PWA-F-ADU +5.1VB B14 J534
+5.1VA A1 A15 A1 15 141 DQ50 AD[25] 41 103 AC SYNC SCLK-0 J40 CN467 +24VD1 EXTMB 3 3 EXIT-MOT M FDMC 5 11 7 B11 CLTRP NC
5 +5.1VA 49 49 2 1 1 A8 A6 (DRV) EXTMB M (M5) 1 4 (ADU) ADTR2 B13 J640 3
SG B15 B1 B15 16 142 DQ51 AD[28] 42 104 M66EN SDO-0 SG +24VD1 +5VSW 4 4 (M7) FDMD 6 10 8 B10 +5.1VB TNR-MOT
6 +5.1VA 50 50 LP-EXPO CN1 CN21 3 22 22 24 2 2 A7 A7 +24VD2 6 5 CRTDOWN B12 1 4 2 M
VEE B14 B2 B14 17 143 +3.3VA RSV 43 105 AC SDATA IN CERED-0 CN2 SG PG EEPDOUT 5 5 +24VD1 7 9 9 B9 PSTRPD (M3)
7 CPRST-0A 51 51 (EXP) PG 4 21 21 23 3 3 A6 A8 EXTMD 5 6 ADM2A B11 2 3 1
LCD
(LCD)
D.OFF B13 B3 B13 18 144 DQ52 AD[26] 44 106 AC SDATA OUT SHD-0 LAMP 1 1 +5.1VB PG EEPDIN 6 6 8 8 10 B8 SG
8 SG 52 52 1 PG 5 20 20 22 4 4 A5 A9 CN216 ADM2C B10 3 2 J532
D0 B12 B4 B12 19 145 NC C/BE[3] 45 107 AC BIT CLK SHP-0 NC 2 2 +5.1VB +24VD2 SG 9 7 11 B7 KTNR1B
9 RTS0-0A 53 53 2 INV-EXP LMPON-0A 6 19 19 21 5 A4 A10 1 ADM2B B9 4 1 1 K-TNR-SW
D1 B11 B5 B11 20 146 NC AD[24] 46 108 AC CODEC ID0 BLKCLP-0 NC 3 3 SG +24VD2 NC 10 6 12 B6 KTNR1A
10 CTS0-0A 54 54 3 (INV) +24VD4 7 18 18 20 6 A3 2 ADM2D B8 2 (S14)
D2 B10 B6 B10 21 147 NC AD[23] 47 109 AC CODEC ID1 ACLP-0 LANP 4 4 SG PG NC 11 5 13 B5 KTNDET
11 SOUT[0] 55 55 4 FG 8 17 17 19 PS-ACC 7 A2 NC 3 +24VD1 B7 J528
D3 B9 B7 B9 22 148 SG IDSEL 48 110 AC RESET ADCLK-1 5 5 +3.3VB PG NC CN212 4 14 B4 SG
12 SIN[0] 56 56 9 16 16 18 (PS) 8 A1 4 +24VD1 B6 J565 1 SIDE-COV-SW
B8 B8 B8 23 149 DQ53 SG 49 111 MOD AUDIO MON SG +3.3VB 1 3 15 B3 SG
SG 57 57 10 15 15 17 5 PG B5 1 5 2 (S44)
B7 B9 B7 24 150 DQ54 SG 50 112 RSV SG NC CN469 CN436 2 2 16 B2 SDCSW
G J429 J426 UD3-1A 58 58 11 16 J593 CN217 PG B4 2 4 J566 G
B6 B10 B6 25 151 DQ55 AD[21] 51 113 AUDIO GND +5.1VB NC +24VD1 +24VD2 COVSW 3 1 17 B1 +5.1VB
SCN15 UD2-1A 59 59 12 15 1 1 2 1 B3 3 3 1
1 1 B5 B11 B5 26 152 SG AD[22] 52 114 SG +5.1VB PWA-F-SLG +24VD4 +24VD1 +24VD2 ADU-SET-SW 4 CTLFED FED-L-SNR
SCN14 UD1-1A 60 60 13 14 14 14 2 2 SG B2 4 2 2
2 2 B4 B12 B4 27 153 DQ56 AD[19] 53 115 SYS AUDIO OUT +5.1VB PG PG (S37) 1 2 SG (S24)
(SLG) PG
SCN13 UD0-1A 61 61 14 13 13 13 3 3 B1 5 1 3
3 3 B3 B13 B3 28 154 DQ57 AD[20] 54 116 SYS AUDIO IN SG +24VD4 PG PG
(DSP)
SCN12 SG 62 62 12 12 12 4 4 J527 J556
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4 4 B2 B14 B2 29 155 DQ58 SG 55 117 SYS AUDIO OUT GND SG PG +5.1VB NC +5.1VB
SCN11 LCDEN-1A 63 63 11 11 11 5 5 Bypass unit J545 A20 1 6 1
PWA-F-DSP
5 5 B1 B15 B1 30 156 DQ59 PAR 56 118 SYS AUDIO IN GND SG +24VD4 SG NC NC PSTPC FED-U-SNR
CN11
RET0 64 64 10 10 10 6 J631 18 1 A19 2 5 2
6 6 157 +3.3VA AD[17] 57 119 AUDIO GND SH-0 PG SFSSW SG (S23)
RET1 65 65 9 9 9 1 17 2 A17 A18 3 4 3
7 7 158 DQ60 AD[18] 58 120 AUDIO GND CCDSW SFB-FED-SNR +5.1VB +5.1VB
SG
SG
RET2 66 66 2 16 3 A16 A17 4 3 J555
8 8 159 DQ61 C/BE[2] 59 121 RSV CK2-0 (S36) SFBFED CTUFED
DFAK-0A
DFRQ-0A
DFTXD-0A
DFRAK-0A
DFCNT-0A
DFRXD-0A
RET3 67 67 DFRRQ-0A 3 15 4 A15 A16 5 2 1
DFSCST-0A
9 9 160 DQ62 AD[16] 60 122 MPC1ACT CK1-1 SG SG RGST-SNR
RET8 68 68 CN468 J629 14 5 A14 A15 6 1 2
10 10 161 DQ63 IRDY 61 123 VCC5V SHMONO-0 SOLSFB (S22)
RET9 69 69 +5.1VB SFB-SOL 2 2 13 6 A13 3
J42
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11 162 SG +3.3VA 62 124 +3.3VA SHCOLOR-0 4 +24VD1

70 70 SG (SOL3) 1 1 12 7 A12 J511 J625 J542
163 CLK3 CP-0 3 CLSFB +12VB
J428 J425 71 71 +24VD5 J628 11 8 A11 A14 1 11 1 7 1
NC
164 NC RS-0 J41 2 +24VD1 AG

LDFC-1 Option 72 72 PG SFB-FEED-CLT 2 2 10 9 A10 A13 2 10 2 6 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN71
10
11
1 1 165 SA0 SG NC SG 1 SG TNREF

LDFC-2 73 73 CN71 11 11 1 1 8 8 8 (CLT6) 1 1 9 10 A9 A12 3 9 3 5 3
2 2 166 SA1 SG SG CN495 SFBSW TNLVL1 TNLVL-SNR
LDFC-4 74 74 1 12 12 2 2 7 7 7 J650 J630 8 11 A8 A11 4 8 4 4 4
(KEY)
3 3 167 SA2 +10.5V +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB TNLVL2 (S17)
LDFC-5 Option CN104 75 75 2 13 13 3 3 6 6 6 1 1 1 3 7 12 A7 A10 5 7 5 3 5
4 4 168 +3.3VA +10.5V +5.1VB NC NC NC PWA-F-FIL SFB-SNR TNLED
PWA-F-KEY
LDFC-6 L/S 76 76 3 14 14 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 A9 6 6 6 2 6
5 5 1 SG PG SG (FIL) (S35) AG
LDFC-7 FULL-C 77 77 RADF 4 15 15 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 1 A8 7 5 7 1 7
6 6 2 SG PG SLTBTNA
LDFC-8 MONO-C 78 78 5 16 16 6 6 3 3 3 J619 J507 A7 8 4 J543
7 7 Coin controler / 3 SG +24VD3 SFSZ3 +24VD1
LDFC-9 B/W 79 79 6 17 17 7 7 2 2 2 5 1 5 6 13 A6 A6 9 3 1 1 TNLVL-SHUT-SOL
8 8 Copy key card 4 SG +24VD3 CN470 SFSZ2 SG
LDFC-10 +5.1VA 80 80 7 18 18 8 8 1 1 1 4 2 4 5 14 A5 A5 10 2 2 2 (SOL2)
9 9 5 NC NC +24VD1 PWA-F-SFB SFSZ1 FRDSW
LDFC-11 SG 19 19 1 PS-FAN-MOT 3 3 3 4 15 A4 A4 11 1 J577
10 10 6 FAN-ACC M (SFB) SFSZ0 NC
LDFC-12 NC FG 20 20 FG FG FG 2 (M19) 2 4 2 3 16 A3 A3 1 FRNT-COV-SW
11 11 7 Option SG NC
LDFC-13 1 5 1 2 17 A2 A2 2 (S42)
12 12 SG NC
LDFC-15 1 18 A1 A1
H 13 13 H
LDON0 CN471
14 14 J634
LDON1 +12VB +12VB
15 15 1 3 1
SG PG PG
16 16 2 2 2 FG FG FG FG
NC NC NC
3 1 3
JPD model only
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10.3 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Unit construction [B] Scanner unit [B] Scanner unit [C] Control panel unit [D] Process unit
[B-1] Motor, sensor, lamp [B-2] Switch, PC board, heater, thermostat, other parts [D-1] Motor, sensor, switch, clutch, solenoid
A4 series
M15
M1
Drive unit
S7 S5
PC board unit Scanner unit

S6
Control panel unit

M2 S16
S4 KEY
DH2* S15
CLT1
SLG LCD
Fuser unit EXP
S1 Front side CCD
S2 S9
Automatic
duplexing S3
unit S41
S8 S19
THMO2*
LT series
S12
DH1*
Bypass unit M15 S10
Front side S11
M1 INV DSP Front side
Transport unit SOL1
M20 Front side
S7 S5 M16
Process unit
Front side S6
Laser unit
Paper feeder unit
S4
EXP
Front side
S2
S3
[D] Process unit [D] Process unit [E] Laser unit [F] Paper feeder unit [G] Transport unit
[D-2] Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, heater, ther- [D-3] Motor, switch
mistor, thermostat
CLT2 CLT3
S45*
M3 S31 S27 CLT5
S20
S14 S33 S29
SNS S18
SOL2 S32
S25 S22
S28
S17 S34
M13 S23
S42
ERS
S26 S30
S44 S43
LDR
THM4
THMO3* DH4* S24
Front side
M4
DH3* Front side
S13 Front side Front side
Front side
[H] Bypass unit [I] Automatic duplexing unit [J] Fuser unit [K] Drive unit [L] PC board unit
M17
HDD
M21
M6 IH
SFB S37 M7
S38
SYS
S39 M18
S40
M5
CLT6 DRV M8
IH-COIL
M19
CLT7 CLT12
M12 M9 LGC
CLT14
ADU
THMO1 CLT8 CLT13
SOL3 CLT15
THM2 CLT9
CLT16 BRK
S35 M10
Front side THM3 Front side CLT10
S36 CLT11 FIL
THM1
Front side PS
M11 Front side

Front side
HVT
Motors Sensors and Switches Symbol Name Figure

Wire harness
location
PC boards
Wire harness Wire harness Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure COV-INTLCK-SW Symbol Name Figure
location location S43 [G] AC wire harness location
Cover opening/closing interlock switch
SCAN-MOT APS 1-3, APS-C, APS-R 4-E PWA-F-CCD
M1 [B-1] 4-G S1-5 [B-1] SIDE-COV-SW CCD [B-2] 3-F
Scan motor Automatic original detection sensor 4-F S44 [G] 8-G CCD driving PC board (CCD board)
Side cover opening/closing switch
BELT-CLN-MOT HOME-SNR PWA-F-SLG
M2 [D-1] 7-F S6 [B-1] 4-F CLING-SNR SLG [B-2] 4-G
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor Carriage home position sensor S45 Paper clinging detection sensor [G] 8-F Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)
TNR-MOT PLTN-SNR * Only for JPD model of all equipments PWA-F-DSP
M3 [D-2] 8-G S7 [B-1] 4-F DSP [C] 1-G
Toner motor Platen sensor Display PC board (DSP board)
M/DC-POL REVLV-HP-SNR PWA-F-KEY
M4 [E] 8-B S8 [D-1] 6-F KEY [C] 1-H
Polygonal motor Revolver home position sensor Key control PC board (KEY board)
M5
ADU-MOT
ADU motor
[I] 6-G S9
COLR-TNR-SNR
Color toner cartridge sensor
[D-1] 7-D Electromagnetic spring clutches LDR
PWA-F-LDR
Laser driving PC board (LDR board)
[E] 8-B
MAIN-MOT COLR-ATTNR-SNR Wire harness PWA-F-SNS
M6 [K] 6-B S10 [D-1] 7-C Symbol Name Figure SNS [E] 8-B
Main motor Color auto-toner sensor location H-sync signal detection PC board (SNS board)
EXIT-MOT K-DEV-POS-SNR TRBLT-CLN-CLT PWA-F-SFB
M7 [K] 6-G S11 [D-1] 7-E CLT1 [D-1] 7-D
Exit motor Black developer contact position detection sensor Transfer belt cleaner clutch SFB Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board [H] 6-H
DRM-CLN-MOT K-DEV-TIM-SNR CST-U-FEED-CLT (SFB board)
M8 [K] 8-D S12 [D-1] 7-E CLT2 [F] 8-D
Drum cleaner brush motor Black developer contact timing detection sensor Upper drawer feed clutch PWA-F-ADU
CST-L-FEED-CLT ADU [I] 7-G
TRSP-MOT K-ATTNR-SNR CLT3 [F] 8-F ADU driving PC board (ADU board)
M9 [K] 6-C S13 [D-2] 7-E Lower drawer feed clutch
Transport motor Black auto-toner sensor PS-IH 7-B
2TR-CONT-CLT IH [K]
TRY-MOT K-TNR-SW CLT5 [G] 8-F IH control PC board (IH board) AC wire harness
M10 [K] 8-F S14 [D-2] 8-G 2nd transfer roller contact clutch
Tray-up motor Black toner cartridge switch PWA-F-DRV
SFB-FEED-CLT DRV [K] 6-G
DEV-MOT TRBLT-HP-SNR1 CLT6 [H] 6-H Driving PC board (DRV board)
M11 [K] 6-B S15 [D-1] 7-F Bypass feed clutch
Developer motor Transfer belt home position sensor-1 PWA-F-SYS
ADU-CLT SYS [L] 3-A
REVLV-MOT TRBLT-HP-SNR2 CLT7 [I] 6-F System control PC board (SYS board)
M12 [K] 6-F S16 [D-1] 7-F ADU clutch
Revolver motor Transfer belt home position sensor-2 PWA-F-LGC
COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT LGC [L] 6-A
CCL-MOT TNLVL-SNR CLT8 [K] 8-D Logic PC board (LGC board)
M13 [B-1] 8-C S17 [D-2] 8-H Color developer toner supply clutch
Charger cleaner motor Image quality sensor PWA-F-FIL 6-H
COLR-DEV-CLT FIL [L]
SCAN-FAN-MOT TR2-POS-SNR CLT9 [K] 8-D Filter PC board (FIL board) AC wire harness
M15 [B-1] 4-F S18 [G] 8-G Color developer drive clutch
Scanner unit cooling fan 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
LSU-FAN-MOT TEMP/HUMI-SNR K-DEV-CLT
M16 [D-1] 7-D S19 [D-1] 7-D CLT10 [K] 8-D
Laser unit cooling fan Temperature/humidity sensor Black developer drive clutch
K-DEV-LIFT-CLT
M17
IH-FAN-MOT
IH control board cooling fan
[K] 8-A S20
USD-TNR-FLL-SNR
Toner bag full detection sensor
[D-2] 8-C CLT11
Black developer lifting clutch
[K] 8-C Thermistors and thermostats
OZN-FAN-MOT RGST-SNR RGST-CLT Wire harness
M18 [K] 8-A S22 [G] 8-G CLT12 [K] 8-D Symbol Name Figure
Ozone exhaust fan Registration sensor Registration clutch location
PS-FAN-MOT FED-U-SNR CST-U-TR-L-CLT THMS-EDGE-FBLT
M19 [L] 5-H S23 [G] 8-G CLT13 [K] 8-D THM1 [J] 7-C
Power supply cooling fan Upper drawer feed sensor Upper transport clutch (Low speed) Front edge thermistor
INTRNL-FAN-MOT FED-L-SNR CST-U-TR-H-CLT THMS-MAIN-FBLT
M20 [D-1] 7-D S24 [G] 8-G CLT14 [K] 8-D THM2 [J] 7-C
Internal cooling fan Lower drawer feed sensor Upper transport clutch (High speed) Main thermistor
HDD-FAN-MOT CCL-F-POS-SW CST-L-TR-L-CLT THMS-SUB-FBLT
M21 [L] 5-A S25 [D-3] 8-C CLT15 [K] 8-F THM3 [J] 7-C
HDD cooling fan Charger cleaner front position detection switch Lower transport clutch (Low speed) Sub thermistor
CCL-R-POS-SW CST-L-TR-H-CLT THMS-DRM
S26 [D-3] 8-C CLT16 [K] 8-F THM4 [D-2] 7-F
Charger cleaner rear position detection switch Lower transport clutch (High speed) Drum thermistor
CST-U-TRY-SNR THERMO-FSR
S27 [F] 8-E THMO1 [J] AC wire harness
Fuser thermostat
Lamps and heaters Upper drawer tray-up sensor
THERMO-SCN-DH
CST-L-TRY-SNR THMO2 [B-2] AC wire harness
S28 [F] 8-E
Symbol Name Figure
Wire harness
location
Lower drawer tray-up sensor Solenoids Scanner damp heater thermostat
THERMO-DRM-DH
EMP-U-SNR Wire harness THMO3 [D-2] AC wire harness
LP-EXPO S29 [F] 8-E Symbol Name Figure Drum damp heater thermostat
EXP [B-1] 3-G Upper drawer empty sensor location
Exposure lamp
EMP-L-SNR ATTNR-SHUT-SOL
LP-ERS S30 [F] 8-E SOL1 [D-1] 7-D
ERS [D-2] 7-E Lower drawer empty sensor Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid
Discharge LED
NEMP-U-SNR TNLVL-SHUT-SOL
S31 [F] 8-E
IH-COIL
IH-COIL
IH coil
[J] AC wire harness Upper drawer paper stock sensor SOL2
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid
[D-2] 8-H Others
NEMP-L-SNR SFB-SOL Wire harness
SCN-L-DH S32 [F] 8-F SOL3 [H] 6-G Symbol Name Figure
Lower drawer paper stock sensor Bypass pickup solenoid location
Scanner damp heater (Left)
DH1 [B-2] AC wire harness CST-U-SW
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other S33 [F] 8-E INV-EXP
Upper drawer detection switch INV [B-2] 4-G
models Inverter board
CST-L-SW LCD
SCN-R-DH S34 [F] 8-E
Lower drawer detection switch LCD [C] 1-G
DH2
Scanner damp heater (Right)
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other
[B-2] AC wire harness
S35
SFB-SNR
[H] 6-H
Transformer LCD panel
HDD
Bypass paper sensor Wire harness HDD [L] 5-B
models Symbol Name Figure Hard disk
DRM-DH SFB-FED-SNR location PS-ACC 5-G
S36 [H] 6-G PS [L]
Drum damp heater Bypass feed sensor PS-HVT Switching regulator AC wire harness
DH3 [D-2] AC wire harness HVT [K] 6-D
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other ADU-SET-SW High-voltage transformer BREAKER
S37 [I] 6-G BRK [L] AC wire harness
models ADU opening/closing switch Breaker
CST-DH ADU-TRU-SNR
S38 [I] 6-F
DH4 Drawer damp heater [F] AC wire harness ADU entrance sensor
* Only for JPD model of all equipments ADU-TRL-SNR
S39 [I] 6-F
ADU exit sensor
EXIT-SNR
S40 [J] 6-C
Exit sensor
MAIN-SW 8-A
S41 [B-2]
Main switch AC wire harness
FRNT-COV-SW
S42 [G] 8-H
Front cover opening/closing switch
05/11

FC-451C SH en 0012 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FC-451C SH en 0012 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SERVICE HANDBOOK

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3) Important Service Parts for Safety

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE

10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

Thick paper / OHP

Thick2 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Thick2 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

Thick2 (106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

Platen cover KA-3511PC / -C

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Saddle stitch Staple Cartridge

Staple Cartridge Data Parallel Scrambler PCI slot

Drawer Module Paper Feed Large Capacity

2.1 Error Code List

Error code Classification Contents Troubleshooting

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

Error code Classification Contents Troubleshooting

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

© 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c

e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c © 2005 - 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Mode For start Contents For exit Display

To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode:

• Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”.

• Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”.